Micom P341: Interconnection Protection Relay

MiCOM P341
Interconnection Protection Relay

Software Version 0050B
Technical Guide
Technical Guide
MiCOM P341
Volume 1
Issue Control
P341/EN T/C22
MiCOM P341
Manual Issue D
Doc
Ref.
-
Section
IT
IT
1.
Amendments completed 09.12.2004
Front Cover
Software version details removed from back of front cover
Contents
Reference to P14x brochure, removed from Application
Notes heading
Throughout
Handling of electronic equipment

Company name changed
Throughout
Introduction
4
IT
2.
2.
6.
IT
Description
Page
Throughout
Introduction to MiCOM
Last line of section : website address changed
Introduction to MiCOM guides
Reference to P14x brochure, removed from Application
Notes summary
Reference to P14x brochure, removed from Installation
summary
Safety Section : Installing, commissioning and
servicing
Before energising the equipment, the following should be
checked: 2 new points added at the end of the list
Safety Section : Technical specifications
Insulation category : in 1st sentence installation amended
to insulation
Product safety : law voltage directive amended to low
voltage directive
Section brought into line with corporate standard.
All references to chapters have been replaced with new
subdocument references
Company name amended
AP
Throughout
Application Notes
AP
Throughout
All references to chapters replaced with new subdocument

references
AP
AP
AP
AP
1.2.1
1.2.2
2.1
Publication
Latest version (P341/EN BR Cd)
10
Protection features
11th bullet point added
10
Non-protection features
4th bullet point : 2nd sentence amended
12
Configuration column
In the menu text column between Power and Overcurrent :
Thermal overload has been added
P341/EN T/C22
Issue Control
MiCOM P341
Manual Issue D
Doc
Ref.
AP
AP
Section
2.2
2.4
13
CT and VT ratios
Data in table amended
16
Rate of change of frequency protection

DDB information in sentences 1 and 2 : amended
18
Voltage vector shift protection

3rd equation : amended
Figure 2c : title amended
Paragraph 3 : DDB information in 1st sentence amended
20
Reconnection timer
17
18
AP
AP
2.5
2.6
20
AP
2.7
21
22 - 23
25
Reverse power protection function

Table number changed from 2 to 1
1st paragraph after Table 1 : sentences 3 and 4 amended
22
AP
2.7.1
2.7.4
26
AP
2.8
28
34
AP
2.10.1
35
AP
AP
2.10.2
2.11.2
2.11.3
Overcurrent protection
Paragraph 6 : DDB information in sentences 1 and 3
amended
After table : paragraphs 2 and 3 added
Standard earth fault protection element
amended
37
Sensitive earth fault protection element (SEF)

amended
39
Negative sequence polarisation

Paragraph 3 : added
40
General setting guidelines for DEF

Paragraph 2 : amended
Last 2 angle settings added
36
AP
Power protection
Sensitive power protection function
1st sentence amended
Paragraph 2 : %Pn changed from 2 to 7
Paragraph before table : DDB information in 1st sentence
amended
21
AP
Description
Page
Operation of sensitive earth fault element

AP
2.12
49
tem 3 of list : added

Paragraph 2 : 1st sentence amended
Issue Control
P341/EN T/C22
MiCOM P341
Manual Issue D
Doc
Ref.
AP
AP
AP
Section
2.13.1
2.14
2.14.1

Page
51
Calculation of required relay settings

Paragraph 3 : last sentence amended
52
Restricted earth fault protection

53
High impedance restricted earth fault protection

Figure 13 : where k = 0.5 changed to where k = 1
57
Setting guidelines for high impedance REF

1st equation on page amended
Sections last list changed from numbers 4 and 5 to
numbers 1 and 2
60
Residual over voltage/neutral voltage

displacement protection
DDB information in paragraph before table amended
55
AP
AP
2.14.2
2.15
61
AP
2.16
62
64
66
Under frequency protection

DDB information in 1st two sentences of paragraph before
table amended
68
Over frequency protection function

DDB information in 1st two sentences of paragraph before
table amended
64
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
2.21.2
2.22.1
2.22.2
4.1
Under voltage protection

Paragraph 4 : DDB information amended
Note added after 4th paragraph
Over voltage protection
Paragraph 4 : DDB information amended
Note added after 4th paragraph
63
AP
Description
69 - 73
Thermal overload protection

New section added
75
Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers

Data in 2nd table amended
Paragraph after 2nd table : 1st sentence amended and 3rd
sentence added
76
Breaker fail timer settings

Paragraph 2 : 1st sentence amended
77
Breaker fail undercurrent settings

Figure 17 : CB fail logic diagram added
79
Voltage transformer supervision (VTS)

Minor amendment in last paragraph
P341/EN T/C22
Issue Control
MiCOM P341
Manual Issue D
Doc
Ref.
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
Section
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.2.1
4.1.2.2
4.1.3
4.2.1
79
Loss of all three phase voltages under load

conditions
Minor amendments in paragraph 2
80 - 81
Absence of three phase voltages upon line

energisation
Sentence and bullet points added after figure 19
81
Inputs
New section added
82
Outputs
New section added
82
Menu settings
Bullet points after table amended
1st two paragraphs after bullet points added
83
The CT supervision feature

Paragraph 2 : added
Paragraph 3 : sentence 1 amended and sentence 3 added
Figure 20 : amended
86
Circuit breaker state monitoring features

1st sentence added to paragraph after 2nd group of bullet
points
Last sentence added to paragraph before table
Figure 21 : added
86
Circuit breaker control

Section deleted
84
85
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
4.3.1
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.8
4.9.1.3
4.9.1.6
4.9.4
4.10
Description
Page
86 - 87
Pole dead logic

New section added
87 - 90
Circuit breaker condition monitoring

New section added
92 - 96
Trip circuit supervision (TCS)

New section added
98
Relay alarm conditions

Table : replaced
99
Fault records
Paragraph 4 : added
101
Event filtering
Minor amendments made to 2nd paragraph after table
102
Disturbance recorder
Paragraph 1 : re-written
Paragraph 3 : last sentence added
Issue Control
P341/EN T/C22
MiCOM P341
Manual Issue D
Doc
Ref.
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
Section
4.13
4.14
4.15
5.6
5.7.2
5.9
6.
HW
HW
HW
106
Control inputs
New section added
107
CT connections
New section added
109
110

1st equation : amended
111
Metering class current transformers

Table : replaced
112
Converting IEC185 current transformer standard

protection classification to an ANSI/IEEE standard
voltage rating
New section added
Throughout
2.3.2
2.3.3
HW
HW
HW
HW
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.5
3.4.3.1
4.2
Commissioning test menu

New section added
references
Power supply module

RS485 reference changed to EIA(RS)485
Input board
Figure 2 : amended
Last 2 paragraphs deleted
7-8
Universal opto isolated logic inputs

New section added
Power supply board (including EIA(RS)485

communication interface
Heading : amended
2nd paragraph after table : all RS485 reference changed to
EIA(RS)485
Output relay board

Section re-written
IRIG-B board
Paragraph 2 : RS485 reference changed to EIA(RS)485
8
HW
Auto reset of trip LED indication

New section added
Directional instantaneous SEF protection
(residually connected)
Only 1st equation remains, rest of section deleted
112 - 115
1.1.3
Description
Page
107 - 108
5.5.4
HW
13
PSL data
New section added
16
Continuous self-testing
4th bullet point amended
P341/EN T/C22
Issue Control
MiCOM P341
Manual Issue D
Doc
Ref.
Section
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
TD
Throughout
1.5
1.6
8-9
2.3
2.4
10.9
10.14
Description
Page

references
Universal logic inputs (P340 range)
Section re-written
Output relay contacts
Section re-written
10
Auxiliary supply
2nd table : replaced
10
Optically-isolated inputs
Paragraph 1 : deleted
32
Reverse power/low forward power/over power

(32R / 32L / 32O)
35
Thermal overload (49)

New section added
Accuracy
TD
TD
TD
TD
10.2.2
13.2.2
15.2.4
19.
CT
CO
VC
DT operation setting amended to 2% or 50ms whichever

is greater
37
Performance
39
Undercurrent accuracy
41
Local and remote communications

New section added
Throughout
CT
GC
22
Throughout
SCADA Communications
Section brought into line with corporate standard.
references
Relay menu database

Amended to reflect latest relay software
External connection diagrams

New diagrams
Hardware/software version history and

compatibility
Amended to reflect latest relay software
Technical Guide
P341/EN T/D22
MiCOM P341
INTERCONNECTION PROTECTION RELAY

MiCOM P341
CONTENT
Issue Control
Handling of Electronic Equipment
Safety Instructions
Introduction
P341/EN IT/D22
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
Relay Description
P341/EN HW/D22
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
P341/EN CT/D22
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
External Connection Diagrams
P341/EN CO/D22
Hardware / Software Version History and

Compatibility
P341/EN VC/C22
P341/EN T/D22
Technical Guide
MiCOM P341
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A persons normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several
thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when
handling circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately
apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits of AREVA T&D products are immune to the relevant levels of
electrostatic discharge when housed in their cases. Do not expose them to the risk of
damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily.
Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor
devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following
precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the
equipment has been designed and manufactured.
1.
Before removing a module, ensure that you are a same electrostatic potential
as the equipment by touching the case.
2.
Handle the module by its front-plate, frame, or edges of the printed circuit
board. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or
connectors.
3.
Do not pass the module to any person without first ensuring that you are both
at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
4.
Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is

at the same potential as yourself.
5.
Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be
found in BS5783 and IEC 60147-0F.
If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment
in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist
strap.
Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k 10M ohms. If a
wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to
prevent the build up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making
measurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible.
AREVA T&D strongly recommends that detailed investigations on the electronic
circuitry, or modification work, should be carried out in a Special Handling Area such
as described in BS5783 or IEC 60147-0F.
CONTENT
1.
SAFETY SECTION
1.1
Health and Safety
1.2
Explanation of symbols and labels
2.
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING
3.
EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS
3.1
Current transformer circuits
3.2
External resistors
3.3
Battery Replacement
3.4
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
3.5
Insertion of modules and pcb cards
3.6
Fibre optic communication
4.
OLDER PRODUCTS
5.
DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL
6.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.
SAFETY SECTION
This Safety Section should be read before commencing any work on the
equipment.
1.1
Health and Safety

The information in the Safety Section of the product documentation is intended to
ensure that products are properly installed and handled in order to maintain them in
a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the
equipment will be familiar with the contents of the Safety Section.
1.2
Explanation of symbols and labels

The meaning of symbols and labels may be used on the equipment or in the product
documentation, is given below.
Caution : refer to product documentation
Caution : risk of electric shock
Protective/safety *earth terminal
Functional *earth terminal

Note: This symbol may also be
used for a protective/safety earth
terminal if that terminal is part of a
terminal block or sub-assembly
e.g. power supply.
*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THE PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION IS THE
DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
2.
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work on this
equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The
product documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning or
servicing the equipment.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present
a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all
personnel to avoid electrical shock or energy hazards.
Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations
to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. To
ensure that wires are correctly terminated, the correct crimp terminal and tool for the
wire size should be used.
Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective earth
terminal, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug
connected equipment. Omitting or disconnecting the equipment earth may cause a
safety hazard.
The recommended minimum earth wire size is 2.5mm2, unless otherwise stated in the
technical data section of the product documentation.
Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked:
3.
Voltage rating and polarity;
CT circuit rating and integrity of connections;
Protective fuse rating;
Integrity of earth connection (where applicable)
EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS

The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental
limits.
3.1
Current transformer circuits

Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high level voltage produced
may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation.
3.2
External resistors
Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a risk of electric shock
or burns, if touched.
3.3
Battery Replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended
type and be installed with the correct polarity, to avoid possible damage to the
equipment.
3.4
Insulation and dielectric strength testing

Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the
end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to
discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
3.5
Insertion of modules and pcb cards

These must not be inserted into or withdrawn from equipment whist it is energised
since this may result in damage.
3.6
Fibre optic communication

Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal
level of the device.
4.
OLDER PRODUCTS
Electrical adjustments
Equipments which require direct physical adjustments to their operating mechanism
to change current or voltage settings, should have the electrical power removed
before making the change, to avoid any risk of electrical shock.
Mechanical adjustments
The electrical power to the relay contacts should be removed before checking any
mechanical settings, to avoid any risk of electric shock.
Draw out case relays
Removal of the cover on equipment incorporating electromechanical operating
elements, may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts.
Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards
When using an extender card, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the
equipment whilst it is energised. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards.
Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card.
Insertion and withdrawal of heavy current test plugs
When using a heavy current test plug, CT shorting links must be in place before
insertion or removal, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
5.
DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Decommissioning: The auxiliary supply circuit in the relay may include capacitors
across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy
hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the relay (both
poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely
discharged via the external terminals prior to decommissioning.
Disposal:
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water

courses is avoided. The product should be disposed of in a safe
manner. Any products containing batteries should have them
removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short
circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation,
may apply to the disposal of lithium batteries.
6.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Protective fuse rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for this equipment
is 16A, Red Spot type of equipment, unless otherwise stated in the technical data
section of the product documentation.
Insulation class:
IEC 601010-1 : 1990/A2 : 1995

Class I
EN 61010-1 : 1993/A2 : 1995
Class I
This equipment requires a

protective (safety) earth
connection to ensure user
safety.
Insulation
Category
(Overvoltage):
IEC 601010-1 : 1990/A2 : 1995

Category III
EN 61010-1 : 1993/A2 : 1995
Category III
Distribution level, fixed

installation. Equipment in this
category is qualification tested
at 5kV peak, 1.2/50s,
500, 0.5J, between all supply
circuits and earth and also
between independent circuits.
Environment:
IEC 601010-1 : 1990/A2 : 1995

Pollution degree 2
Compliance is demonstrated
by reference to generic safety
standards.
EN 61010-1 : 1993/A2 : 1995

Pollution degree 2
Product Safety:
72/23/EEC
Compliance with the European

Commission Law Voltage
Directive.
EN 61010-1 : 1993/A2 : 1995

EN 60950 : 1992/A11 : 1997
Compliance is demonstrated
by reference to generic safety
standards.
Introduction
P341/EN IT/D22
MiCOM P341
INTRODUCTION
P341/EN IT/D22
Introduction
MiCOM P341
Introduction
MiCOM P341
P341/EN IT/D22
Page 1/24
CONTENT
1.
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM
2.
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES
3.
USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE
3.1
Introduction to the relay
3.1.1
Front panel
3.1.2
Relay rear panel
3.2
Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options
3.3
Menu structure
3.3.1
Protection settings
10
3.3.2
Disturbance recorder settings
10
3.3.3
Control and support settings
11
3.4
Password protection
11
3.5
Relay configuration
12
3.6
Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD)
12
3.6.1
Default display and menu time-out
13
3.6.2
Menu navigation and setting browsing
14
3.6.3
Password entry
14
3.6.4
Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records
14
3.6.5
Setting changes
15
3.7
Front communication port user interface
16
3.8
Rear communication port user interface
17
3.8.1
Courier communication
18
3.8.2
Modbus communication
20
3.8.3
IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication
22
3.8.4
DNP 3.0 communication
23
P341/EN IT/D22
Page 2/24
Introduction
MiCOM P341
Figure 1: Relay front view
Figure 2: Relay rear view
Figure 4: Front panel user interface
13
Figure 5: Front port connection
16
Figure 6: PC relay signal connection
17
Figure 7: Remote communication connection arrangements
19
Introduction
P341/EN IT/D22
MiCOM P341
1.
Page 3/24
INTRODUCTION TO MICOM
MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply
requirements. It comprises a range of components, systems and services from AREVA
T&D.
Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility.
MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive
communication capabilities, to integrate it with your power supply control system.
The components within MiCOM are:
-
P range protection relays;
C range control products;
M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring;
S range versatile PC support and substation control packages.
MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state
and behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records. They can
also provide measurements of the system at regular intervals to a control centre
enabling remote monitoring and control to take place.
For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, visit our website:
www.areva-td.com
P341/EN IT/D22
Introduction
Page 4/24
2.
MiCOM P341
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES

The guides provide a functional and technical description of the MiCOM protection
relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relays use and application.
Divided into two volumes, as follows:
Volume 1 Technical Guide, includes information on the application of the relay and
a technical description of its features. It is mainly intended for protection engineers
concerned with the selection and application of the relay for the protection of the
power system.
Volume 2 Operation Guide, contains information on the installation and
commissioning of the relay, and also a section on fault finding. This volume is
intended for site engineers who are responsible for the installation, commissioning
and maintenance of the relay.
The section content within each volume is summarised below:
Volume 1
Technical Guide

Safety Section
P341/EN IT
Introduction
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start
using the relay.
P341/EN AP
Application Notes
Comprehensive and detailed description of the features of the relay including both
the protection elements and the relays other functions such as event and disturbance
recording, fault location and programmable scheme logic. This section includes a
description of common power system applications of the relay, calculation of suitable
settings, some typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the relay.
P341/EN HW Relay Description
Overview of the operation of the relays hardware and software. This section
includes information on the self-checking features and diagnostics of the relay.
P341/EN TD
Technical Data
Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy limits, recommended operating

conditions, ratings and performance data. Compliance with technical standards is
quoted where appropriate.
P341/EN CT
Communications and Interface Guide
This section provides detailed information regarding the communication interfaces of

the relay, including a detailed description of how to access the settings database
stored within the relay. The section also gives information on each of the
communication protocols that can be used with the relay, and is intended to allow the
user to design a custom interface to a SCADA system.
Introduction
P341/EN IT/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 5/24
P341/EN GC Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC 60870-5103/DNP 3.0

Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief description
of each.
P341/EN CO External Connection Diagrams
All external wiring connections to the relay.
P341/EN VC
Volume 2
Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility

Operation Guide

Safety Section
P341/EN IT
Introduction
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start
using the relay.
P341/EN IN
Installation
Recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the relay. A

guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay is provided
incorporating earthing recommendations.
P341/EN CM Commissioning and Maintenance
Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks on the calibration
and functionality of the relay. A general maintenance policy for the relay is outlined.
P341/EN PR
Problem Analysis
Advice on how to recognise failure modes and the recommended course of action.
P341/EN GC Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC 60870-5103/DNP 3.0
Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief description
of each.
P341/EN CO External Connection Diagrams
All external wiring connections to the relay.
P341/EN VC
Repair Form
Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility
P341/EN IT/D22
Introduction
Page 6/24
3.
MiCOM P341
USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

The settings and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both from
the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports.
Information on each of these methods is given in this section to describe how to get
started using the relay.
3.1
Introduction to the relay
3.1.1
Front panel
The front panel of the relay is shown in Figure 1, with the hinged covers at the top
and bottom of the relay shown open. Extra physical protection for the front panel can
be provided by an optional transparent front cover. With the cover in place read only
access to the user interface is possible. Removal of the cover does not compromise
the environmental withstand capability of the product, but allows access to the relay
settings. When full access to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the
transparent cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers
are open. If the lower cover is secured with a wire seal, this will need to be removed.
Using the side flanges of the transparent cover, pull the bottom edge away from the
relay front panel until it is clear of the seal tab. The cover can then be moved
vertically down to release the two fixing lugs from their recesses in the front panel.
Serial No and I*, V Ratings
Top cover
In
Vx
Vn
SER No
DIAG No
1/5 A 50/60 Hz
V
V
LCD
TRIP
Fixed
function
LEDs
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
User programable
function LEDs
= CLEAR
= READ
= ENTER
Keypad
Bottom
cover
Battery compartment
Figure 1:
Front comms port
Relay front view
Download/monitor port
P0103ENa
Introduction
P341/EN IT/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 7/24
The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in Figure 1:
-
a 16-character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD).
a 7-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (/, 6, 8 and 2), an enter key
(5), a clear key (0), and a read key (1).
12 LEDs; 4 fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8
programmable function LEDs on the right hand side.
Under the top hinged cover:

-
the relay serial number, and the relays current and voltage rating information*.
Under the bottom hinged cover:

-
battery compartment to hold the 1/2 AA size battery which is used for memory
back-up for the real time clock, event, fault and disturbance records.
a 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the
relay (up to 15m distance) via an EIA(RS)232 serial data connection.
a 25-pin female D-type port providing internal signal monitoring and high
speed local downloading of software and language text via a parallel data
connection.
The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to indicate
the following conditions:
Trip (Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is reset when the
associated fault record is cleared from the front display. (Alternatively the trip LED
can be configured to be self-resetting)*.
Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay has registered an alarm. This may be
triggered by a fault, event or maintenance record. The LED will flash until the alarms
have been accepted (read), after which the LED will change to constant illumination,
and will extinguish when the alarms have been cleared.
Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relays protection is unavailable.
Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay is in correct working order, and should be on
at all times. It will be extinguished if the relays self-test facilities indicate that there is
an error with the relays hardware or software. The state of the healthy LED is
reflected by the watchdog contact at the back of the relay.
3.1.2
Relay rear panel

The rear panel of the relay is shown in Figure 2. All current and voltage signals*,
digital logic input signals and output contacts are connected at the rear of the relay.
Also connected at the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear EIA(RS)485
communication port, the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the optical fibre rear
communication port which are both optional.
Note: *May vary according to relay type/model
P341/EN IT/D22
Introduction
Page 8/24
MiCOM P341
Optional IRIG-B board
Digital input connections
Power supply
connection
PORT 1
IRIG B
TX
Rear comms port

(RS485)
RX
Current* and voltage

input terminals
Figure 2:
Digital output
(relays) connections
P0104ena
Relay rear view
Refer to the wiring diagram in Appendix B for complete connection details.

3.2
Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options

The relay has three user interfaces:
-
the front panel user interface via the LCD and keypad.
the front port which supports Courier communication.
the rear port which supports one protocol of either Courier, Modbus,
IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3.0. The protocol for the rear port must be specified
when the relay is ordered.
The measurement information and relay settings which can be accessed from the
three interfaces are summarised in Table 1.
Introduction
P341/EN IT/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 9/24
IEC870-5103
DNP3.0
Extraction of disturbance
records
Programmable scheme logic

settings
Keypad/
LCD
Courier
Modbus
Display & modification of all

settings
Digital I/O signal status
Display/extraction of
measurements
Display/extraction of fault
records
Reset of fault & alarm

records
Clear event & fault records
Time synchronisation
Control commands
Table 1
3.3
Menu structure
The relays menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu is
referred to as a cell, and each cell in the menu may be accessed by reference to a
row and column address. The settings are arranged so that each column contains
related settings, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings are contained
within the same column. As shown in Figure 3, the top row of each column contains
the heading which describes the settings contained within that column. Movement
between the columns of the menu can only be made at the column heading level. A
complete list of all of the menu settings is given in Appendix A of the manual.
P341/EN IT/D22
Introduction
Page 10/24
MiCOM P341
Column header
Up to 4 protection setting groups
System data
View records
Overcurrent
Ground fault
Overcurrent
Ground fault
Column
data
settings
Control & support
Group 1
Group 2
Repeated for groups 2, 3 and 4
P0106ena
Figure 3:
Menu structure
All of the settings in the menu fall into one of three categories: protection settings,
disturbance recorder settings, or control and support (C&S) settings. One of two
different methods is used to change a setting depending on which category the
setting falls into. Control and support settings are stored and used by the relay
immediately after they are entered. For either protection settings or disturbance
recorder settings, the relay stores the new setting values in a temporary scratchpad.
It activates all the new settings together, but only after it has been confirmed that the
new settings are to be adopted. This technique is employed to provide extra security,
and so that several setting changes that are made within a group of protection
settings will all take effect at the same time.
3.3.1
Protection settings
The protection settings include the following items:
-
protection element settings
scheme logic settings
auto-reclose and check synchronisation settings (where appropriate)*
fault locator settings (where appropriate)*
There are four groups of protection settings, with each group containing the same
setting cells. One group of protection settings is selected as the active group, and is
used by the protection elements.
3.3.2
Disturbance recorder settings

The disturbance recorder settings include the record duration and trigger position,
selection of analogue and digital signals to record, and the signal sources that trigger
the recording.
Introduction
P341/EN IT/D22
MiCOM P341
3.3.3
Page 11/24

The control and support settings include:
3.4
relay configuration settings
open/close circuit breaker*
CT & VT ratio settings*
reset LEDs
active protection setting group
password & language settings
circuit breaker control & monitoring settings*
communications settings
measurement settings
event & fault record settings
user interface settings
commissioning settings
Password protection
The menu structure contains three levels of access. The level of access that is enabled
determines which of the relays settings can be changed and is
controlled by entry of two different passwords. The levels of access are summarised
in Table 2.
Access level
Operations enabled
Level 0
No password required
Read access to all settings, alarms, event

records and fault records
Level 1
Password 1 or 2
As level 0 plus:
Control commands, e.g.
circuit breaker open/close.
Reset of fault and alarm conditions.
Reset LEDs.
Clearing of event and fault records.
Password 2 required
All other settings
Level 2
As level 1 plus:
Table 2
Each of the two passwords are 4 characters of upper case text. The factory default
for both passwords is AAAA. Each password is user-changeable once it has been
correctly entered. Entry of the password is achieved either by a prompt when a
setting change is attempted, or by moving to the Password cell in the System data
column of the menu. The level of access is independently enabled for each interface,
that is to say if level 2 access is enabled for the rear communication port, the front
panel access will remain at level 0 unless the relevant password is entered at the front
panel. The access level enabled by the password entry will time-out independently
for each interface after a period of inactivity and revert to the default level. If the
P341/EN IT/D22
Page 12/24
Introduction
MiCOM P341
passwords are lost an emergency password can be supplied contact AREVA T&D
with the relays serial number. The current level of access enabled for an interface
can be determined by examining the 'Access level' cell in the 'System data' column,
the access level for the front panel User Interface (UI), can also be found as one of
the default display options.
The relay is supplied with a default access level of 2, such that no password is
required to change any of the relay settings. It is also possible to set the default
menu access level to either level 0 or level1, preventing write access to the relay
settings without the correct password. The default menu access level is set in the
Password control cell which is found in the System data column of the menu (note
that this setting can only be changed when level 2 access is enabled).
3.5
Relay configuration
The relay is a multi-function device which supports numerous different protection,
control and communication features. In order to simplify the setting of the relay,
there is a configuration settings column which can be used to enable or disable many
of the functions of the relay. The settings associated with any function that is disabled
are made invisible, i.e. they are not shown in the menu. To disable a function
change the relevant cell in the Configuration column from Enabled to Disabled.
The configuration column controls which of the four protection settings groups is
selected as active through the Active settings cell. A protection setting group can
also be disabled in the configuration column, provided it is not the present active
group. Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active group.
The column also allows all of the setting values in one group of protection settings to
be copied to another group.
To do this firstly set the Copy from cell to the protection setting group to be copied,
then set the Copy to cell to the protection group where the copy is to be placed. The
copied settings are initially placed in the temporary scratchpad, and will only be used
by the relay following confirmation.
To restore the default values to the settings in any protection settings group, set the
Restore defaults cell to the relevant group number. Alternatively it is possible to set
the Restore defaults cell to All settings to restore the default values to all of the
relays settings, not just the protection groups settings. The default settings will
initially be placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the relay after they have
been confirmed. Note that restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear
communication port settings, which may result in communication via the rear port
being disrupted if the new (default) settings do not match those of the master station.
3.6
Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD)

When the keypad is exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the relay,
with the information displayed on the LCD.
The /, 6, 8 and 2 keys which are used for menu navigation and setting value
changes include an auto-repeat function that comes into operation if any of these
keys are held continually pressed. This can be used to speed up both setting value
changes and menu navigation; the longer the key is held depressed, the faster the
rate of change or movement becomes.
Introduction
P341/EN IT/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 13/24
System
frequency
Other default displays
3-phase voltage
Alarm messages
Date and time
C
C
Column n
Group 4
Overcurrent
Column 1
Sytem data
Column 2
View records
Data 1.1
Language
Data 2.1
Last record
Data 1.2
Password
Data 2.2
Time and date
Other setting
cells in
column 1
Other setting
cells in
column 2
Other setting
cells in
column n
Data 1.n
Password
level 2
Data 2.n
C A voltage
Data n.n
|> char angle
Other column headings
Data n.1
|>1 function
C
Note: The C key will return
to column header
from any menu cell
Data n.2
|>1 directional
P0105ena
Figure 4:
3.6.1
Front panel user interface
Default display and menu time-out

The front panel menu has a selectable default display. The relay will time-out and
return to the default display and turn the LCD backlight off after 15 minutes of
keypad inactivity. If this happens any setting changes which have not been confirmed
will be lost and the original setting values maintained.
The contents of the default display can be selected from the following options:
3-phase and neutral current, 3-phase voltage, power, system frequency, date and
time, relay description, or a user-defined plant reference*. The default display is
selected with the Default display cell of the Measuret setup column. Also, from the
default display the different default display options can be scrolled through using the
/and 6 keys. However the menu selected default display will be restored following
the menu time-out elapsing. Whenever there is an uncleared alarm present in the
relay (e.g. fault record, protection alarm, control alarm etc.) the default display will
be replaced by:
Alarms/Faults
Present
P341/EN IT/D22
Introduction
Page 14/24
MiCOM P341
Entry to the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display and is not
affected if the display is showing the Alarms/Faults present message.
3.6.2
Menu navigation and setting browsing

The menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the structure shown in
Figure 4. Thus, starting at the default display the 8 key will display the first column
heading. To select the required column heading use the Pand 6 keys. The setting
data contained in the column can then be viewed by using the
2 and 8 keys. It is possible to return to the column header either by holding the
[up arrow symbol] key down or by a single press of the clear key 0. It is only
possible to move across columns at the column heading level. To return to the
default display press the 8 key or the clear key 0 from any of the column
headings. It is not possible to go straight to the default display from within one of the
column cells using the auto-repeat facility of the 8 key, as the auto-repeat will stop
at the column heading. To move to the default display, the 8 key must be released
and pressed again.
3.6.3
Password entry
When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear:
Enter password
**** Level 1
Note:
The password required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown

above
A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be changed.
Press the 8 and 2 keys to vary each character between A and Z. To move
between the character fields of the password, use the 4 and 6 keys. The password is
confirmed by pressing the enter key 5. The display will revert to Enter Password if
an incorrect password is entered. At this point a message will be displayed indicating
whether a correct password has been entered and if so what level of access has been
unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the selected setting then the display will
return to the setting page to allow the edit to continue. If the correct level of
password has not been entered then the password prompt page will be returned to.
To escape from this prompt press the clear key 0. Alternatively, the password can
be entered using the Password cell of the System data column.
For the front panel user interface the password protected access will revert to the
default access level after a keypad inactivity time-out of 15 minutes. It is possible to
manually reset the password protection to the default level by moving to the
Password menu cell in the System data column and pressing the clear key 0
instead of entering a password.
3.6.4
Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records

The presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the default display
and by the yellow alarm LED flashing. The alarm messages can either be selfresetting or latched, in which case they must be cleared manually. To view the alarm
messages press the read key 1. When all alarms have been viewed, but not
Introduction
P341/EN IT/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 15/24
cleared, the alarm LED will change from flashing to constant illumination and the
latest fault record will be displayed (if there is one). To scroll through the pages of
this use the 1 key. When all pages of the fault record have been viewed, the
following prompt will appear:
Press clear to
reset alarms
To clear all alarm messages press 0; to return to the alarms/faults present display
and leave the alarms uncleared, press 1. Depending on the password configuration
settings, it may be necessary to enter a password before the alarm messages can be
cleared (see section on password entry). When the alarms have been cleared the
yellow alarm LED will extinguish, as will the red trip LED if it was illuminated following
a trip.
Alternatively it is possible to accelerate the procedure, once the alarm viewer has
been entered using the 1 key, the 0 key can be pressed, this will move the display
straight to the fault record. Pressing 0 again will move straight to the alarm reset
prompt where pressing 0 once more will clear all alarms.
3.6.5
Setting changes
To change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to display the relevant cell.
To change the cell value press the enter key 5, which will bring up a flashing cursor
on the LCD to indicate that the value can be changed. This will only happen if the
appropriate password has been entered, otherwise the prompt to enter a password
will appear. The setting value can then be changed by pressing the or 6 keys. If the
setting to be changed is a binary value or a text string, the required bit or character to
be changed must first be selected using the /and 6 keys. When the desired new
value has been reached it is confirmed as the new setting value by pressing
5. Alternatively, the new value will be discarded either if the clear button 0 is
pressed or if the menu time-out occurs.
For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must be
confirmed before they are used by the relay. To do this, when all required changes
have been entered, return to the column heading level and press the key. Prior to
returning to the default display the following prompt will be given:
Update settings?
Enter or clear
Pressing 5 will result in the new settings being adopted, pressing 0 will cause the
relay to discard the newly entered values. It should be noted that, the setting values
will also be discarded if the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have
been confirmed. Control and support settings will be updated immediately after they
are entered, without Update settings? prompt.
P341/EN IT/D22
Introduction
Page 16/24
3.7
MiCOM P341
Front communication port user interface

The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located
under the bottom hinged cover. It provides EIA(RS)232 serial data communication
and is intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown
in Figure 5. This port supports the Courier communication protocol only. Courier is
the communication language developed by AREVA T&D to allow communication with
its range of protection relays. The front port is particularly designed for use with the
relay settings program MiCOM S1 which is a Windows 98/NT based software
package.
MiCOM relay
Laptop
SK2
SK1
Battery
25 pin
download/monitor port
9 pin
front comms port
Serial data connector
(up to 15m)
Serial communication port

(COM 1 or COM 2)
P0107ena
Figure 5:
Front port connection
The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device.

connections of the relays 9-pin front port are as follows:
Pin no. 2
Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 3
Rx Receive data
Pin no. 5
0V Zero volts common
Thus the pin
None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to
the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below
(if in doubt check your PC manual):
25 Way
9 Way
Pin no.
Rx Receive data
Pin no.
Tx Transmit data
Pin no.
0V Zero volts common
For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the
Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the
PC, as shown in Figure 6. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin
connections as given above, a straight through serial connector is required, i.e. one
that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a common
cause of difficulty with serial data communication is connecting Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx.
Introduction
P341/EN IT/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 17/24
This could happen if a cross-over serial connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin
2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or if the PC has the same pin configuration as the
relay.
PC
MiCOM relay
DCE
Pin 2 Tx
Pin 3 Rx
Pin 5 0V
Serial data connector
DTE
Pin 2 Rx
Pin 3 Tx
Pin 5 0V
Note: PC connection shown assuming 9 Way serial port
P0108ena
Figure 6:
PC relay signal connection
Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PCs
communication settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The relays
communication settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the table below:
Protocol
Courier
Baud rate
19,200 bits/s
Courier address
Message format
11 bit - 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit (even parity),

1 stop bit
The inactivity timer for the front port is set at 15 minutes. This controls how long the
relay will maintain its level of password access on the front port. If no messages are
received on the front port for 15 minutes then any password access level that has
been enabled will be revoked.
3.8
Rear communication port user interface

The rear port can support one of four communication protocols (Courier, Modbus,
DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-103), the choice of which must be made when the relay is
ordered. The rear communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw connector
located on the back of the relay. See Appendix B for details of the connection
terminals. The rear port provides K-Bus/EIA(RS)485 serial data communication and is
intended for use with a permanently-wired connection to a remote control centre. Of
the three connections, two are for the signal connection, and the other is for the earth
shield of the cable. When the K-Bus option is selected for the rear port, the
two signal connections are not polarity conscious, however for Modbus, IEC 608705-103 and DNP3.0 care must be taken to observe the correct polarity.
The protocol provided by the relay is indicated in the relay menu in the
Communications column. Using the keypad and LCD, firstly check that the Comms
settings cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the
Communications column. The first cell down the column shows the communication
protocol being used by the rear port.
P341/EN IT/D22
Page 18/24
3.8.1
Introduction
MiCOM P341
Courier communication
Courier is the communication language developed by AREVA T&D to allow remote
interrogation of its range of protection relays. Courier works on a master/slave basis
where the slave units contain information in the form of a database, and respond
with information from the database when it is requested by a master unit.
The relay is a slave unit which is designed to be used with a Courier master unit such
as MiCOM S1, MiCOM S10, PAS&T or a SCADA system. MiCOM S1 is a Windows
NT4.0/98 compatible software package which is specifically designed for setting
changes with the relay.
To use the rear port to communicate with a PC-based master station using Courier, a
KITZ K-Bus to EIA(RS)232 protocol converter is required. This unit is available from
AREVA T&D. A typical connection arrangement is shown in Figure 7. For more
detailed information on other possible connection arrangements refer to the manual
for the Courier master station software and the manual for the KITZ protocol
converter. Each spur of the K-Bus twisted pair wiring can be up to 1000m in length
and have up to 32 relays connected to it.
Introduction
P341/EN IT/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 19/24
Twisted pair K-Bus RS485 communications link
MiCOM relay
MiCOM relay
MiCOM relay
RS232
K-Bus
PC
PC serial port
KITZ protocol
converter
Modem
Public switched
telephone network
Courier master station

eg. substation control room
PC
Modem
Remote Courier master station

eg. area control centre
Figure 7:
P0109ena
Remote communication connection arrangements
Having made the physical connection to the relay, the relays communication settings
must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay
menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set
to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Only two settings apply to
the rear port using Courier, the relays address and the inactivity timer. Synchronous
communication is used at a fixed baud rate of 64kbits/s.
Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the first cell
down which indicates the communication protocol:
P341/EN IT/D22
Introduction
Page 20/24
MiCOM P341
Protocol
Courier
The next cell down the column controls the address of the relay:
Remote address
1
Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in Figure 7, it
is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the
master control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses an integer
number between 0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is
important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is
then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
The next cell down controls the inactivity timer:
Inactivity timer
10.00 mins
The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any
messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any
password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and
30 minutes.
Note that protection and disturbance recorder settings that are modified using an online editor such as PAS&T must be confirmed with a write to the Save changes cell of
the Configuration column. Off-line editors such as MiCOM S1 do not require this
action for the setting changes to take effect.
3.8.2
Modbus communication
Modbus is a master/slave communication protocol which can be used for network
control. In a similar fashion to Courier, the system works by the master device
initiating all actions and the slave devices, (the relays), responding to the master by
supplying the requested data or by taking the requested action.
Modbus
communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be
used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices.
Introduction
P341/EN IT/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 21/24
To use the rear port with Modbus communication, the relays communication settings
menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set
to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings apply to the
rear port using Modbus which are described below.
Move down the
Communications column from the column heading to the first cell down which
indicates the communication protocol:
Protocol
Modbus
The next cell down controls the Modbus address of the relay:
Modbus address
23
Up to 32 relays can be connected to one Modbus spur, and therefore it is necessary
for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control
station are accepted by one relay only. Modbus uses an integer number between 1
and 247 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same
Modbus address. The Modbus address is then used by the master station to
communicate with the relay.
The next cell down controls the inactivity timer:
Inactivity timer
10.00 mins
The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any
messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any
password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and
30 minutes.
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used:
Baud rate
9600 bits/s
Modbus communication is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the
relay, 9600 bits/s, 19200 bits/s and 38400 bits/s. It is important that whatever
baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus master
station.
The next cell down controls the parity format used in the data frames:
Parity
None
P341/EN IT/D22
Introduction
Page 22/24
MiCOM P341
The parity can be set to be one of None, Odd or Even. It is important that
whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus
master station.
3.8.3
IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication

The IEC specification IEC 60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5:
Transmission Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards
IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5 to perform communication with protection
equipment. The standard configuration for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is to use a
twisted pair connection over distances up to 1000m. As an option for IEC 60870-5103, the rear port can be specified to use a fibre optic connection for direct
connection to a master station. The relay operates as a slave in the system,
responding to commands from a master station. The method of communication uses
standardised messages which are based on the VDEW communication protocol.
To use the rear port with IEC 60870-5-103 communication, the relays
communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user
interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the
Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column.
Four settings apply to the rear port using IEC 60870-5-103 which are described
below. Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the
first cell which indicates the communication protocol:
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103
The next cell down controls the IEC 60870-5-103 address of the relay:
Remote address
162
Up to 32 relays can be connected to one IEC 60870-5-103 spur, and therefore it is
necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master
control station are accepted by one relay only. IEC 60870-5-103 uses an integer
number between 0 and 254 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays
have the same IEC 60870-5-103 address. The IEC 60870-5-103 address is then
used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
Baud rate
9600 bits/s
IEC 60870-5-103 communication is asynchronous. Two baud rates are supported by
the relay, 9600 bits/s and 19200 bits/s. It is important that whatever baud rate is
selected on the relay is the same as that set on the IEC 60870-5-103 master station.
Introduction
P341/EN IT/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 23/24
The next cell down controls the period between IEC 60870-5-103 measurements:
Measuret period
30.00 s
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows the relay to supply measurements at regular
intervals. The interval between measurements is controlled by this cell, and can be
set between 1 and 60 seconds.
The next cell down the column controls the physical media used for the
communication:
Physical link
EIA(RS)485
The default setting is to select the electrical EIA(RS)485 connection. If the optional
fibre optic connectors are fitted to the relay, then this setting can be changed to Fibre
optic.
The next cell down can be used to define the primary function type for this interface,
where this is not explicitly defined for the application by the
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol*.
Function type
226
3.8.4
DNP 3.0 communication

The DNP 3.0 protocol is defined and administered by the DNP User Group.
Information about the user group, DNP 3.0 in general and protocol specifications
can be found on their website: www.dnp.org
The relay operates as a DNP 3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol
plus some of the features from level 3. DNP 3.0 communication is achieved via a
twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a distance of 1000m
with up to 32 slave devices.
To use the rear port with DNP 3.0 communication, the relays communication settings
menu firstly check that the Comms setting cell in the Configuration column is set to
Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings apply to the rear
port using DNP 3.0, which are described below. Move down the Communications
column from the column heading to the first cell which indicates the communications
protocol:
Protocol
DNP 3.0
P341/EN IT/D22
Introduction
Page 24/24
MiCOM P341
The next cell controls the DNP 3.0 address of the relay:
DNP 3.0 address
232
Upto 32 relays can be connected to one DNP 3.0 spur, and therefore it is necessary
for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control
station are accepted by only one relay. DNP 3.0 uses a decimal number between 1
and 65519 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same
DNP 3.0 address. The DNP 3.0 address is then used by the master station to
communicate with the relay.
Baud rate
9600 bits/s
DNP 3.0 communication is asynchronous. Six baud rates are supported by the relay
1200bits/s,
2400bits/s,
4800bits/s,
9600bits/s,
19200bits/s
and
38400bits/s. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the
same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master station.
The next cell down the column controls the parity format used in the data frames:
Parity
None
The parity can be set to be one of None, Odd or Even. It is important that
whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the DNP 3.0
master station.
The next cell down the column sets the time synchronisation request from the master
by the relay:
Time Synch
Enabled
The time synch can be set to either enabled or disabled. If enabled it allows the DNP
3.0 master to synchronise the time.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
APPLICATION NOTES
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 1/116
CONTENT
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Interconnection protection
1.2
MiCOM interconnection protection relay
1.2.1
Protection features
10
1.2.2
10
2.
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
11
2.1
11
2.2
CT and VT ratios
13
2.3
Loss of mains protection
13
2.4
15
2.4.1
Setting guidelines for df/dt protection
16
2.5
17
2.5.1
Setting guidelines for voltage vector shift protection
19
2.6
Reconnection timer
19
2.6.1
Setting guidelines for the reconnect delay
20
2.7
Power protection
20
2.7.1
21
2.7.2
Over power protection
23
2.7.2.1
Over power setting guideline
23
2.7.3
Low forward power protection function
24
2.7.3.1
Low forward power setting guideline
24
2.7.4
24
2.7.4.1
Reverse power setting guideline
25
2.8
26
2.8.1
Transformer magnetising inrush
29
2.8.2
Application of timer hold facility
29
2.8.3
Setting guidelines
30
2.9
Directional overcurrent protection
30
2.9.1
Synchronous polarisation
32
2.9.2
Setting guidelines
33
2.10
Earth fault protection
34
2.10.1
Standard earth fault protection element
34
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 2/116
MiCOM P341
2.10.2
Sensitive earth fault protection element (SEF)
36
2.11
Directional earth fault protection (DEF)
38
2.11.1
Residual voltage polarisation
38
2.11.2
Negative sequence polarisation
39
2.11.3
General setting guidelines for DEF
39
2.11.4
Application to insulated systems
40
2.11.5
Setting guidelines insulated systems
43
2.11.6
Application to petersen coil earthed systems
43
2.12
48
2.13
Application considerations
50
2.13.1
Calculation of required relay settings
50
2.13.2
Application of settings to the relay
51
2.14
51
2.14.1
52
2.14.2
Setting guidelines for high impedance REF
54
2.15
Residual over voltage/neutral voltage displacement protection
57
2.15.1
Setting guidelines for residual over voltage/neutral voltage displacement

protection
60
2.16
61
2.16.1
Setting guidelines for under voltage protection
62
2.17
63
2.17.1
Setting guidelines for over voltage protection
64
2.18
65
2.18.1
Setting guidelines for under frequency protection
66
2.19
68
2.19.1
Setting guidelines for over frequency protection
68
2.20
69
2.20.1
Introduction
69
2.20.2
Thermal replica
70
2.20.3
Setting guidelines
72
2.21
Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF)
73
2.21.1
Breaker failure protection configurations
73
2.21.2
Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers
74
2.22
Typical settings
75
2.22.1
Breaker fail timer settings
75
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 3/116
2.22.2
Breaker fail undercurrent settings
76
3.
OTHER PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS
77
3.1
Blocked overcurrent protection
77
4.
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
79
4.1
79
4.1.1
Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions
79
4.1.2
Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation
80
4.1.2.1
Inputs
81
4.1.2.2
Outputs
82
4.1.3
Menu settings
82
4.2
Current transformer supervision
83
4.2.1
83
4.2.2
Setting the CT supervision element
84
4.3
Circuit breaker state monitoring
84
4.3.1
84
4.4
Pole dead logic
86
4.5
87
4.5.1
Circuit breaker condition monitoring features
88
4.5.2
Setting guidelines
89
4.5.2.1
Setting the S I^ thresholds
89
4.5.2.2
Setting the number of operations thresholds
89
4.5.2.3
Setting the operating time thresholds
90
4.5.2.4
Setting the excessive fault frequency thresholds
90
4.6
90
4.7
92
4.7.1
TCS scheme 1
93
4.7.1.1
Scheme description
93
4.7.2
Scheme 1 PSL
95
4.7.3
TCS scheme 2
95
4.7.3.1
Scheme description
95
4.7.4
Scheme 2 PSL
96
4.7.5
TCS scheme 3
96
4.7.5.1
Scheme description
96
4.7.6
Scheme 3 PSL
97
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 4/116
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
4.8
Event & fault records
97
4.8.1
Types of event
98
4.8.1.1
Change of state of opto-isolated inputs
98
4.8.1.2
Change of state of one or more output relay contacts
99
4.8.1.3
Relay alarm conditions
99
4.8.1.4
Protection element starts and trips
100
4.8.1.5
General events
100
4.8.1.6
Fault records
100
4.8.1.7
Maintenance reports
100
4.8.1.8
Setting changes
101
4.8.2
Resetting of event/fault records
101
4.8.3
Viewing event records via MiCOM S1 support software
101
4.8.4
Event filtering
102
4.9
103
4.10
Measurements
104
4.10.1
Measured voltages and currents
104
4.10.2
Sequence voltages and currents
104
4.10.3
Power and energy quantities
104
4.10.4
Rms. voltages and currents
105
4.10.5
Demand values
105
4.10.5.1 Fixed demand values
105
4.10.5.2 Rolling demand values
105
4.10.5.3 Peak demand values
106
4.10.6
106
Settings
4.10.6.1 Default display
106
4.10.6.2 Local values
106
4.10.6.3 Remote values
106
4.10.6.4 Measurement ref
106
4.10.6.5 Measurement mode
106
4.10.6.6 Fixed demand period
106
4.10.6.7 Rolling sub-period and number of sub-periods
107
4.11
Changing setting groups
107
4.12
Control inputs
107
4.13
VT connections
108
4.13.1
Open delta (vee connected) VT's
108
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 5/116
4.13.2
VT single point earthing
108
4.14
108
5.
CT/VT REQUIREMENTS
109
5.1
Non-directional definite time/IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection 109
5.1.1
Time-delayed phase overcurrent elements
109
5.1.2
Time-delayed earth fault overcurrent elements
109
5.2
Non-directional instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection
109
5.2.1
CT requirements for instantaneous phase overcurrent elements
109
5.2.2
CT requirements for instantaneous earth fault overcurrent elements
109
5.3
Directional definite time/IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection
109
5.3.1
109
5.3.2
110
5.4
Directional instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection
110
5.4.1
110
5.4.2
110
5.5
Non-directional/directional definite time/IDMT sensitive earth fault (SEF)

protection
110
5.5.1
Non-directional time delayed SEF protection (residually connected)
110
5.5.2
Non-directional instantaneous SEF protection (residually connected)
110
5.5.3
Directional time delayed SEF protection (residually connected)
110
5.5.4
Directional instantaneous SEF protection (residually connected)
110
5.5.5
SEF protection - as fed from a core-balance CT
110
5.6
111
5.7
Reverse and low forward power protection functions
111
5.7.1
Protection class current transformers
111
5.7.2
112
5.8
Converting an IEC185 current transformer standard protection

classification to a kneepoint voltage
112
5.9
Converting IEC185 current transformer standard protection

classification to an ANSI/IEEE standard voltage rating
113
6.
COMMISSIONING TEST MENU
113
6.1
Opto I/P status
114
6.2
Relay O/P status
114
6.3
Test port status
115
6.4
LED status
115
6.5
Monitor bits 1 to 8
115
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 6/116
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
6.6
Test mode
115
6.7
Test pattern
116
6.8
Contact test
116
6.9
Test LEDs
116
6.10
Using a monitor/download port test box
116
Figure 1:
Typical system with embedded generation
14
Figure 2a:
Vector diagram representing steady state condition
17
Figure 2b:
Single phase line diagram showing generator parameters
18
Figure 2c:
Transient voltage vector change q due to change in load current DIL
18
Figure 3:
Typical distribution system using parallel transformers
32
Figure 4:
Positioning of core balance current transformers
38
Figure 5:
Current distribution in an insulated system with C phase fault
41
Figure 6:
Phasor diagrams for insulated system with C phase fault
42
Figure 7:
Current distribution in Peterson Coil earthed system
44
Figure 8:
Distribution of currents during a C phase to earth fault
45
Figure 9:
Theoretical case no resistance present in XL or Xc
46
Figure 10:
Zero sequence network showing residual currents
47
Figure 11:
Practical case: resistance present in XL and Xc
48
Figure 12:
Resistive components of spill current
49
Figure 13:
High impedance principle
53
Figure 14:
High impedance REF relay/CT connections
54
Figure 15a:
Residual voltage, solidly earthed systems
58
Figure 15b:
Residual voltage, resistance earthed systems
59
Figure 16:
Co-ordination of underfrequency protection function with system load

shedding
67
Figure 17:
CB fail logic
77
Figure 18a:
Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer)
78
Figure 18b:
Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer)
78
Figure 19:
VTS logic
80
Figure 20:
CT supervision function block diagram
83
Figure 21:
CB state monitoring
86
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 7/116
Figure 22:
Pole dead logic
87
Figure 23:
Remote control of circuit breaker
91
Figure 24:
TCS scheme 1
93
Figure 25:
PSL for TCS schemes 1 and 3
95
Figure 26:
TCS scheme 2
95
Figure 27:
PSL for TCS scheme 2
96
Figure 28:
TCS scheme 2
96
Figure 29:
Trip LED logic diagram
109
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 8/116
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Interconnection protection
Page 9/116
Small-scale generators can be found in a wide range of situations. These may be

used to provide emergency power in the event of loss of the main supply.
Alternatively the generation of electrical power may be a by-product of a heat/steam
generation process. Where such embedded generation capacity exists it can be
economic to run the machines in parallel with the local Public Electricity Suppliers
(PES) network. This can reduce a sites overall power demand or peak load.
Additionally, excess generation may be exported and sold to the local PES. If parallel
operation is possible great care must be taken to ensure that the embedded
generation does not cause any dangerous conditions to exist on the local PES
network.
PES networks have in general been designed for operation where the generation is
supplied from central sources down into the network. Generated voltages and
frequency are closely monitored to ensure that values at the point of supply are within
statutory limits. Tap changers and tap changer control schemes are optimised to
ensure that supply voltages remain within these limits. Embedded generation can
affect the normal flow of active and reactive power on the network leading to
unusually high or low voltages being produced and may also lead to excessive fault
current that could exceed the rating of the installed distribution switchgear/cables.
It may also be possible for the embedded generators to become disconnected from
the main source of supply but be able to supply local load on the PES network. Such
islanded operation must be avoided for several reasons
to ensure that unearthed operation of the PES network is avoided
to ensure that automatic reclosure of system circuit breakers will not result in
connecting unsynchronised supplies causing damage to the generators
to ensure that system operations staff cannot attempt unsynchronised manual

closure of an open circuit breaker.
to ensure that there is no chance of faults on the PES system being undetectable
due to the low fault supplying capability of the embedded generator
to ensure that the voltage and frequency supplied to PES customers remains within
statutory limits
Before granting permission for the generation to be connected to their system the PES
must be satisfied that no danger will result. The type and extent of protection
required at the interconnection point between PES system and embedded generation
will need to be analysed.
1.2
MiCOM interconnection protection relay

MiCOM relays are a new range of products from AREVA T&D. Using the latest
numerical technology the platform includes devices designed for the application to a
wide range of power system plant such as motors, generators, feeders, overhead
lines and cables.
Each relay is designed around a common hardware and software platform in order
to achieve a high degree of commonality between products. One such product in the
range is the P341 Interconnection Protection Relay. The relay has been designed to
provide a wide range of protection functions required to prevent dangerous
conditions that could be present when embedded generators provide power to local
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 10/116
MiCOM P341
power supply networks when the main connection with the Electricity Supply system is
lost.
The relays also include a comprehensive range of non-protection features to aid with
power system diagnosis and fault analysis. All these features can be accessed
remotely from one of the relays remote serial communications options.
1.2.1
Protection features
The P341 relay contains a wide variety of protection functions, these are summarised
below:
1.2.2
Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection four stage back-up protection.
Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection four stage back-up protection.
Neutral Displacement Protection provides protection against earth faults on

impedance earthed/un-earthed systems.
Under/Over Voltage Protection two stage protection to prevent the supply of

unusual voltages to external supply network.
Under/Over Frequency Protection six stage frequency protection to prevent the

supply of unusual frequencies to the external supply network.
Reverse Power protection against prime mover failure of a generator.
Low Forward Power provides an interlock for non urgent tripping.
Over Power back-up overload protection, or protection against excessive export

power to local network
Rate of Change of Frequency Protection to detect the loss of connection to main

grid supply network.
Voltage Vector Shift Protection to detect the loss of connection to main grid
supply network.
Thermal overload protection two stage thermal overload protection.
Voltage Transformer Supervision to prevent mal-operation of voltage dependent

protection elements upon loss of a VT input signal.
Programmable Scheme Logic allowing user defined protection and control logic
to suit particular customer applications.
Below is a summary of the P341 relay non-protective features:
Measurements various measurements of value for display on the relay or

accessed from the serial communications, e.g. currents, voltages etc.
Fault/Event/Disturbance Records available from the serial communications or

on the relay display (fault/event records only on relay display).
Four Setting Groups independent setting groups to cater for alternative power
system and protection arrangements or special applications.
Remote Serial Communications to allow remote access to the relays. The

following communications protocols are supported; Courier, MODBUS,
IEC 60870-5-103 (VDEW) and DNP 3.0.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
2.
Page 11/116
Continuous Self Monitoring power-on diagnostics and self checking routines to

provide maximum relay reliability and availability.
Commissioning test facilities.
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

The following sections detail the individual protection functions in addition to where
and how they may be applied. Each section also gives an extract from the respective
menu columns to demonstrate how the settings are actually applied to the relay.
2.1
The P340 relays include a column in the menu called the CONFIGURATION
column. This affects the operation of each of the individual protection functions. The
aim of this column is to allow general configuration of the relay from a single point in
the menu. Any of the functions that are disabled or made invisible from this column
do not then appear within the main relay menu.
The following table shows the relay menu for the Configuration column, with default
settings. The brief description of the function of each setting is also provided.
Menu Text
Default Setting
Available Settings
Function
No Operation
No Operation
All Settings
Setting Group 1
Setting Group 2
Setting Group 3
Setting Group 4
Restore default
settings to any or all
groups of settings
Select via Menu
Select via Menu

Select via Optos
Change setting
groups by?
Group 1
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Select active setting

group used for
protection settings
No Operation
No Operation
Save
Abort
Saves all setting

changes from stored
settings buffer
memory into stored
settings
Group1, 2, 3 or 4
Selects a group of
settings to copy to the
group designated in
Copy To cell
No Operation
Group1, 2, 3 or 4
Copies the group of

settings selected in the
Copy From cell to
the selected setting
group
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
Selects if Group 1
settings are available
on the relay
CONFIGURATION
Restore Defaults
Setting Group
Active Settings
Save Changes
Copy From
Copy To
Setting Group 1
Group 1
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 12/116
MiCOM P341
Menu Text
Default Setting
Available Settings
Function
Setting Group 2
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Selects if Group 2
on the relay
Setting Group 3
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Selects if Group 3
on the relay
Setting Group 4
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Selects if Group 4
on the relay
Power
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
Makes settings visible

in the relay menu
Thermal Overload
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
Overcurrent
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
Earth Fault
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
SEF/REF/SPower
SEF/REF
Disabled or SEF/REF
or Sensitive Power

in the relay menu
Residual O/V NVD
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
df/dt
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
V Vector Shift
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
Reconnect Delay
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
Volt Protection
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
Freq Protection
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
CB Fail
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
Supervision
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled

in the relay menu
Input Labels
Visible
Invisible or Visible

in the relay menu
Output Labels
Visible

in the relay menu
CT & VT Ratios
Visible

in the relay menu
Event Recorder
Invisible

in the relay menu
Disturb Recorder
Invisible

in the relay menu
Measuret Setup
Invisible

in the relay menu
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 13/116
Menu Text
Default Setting
Available Settings
Function
Comms Settings
Visible

in the relay menu
Commission Tests
Visible

in the relay menu
Primary or
Secondary
Selects if relay
protection settings are
displayed in primary
or secondary
current/voltage values
Setting Values
2.2
Primary
CT and VT ratios
The P340 relay allows the current and voltage settings to be applied to the relay in
either primary or secondary quantities. This is done by programming the Setting
Values cell of the CONFIGURATION column to either Primary or Secondary.
When this cell is set to Primary, all current, voltage and impedance setting values
are scaled by the programmed CT and VT ratios. These are found in the VT & CT
RATIOS column, settings for which are shown below:
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Step Size
Min.
Max.
110V
100V
1000000V
1V
110V
(Vn=100/120V)
400V
(Vn=380/480V)
80V
(Vn=100/120V)
360V
(Vn=380/480V)
140V
(Vn=100/120V)
480V
(Vn=380/480V)
1V
(Vn=100/120V)
4V
(Vn=380/480V)
110 V
100 V
1000000 V
1V
110V
(Vn=100/120V)
400V
(Vn=380/480V)
80V
(Vn=100/120V)
360V
(Vn=380/480V)
140V
(Vn=100/120V)
480V
(Vn=380/480V)
1V
(Vn=100/120V)
4V
(Vn=380/480V)
Phase CT Primary
30000
Phase CT Secy
E/F CT Primary
30000
E/F CT Secondary
SEF CT Primary
30000
SEF CT Secondary
CT & VT RATIOS
Main VT Primary
Main VT Secy
NVD VT Primary
NVD VT Secondary
2.3
Loss of mains protection

If the capacity of an embedded generator exceeds the locally connected load it is
conceivable that it could supply the local load in island mode. Fault clearance may
disconnect part of the public supply system from the main source of supply resulting
in the embedded generation feeding the local loads, i.e. a Loss of Mains or Loss of
Grid condition. This is illustrated in Figure 1. A fault at F will result in the tripping of
CB1 disconnecting substations S1, S2 and S3 from the main source of supply. Also
note that transformer T1 was supplying the earth connection for S1, S2 and S3, this
earth connection is lost when CB1 opens. Should the load at substations S1 and S2
greatly exceed the rating of EG1, the generator will slow down quickly and
underfrequency and/or undervoltage relays could operate to disconnect EG1 from
the system. The worst scenario is when the external load is smaller than the
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 14/116
MiCOM P341
generator rating, in this case the generator can continue to operate normally
supplying the external loads. The local system will now be operating unearthed and
overcurrent protection may be inoperative at S1 and S2 due to the low fault supplying
capacity of generator EG1. The embedded generator may also lose synchronism
with the main system supply leading to serious problems if CB1 has auto reclosing
equipment.
An even more serious problem presents itself if manual operation of distribution
switchgear is considered. System Operation staff may operate circuit breakers by
hand. In these circumstances it is essential that unsynchronised reclosure is prevented
as this could have very serious consequences for the operator, particularly if the
switchgear is not designed, or rated, to be operated when switching onto a fault. To
protect personnel, the embedded machine must be disconnected from the system as
soon as the system connection is broken, this will ensure that manual unsynchronised
closure is prevented.
CB2
T1
CB1
PES
system
EG1
S3
S1
S2
P2029ENa
Figure 1:
Typical system with embedded generation
Where the embedded generator does not export power under normal conditions it
may be possible to use directional power or directional overcurrent protection relays
to detect the export of power under loss of mains conditions. If export of power into
the system is allowed it may not be possible to set directional relays using settings
sensitive enough to detect the loss of the mains connection. In such circumstances a
Rate of Change of Frequency and/or Voltage Vector Shift protection can be applied.
These detect the slight variation in generator speed that occurs when the main supply
connection is disconnected and the generator experiences a step change in load.
The type of protection required to detect Loss of Mains conditions will depend on a
number of factors, e.g. the generator rating, size of local load, ability to export
power, and configuration of supply network etc. Protection requirements should be
discussed and agreed with the local Public Electricity Supplier before permission to
connect the embedded generator in parallel with the system is granted.
A number of protection elements that may be sensitive to the Loss of Mains conditions
are offered in the P341 relay; Rate of Change of Frequency, Voltage Vector Shift,
Over Power Protection, Directional Overcurrent Protection, Frequency Protection,
Voltage Protection. Application of each of these elements is discussed in the
following sections.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
2.4
Page 15/116

When a machine is running in parallel with the main power supply the frequency and
hence speed of the machine will be governed by the grid supply. When the
connection with the grid is lost, as described in section 2.3, the now islanded
machine is free to slow down or speed up as determined by the new load conditions,
machine rating and governor response. Where there is a significant change in load
conditions between the synchronised and islanded condition the machine will speed
up or slow down before the governor can respond.
The rate of change of speed, or frequency, following a power disturbance can be
approximated by
df/
dt =
where P
f
DP.f
2GH
= Change in power output between synchronised and islanded

operation
= Rated frequency
G = Machine rating in MVA

H = Inertia constant
This simple expression assumes that the machine is running at rated frequency and
that the time intervals are short enough that AVR and governor dynamics can be
ignored. From this equation it is clear that the rate of change of frequency is directly
proportional to the change in power output between two conditions. Provided there
is a small change in load between the synchronised and islanded (loss of mains)
condition the rate of change of frequency as the machine adjusts to the new load
conditions can be detectable. The change in speed of the machine is also
proportional to the inertia constant and rating of the machine and so will be
application dependent.
Care must be taken in applying this type of protection as the prime consideration is
detecting the loss of grid connection. Failure to detect this condition may result in
unsynchronised re-connection via remote re-closing equipment. However if too
sensitive a setting is chosen there is a risk of nuisance tripping due to frequency
fluctuations caused by normal heavy load switching or fault clearance. Guidance can
be given for setting a rate of change of frequency element but these settings must be
thoroughly tested on site to prove their accuracy for a given machine and load.
A single stage, definite time delayed, rate of change of frequency element is provide
in the P341 relay. The element calculates the rate of change of frequency every 3
cycles by calculating the frequency difference over the 3-cycle period as shown.
df/
dt =
fn - fn-3cycle
3cycle
Two consecutive calculations must give a result above the setting threshold before a
trip decision can be initiated.
The element also allows the user to set a frequency band within which the element is
blocked. This provides additional stability for non loss of grid disturbances which do
not affect the machine frequency significantly.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 16/116
MiCOM P341
A DDB (Digital Data Bus) signal is available to indicate that the element has operated
(DDB 440 df/dt Trip). A second DDB signal is available to indicate that the element
has started (DDB 630 df/dt Start). These signals are used to operate the output relays
(as programmed into the Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL)) and trigger the
disturbance recorder. The state of the DDB signals can also be programmed to be
viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay.
The following table shows the relay menu for the rate of change of frequency or df/dt
protection element, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Max.
Step Size
GROUP 1 df/dt
df/dt Status
Enabled
df/dt Setting
0.2 Hz/s
0.1 Hz/s
10 Hz/s
0.01 Hz/s
0.5 s
0s
100 s
0.1 s
df/dt f Low
49.5 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.01 Hz
df/dt f High
50.5 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.01 Hz
df/dt Time Delay
2.4.1
Enabled, Disabled
Setting guidelines for df/dt protection

The rate of change of frequency, or df/dt, protection can be selected by setting the
df/dt Status cell to Enabled.
The rate of change of frequency setting threshold, df/dt Setting, should be set to the
desired level.
The time delay setting, df/dt Time Delay, can be used to provide a degree of
stability against normal load switching events which will cause a change in the
frequency before governor correction.
The frequency dead band can be set by setting the upper and lower frequency
thresholds, df/dt f High, df/dt f Low, respectively.
The setting thresholds should be set such that the loss of mains condition can be
detected, this can be determined by system switching during initial commissioning.
System simulation testing has shown that the following settings can provide stable
operation for external faults, and load switching events, whilst operating for a loss of
mains event which causes a 10% change in the machine output, for a typical 4MW
machine. These can be used as a guide but will by no means be acceptable in all
applications. Machine rating, governor response, local load and system load, will all
affect the dynamic response of a machine to a loss of mains event.
df/dt Setting
0.2Hz/s
df/dt Time Delay
0.5s
df/dt f High
50.5Hz
df/dt f Low
49.5Hz
Once installed, the settings should be periodically reviewed to ensure that they are
adequate to detect a loss of grid connection event, but not too sensitive such that
unwanted tripping occurs during normal fault clearance, or load switching, that does
not lead to the loss of mains condition. Safety of personnel is paramount and this
should be kept in mind when optimising settings; non-synchronised manual
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 17/116
operation of circuit breakers must be prevented by disconnection of the embedded

machine when the system becomes separated.
2.5

An expression for a sinusoidal mains voltage waveform is generally given by the
following:
V
where
Vp sin (wt)
q(t) =
wt = 2pft
or
Vp sin q(t)
If the frequency is changing at constant rate Rf from a frequency fo then the variation
in the angle q(t) is given by:
q(t) =
2p f dt,
which gives
q(t) =
2p (fo t + t Rf t/2),
and
V sin {2p (fo + t Rf/2)t}
Hence the angle change Dq(t) after time t is given by:

Dq(t) = p Rf t2,
Therefore the phase of the voltage with respect to a fixed frequency reference when
subject to a constant rate of change of frequency changes in proportion to t2. This is
a characteristic difference from a rate of change of frequency function, which in most
conditions can be assumed as changing linearly with time.
A rate of change of frequency of 10 Hz/s results in an angular voltage vector shift of
only 0.72 degrees in the first cycle after the disturbance. This is too small to be
detected by vector shift relays. In fact a typical setting for a voltage vector shift relay
is, normally between 6 and 13 degrees. Therefore a voltage vector shift relay is not
sensitive to the change in voltage phase brought about by change of frequency
alone.
To understand the relation between the resulting voltage vector angle change
following a disturbance and the embedded generator characteristics a simplified
single phase equivalent circuit of a synchronous generator or induction generator is
shown in Figures 2a, 2b and 2c. The voltage VT is the symmetrical terminal voltage
of the generator and the voltage E is the internal voltage lying behind the machine
impedance which is largely reactive (X). When a disturbance causes a change in
current the terminal voltage will jump with respect to its steady state position. The
resultant voltage vector is dependent on the rate of change in current, and the
subtransient impedance of the machine, which is the impedance the generator
presents to a sudden load change. In turn the current change depends on how
strong the source is (short circuit capacity) and the voltage regulation at the generator
terminal which is also affected by the reactive power load connected to the machine.
E
IL X
VT
IL
IL R
P2030ENa
Figure 2a: Vector diagram representing steady state condition
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 18/116
MiCOM P341
jX
IL
VT
P2031ENa
Figure 2b: Single phase line diagram showing generator parameters
IL
VT
VT
DIL
ILX
ILR
DILX
P2032ENa
Figure 2c:
Transient voltage vector change q due to change in load

current DIL
The voltage vector shift function is designed to respond within one to two full mains
cycles when its threshold is exceeded. Discrimination between a loss of mains
condition and a circuit fault is therefore achievable only by selecting the angle
threshold to be above expected fault levels. This setting can be quantified by
calculating the angular change due to islanding. However this angular change
depends on system topology, power flows and very often also on the instant of the
system faults. For example a bolted three phase short circuit which occurs close to
the relay may cause a problem in that it inherently produces a vector shift angle at
the instant of the fault which is bigger than any normal setting, independent of the
mains condition. This kind of fault would cause the relay to trip shortly after the
instant of its inception. Although this may seem to be a disadvantage of the vector
shift function, isolating the embedded generator at the instant of a bolted three phase
fault is of advantage to the PES. This is because the mains short circuit capacity and
consequently the energy feeding the short circuit is limited by the instant operation of
the relay. The fast operation of this vector shift function renders it to operate at the
instant of a disturbance rather than during a gradual change caused by a gradual
change of power flow. Operation can occur at the instant of inception of the fault, at
fault clearance or following non-synchronised reclosure, which affords additional
protection to the embedded generator.
The P341 has a single stage Voltage Vector Shift protection element. This element
measures the change in voltage angle over successive power system half-cycles. The
element operates by measuring the time between zero crossings on the voltage
waveforms. A measurement is taken every half cycle for each phase voltage. Over a
power system cycle this produces 6 results, a trip is issued if 5 of the 6 calculations for
the last power system cycle are above the set threshold. Checking all three phases
makes the element less susceptible to incorrect operation due to harmonic distortion
or interference in the measured voltage waveform.
(DDB 441 V Shift Trip). The state of the DDB signal can also be programmed to be
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 19/116
The following table shows the relay menu for the Voltage Vector Shift protection
element, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Max.
Step Size
GROUP 1 V Vector Shift
2.5.1
V Shift Status
Enabled
V Shift Angle
10
Enabled, Disabled
2
30
Setting guidelines for voltage vector shift protection

The element can be selected by setting the V Shift Status cell to Enabled.
The angle change setting threshold, V Shift Angle, should be set to the desired
level.
The setting threshold should be set such that the loss of mains condition can be
detected, this can be determined by system switching during initial commissioning.
System simulation testing has shown that a V Shift Angle setting of 10 can provide
stable operation for external faults, and load switching events, whilst operating for a
loss of mains event which causes a 10% change in the machine output for a typical
4MW machine. Although in some circumstances, this setting may prove to be too
sensitive, it is recommended to achieve a successful loss of mains trip in as many
cases as possible. Although the vector shift function may trip the relay due to a
bolted 3 phase fault, it is also essential in securing a trip at the instant of an out-ofphase autoreclose, where the df/dt function does not trip.
This setting should be used as a guide but will by no means be acceptable in all
applications. Machine rating, governor response, local load and system load, will all
affect the dynamic response of a machine to a loss of mains event. Once installed
the settings should be periodically reviewed to ensure that they are adequate to detect
a loss of grid connection event, but not too sensitive such that unwanted tripping
occurs during normal fault clearance that does not lead to the loss of mains
condition. Safety of personnel is paramount and this should be kept in mind when
optimising settings; non-synchronised manual operation of circuit breakers must be
prevented by disconnection of the embedded machine when the system becomes
separated.
2.6
Reconnection timer
As explained in sections 2.4 and 2.5, due to the sensitivity of the settings applied to
the df/dt and/or the Voltage Vector Shift element, false operation for non loss of
mains events may occur. This could, for example, be due to a close up three phase
fault which can cause operation of a Voltage Vector Shift element. Such operations
will lead to the disconnection of the embedded machine from the external network
and prevent export of power. Alternatively the loss of mains protections may operate
correctly, and auto re-closure equipment may restore the grid supply following a
transient fault.
Disconnection of an embedded generator could lead to a simple loss of revenue. Or
in cases where the licensing arrangement demands export of power at times of peak
load may lead to penalty charges being imposed. To minimise the disruption
caused, the P341 includes a reconnection timer. This timer is initiated following
operation of any protection element that could operate due to a loss of mains event,
i.e. df/dt, voltage vector shift, under/over frequency, power and under/over voltage.
The timer is blocked should a short circuit fault protection element operate, i.e.
residual overvoltage, overcurrent, and earth fault. Once the timer delay has expired
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 20/116
MiCOM P341
the element will provide a pulsed output signal. This signal can be used to initiate
external synchronising equipment that can re-synchronise the machine with the
system and reclose the CB.
(DDB 742 Reconnection). The state of the DDB signal can also be programmed to be
The following table shows the relay menu for the Reconnect Delay, including the
available setting ranges and factory defaults:
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Max.
Step Size
GROUP 1 RECONNECT DELAY
2.6.1
Reconnect Status
Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Reconnect Delay
60 s
0s
300 s
0.01 s
Reconnect tPULSE
1s
0.01 s
30 s
0.01 s
Setting guidelines for the reconnect delay

The element can be selected by setting the Reconnect Status cell to Enabled.
The timer setting, Reconnect Delay, should be set to the desired delay, this would
typically be longer than the dead time of system auto reclose equipment to ensure
that re-synchronisation is only attempted after the system has been returned to a
normal state. The signal pulse time, Reconnect tPULSE should be set such that the
output pulse is sufficient to securely initiate the auto synchronising equipment when
required.
2.7
Power protection
The power protection elements of the P341 relay calculate the three phase active
power based on the following formula, using the current measured at the IA, IB, IC
inputs on the relay.
P = Vala cosfa
Vblb cosfb
Vclc cosfc
Two stages of power protection are provided, these can be independently selected as
either Reverse Power, Over Power, Low Forward Power or Disabled, operation in
each mode is described in the following sections. The power elements may be
selectively disabled, via fixed logic, so that they can be inhibited when used for
machine protection and the protected machine CB is open. This will prevent false
operation and nuisance flagging of any stage selected to operate as Low Forward
power.
Where the local licensing agreement prevents the export of power into the local
supply Over Power protection may be used as a simple Loss of Mains protection. In
these cases the element can be used to provide alarm and trip stages allowing the
machine operators to closely monitor the machine export capability.
DDB signals are available to indicate starting and tripping of each stage
(Starts: DDB 595, DDB 596, Trips: DDB 475, 476). The state of the DDB signals can
be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION
TESTS column in the relay.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 21/116
Setting ranges for the Power elements are shown in the following table:
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Max.
Step Size
GROUP 1 POWER
Power1 Function
Disabled, Reverse, Low Forward, Over
-P>1 Setting
20 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
80 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
14 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
56 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
40 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
160 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
2 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
8 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
P<1 Setting
20 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
80 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
14 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
56 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
40 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
160 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
2 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
8 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
P>1 Setting
120 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
20 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
14 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
56 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
300 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
1200 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
2 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
8 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
Power1 Time Delay
5s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
Power1 DO Timer
0s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
P1 Poledead Inh
Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Power2 Function
Low Forward
P>2 Setting
20 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
20 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
14 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
56 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
40 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
160 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
2 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
8 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
P<2 Setting
20 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
20 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
14 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
56 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
40 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
160 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
2 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
8 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
P>2 Setting
120 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
20 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
14 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
56 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
300 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
100 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
2 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
8 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
Power2 Time Delay
5s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
Power2 DO Timer
0s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
P2 Poledead Inh
2.7.1
Reverse
Enabled
Enabled, Disabled

The minimum standard 3 phase power protection setting (7%Pn for P341) can be
restrictive for some applications. For example for steam turbine generators and some
hydro generators a reverse power setting as low as 0.5%Pn is required. A sensitive
setting for low forward power protection may also be required, especially for steam
turbine generators which have relatively low over speed design limits.
If a power setting less than 7%Pn is required then the sensitive power protection
should be used.
To improve the power protection sensitivity, a sensitive CT input is used. The CT input
is the same as that of the sensitive earth fault and restricted earth fault protection
elements, so the user can only select either sensitive power or SEF/REF in the
Configuration menu, but not both.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 22/116
MiCOM P341
The sensitive power protection measures only A-phase active power, as the abnormal
power condition is a 3-phase phenomenon. Having a separate CT input also means
that a correctly loaded metering class CT can be used which can provide the required
angular accuracy for the sensitive power protection function. A compensation angle
setting qC is also be provided to compensate for the angle error introduced by the
system CT and VT.
The A-phase power is calculated based on the following formula:
PA = IA VA cos (f - qC)
Where f is the angle of IA with respect to VA and qC is the compensation angle
setting.
Therefore, rated single phase power, Pn, for a 1A rated CT and 110V rated VT is
Pn = In x Vn = 1 x 110/3 = 63.5 W
The minimum setting is 0.3 W = 0.47% Pn
Two stages of sensitive power protection are provided, these can be independently
selected as either reverse power, over power, low forward power or disabled,
operation in each mode is described in the following sections. The power elements
may be selectively disabled, via fixed logic, so that they can be inhibited when the
protected machines CB is open, this will prevent maloperation and nuisance flagging
of any stage selected to operate as low forward power.
Measurement displays of A Phase sensitive active power, reactive power and power
factor angle APh Sen Watts, Aph Sen Vars and APh Power Angle are provided in
the MEASUREMENTS 3 menu to aid testing and commissioning.
DDB signals are available to indicate starting and tripping of each stage stage (Starts:
DDB 643, DDB 644, Trips: DDB 495, 496). The state of the DDB signals can be
programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS
column in the relay.
Setting ranges for the Sensitive Power elements are shown in the following table:
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min
Max
Step Size
Group 1: Sensitive Power

Sen Power1 Func
Reverse
0.5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.3 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
15 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.1 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
2 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
1.2 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
60 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
0.4 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
0.5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.3 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
15 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.1 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
2 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
1.2 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
60 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
0.4 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
50 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.3 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
100 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.1 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
200 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
1.2 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
400 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
0.4 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
Sen Power1 Delay
5s
0s
100 s
0.1 s
Power1 DO Timer
0s
0s
10 s
0.1 s
Sen P>1 Setting
Sen P<1 Setting
Sen P>1 Setting
P1 Poledead Inh
Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Menu Text
Page 23/116
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min
Max
Step Size
Group 1: Sensitive Power

Sen Power2 Func
0.5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.3 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
15 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.1 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
2 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
1.2 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
60 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
0.4 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
0.5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.3 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
15 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.1 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
2 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
1.2 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
60 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
0.4 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
50 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.3 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
100 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.1 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
200 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
1.2 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
400 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
0.4 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
Sen Power2 Delay
2s
0s
100 s
0.1 s
Power2 DO Timer
0s
0s
10 s
0.1 s
P2 Poledead Inh
Enabled
Sen P>2 Setting
Sen P<2 Setting
Sen P>2 Setting
2.7.2
Low Forward
Enabled, Disabled
Over power protection

The Over Power function is a directional element that will operate when power flows
in the forward direction. From the convention, this means power flowing away from
the busbar into the interconnection feeder or out of the protected machine.
Over Power protection can be used as simple overload indication, or as a back up
protection for failure of governor and control equipment, and would be set above the
maximum power rating of the machine.
Alternatively the Over Power function can be used as protection against excessive
export power for an embedded generator. In some installations the machine may be
allowed to operate in parallel with the external supply but the exportation of power
into the external supply may be forbidden. In these cases a simple Over Power
element can be used to monitor the power flow at the interconnection circuit breaker
and trip if power is seen to be exported into the system. For small standby generators
this may be accepted as the Loss of Mains protection.
2.7.2.1 Over power setting guideline

Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as an Over Power stage by
selecting the Power1 Function/Sen Power1 Func or Power2 Function/Sen Power2
Func cell to Over.
The power threshold setting of the Over Power protection, P>1 Setting/Sen P>1
Setting or P2 Setting/Sen P>2 Setting, should be set greater than the machine full
load rated power if providing overload protection. If the element is used to prevent
the export of power into the external system then the threshold can be set to minimum
or just in excess of the power export allowance.
A time delay setting, Power1 TimeDelay/Sen Power1 Delay or Power2
TimeDelay/Sen Power2 Delay can be applied.
The delay on reset timer, Power1 DO Timer or Power2 DO Timer, would
normally be set to zero.
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 24/116
2.7.3
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
Low forward power protection function

Low forward power may be used where the P341 relay is being used to protect a
small generator. When the CB connecting the generator to the system is tripped, the
electrical load on the machine is cut. This could lead to generator over-speed if the
mechanical input power is not reduced quickly. To reduce the risk of over speed
damage, it is sometimes chosen to interlock non-urgent tripping of the generator
breaker with a low forward power check. This ensures that the generator set circuit
breaker is opened only when the output power is sufficiently low that over speeding is
unlikely. The delay in electrical tripping, until prime mover input power has been
removed, may be deemed acceptable for non-urgent protection trips; e.g. stator
earth fault protection for a high impedance earthed generator. For urgent trips,
e.g. stator short circuit protection the low forward power interlock should not be used.
With the low probability of urgent trips, the risk of over speed and possible
consequences must be accepted.
The Low Forward Power protection can be arranged to interlock non-urgent tripping
using the relay programmable scheme logic. It can also be arranged to provide a
contact for external interlocking of manual tripping, if desired.
To prevent unwanted relay alarms and flags, a Low Forward Power protection
element can be disabled when the circuit breaker is opened via poledead logic.
2.7.3.1 Low forward power setting guideline

Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as a Low Forward Power
stage by selecting the Power1 Function/Sen Power1 Func or Power2 Function/Sen
Power2 Func cell to Low Forward.
When required, the threshold setting of the Low Forward Power protection function,
P<1 Setting/Sen P<1 Setting or P<2 Setting/Sen P<2 Setting, should be less
than 50% of the power level that could result in a dangerous over speed transient on
loss of electrical loading. The generator set manufacturer should be consulted for a
rating for the protected machine.
The time delay associated with the Low Forward Power protection function, Power1
Time Delay/Sen Power1 Delay or Power2 Time Delay/Sen Power2 Delay, could be
set to zero. However, some delay is desirable so that permission for a non-urgent
electrical trip is not given in the event of power fluctuations arising from sudden
steam valve/throttle closure. A typical time delay for this reason is 2s.
normally be set to zero when selected to operate Low Forward power elements.
To prevent unwanted relay alarms and flags, a Low Forward Power protection
element can be disabled when the circuit breaker is open via poledead logic. This is
controlled by setting the power protection inhibit cells, P1 Poledead Inh or P2
Poledead Inh, to Enabled.
2.7.4

Reverse Power protection may be used where the P341 relay is being used to protect
a small generator. A generator is expected to supply power to the connected system
in normal operation. If the generator prime mover fails, a generator that is
connected in parallel with another source of electrical supply will begin to motor.
This reversal of power flow due to loss of prime mover can be detected by the reverse
power element.
The consequences of generator motoring and the level of power drawn from the
power system will be dependent on the type of prime mover. Typical levels of
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 25/116
motoring power and possible motoring damage that could occur for various types of
generating plant are given in Table 1.
Prime Mover
Motoring Power
(Percentage Rating)
Possible Damage
Diesel Engine
5% 25%
Risk of fire or explosion from unburned

fuel
Motoring level depends on compression ratio and cylinder bore stiffness. Rapid
disconnection is required to limit power loss and risk of damage.
Gas Turbine
10% 15%
(Split-shaft)
>50%)
(Single-shaft)
With some gear-driven sets, damage

may arise due to reverse torque on
gear teeth.
Compressor load on single shaft machines leads to a high motoring power

compared to split-shaft machines. Rapid disconnection is required to limit power
loss or damage.
Hydraulic
Turbines
0.2 >2%
(Blades out of water)
>2.0%
(Blades in water)
Blade and runner cavitation may occur

with a long period of motoring.
Power is low when blades are above tail-race water level. Hydraulic flow detection
devices are often the main means of detecting loss of drive. Automatic
disconnection is recommended for unattended operation.
Table 1:
Motoring power and possible damage for various types of prime mover
In some applications, the level of reverse power in the case of prime mover failure
may fluctuate. This may be the case for a failed diesel engine. To prevent cyclic
initiation and reset of the main trip timer, and consequent failure to trip, an
adjustable reset time delay is provided (Power1 DO Timer/Power2 DO Timer). This
delay would need to be set longer than the period for which the reverse power could
fall below the power setting (P<1 Setting/Sen P<1 Setting). This setting needs to be
taken into account when setting the main trip time delay. It should also be noted that
a delay on reset in excess of half the period of any system power swings could result
in operation of the reverse power protection during swings.
Reverse Power Protection may also be used to interlock the opening of the generator
set circuit breaker for non-urgent tripping, as discussed in 2.12.1. Reverse Power
interlocking is preferred over Low Forward Power interlocking by some utilities.
2.7.4.1 Reverse power setting guideline
Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as a Reverse Power stage
by selecting the Power1 Function/Sen Power1 Func or Power2 Function/Sen
Power2 Func cell to Reverse.
The power threshold setting of the Reverse Power protection, P>1 Setting/Sen P>1
Setting or P>2 Setting/Sen P>2 Setting, should be less than 50% of the
motoring power, typical values for the level of reverse power for generators are given
in Table 1.
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 26/116
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
The reverse power protection function should be time-delayed to prevent false trips or
alarms being given during power system disturbances or following synchronisation.
A time delay setting, Power1 Time Delay/Sen Power1 Delay or Power2 Time
Delay/Sen Power2 Delay of 5s should be applied typically.
normally be set to zero. When settings of greater than zero are used for the reset
time delay, the pick up time delay setting may need to be increased to ensure that
false tripping does not result in the event of a stable power swinging event.
2.8
Overcurrent relays are the most commonly used protective devices in any industrial or
distribution power system. They provide main protection to both feeders and busbars
when unit protection is not used. They are also commonly applied to provide backup protection when unit systems, such as pilot wire schemes, are used.
By a combination of time delays and relay pick-up settings, overcurrent relays may be
applied to either feeders or power transformers to provide discriminative phase fault
protection (and also earth fault protection if system earth fault levels are sufficiently
high). In such applications, the various overcurrent relays on the system are
co-ordinated with one another such that the relay nearest to the fault operates first.
This is referred to as cascade operation because if the relay nearest to the fault does
not operate, the next upstream relay will trip in a slightly longer time.
The overcurrent protection included in the P341 relay provides four stage nondirectional/directional three phase overcurrent protection with independent time
delay characteristics. All overcurrent and directional settings apply to all three phases
but are independent for each of the four stages.
The first two stages of overcurrent protection have time delayed characteristics which
are selectable between inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), or definite time (DT).
The third and fourth stages have definite time characteristics only.
Various methods are available to achieve correct relay co-ordination on a system; by
means of time alone, current alone or a combination of both time and current.
Grading by means of current is only possible where there is an appreciable difference
in fault level between the two relay locations. Grading by time is used by some
utilities but can often lead to excessive fault clearance times at or near source
substations where the fault level is highest. For these reasons the most commonly
applied characteristic in co-ordinating overcurrent relays is the IDMT type.
Each stage can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL (DDB
354, DDB 355, DDB 356, DDB 357). This allows the overcurrent protection to be
integrated into busbar protection schemes, as shown in section 2.18, or can be used
to improve grading with downstream devices. DDB signals are also available to
indicate the start and trip of each phase of each stage of protection, (Starts: DDB
597-612, Trips: DDB 477-492). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to
be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the
relay.
The following table shows the relay menu for the overcurrent protection, including the
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 27/116
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Max.
Step Size
GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT
I>1 Function
IEC S Inverse
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse,

IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M
Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US
Inverse, US ST Inverse
I>1 Direction
Non-Directional
Non-Directional, Directional Fwd,

Directional Rev
I>1 Current Set
1 x In A
0.08 x In A
4.0 x In A
0.01 x In A
I>1 Time Delay
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
I>1 TMS
0.025
1.2
0.025
I>1 Time Dial
0.5
15
0.1
I>1 Reset Char
DT
I>1 tRESET
0s
DT or Inverse
0s
100 s
0.01 s
I>2 Cells as for

I>1 above
I>3 Status
I>3 Direction
Disabled
Disabled, Enabled
Non-Directional

Directional Rev
I>3 Current set
20 x In A
0.08 x In A
32 x In A
0.01 x In A
I>3 Time Delay
0s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
45
95
+95
I>4 Cells as for

I>3 above
I> Char Angle
I> Function Link
{See Note}
Note:
00001111
Bit 0 I>1 VTS Block, Bit 1 I>2 VTS Block,

Bit 2 I>3 VTS Block, Bit 3 I>4 VTS Block,
Bit 4, 5, 6 & 7 Not Used
VTS Block When relevant bit set to 1, operation of Voltage Transformer

Supervision (VTS) will block stage if directionalised. When set to 0, stage will
revert to non-directional.
The inverse time delayed characteristics listed above, comply with the
following formula:
The IEC/UK IDMT curves conform to the following formula:
K
+L
t=Tx
a
(I/Is) - 1
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 28/116
MiCOM P341
The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula:
K
TD
t= x
(I/Is) a - 1
7
where t
+ L
= operation time
= constant
= measured current
IS = current threshold setting

a
= constant
= ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC/UK curves)
= Time multiplier setting for IEC/UK curves
TD = Time dial setting for IEEE/US curves

IDMT characteristics
IDMT Curve
Description
Standard
K
Constant
a
Constant
L
Constant
Standard inverse
IEC
0.14
0.02
Very inverse
IEC
13.5
Extremely inverse
IEC
80
Long time inverse
UK
120
Moderately inverse
IEEE
0.0515
0.02
0.114
Very inverse
IEEE
19.61
0.491
Extremely inverse
IEEE
28.2
0.1217
Inverse
US-C08
5.95
0.18
Short time inverse
US-C02
0.02394
0.02
0.01694
Note that the IEEE and US curves are set differently to the IEC/UK curves, with regard
to the time setting. A time multiplier setting (TMS) is used to adjust the operating time
of the IEC curves, whereas a time dial setting is employed for the IEEE/US curves.
Both the TMS and Time Dial settings act as multipliers on the basic characteristics but
the scaling of the time dial is approximately 10 times that of the TMS, as shown in the
previous menu. The menu is arranged such that if an IEC/UK curve is selected, the
I> Time Dial cell is not visible and vice versa for the TMS setting.
Note, that the IEC/UK inverse characteristics can be used with a definite time reset
characteristic, however, the IEEE/US curves may have an inverse or definite time reset
characteristic.
The overcurrent protection function operates from the phase currents measured by
the IA, IB and IC measurement inputs on the relay.
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
2.8.1
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 29/116
Transformer magnetising inrush

When applying overcurrent protection to the HV side of a power transformer, it is
usual to apply a high set instantaneous overcurrent element, in addition to the time
delayed low-set, to reduce fault clearance times for HV fault conditions. Typically,
this will be set to approximately 1.3 times the LV fault level, such that it will only
operate for HV faults. A 30% safety margin is sufficient due to the low transient
overreach of the third and fourth overcurrent stages. Transient overreach defines the
response of a relay to DC components of fault current and is quoted as a percentage.
A relay with a low transient overreach will be largely insensitive to a DC offset and
may therefore be set more closely to the steady state AC waveform.
The second requirement for this element is that it should remain inoperative during
transformer energisation, when a large primary current flows for a transient period.
In most applications, the requirement to set the relay above the LV fault level will
automatically result in settings that will be above the level of magnetising inrush
current.
Due to the nature of operation of the third and fourth overcurrent stages in the P341
relays, it is possible to apply settings corresponding to 35% of the peak inrush
current, whilst maintaining stability for the condition.
This is important where low-set instantaneous stages are used to initiate autoreclose
equipment. In such applications, the instantaneous stage should not operate for
inrush conditions, which may arise from small teed-off transformer loads for
example. However, the setting must also be sensitive enough to provide fast
operation under fault conditions.
Where an instantaneous element is required to accompany the time delayed
protection, as described above, the third or fourth overcurrent stage of the P341 relay
should be used, as they have wider setting ranges.
2.8.2
Application of timer hold facility

The first two stages of overcurrent protection in the P341 relays are provided with a
timer hold facility, which may either be set to zero or to a definite time value. (Note
that if an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be set to
either definite or inverse time in cell I>1 Reset Char; otherwise this setting cell is not
visible in the menu). Setting of the timer to zero means that the overcurrent timer for
that stage will reset instantaneously once the current falls below 95% of the current
setting. Setting of the hold timer to a value other than zero delays the resetting of the
protection element timers for this period. This may be useful in certain applications,
for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which
have inherent reset time delays.
Another situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance
times is where intermittent faults may be experienced. An example of this may occur
in a plastic insulated cable. In this application it is possible that the fault energy melts
and reseals the cable insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats
to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing
intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent.
When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is instantaneous the relay will be
repeatedly reset and not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using
the Timer Hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby
reducing fault clearance time.
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 30/116
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
The timer hold facility can be found for the first and second overcurrent stages as
settings I>1 tRESET and I>2 tRESET, respectively. Note that this cell is not visible if
an inverse time reset characteristic has been selected, as the reset time is then
determined by the programmed time dial setting.
2.8.3
Setting guidelines
When applying the overcurrent protection provided in the P341 relays, standard
principles should be applied in calculating the necessary current and time settings for
co-ordination. The setting example detailed below shows a typical setting calculation
and describes how the settings are actually applied to the relay.
Assume the following parameters for a relay feeding an LV switchboard:
CT Ratio = 500/1
Full Load Current of circuit = 450A
Slowest downstream protection = 100A Fuse
The current setting employed on the P341 relay must account for both the maximum
load current and the reset ratio of the relay itself:
I> must be greater than: 450/0.95 = 474A

The P341 relay allows the current settings to be applied to the relay in either primary
or secondary quantities.
Programming the Setting Values cell of the
CONFIGURATION column to either Primary or Secondary does this. When this
cell is set to primary, all phase overcurrent setting values are scaled by the
programmed CT ratio. This is found in column 0A of the relay menu, entitled VT &
CT RATIOS, where cells Phase CT Primary and Phase CT Secy can be
programmed with the primary and secondary CT ratings, respectively.
In this example, assuming primary currents are to be used, the ratio should be
programmed as 500/1.
The required setting is therefore 0.95A in terms of secondary current or 475A in
terms of primary.
A suitable time delayed characteristic will now need to be chosen.
When
co-ordinating with downstream fuses, the applied relay characteristic should be
closely matched to the fuse characteristic. Therefore, assuming IDMT co-ordination is
to be used, an Extremely Inverse (EI) characteristic would normally be chosen. As
previously described, this is found under I>1 Function and should therefore be
programmed as IEC E Inverse.
Finally, a suitable time multiplier setting (TMS) must be calculated and entered in cell
I>1 TMS.
For more detailed information regarding overcurrent relay co-ordination, reference
should be made to ALSTOMS Network Protection & Automation Guide Chapter 9.
2.9
Directional overcurrent protection

If fault current can flow in both directions through a relay location, it is necessary to
add directionality to the overcurrent relays in order to obtain correct co-ordination.
Typical systems that require such protection are parallel feeders (both plain and
transformer) and ring main systems, each of which are relatively common in
distribution networks.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 31/116
In order to give directionality to an overcurrent relay, it is necessary to provide it with

a suitable reference, or polarising, signal. The reference generally used is the system
voltage, as its angle remains relatively constant under fault conditions. The phase
fault elements of the P341 relay are internally polarised by the quadrature phasephase voltages, as shown in the table below:
Phase of Protection
Operate Current
Polarising Voltage
A Phase
IA
VBC
B Phase
IB
VCA
C Phase
IC
VAB
It is therefore important to ensure the correct phasing of all current and voltage inputs
to the relay, in line with the supplied application diagram.
Under system fault conditions, the fault current vector will lag its nominal phase
voltage by an angle dependent upon the system X/R ratio. It is therefore a
requirement that the relay operates with maximum sensitivity for currents lying in this
region. This is achieved by means of the relay characteristic angle (RCA) setting; this
defines the angle by which the current applied to the relay must be displaced from
the voltage applied to the relay to obtain maximum relay sensitivity. This is set in cell
I>Char Angle in the Overcurrent menu.
Figure 3 shows a typical distribution system utilising parallel power transformers. In
such an application, a fault at F could result in the operation of both R3 and R4
relays and the subsequent loss of supply to the 11kV busbar. Hence, with this system
configuration, it is necessary to apply directional relays at these locations set to look
into their respective transformers. These relays should co-ordinate with the nondirectional relays, R1 and R2; hence ensuring discriminative relay operation during
such fault conditions.
In such an application, relays R3 and R4 may commonly require non-directional
overcurrent protection elements to provide protection to the 11kV busbar, in addition
to providing a back-up function to the overcurrent relays on the outgoing feeders
(R5).
When applying the P341 relays in the above application, stage 1 of the overcurrent
protection of relays R3 and R4 would be set non-directional and time graded with R5,
using an appropriate time delay characteristic. Stage 2 could then be set directional,
looking back into the transformer, also having a characteristic which provided correct
co-ordination with R1 and R2. IDMT or DT characteristics are selectable for both
stages 1 and 2 and directionality of each of the overcurrent stages is set in cell I>
Direction
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 32/116
MiCOM P341
33kV
R2
OC/EF
R1
OC/EF
SBEF
F
R3
DOC/DEF
OC/EF
R4
DOC/DEF
OC/EF
11kV
R5
OC/EF
Loads
Figure 3:
P0110ENa
Typical distribution system using parallel transformers
Note that the principles previously outlined for the parallel transformer application
are equally applicable for plain feeders which are operating in parallel.
2.9.1
Synchronous polarisation
For a fault condition that occurs close to the relaying point, the faulty phase voltage
will reduce to a value close to zero volts. For single or double phase faults, there will
always be at least one healthy phase voltage present for polarisation of the phase
overcurrent elements. For example, a close up A to B fault condition will result in the
collapse of the A and B phase voltages. However, the A and B phase elements are
polarised from VBC and VCA respectively. As such a polarising signal will be
present, allowing correct relay operation.
For a close up three phase fault, all three voltages will collapse to zero and no
healthy phase voltages will be present. For this reason, the P341 relays include a
synchronous polarisation feature that stores the pre-fault voltage information and
continues to apply it to the DOC elements for a time period of 3.2 seconds. This
ensures that either instantaneous or time delayed DOC elements will be allowed to
operate, even with a three phase voltage collapse.
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
2.9.2
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 33/116
Setting guidelines
The applied current settings for directional overcurrent relays are dependent upon the
application in question. In a parallel feeder arrangement, load current is always
flowing in the non-operate direction. Hence, the relay current setting may be less
than the full load rating of the circuit; typically 50% of In.
Note that the minimum setting that may be applied has to take into account the
thermal rating of the relay. Some electro-mechanical directional overcurrent relays
have continuous withstand ratings of only twice the applied current setting and hence
50% of rating was the minimum setting that could be applied. With the P341, the
continuous current rating is 4 x rated current and so it is possible to apply much more
sensitive settings, if required. However, there are minimum safe current setting
constraints to be observed when applying directional overcurrent protection at the
receiving-ends of parallel feeders. The minimum safe settings to ensure that there is
no possibility of an unwanted trip during clearance of a source fault are as follows for
linear system load:
Parallel plain feeders:
Set>50% Prefault load current
Parallel transformer feeders:
Set>87% Prefault load current
When the above setting constraints are infringed, independent-time protection is
more likely to issue an unwanted trip during clearance of a source fault than
dependent-time protection.
Where the above setting constraints are unavoidably infringed, secure phase fault
protection can be provided with relays which have 2-out-of-3 directional protection
tripping logic.
A common minimum current setting recommendation (50% relay rated current) would
be virtually safe for plain parallel feeder protection as long as the circuit load current
does not exceed 100% relay rated current. It would also be safe for parallel
transformer feeders, if the system design criterion for two feeders is such that the load
on each feeder will never exceed 50% rated current with both feeders in service. For
more than two feeders in parallel the 50% relay rated current setting may not be
absolutely safe.
In a ring main application, it is possible for load current to flow in either direction
through the relaying point. Hence, the current setting must be above the maximum
load current, as in a standard non-directional application.
The required characteristic angle settings for directional relays will differ depending
on the exact application in which they are used. Recommended characteristic angle
settings are as follows:
Plain feeders, or applications with an earthing point (zero sequence source)

behind the relay location, should utilise a +30 RCA setting.
Transformer feeders, or applications with a zero sequence source in front of the

relay location, should utilise a +45 RCA setting.
On the P341 relay, it is possible to set characteristic angles anywhere in the range
95 to +95. Whilst it is possible to set the RCA to exactly match the system fault
angle, it is recommended that the above guidelines are adhered to, as these settings
have been shown to provide satisfactory performance and stability under a wide
range of system conditions.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 34/116
2.10
MiCOM P341
Earth fault protection

The P341 relay has a total of four input current transformers; one for each of the
phase current inputs and one for supplying the sensitive earth fault protection
element. Residual, or earth fault, current can be derived from the sum of the phase
current inputs. With this flexible input arrangement, various combinations of
standard, sensitive (SEF) and restricted earth fault (REF) protection may be configured
within the relay.
It should be noted that in order to achieve the sensitive setting range that is available
in the P341 relay for SEF protection, the input CT is designed specifically to operate at
low current magnitudes. This common input is used to drive either the SEF or REF
protection which are enabled / disabled accordingly within the relay menu.
2.10.1 Standard earth fault protection element

The four stage Standard Earth Fault protection operates from earth fault current
which is derived internally from the summation of the three phase currents.
The first and second stages have selectable IDMT or DT characteristics, whilst the
third and fourth stages are DT only. Each stage is selectable to be either nondirectional, directional forward or directional reverse. The Timer Hold facility,
previously described for the overcurrent elements, is available on each of the first two
stages.
relay.
The following table shows the relay menu for the Earth Fault protection, including the
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Max.
Step Size
GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT 1

IN>1 Function
IEC S Inverse
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse,

IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse,
IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse,
IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse
IN>1 Direction
NonDirectional
Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev
IN>1 Current
0.2 x In A
0.08 x In A
4.0 x In A
0.01 x In A
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
IN1>1 TMS
0.025
1.2
0.025
IN1>1 Time Dial
0.5
15
0.1
IN>1 Reset Char
DT
IN>1 tRESET
0s
IN>1 Time Delay
IN>2 Cells as for

IN>1 above
DT or Inverse
0s
100 s
0.01 s
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 35/116
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Max.
Step Size
GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT 1

IN>3 Status
IN>3 Direction
Disabled
Disabled, Enabled
NonDirectional
Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev
IN>3 Current set
20 x In A
0.08 x In A
32 x In A
0.01 x In A
IN>3 Time Delay
0s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
IN>4 Cells as for

IN>3 above
IN> Function Link
See Note}
00001111
Bit 0 I>1 VTS Block, Bit 1 I>2 VTS Block, Bit 2 I>3
VTS Block, Bit 3 I>4 VTS Block,
Bit 4, 5 6&7 Not Used
IN> DIRECTIONAL
IN> Char Angle
IN1> Pol
Sub Heading
60
Zero
Sequence
95
+95
Zero Sequence, Neg Sequence
IN1>VNpol Set
5V
(Vn=100/120V)
20V
(Vn=380/480V)
0.5V
(Vn=100/120V)
2V
(Vn=380/480V)
22V
(Vn=100/120V)
88V
(Vn=380/480V)
0.5V
(Vn=100/120V)
2V
(Vn=380/480V)
IN1>V2pol Set
5V
(Vn=100/120V)
20V
(Vn=380/480V)
0.5V
(Vn=100/120V)
2V
(Vn=380/480V)
22V
(Vn=100/120V)
88V
(Vn=380/480V)
0.5V
(Vn=100/120V)
2V
(Vn=380/480V)
IN1>I2pol Set
0.08 x In A
0.08 x In A
1 x In A
0.015 x In A
Note:
VTS Block - When relevant bit set to 1, operation of VTS will block stage if
directionalised. When set to 0, stage will revert to non-directional.
For the range of available inverse time delayed characteristics, refer to those
of the phase overcurrent elements, section 2.9.
The multiple stages may be enabled in the relay at the same time, this
provides some application advantages.
For example, the parallel
transformer application shown in Figure 1 requires directional earth fault
protection at locations R3 and R4, to provide discriminative protection.
However, in order to provide back-up protection for the busbar and other
downstream earth fault devices, non-directional earth fault protection can
also be applied.
Where a neutral earthing resistor (NER) is used to limit the earth fault level, it
is possible that an earth fault condition could cause a flashover of the NER
and hence a dramatic increase in the earth fault current. For this reason, it
may be appropriate to apply two stage EF protection. The first stage should
have current and time characteristics which co-ordinate with downstream
earth fault protection. A second stage may then be set with a higher current
setting greater than the NER limited fault current but with zero time delay;
hence providing fast clearance of an earth fault which gives rise to an NER
flashover.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 36/116
MiCOM P341
2.10.2 Sensitive earth fault protection element (SEF)

If a system is earthed through high impedance, or is subject to high ground fault
resistance, the earth fault level will be severely limited. Consequently, the applied
earth fault protection requires both an appropriate characteristic and a sensitive
setting range in order to be effective. A separate 4 stage Sensitive Earth Fault
element is provided within the P341 relay for this purpose, this has a dedicated CT
input.
relay.
The following table shows the relay menu for the Sensitive Earth Fault protection,
including the available setting ranges and factory defaults.
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Max.
Step Size
GROUP 1 SEF/REF PROTN

SEF
SEF, SEF cos (PHI), SEF sin (PHI), Wattmetric, Hi Z

REF
ISEF>1 Function
DT
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E

Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V
Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse,
US ST Inverse
ISEF>1 Direction
Non-Directional

Directional Rev
Sens E/F Options
ISEF>1 Current
0.05 x In A
0.005 x In A
0.1 x In A
0.00025 x In A
1s
0s
200 s
0.01 s
ISEF>1 TMS
0.025
1.2
0.025
ISEF>1 Time Dial
0.5
15
0.1
ISEF>1 Time Delay
ISEF>1 Reset Char
DT
ISEF>1 tRESET
1s
DT or Inverse
0s
100 s
0.01 s
ISEF>2 Cells as for

ISEF>1 above
ISEF>3 Status
ISEF>3 Direction
ISEF>3 Current
ISEF>3 Time Delay
Disabled
Disabled, Enabled
NonDirectional

Directional Rev
0.2 x In A
0.002 x In A
0.8 x In A
0.002 x In A
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
ISEF>4 Cells as for

ISEF>3 above
ISEF> Func Link
{See Note}
00001111
Bit 0 ISEF>1 VTS Block, Bit 1 ISEF>2 VTS Block,

Bit 2 ISEF>3 VTS Block, Bit 3 ISEF>4 VTS Block,
Bit 4, 5, 6 & 7 Not Used
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 37/116
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Max.
Step Size

ISEF DIRECTIONAL
Sub Heading
ISEF> Char Angle
90
ISEF> VNpol Input
Measured
ISEF> VNpol Set
5V
(Vn=100/120V)
20V
(Vn=380/480V)
WATTMETRIC SEF
PN> Setting
Note:
95
+95
Measured, Derived
0.5V
(Vn=100/120V)
2V
(Vn=380/480V)
80V
(Vn=100/120V)
320V
(Vn=380/480V)
0.5V
(Vn=100/120V)
2V
(Vn=380/480V)
Sub Heading
9 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
36 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
0 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
20 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
80 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
0.05 x In W
(Vn=100/120V)
0.2 x In W
(Vn=380/480V)
VTS Block - When relevant bit set to 1, operation of VTS will block stage if
directionalised. When set to 0, stage will revert to non-directional.
For the range of available inverse time delayed characteristics, refer to those
of the phase overcurrent elements, section 2.9.
Notes: As can be seen from the menu, the Sens E/F Options cell has a number of
setting options. To enable standard, four stage SEF protection, the SEF
option should be selected, which is the default setting. However, if
wattmetric or restricted earth fault protection is required, then one of the
remaining options should be selected. These are described in more detail in
section 2.11.6. The WATTMETRIC and RESTRICTED E/F cells will only
appear in the menu if the functions have been selected in the Options cell.
As shown in the previous menu, each SEF stage is selectable to be either
non-directional, directional forward or directional reverse in the ISEF>
Direction cell. The Timer Hold facility, previously described for the
overcurrent elements in section 2.9, is available on each of the first two
stages and is set in the same manner.
Settings related to directionalising the SEF protection are described in detail
in the following section.
SEF would normally be fed from a core balance current transformer (CBCT)
mounted around the three phases of the feeder cable. However, care must
be taken in the positioning of the CT with respect to the earthing of the cable
sheath. See Figure 4 below:
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 38/116
MiCOM P341
Cable gland
Cable box
Cable gland/sheath
earth connection
SEF
Incorrect
SEF
No operation
Correct
Operation
SEF
P0112ENa
Figure 4:
Positioning of core balance current transformers
As can be seen from the diagram, if the cable sheath is terminated at the cable gland
and earthed directly at that point, a cable fault (from phase to sheath) will not result
in any unbalance current in the core balance CT. Prior to earthing, the connection
must be brought back through the CBCT and earthed on the feeder side. This
ensures correct relay operation during earth fault conditions.
2.11
Directional earth fault protection (DEF)

Each of the four stages of standard earth fault protection and SEF protection may be
set to be directional if required. Consequently, as with the application of directional
overcurrent protection, a voltage supply is required by the relay to provide the
necessary polarisation.
With the standard earth fault protection element in the P341 relay, two options are
available for polarisation; Residual Voltage or Negative Sequence.
2.11.1 Residual voltage polarisation

With earth fault protection, the polarising signal requires to be representative of the
earth fault condition. As residual voltage is generated during earth fault conditions,
this quantity is commonly used to polarise DEF elements. The P341 relay can
internally derive this voltage from the 3 phase voltage input, or can measure the
voltage via the neutral displacement or residual overvoltage input. The method of
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 39/116
measuring the polarising signal is set in the IN> Vnpol Input cell. Where the
residual voltage is derived from the 3 phase voltages a 5-limb or three single phase
VTs must be used. These types of VT design allow the passage of residual flux and
consequently permit the relay to derive the required residual voltage. In addition, the
primary star point of the VT must be earthed. A three limb VT has no path for
residual flux and is therefore unsuitable to supply the relay.
It is possible that small levels of residual voltage will be present under normal system
conditions due to system imbalances, VT inaccuracies, relay tolerances etc. Hence,
the P341 relay includes a user settable threshold, IN>VNpol Set, which must be
exceeded in order for the DEF function to be operational. The residual voltage
measurement provided in the MEASUREMENTS 1 column of the menu may assist in
determining the required threshold setting during the commissioning stage, as this
will indicate the level of standing residual voltage present.
Note that residual voltage is nominally 180 out of phase with residual current.
Consequently, the DEF relays are polarised from the Vres quantity. This 180
phase shift is automatically introduced within the P341 relay.
2.11.2 Negative sequence polarisation
In certain applications, the use of residual voltage polarisation of DEF may either be
not possible to achieve, or problematic. An example of the former case would be
where a suitable type of VT was unavailable, for example if only a three limb VT was
fitted. An example of the latter case would be an HV/EHV parallel line application
where problems with zero sequence mutual coupling may exist.
In either of these situations, the problem may be solved by the use of negative phase
sequence (nps) quantities for polarisation. This method determines the fault direction
by comparison of nps voltage with nps current. The operate quantity, however, is still
residual current. This is available for selection on the derived earth fault element but
not on the SEF protection. It requires a voltage and current threshold to be set in cells
IN> V2pol Set & IN> I2pol Set, respectively.
Negative sequence polarising is not recommended for impedance earthed systems
regardless of the type of VT feeding the relay. This is due to the reduced earth fault
current limiting the voltage drop across the negative phase sequence source
impedance (V2pol) to negligible levels. If this voltage is less than 0.5 volts the relay
will cease to provide DEF protection.
2.11.3 General setting guidelines for DEF
When setting the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the directional overcurrent
element, a positive angle setting was specified. This was due to the fact that the
quadrature polarising voltage lagged the nominal phase current by 90 i.e. the
position of the current under fault conditions was leading the polarising voltage and
hence a positive RCA was required. With DEF, the residual current under fault
conditions lies at an angle lagging the polarising voltage. Hence, negative RCA
settings are required for DEF applications. This is set in cell I>Char Angle in the
relevant earth fault menu.
The following angle settings are recommended for a residual voltage polarised relay:
Resistance earthed systems
Distribution systems (solidly earthed)
45
Transmission Systems (solidly earthed) 60
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 40/116
MiCOM P341
For negative sequence polarisation, the RCA settings must be based on the angle of
the nps source impedance, much the same as for residual polarising. Typical settings
would be:
Distribution systems
45
Transmission Systems 60
2.11.4 Application to insulated systems
The advantage gained by running a power system which is insulated from earth is the
fact that during a single phase to earth fault condition, no earth fault current is
allowed to flow. Consequently, it is possible to maintain power flow on the system
even when an earth fault condition is present. However, this advantage is offset by
the fact that the resultant steady state and transient overvoltages on the sound phases
can be very high. It is generally the case, therefore, that insulated systems will only
be used in low/medium voltage networks where it does not prove too costly to
provide the necessary insulation against such overvoltages. Higher system voltages
would normally be solidly earthed or earthed via a low impedance.
Operational advantages may be gained by the use of insulated systems. However, it
is still vital that detection of the fault is achieved. This is not possible by means of
standard current operated earth fault protection. One possibility for fault detection is
by means of a residual overvoltage device. This functionality is included within the
P341 relays and is detailed in section 2.12. However, fully discriminative earth fault
protection on this type of system can only be achieved by the application of a
sensitive earth fault element. This type of relay is set to detect the resultant imbalance
in the system charging currents that occurs under earth fault conditions. It is therefore
essential that a core balance CT is used for this application. This eliminates the
possibility of spill current that may arise from slight mismatches between residually
connected line CTs. It also enables a much lower CT ratio to be applied, thereby
allowing the required protection sensitivity to be more easily achieved.
Consider Figure 5:
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 41/116
Ia1
Ib1
IR1
- jXc1
IH1
Ia2
Ib2
IR2
- jXc2
IH2
Ia3
Ib3
IH1 + IH2 + IH3
IR3
- jXc3
IR3 = IH1 + IH2 + IH3 - IH3
IH3
IH1 + IH2
IR3 = IH1 + IH2

P2035ENa
Figure 5:
Current distribution in an insulated system with C phase fault
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 42/116
MiCOM P341
From Figure 5, it can be seen that the relays on the healthy feeders see the
unbalance in the charging currents for their own feeder. The relay on the faulted
feeder, however, sees the charging current from the rest of the system (IH1 and IH2
in this case), with its own feeders charging current (IH3) becoming cancelled out.
This is further illustrated by the phasor diagrams shown in Figure 6.
Vaf
Restrain
IR1
Vapf
Ib1
Operate
Ia1
Vbf
Vcpf
Vbpf
Vres
(=3Vo)
An RCA setting of +90
shifts the MTA to here
IR3 = (IH1+ IH2)

P2036ENa
Figure 6:
Phasor diagrams for insulated system with C phase fault
Referring to the phasor diagram, it can be seen that the C phase to earth fault causes
the voltages on the healthy phases to rise by a factor of 3. The A phase charging
current (Ia1), is then shown to be leading the resultant A phase voltage by 90.
Likewise, the B phase charging current leads the resultant Vb by 90.
The unbalance current detected by a core balance current transformer on the healthy
feeders can be seen to be the vector addition of Ia1 and Ib1, giving a residual
current which lies at exactly 90 lagging the polarising voltage (3Vo). As the healthy
phase voltages have risen by a factor of 3, the charging currents on these phases
will also be 3 times larger than their steady state values. Therefore, the magnitude
of residual current, IR1, is equal to 3 x the steady state per phase charging current.
The phasor diagrams indicate that the residual currents on the healthy and faulted
feeders, IR1 and IR3 respectively, are in anti-phase. A directional element could
therefore be used to provide discriminative earth fault protection.
If the polarising voltage of this element, equal to 3Vo, is shifted through +90, the
residual current seen by the relay on the faulted feeder will lie within the operate
region of the directional characteristic and the current on the healthy feeders will fall
within the restrain region.
As previously stated, the required characteristic angle setting for the SEF element
when applied to insulated systems, is +90. It should be noted though, that this
recommended setting corresponds to the relay being connected such that its
direction of current flow for operation is from the source busbar towards the feeder,
as would be the convention for a relay on an earthed system. However, if the
forward direction for operation was set as being from the feeder into the busbar,
(which some utilities may standardise on), then a 90( RCA would be required. The
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 43/116
correct relay connections to give a defined direction for operation are shown on the
relay connection diagram.
Note that discrimination can be provided without the need for directional control.
This can only be achieved if it is possible to set the relay in excess of the charging
current of the protected feeder and below the charging current for the rest of the
system.
2.11.5 Setting guidelines insulated systems
As has been previously shown, the residual current detected by the relay on the
faulted feeder is equal to the sum of the charging currents flowing from the rest of the
system. Further, the addition of the two healthy phase charging currents on each
feeder gives a total charging current which has a magnitude of three times the per
phase value. Therefore, the total unbalance current detected by the relay is equal to
three times the per phase charging current of the rest of the system. A typical relay
setting may therefore be in the order of 30% of this value, i.e. equal to the per phase
charging current of the remaining system. Practically though, the required setting
may well be determined on site, where suitable settings can be adopted based upon
practically obtained results. The use of the P140 relays comprehensive measurement
and fault recording facilities may prove useful in this respect.
2.11.6 Application to petersen coil earthed systems
Power systems are usually earthed in order to limit transient overvoltages during
arcing faults and also to assist with detection and clearance of earth faults.
Impedance earthing has the advantage of limiting damage incurred by plant during
earth fault conditions and also limits the risk of explosive failure of switchgear, which
is a danger to personnel. In addition, it limits touch and step potentials at a
substation or in the vicinity of an earth fault.
If a high impedance device is used for earthing the system, or the system is
unearthed, the earth fault current will be reduced but the steady state and transient
overvoltages on the sound phases can be very high. Consequently, it is generally the
case that high impedance earthing will only be used in low/medium voltage networks
in which it does not prove too costly to provide the necessary insulation against such
overvoltages. Higher system voltages would normally be solidly earthed or earthed
via a low impedance.
A special case of high impedance earthing via a reactor occurs when the inductive
earthing reactance is made equal to the total system capacitive reactance to earth at
system frequency. This practice is widely referred to as Petersen (or resonant) Coil
Earthing. With a correctly tuned system, the steady state earthfault current will be
zero, so that arcing earth faults become self extinguishing. Such a system can, if
designed to do so, be run with one phase earthed for a long period until the cause of
the fault is identified and rectified. With the effectiveness of this method being
dependent upon the correct tuning of the coil reactance to the system capacitive
reactance, an expansion of the system at any time would clearly necessitate an
adjustment of the coil reactance. Such adjustment is sometimes automated.
Petersen Coil earthed systems are commonly found in areas where the power system
consists mainly of rural overhead lines and can be particularly beneficial in locations
which are subject to a high incidence of transient faults. Transient earth faults caused
by lightning strikes, for example, can be extinguished by the Petersen Coil without the
need for line outages.
Figure 7 shows a source of generation earthed through a Petersen Coil, with an earth
fault applied on the A Phase. Under this situation, it can be seen that the A phase
shunt capacitance becomes short circuited by the fault.
Consequently, the
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 44/116
MiCOM P341
calculations show that if the reactance of the earthing coil is set correctly, the resulting
steady state earth fault current will be zero.
-Ib
-Ic
If = -Ib - Ic + Van
Vba
-jXc
(-Ib) (-Ic)
jXL
= 0 if Van = Ib + Ic
jXL
(IL)
jXL
Vba
-jXc
-jXc
If
Vca
-jXc
-jXc
-jXc
-IC
A
IL
-IB
N
C
Current vectors for A phase fault

P2037ENa
Figure 7:
Current distribution in Peterson Coil earthed system
Prior to actually applying protective relays to provide earth fault protection on systems
which are earthed via a Petersen Coil, it is imperative to gain an understanding of the
current distributions that occur under fault conditions on such systems. With this
knowledge, it is then possible to decide on the type of relay that may be applied,
ensuring that it is both set and connected correctly.
Figure 8 shows a radial distribution system having a source which is earthed via a
Petersen Coil. Three outgoing feeders are present, the lower of which has a phase to
earth fault applied on the C phase.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 45/116
Ia1
Ib1
IR1
-jXc1
IH1
IL
Ia2
Ib2
IR2
jXL
-jXc2
IH2
Ia3
Ib3
Ic3=IF
IR3
IL = IF + IH1 + IH2 - IH3
IL
-jXc3
IF
IH3
IH1+IH2
P2038ENa
Figure 8:
Distribution of currents during a C phase to earth fault
Figures 9 (a, b and c) show vector diagrams for the previous system, assuming that it
is fully compensated (i.e. coil reactance fully tuned to system capacitance), in addition
to assuming a theoretical situation where no resistance is present either in the
earthing coil or in the feeder cables.
Referring to the vector diagram illustrated in Figure 9a, it can be seen that the C
phase to earth fault causes the voltages on the healthy phases to rise by a factor of
3. The A phase charging currents (Ia1, Ia2 and Ia3), are then shown to be leading
the resultant A phase voltage by 90 and likewise for the B phase charging currents
with respect to the resultant Vb.
The unbalance current detected by a core balance current transformer on the healthy
feeders can be seen to be a simple vector addition of Ia1 and Ib1, giving a residual
current which lies at exactly 90 lagging the residual voltage (Figure 9b). Clearly, as
the healthy phase voltages have risen by a factor of 3, the charging currents on
these phases will also be 3 times larger than their steady state values. Therefore,
the magnitude of residual current, IR1, is equal to 3 x the steady state per phase
charging current.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 46/116
MiCOM P341
IL
IH3
3Vo
IH2
IH1
a) Capacitive & inductive currents
Ib1
Ia1
N
C
IL
IR1 = IH1
IH1
Ib1
b) Unfaulted line
Ia1
Vres = -3Vo
-IH2
c) Faulted line
IR3
IR3 = IF + IH3
= IL IH1 IH2
Vres=-3Vo
P2039ENa
Figure 9:
Note:
Theoretical case no resistance present in XL or Xc
The actual residual voltage used as a reference signal for directional earth
fault relays is phase shifted by 180 and is therefore shown as 3Vo in the
vector diagrams. This phase shift is automatically introduced within the
P140 relays.
On the faulted feeder, the residual current is the addition of the charging
current on the healthy phases (IH3) plus the fault current (IF). The net
unbalance is therefore equal to IL-IH1-IH2, as shown in Figure 9c.
This situation may be more readily observed by considering the zero
sequence network for this fault condition. This is depicted in Figure 10.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 47/116
IR0F
IR0H
IR0H
IL
Vo
3XL
I0F
Faulted feeder
Healthy feeders
IH3 IH2 IH1

Xco
Key:
IR0F = Residual current on faulted feeder
IR0H = Residual current on healthy feeder
It can therefore be seen that:I0F = IL IH1 IH2 IH3

IR0F = IH3 + I0F
So:
IR0F = IL IH1 IH2
P2040ENa
Figure 10: Zero sequence network showing residual currents

In comparing the residual currents occurring on the healthy and on the faulted
feeders (Figures 9b & 9c), it can be seen that the currents would be similar in both
magnitude and phase; hence it would not be possible to apply a relay which could
provide discrimination.
However, as previously stated, the scenario of no resistance being present in the coil
or feeder cables is purely theoretical. Further consideration therefore needs to be
given to a practical application in which the resistive component is no longer ignored
consider Figure 11.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 48/116
MiCOM P341
Resistive component
in grounding coil
Resistive component in feeder
(IH1 + IH2 + IH3)

A
IL
3Vo

with resistive components
N
C
Restrain
Operate
IL
IR1 = IH1
b) Unfaulted line
Zero torque line

for 0 RCA
c) Faulted line
-IH1 -IH2
IR3 = IF + IH3
= IL IH1 IH2
IR3
Restrain
Vres = 3Vo
Zero torque line for 0 RCA
Resistive component
in grounding coil
Resistive component
in grounding coil
(IH1 + IH2 + IH3)

IL
Operate
(IH1 + IH2 + IH3)

IL
3Vo

Vres =- 3Vo
3Vo

N
Restrain
Restrain
Operate
Operate
IL
IR1 = IH1
b) Unfaulted line
Zero torque line

for 0 RCA
c) Faulted line
IL
IR1 = IH1
b) Unfaulted line
Zero torque line

for 0 RCA
c) Faulted line
-IH1 -IH2
IR3 = IF + IH3
= IL IH1 IH2
P2041ENa
-IH1 -IH2
IR3
IR3 = IF + IH3
= IL IH1 IH2
Restrain
Vres = 3Vo
IR3
Restrain
Vres = 3Vo
Vres =- 3Vo
Operate
P2041ENa
Vres =- 3Vo
Operate
P2041ENa
Figure 11: Practical case: resistance present in XL and Xc

Figure 11a again shows the relationship between the capacitive currents, coil current
and residual voltage. It can now be seen that due to the presence of resistance in the
feeders, the healthy phase charging currents are now leading their respective phase
voltages by less than 90. In a similar manner, the resistance present in the earthing
coil has the effect of shifting the current, IL, to an angle less than 90 lagging. The
result of these slight shifts in angles can be seen in Figures 11b and 11c.
The residual current now appears at an angle in excess of 90 from the polarising
voltage for the unfaulted feeder and less than 90 on the faulted feeder. Hence, a
directional relay having a characteristic angle setting of 0 (with respect to the
polarising signal of 3Vo) could be applied to provide discrimination. i.e. the healthy
feeder residual current would appear within the restrain section of the characteristic
but the residual current on the faulted feeder would lie within the operate region as
shown in diagrams 11b and 11c.
In practical systems, it may be found that a value of resistance is purposely inserted in
parallel with the earthing coil. This serves two purposes; one is to actually increase
the level of earth fault current to a more practically detectable level and the second is
to increase the angular difference between the residual signals; again to aid in the
application of discriminating protection.
2.12

It has been shown that the angular difference between the residual currents on the
healthy and faulted feeders allows the application of a directional relay whose zero
torque line passes between the two currents. Two possibilities exist for the type of
protection element that may consequently be applied for earth fault detection:
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 49/116
1.
A suitably sensitive directional earth fault relay having a relay characteristic

angle setting (RCA) of zero degrees, with the possibility of fine adjustment about
this threshold.
2.
A sensitive directional zero sequence wattmetric relay having similar

requirements to 1. above with respect to the required RCA settings.
3.
A sensitive directional earth fault relay having Icosf and Isinf characteristics.
All stages of the sensitive earth fault element of the P341 relay are settable down to
0.5% of rated current and would therefore fulfill the requirements of the first method
listed above and could therefore be applied successfully. However, many utilities
(particularly in central Europe) have standardised on the wattmetric method of earth
fault detection, which is described in the following section.
Zero sequence power measurement, as a derivative of Vo and Io, offers improved
relay security against false operation with any spurious core balance CT output for
non earth fault conditions. This is also the case for a sensitive directional earth fault
relay having an adjustable Vo polarising threshold.
Some utilities in Scandinavia prefer to use Icosf/Isinf for non compensated Peterson
Coil or insulated networks.
Wattmetric Characteristic
The previous analysis has shown that a small angular difference exists between the
spill current on the healthy and faulted feeders. It can be seen that this angular
difference gives rise to active components of current which are in antiphase to one
another. This is shown in Figure 12 below:
Vres = 3Vo
Active component
of residual current:
Faulted Feeder
IR3
Operate
IH1 IH2
IL
Active component
of residual current:
Healthy Feeder
IR1
Zero torque line

for 0 RCA
Restrain
P0113ENa
Figure 12: Resistive components of spill current

Consequently, the active components of zero sequence power will also lie in similar
planes and so a relay capable of detecting active power would be able to make a
discriminatory decision. i.e. if the wattmetric component of zero sequence power was
detected in the forward direction, then this would be indicative of a fault on that
feeder; if power was detected in the reverse direction, then the fault must be present
on an adjacent feeder or at the source.
For operation of the directional earth fault element within the P140 relays, all three of
the settable thresholds on the relay must be exceeded; namely the current "ISEF>",
the voltage "ISEF>VNpol Set" and the power "PN> Setting".
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 50/116
MiCOM P341
As can be seen from the following formula, the power setting within the relay menu is
called PN> and is therefore calculated using residual rather than zero sequence
quantities. Residual quantities are three times their respective zero sequence values
and so the complete formula for operation is as shown below:
Vres x Ires X Cos (f fc) = 9 x Vo x Io x Cos (f fc)
Where:
f
= Angle between the Polarising Voltage (-Vres) and the Residual Current
fc
= Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA) Setting (ISEF> Char Angle)
Vres = Residual Voltage
Ires = Residual Current

Vo
= Zero Sequence Voltage
Io
= Zero Sequence Current
The action of setting the PN> threshold to zero would effectively disable the
wattmetric function and the relay would operate as a basic, sensitive directional earth
fault element. However, if this is required, then the 'SEF' option can be selected from
the 'Sens E/F Options' cell in the menu.
A further point to note is that when a power threshold other than zero is selected, a
slight alteration is made to the angular boundaries of the directional characteristic.
Rather than being 90 from the RCA, they are made slightly narrower at 85.
Icosf /Isinf Characteristic
In some applications, the residual current on the healthy feeder can lie just inside the
operating boundary following a fault condition. The residual current for the faulted
feeder lies close to the operating boundary.
In this case, correct discrimination is achieved by means of an Icosf characteristic as
the faulted feeder will have a large active component of residual current, whilst the
healthy feeder will have a small value.
For insulated earth applications, it is common to use the Isinf characteristic.
2.13
Application considerations
Required relay current and voltage connections
Referring to the relevant application diagram for the P140 Relay, it should be applied
such that its direction for forward operation is looking down into the protected feeder
(away from the busbar), with a 0 RCA setting.
As illustrated in the relay application diagram, it is usual for the earth fault element to
be driven from a core balance current transformer (CBCT). This eliminates the
possibility of spill current that may arise from slight mismatches between residually
connected line CTs. It also enables a much lower CT ratio to be applied, thereby
allowing the required protection sensitivity to be more easily achieved.
2.13.1 Calculation of required relay settings

As has been previously shown, for a fully compensated system, the residual current
detected by the relay on the faulted feeder is equal to the coil current minus the sum
of the charging currents flowing from the rest of the system. Further, as stated in the
previous section, the addition of the two healthy phase charging currents on each
feeder gives a total charging current which has a magnitude of three times the steady
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 51/116
state per phase value. Therefore, for a fully compensated system, the total unbalance
current detected by the relay is equal to three times the per phase charging current of
the faulted circuit. A typical relay setting may therefore be in the order of 30% of this
value, i.e. equal to the per phase charging current of the faulted circuit. Practically
though, the required setting may well be determined on site, where system faults can
be applied and suitable settings can be adopted based upon practically obtained
results.
Also, it should be noted that in most situations, the system will not be fully
compensated and consequently a small level of steady state fault current will be
allowed to flow. The residual current seen by the relay on the faulted feeder may
thus be a larger value, which further emphasises the fact that relay settings should be
based upon practical current levels, wherever possible.
The above also holds true regarding the required Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA)
setting. As has been shown earlier, a nominal RCA setting of 0 is required.
However, fine tuning of this setting will require to be carried out on site in order to
obtain the optimum setting in accordance with the levels of coil and feeder
resistances present. The loading and performance of the CT will also have an effect
in this regard. The effect of CT magnetising current will be to create phase lead of
current. Whilst this would assist with operation of faulted feeder relays it would
reduce the stability margin of healthy feeder relays. A compromise can therefore be
reached through fine adjustment of the RCA. This is adjustable in 1 steps on the
P341 relay.
2.13.2 Application of settings to the relay
All of the relevant settings can be found under the SENSITIVE E/F column within the
relay menu. Within the Sens E/F Options cell, there are two possibilities for selecting
wattmetric earth fault protection; either on its own or in conjunction with low
impedance REF protection, which is described in section 2.10.
Note that the residual power setting, PN>, is scaled by the programmed CT and VT
ratios in the relay.
2.14

Earth faults occurring on a transformer winding or terminal may be of limited
magnitude, either due to the impedance present in the earth path or by the
percentage of transformer winding that is involved in the fault. In general,
particularly as the size of the transformer increases, it becomes unacceptable to rely
on time delayed protection to clear winding or terminal faults as this would lead to an
increased amount of damage to the transformer. A common requirement is
therefore to provide instantaneous phase and earth fault protection. Applying
differential protection across the transformer may fulfill these requirements.
However, an earth fault occurring on the LV winding, particularly if it is of a limited
level, may not be detected by the differential relay, as it is only measuring the
corresponding HV current. Therefore, instantaneous protection that is restricted to
operating for transformer earth faults only is applied. This is referred to as restricted,
or balanced, earth fault protection (REF or BEF). The BEF terminology is usually used
when the protection is applied to a delta winding.
When applying differential protection such as REF, some technique must be employed
to give the protection stability under external fault conditions, ensuring that relay
operation only occurs for faults on the transformer winding/connections. Two
methods are commonly used; bias or high impedance. The biasing technique
operates by measuring the level of through current flowing and altering the relay
sensitivity accordingly. The high impedance technique ensures that the relay circuit is
of sufficiently high impedance such that the differential voltage that may occur under
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 52/116
MiCOM P341
external fault conditions is less than that required to drive setting current through the
relay.
The REF protection in the P341 should be applied as a high impedance differential
element.
Note that the high impedance REF element of the relay shares the same CT input as
the SEF protection. Hence, only one of these elements may be selected.
A single DDB signal is available to indicate that the REF protection has tripped, DDB
446. The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor
Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay.
All of the REF settings can be found at the bottom of the SEF/REF Protn column and
are shown below, in addition to the SEF setting options:
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Max.
Step Size

Sens E/F Options
IREF> Is
SEF
0.2 x In A
SEF, Wattmetric, Hi Z REF

0.05 x In A
1 x In A
0.01 x In A
Note that CT requirements for REF protection are included in section 6.

2.14.1 High impedance restricted earth fault protection
The high impedance principle is best explained by considering a differential scheme
where one CT is saturated for an external fault, as shown in Figure 13.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 53/116
Healthy CT
Saturated CT
Protected
circuit
Zm
Zm
AG
R CT2
R CT1
IF
R L3
R L1
VS
R ST
R
R L2
R L4
Voltage across relay circuit

VS
= KIF (RCT + 2RL ) where K = 1
Stabilising resistor R ST limits spill current to I S (relay setting)

R ST = VS R R
IS
IF = Maximum secondary through fault current

Where RR = Relay burden
RCT = Current transformer secondary winding resistance
RL
= Resistance of a single lead from the relay to the current transformer

P0115ENb
Figure 13: High impedance principle

If the relay circuit is considered to be a very high impedance, the secondary current
produced by the healthy CT will flow through the saturated CT. If CT magnetising
impedance of the saturated CT is considered to be negligible, the maximum voltage
across the relay circuit will be equal to the secondary fault current multiplied by the
connected impedance, (RL3 + RL4 + RCT2).
The relay can be made stable for this maximum applied voltage by increasing the
overall impedance of the relay circuit, such that the resulting current through the relay
is less than its current setting. As the impedance of the relay input alone is relatively
low, a series connected external resistor is required. The value of this resistor, RST, is
calculated by the formula shown in Figure 13. An additional non linear, metrosil,
may be required to limit the peak secondary circuit voltage during internal fault
conditions.
To ensure that the protection will operate quickly during an internal fault, the CTs
used to operate the protection must have a kneepoint voltage of at least 4Vs.
The necessary relay connections for high impedance REF are shown in Figure 14:
As can be seen from Figure 14, the high impedance protection uses an external
differential connection between the line CTs and neutral CT. The SEF input is then
connected to the differential circuit with a stabilising resistor in series. This leaves the
EF1 input free to be connected for standby earth fault protection, if required, either
from a residual connection of the line CTs or from a separate neutral CT.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 54/116
MiCOM P341
A
B
C
RSTAB
SEF Input
P2044ENa
Figure 14: High impedance REF relay/CT connections

2.14.2 Setting guidelines for high impedance REF
From the Sens E/F Options cell, Hi Z REF must be selected to enable this
protection. The only setting cell then visible is IREF> Is1, which may be
programmed with the required differential current setting. This would typically be set
to give a primary operating current of either 30% of the minimum earth fault level for
a resistance earthed system or between 10 and 60% of rated current for a solidly
earthed system.
The primary operating current (Iop) will be a function of the current transformer ratio,
the relay operating current (IREF> Is1), the number of current transformers in
parallel with a relay element (n) and the magnetising current of each current
transformer (Ie) at the stability voltage (Vs). This relationship can be expressed in
three ways:
1.
To determine the maximum current transformer magnetising current to achieve

a specific primary operating current with a particular relay operating current.
Iop
Ie <
x
- IREF > Is1
n CT ratio
2.
To determine the maximum relay current setting to achieve a specific primary

operating current with a given current transformer magnetising current.
Iop
[IREF > Is] <

- nIe
CT
ratio
3.
To express the protection primary operating current for a particular relay

operating current and with a particular level of magnetising current.
Iop = (CT ratio) x (IREF> Is1 = nIe)
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 55/116
In order to achieve the required primary operating current with the current
transformers that are used, a current setting (IREF> Is) must be selected for the high
impedance element, as detailed in expression (2.) above. The setting of the
stabilising resistor (RST) must be calculated in the following manner, where the setting
is a function of the required stability voltage setting (Vs) and the relay current setting
(IREF> Is).
Vs
IREF>Is
IF (RCT + 2RL)
IREF > Is
The above equation assumes negligible relay burden.

The stabilising resistor supplied is continuously adjustable up to its maximum
declared resistance.
USE OF METROSIL NON-LINEAR RESISTORS
Metrosils are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current transformers
under internal fault conditions, to a value below the insulation level of the current
transformers, relay and interconnecting leads, which are normally able to withstand
3000V peak.
The following formulae should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage that
could be produced for an internal fault. The peak voltage produced during an
internal fault will be a function of the current transformer kneepoint voltage and the
prospective voltage that would be produced for an internal fault if current transformer
saturation did not occur. This prospective voltage will be a function of maximum
internal fault secondary current, the current transformer ratio, the current transformer
secondary winding resistance, the current transformer lead resistance to the common
point, the relay lead resistance and the stabilising resistor value.
Vp = 2
2 Vk ( Vf - Vk )
Vf = If (RCT + 2RL + RST)

where Vp = peak voltage developed by the c.t. under internal fault conditions.
Vk = current transformer knee-point voltage.
Vf
= maximum voltage that would be produced if c.t. saturation did not

occur.
If = maximum internal secondary fault current.

RCT = current transformer secondary winding resistance.
RL
= maximum lead burden from current transformer to relay.
RST = relay stabilising resistor.

When the value given by the formulae is greater than 3000V peak, metrosils should
be applied. They are connected across the relay circuit and serve the purpose of
shunting the secondary current output of the current transformer from the relay in
order to prevent very high secondary voltages.
Metrosils are externally mounted and take the form of annular discs. Their operating
characteristics follow the expression:
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 56/116
MiCOM P341
V
where V
= CI0.25
= Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor (metrosil)
= constant of the non-linear resistor (metrosil )
= instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor (metrosil) .
With a sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil, the RMS current would be
approximately 0.52x the peak current. This current value can be calculated as
follows:
Vs (rms) x
I(rms) = 0.52
C
2 4
where Vs(rms) = rms value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil.
This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the non-linear resistor
(metrosil) is not sinusoidal but appreciably distorted.
For satisfactory application of a non-linear resistor (metrosil), its characteristic
should be such that it complies with the following requirements:
1.
At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor (metrosil) current should be
as low as possible, but no greater than approximately 30mA r.m.s. for 1A
current transformers and approximately 100mA r.m.s. for 5A current
transformers.
2.
At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor (metrosil) should

limit the voltage to 1500V r.m.s. or 2120V peak for 0.25 second. At higher
relay voltage settings, it is not always possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V
r.m.s., so higher fault voltages may have to be tolerated.
The following tables show the typical Metrosil types that will be required, depending
on relay current rating, REF voltage setting etc.
Metrosil Units for Relays with a 1 Amp CT
The Metrosil units with 1 Amp CTs have been designed to comply with the following
restrictions:
1.
At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should less than 30mA rms.
2.
At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit
the voltage to 1500V rms if possible.
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 1Amp CT's are as shown in
the following table:
Relay Voltage
Setting
Nominal
Characteristic
Recommended Metrosil Type
Single Pole Relay
Triple Pole Relay
Up to 125V rms
450
0.25
600A/S1/S256
600A/S3/1/S802
125 to 300V rms
900
0.25
600A/S1/S1088
600A/S3/1/S1195
Note:
Single pole Metrosil units are normally supplied without mounting brackets
unless otherwise specified by the customer
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 57/116
Metrosil Units for Relays with a 5 Amp CT

These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following requirements:
1.
At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 100mA rms
(the actual maximum currents passed by the units shown below their type
description.
2.
At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit
the voltage to 1500V rms for 0.25secs. At the higher relay settings, it is not
possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms hence higher fault voltages have
to be tolerated (indicated by *, **, ***).
3.
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs and single
pole relays are as shown in the following table:
Secondary
Internal
Fault
Current
Recommended Metrosil Type

Relay Voltage Setting
Amps rms
Up to 200V rms
250V rms
275V rms
300V rms
50A
600A/S1/S1213
C = 540/640
35mA rms
600A/S1/S1214
C = 670/800
40mA rms
600A/S1/S1214
C =670/800
50mA rms
600A/S1/S1223
C = 740/870*
50mA rms
100A
600A/S2/P/S1217
C = 470/540
70mA rms
600A/S2/P/S1215
C = 570/670
75mA rms
600A/S2/P/S1215
C =570/670
100mA rms
600A/S2/P/S1196
C =620/740*
100mA rms
150A
600A/S3/P/S1219
C = 430/500
100mA rms
600A/S3/P/S1220
C = 520/620
100mA rms
600A/S3/P/S1221
C = 570/670**
100mA rms
600A/S3/P/S1222
C =620/740***
100mA rm
Note:
*2400V peak
**2200V peak
***2600V peak
In some situations single disc assemblies

AREVA T&D for detailed applications.
may
be
acceptable,
contact
Note:
1.
The Metrosil units recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs can also be applied
for use with triple pole relays and consist of three single pole units mounted on
the same central stud but electrically insulated for each other. To order these
units please specify "Triple Pole Metrosil Type", followed by the single pole type
reference.
2.
Metrosil units for higher relay voltage settings and fault currents can be supplied
if required.
For further advice and guidance on selecting METROSILS please contact the
Applications department at AREVA T&D.
2.15
Residual over voltage/neutral voltage displacement protection

On a healthy three phase power system, the addition of each of the three phase to
earth voltages is nominally zero, as it is the vector addition of three balanced vectors
at 120 to one another. However, when an earth fault occurs on the primary system
this balance is upset and a residual voltage is produced. This could be measured,
for example, at the secondary terminals of a voltage transformer having a broken
delta secondary connection. Hence, a relay that measures residual voltage can be
used to offer earth fault protection on such a system. Note that this condition causes
a rise in the neutral voltage with respect to earth that is commonly referred to as
neutral voltage displacement or NVD. Alternatively, if the system is impedance or
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 58/116
MiCOM P341
distribution transformer earthed, the neutral displacement voltage can be measured

directly in the earth path via a single phase VT.
This type of protection can be used to provide earth fault protection irrespective of
whether the system is connected to earth or not, and irrespective of the form of earth
connection and earth fault current level.
Where embedded generation can be run in parallel with the external distribution
system it is essential that this type of protection is provided at the interconnection with
the external system. This will ensure that if the connection with the main supply
system is lost due to external switching events, some type of reliable earth fault
protection is provided to isolate the generator from an earth fault. Loss of connection
with the external supply system may result in the loss of the earth connection, where
this is provided at a distant transformer, and hence current based earth fault
protection may be unreliable.
S
ZS
ZL
A-G
G
VA
VA
VB
VC
VA
VB
VC
VB
VC
VRES
VA
VB
VC
VB
VRES
VC
VB
VC
Residual voltage at R (relay point) is dependant upon Z S / Z L ratio.

VRES =
Z S0
x3E
2ZS1 + Z S0 + 2ZL1 + Z L0
P0117ENa
Figure 15a: Residual voltage, solidly earthed systems

The residual over voltage protection function of the P341 relay consists of two stages
with adjustable time delays.
Two stages are included for the element to account for applications that require both
alarm and trip stages, for example, an insulated system. It is common in such a case
for the system to have been designed to withstand the associated healthy phase over
voltages for a number of hours following an earth fault. In such applications, an
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 59/116
alarm is generated soon after the condition is detected, which serves to indicate the
presence of an earth fault on the system. This gives time for system operators to
locate and isolate the fault. The second stage of the protection can issue a trip signal
if the fault condition persists.
A dedicated voltage input is provided for this protection function, this may be used to
measure the residual voltage supplied from either an open delta connected VT.
Alternatively, the residual voltage may be derived internally from the three phase to
neutral voltage measurements. Where derived measurement is used the 3 phase to
neutral voltage must be supplied from either a 5-limb or three single phase VTs.
S
ZS
ZL
A-G
ZE
G
VA - G
VC - G
VB - G
VB - G
VA - G
VC - G
G,F
VC - G
VB - G
VC - G
VA - G
VC - G
VB - G
VRES
VRES
VRES
VRES =
VA - G
G,F
G,F
VB - G
VB - G
VC - G
Z S0 + 3ZE
x3E
2ZS1 + Z S0 + 2ZL1 + Z L0 + 3ZE

P0118ENa
Figure 15b: Residual voltage, resistance earthed systems

These types of VT design allow the passage of residual flux and consequently permit
the relay to derive the required residual voltage. In addition, the primary star point of
the VT must be earthed. A three limb VT has no path for residual flux and is
therefore unsuitable to supply the relay when residual voltage is required to be
derived from the phase to neutral voltage measurement.
The residual voltage signal also provides a polarising voltage signal for the sensitive
directional earth fault protection.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 60/116
MiCOM P341
Each stage of protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal, via
the PSL (DDB 368, DDB 369), this can be used to improve grading with downstream
devices. DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip of each stage of
protection, (Starts: DDB 577, DDB 578, Trips: DDB 451, DDB 452). The state of the
DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the
COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay.
Setting ranges and default settings for this element are shown in the following table:
Menu Text
Setting Range
Default Setting
Min.
Max.
Step Size
GROUP 1 RESIDUAL O/V NVD

VN Input
Measured
Measured, Derived
DT
Disabled, DT, IDMT
VN>1 Function
VN>1 Voltage Set
5V
(Vn=100/120V)
20V
(Vn=380/480V)
1V
(Vn=100/120V)
4V
(Vn=380/480V)
80V
(Vn=100/120V)
320V
(Vn=380/480V)
1V
(Vn=100/120V)
4V
(Vn=380/480V)
VN>1 Time Delay
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
0.5
100
0.5
VN>1 tRESET
0s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
VN>2 Status
DT
VN>1 TMS
Disabled, DT
VN>2 Voltage Set
5V
(Vn=100/120V)
20V
(Vn=380/480V)
1V
(Vn=100/120V)
4V
(Vn=380/480V)
80V
(Vn=100/120V)
320V
(Vn=380/480V)
1V
(Vn=100/120V)
4V
(Vn=380/480V)
VN>2 Time Delay
0s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following
formula:
t
= K / (M-1)
= Time Multiplier Setting (VN>1 TMS)
= Operating Time in Seconds
where:
M = Measured Residual Voltage/Relay Setting Voltage (VN>1 Voltage Set)

2.15.1 Setting guidelines for residual over voltage/neutral voltage displacement protection
Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT (inverse time operating characteristic), DT
(definite time operating characteristic) or Disabled, within the VN>1 Function cell.
Stage 2 operates with a definite time characteristic and is Enabled/Disabled in the
VN>2 Status cell. The time delay (VN>1 TMS for IDMT curve; V>1 Time
Delay, V>2 Time Delay for definite time) should be selected in accordance with
normal relay co-ordination procedures to ensure correct discrimination for system
faults.
The Residual Over voltage protection can be set to operate from the voltage
measured at the Vn input VT terminals or the residual voltage derived from the
Phase-Neutral voltage inputs as selected by VN Input.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 61/116
The voltage setting applied to the elements is dependent upon the magnitude of
residual voltage that is expected to occur during the earth fault condition. This in turn
is dependent upon the method of system earthing employed and may be calculated
by using the formulae previously given in Figs. 15a and 15b. It must also be ensured
that the relay is set above any standing level of residual voltage that is present on the
system.
Note that IDMT characteristics are selectable on the first stage of NVD in order that
elements located at various points on the system may be time graded with one
another.
It must also be ensured that the voltage setting of the element is set above any
standing level of residual voltage that is present on the system. A typical setting for
residual over voltage protection is 5V.
The second stage of protection can be used as an alarm stage on unearthed or very
high impedance earthed systems where the system can be operated for an
appreciable time under an earth fault condition.
2.16

Where the P341 relay is being used as interconnection protection the under voltage
element is used to prevent power being exported to external loads at a voltage below
normal allowable limits. Under voltage protection may also be used for back-up
protection for a machine where it may be difficult to provide adequate sensitivity with
phase current measuring elements.
For an isolated generator, or isolated set of generators, a prolonged under voltage
condition could arise for a number of reasons. This could be due to failure of
automatic voltage regulation (AVR) equipment or excessive load following
disconnection from the main grid supply. Where there is a risk that a machine could
become disconnected from the main grid supply and energise external load it is
essential that under voltage protection is used. The embedded generator must be
prevented from energising external customers with voltage below the statutory limits
imposed on the electricity supply authorities.
A two stage under voltage element is provided. The element can be set to operate
from phase-phase or phase-neutral voltages. Each stage has an independent time
delay that can be set to zero for instantaneous operation. Selectable, fixed Logic is
included within the relay to allow the operation of the element to be inhibited during
periods when the machine is isolated from the external system.
Each stage of under voltage protection can be blocked by energising the relevant
DDB signal via the PSL, (DDB 370, DDB 371). DDB signals are also available to
indicate a 3 phase and per phase start and trip, (Starts: DDB 579-586, Trips: DDB
453-460). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the
Monitor Bit x cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay.
Note:
If the undervoltage protection is set for phase-phase operation

then the DDB signals V<1/2 Start/Trip A/AB, V<1/2 Start/Trip
B/BC, V<1/2 Start/ Trip C/CA refer to V<1/2 Start/Trip AB and
V<1/2 Start/Trip BC and V<1/2 Start/Trip CA. If set for phaseneutral then the DDB signals V<1/2 Start/Trip A/AB, V<1/2
Start/Trip B/BC, V<1/2 Start/Trip C/CA refer to V<1/2
Start/Trip A and V<1/2 Start/Trip B and V<1/2 Start/Trip C.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 62/116
MiCOM P341
Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table:
Menu Text
Setting Range
Default Setting
Min.
Step Size
Max.
GROUP 1 VOLT PROTECTION

UNDERVOLTAGE
Sub Heading
V< Measurt Mode
Phase-Neutral
Phase-Phase, Phase-Neutral
V< Operate Mode
Any-phase
Any Phase, Three phase
DT
Disabled, DT, IDMT
V<1 Function
V<1 Voltage Set
80 V
(Vn=100/120V)
320V
(Vn=380/480V)
10V
(Vn=100/120V)
40V
(Vn=380/480V)
120V
(Vn=100/120V)
480V
(Vn=380/480V)
1V
(Vn=100/120V)
4V
(Vn=380/480V)
V<1 Time Delay
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
0.5
100
0.5
V<1 TMS
V<1 Poledead Inh
V<2 Function
Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
DT
Disabled, DT
V<2 Voltage Set
80 V
(Vn=100/120V)
320V
(Vn=380/480V)
10V
(Vn=100/120V)
40V
(Vn=380/480V)
120V
(Vn=100/120V)
480V
(Vn=380/480V)
1V
(Vn=100/120V)
4V
(Vn=380/480V)
V<2 Time Delay
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
V<1 Poledead Inh
Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
formula:
t
= K / (1-M)
= Time Multiplier Setting (V>1 TMS)
where:
M = Measured Voltage/Relay Setting Voltage (V<1 Voltage Set)

2.16.1 Setting guidelines for under voltage protection
Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT (for inverse time delayed operation), DT
(for definite time delayed operation) or Disabled, within the V<1 Function cell.
Stage 2 is definite time only and is Enabled/Disabled in the V<2 Status cell. The
time delay. (V<1 TMS - for IDMT curve: V<1 Time Delay, V<2 Time Delay
for definite time) should be adjusted accordingly.
The under voltage protection can be set to operate from Phase-Phase or PhaseNeutral voltage as selected by V< Measurt Mode. Single or three phase operation
can be selected in V<1 Operate Mode. When Any Phase is selected, the element
will operate if any phase voltage falls below setting, when Three Phase is selected
the element will operate when all three phase voltages are below the setting.
The under voltage threshold for each stage is set in the V>1 Voltage Set and V>2
Voltage Set cells.
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 63/116
Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the
generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (e.g. requirements of
G59 in the UK), the local electricity supply authority will advise settings for the
element. The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system
with voltage outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority. For this
mode of operation the element must be set to operate from phase to neutral voltage,
which will provide an additional degree of earth fault protection.
The operating characteristic would normally be set to definite time, set V<1
Function to DT. The time delay, V<1 Time Delay, should be set to co-ordinate
with downstream. Additionally, the delay should be long enough to prevent
unwanted operation of the under voltage protection for transient voltage dips. These
may occur during clearance of faults further into the power system or by starting of
local machines. The required time delay would typically be in excess of 3s 5s.
As previously stated, local regulations for operating a generator in parallel with the
external electricity supply may dictate the settings used for the under voltage
protection. For example in the UK the protection should be set to measure phase to
neutral voltage and trip at 90% of nominal voltage in a time of less than 0.5s.
The second stage can be used as an alarm stage to warn the user of unusual voltage
conditions so that corrections can be made. This could be useful if the machine is
being operated with the AVR selected to manual control.
To prevent operation of any under voltage stage during normal shutdown of the
generator poledead logic is included in the relay. This is facilitated by selecting V
Poledead Inh to Enabled. This will ensure that when a poledead condition is
detected (i.e. all phase currents below the undercurrent threshold or CB Open, as
determined by an opto isolator and the PSL) the under voltage element will be
inhibited.
2.17

An over voltage condition could arise when a generator is running but not connected
to a power system, or where a generator is providing power to an islanded power
system. Such an over voltage could arise in the event of a fault with automatic
voltage regulating equipment or if the voltage regulator is set for manual control and
an operator error is made. Over voltage protection should be set to prevent possible
damage to generator insulation, prolonged over-fluxing of the generating plant, or
damage to power system loads.
When a generator is synchronised to a power system with other sources, an over
voltage could arise if the generator is lightly loaded supplying a high level of power
system capacitive charging current. An over voltage condition might also be possible
following a system separation, where a generator might experience full-load rejection
whilst still being connected to part of the original power system. The automatic
voltage regulating equipment and machine governor should quickly respond to
correct the over voltage condition in these cases. However, over voltage protection is
advisable to cater for a possible failure of the voltage regulator or for the regulator
having been set to manual control.
A two stage over voltage element is provided. The element can be set to operate
from phase-phase or phase-neutral voltages. Each stage has an independent time
delay which can be set to zero for instantaneous operation.
Each stage of over voltage protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB
signal via the PSL, (DDB 372, DDB 373). DDB signals are also available to indicate
a 3 phase and per phase start and trip, (Starts: DDB 587-594, Trips: DDB 461-468).
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 64/116
MiCOM P341
Note:
If the overvoltage protection is set for phase-phase operation

then the DDB signals V>1/2 Start/Trip A/AB, V>1/2 Start/Trip
B/BC, V>1/2 Start/Trip C/CA refer to V>1/2 Start/Trip AB and
V>1/2 Start/Trip BC and V>1/2 Start/Trip CA. If set for phaseneutral then the DDB signals V>1/2 Start/Trip A/AB, V>1/2
Start/Trip B/BC, V>1/2 Start/Trip C/CA refer to V>1/2
Start/Trip A and V>1/2 Start/Trip B and V>1/2 Start/Trip C.
The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x
cells of the COMMISSION TESTS column in the relay.
Menu Text
Setting Range
Default Setting
Min.
Step Size
Max.
GROUP VOLT PROTECTION

OVERVOLTAGE
Sub Heading
V> Measurt Mode
Phase-Neutral
Phase-Phase, Phase-Neutral
V> Operate Mode
Any-phase
Any Phase, Three phase
DT
Disabled, DT, IDMT
V>1 Function
V>1 Voltage Set
150V
(Vn=100/120V)
600V
(Vn=380/480V)
60V
(Vn=100/120V)
240V
(Vn=380/480V)
185V
(Vn=100/120V)
740V
(Vn=380/480V)
1V
(Vn=100/120V)
4V
(Vn=380/480V)
V>1 Time Delay
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
0.5
100
0.5
V>1 TMS
V>2 Status
DT
Disabled, DT
V>2 Voltage Set
130V
(Vn=100/120V)
520V
(Vn=380/480V)
60V
(Vn=100/120V)
240V
(Vn=380/480V)
185V
(Vn=100/120V)
740V
(Vn=380/480V)
1V
(Vn=100/120V)
4V
(Vn=380/480V)
V>2 Time Delay
1s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
formula:
t
= K / (M - 1)
= Time Multiplier Setting (V>1 TMS)
where:
M = Measured Voltage/Relay Setting Voltage (V>1 Voltage Set)

2.17.1 Setting guidelines for over voltage protection
Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT (for inverse time delayed operation), DT
(for definite time delayed operation) or Disabled, within the V>1 Function cell.
Stage 2 has a definite time delayed characteristic and is Enabled/Disabled in the
V>2 Status cell. The time delay. (V>1 TMS - for IDMT curve; V>1 Time
Delay, V>2 Time Delay - for definite time) should be selected accordingly.
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 65/116
The over voltage protection can be set to operate from Phase-Phase or Phase-Neutral
voltage as selected by V> Measurt Mode cell. Single or three phase operation can
be selected in V> Operate Mode cell. When Any Phase is selected the element
will operate if any phase voltage falls below setting, when Three Phase is selected
the element will operate when all three phase voltages are above the setting.
Generators can typically withstand a 5% over voltage condition continuously. The
withstand times for higher over voltages should be declared by the generator
manufacturer.
To prevent operation during earth faults, the element should operate from the phasephase voltages, to achieve this V>1 Measurt Mode can be set to Phase-Phase
with V>1 Operating Mode set to Three-Phase. The over voltage threshold, V>1
Voltage Set, should typically be set to 100%-120% of the nominal phase-phase
voltage seen by the relay. The time delay, V>1 Time Delay, should be set to
prevent unwanted tripping of the delayed over voltage protection function due to
transient over voltages that do not pose a risk to the generating plant; e.g. following
load rejection where correct AVR/Governor control occurs. The typical delay to be
applied would be 1s 3s, with a longer delay being applied for lower voltage
threshold settings.
The second stage can be used to provide instantaneous high-set over voltage
protection. The typical threshold setting to be applied, V>2 Voltage Set, would be
130 150% of the nominal phase-phase voltage seen by the relay, depending on
plant manufacturers advice. For instantaneous operation, the time delay, V>2
Time Delay, should be set to 0s.
generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (e.g. requirements of G59
in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the element.
The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system with
voltages outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority. For example
in the UK the protection should be set to measure phase to neutral voltage and trip at
110% of nominal voltage in a time of less than 0.5s.
If phase to neutral operation is selected, the element may operate during earth faults,
where the phase-neutral voltage can rise significantly.
2.18

Under frequency operation of a generator will occur when the power system load
exceeds the prime mover capability of an islanded generator or group of generators.
Power system overloading can arise when a power system becomes split, with load
left connected to a set of islanded generators that is in excess of their capacity.
Automatic load shedding could compensate for such events. In this case, under
frequency operation would be a transient condition. This characteristic makes under
frequency protection a simple form of Loss of Mains protection on system where it is
expected that the islanded load attached to the machine when the grid connection
fails exceeds the generator capacity. In the event of the load shedding being
unsuccessful, the generators should be provided with backup under frequency
protection. Where the P341 relay is being used as interconnection protection the
under frequency element is also used to prevent power being exported to external
loads at a frequency below normal allowable limits.
Four independent definite time-delayed stages of under frequency protection are
offered. Two additional over frequency stages can also be reconfigured as under
frequency protection by reprogramming the Programmable Scheme Logic. As well as
being able to initiate generator tripping, the under frequency protection can also be
arranged to initiate local load-shedding, where appropriate.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 66/116
MiCOM P341
Energising the relevant DDB signal, via the PSL (DDB 374-377), can block each stage
of underfrequency protection. DDB signals are also available to indicate start and
trip of each stage, (Starts: DDB 622-625, Trips: DDB 469-472). The state of the DDB
signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Step Size
Max.
GROUP 1 FREQ PROTECTION

UNDER FREQUENCY
Sub Heading
F<1 Status
Enabled
F<1 Setting
49.5 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.01 Hz
4s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
F<1 Time Delay
Disabled, Enabled
F<2 Status
Enabled
F>2 Setting
49.5 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.01 Hz
4s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
F<2 Time Delay
Disabled, Enabled
F<3 Status
Enabled
F>3 Setting
49.5 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.01 Hz
4s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
F<3 Time Delay
Disabled, Enabled
F<4 Status
Enabled
F<4 Setting
49.5 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.01 Hz
4s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
F<4 Time Delay

F< Function Link
1111
Disabled, Enabled
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
- Enable
- Enable
- Enable
- Enable
Block
Block
Block
Block
F<1
F<2
F<3
F<4
during Poledead
during Poledead
during Poledead
during Poledead
2.18.1 Setting guidelines for under frequency protection

Each stage of under frequency protection may be selected as Enabled or Disabled,
within the F<x Status cells. The frequency pickup setting, F<x Setting, and time
delays, F<x Time Delay, for each stage should be selected accordingly.
The protection function should be set so that declared frequency-time limits for the
generating set or system are not infringed. Typically, a 10% under frequency
condition should be continuously sustainable by the machine however system
considerations may mean that settings much closer to the nominal frequency are
specified.
For industrial generation schemes, where generation and loads may be under
common control/ownership, the P341 under frequency protection function could be
used to initiate local system load-shedding. Four stage under frequency/load
shedding can be provided. The final stage of under frequency protection should be
used to trip the generator.
Where separate load shedding equipment is provided, the under frequency protection
should co-ordinate with it. This will ensure that generator tripping will not occur in
the event of successful load shedding following a system overload. Two stages of
under frequency protection could be set-up, as illustrated in Figure 16, to co-ordinate
with multi-stage system load-shedding.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 67/116
Frequency
fn
A
F1<
B
C
F2<
Turbine prohibited area
t2
t1
System frequency response with

minimum load shed for recovery
System frequency response with

under shedding of load
Optimum underfrequency
protection characteristic
Time
P2047ENa
Figure 16: Co-ordination of underfrequency protection function with

system load shedding
To prevent operation of any under frequency stage during normal shutdown of the
generator poledead logic is included in the relay. This is facilitated for each stage
by setting the relevant bit in F< Function Link. For example if F< Function Link is
set to 0111, Stage 1, 2 and 3 of under frequency protection will be blocked when the
generator CB is open. Selective blocking of the frequency protection stages in this
way will allow a single stage of protection to be enabled during synchronisation or
offline running to prevent unsynchronised over fluxing of the machine. When the
machine is synchronised, and the CB closed, all stages of frequency protection will be
enabled providing a multi stage load shed scheme if desired.
G.59 in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the
with frequency outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority. For
example, in the UK the under frequency protection should be set to 47Hz with a trip
time of less than 0.5s.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 68/116
2.19
MiCOM P341

Over frequency running of a generator arises when the mechanical power input to
the alternator is in excess of the electrical load and mechanical losses. The most
common occurrence of over frequency is after substantial loss of load. When a rise
in running speed occurs, the governor should quickly respond to reduce the
mechanical input power, so that normal running speed is quickly regained. Over
frequency protection may be required as a backup protection function to cater for
governor or throttle control failure following loss of load or during unsynchronised or
islanded running.
Moderate over frequency operation of a generator is not as potentially threatening to
the generator and other electrical plant as under frequency running. Action can be
taken at the generating plant to correct the situation without necessarily shutting down
the generator. However, where the P341 relay is being used as interconnection
protection the under frequency element will prevent power being exported to external
loads at a frequency higher than normal allowable limits.
Two independent time-delayed stages of over frequency protection are provided.
Each stage of protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the
PSL, (DDB 378, DDB 379). DDB signals are also available to indicate start and trip
of each stage, (Starts: DDB 626, 627, Trips: DDB 473, 474). The state of the DDB
signals can be programmed to be viewed in the Monitor Bit x cells of the
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Max.
Step Size
GROUP 1 FREQ PROTECTION

OVER FREQUENCY
Sub Heading
F>1 Status
Enabled
F>1 Setting
49.5 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.01 Hz
4s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
F>1 Time Delay
Disabled, Enabled
F>2 Status
Enabled
F>2 Setting
49.5 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.01 Hz
4s
0s
100 s
0.01 s
F>2 Time Delay
Disabled, Enabled
2.19.1 Setting guidelines for over frequency protection

Each stage of over frequency protection may be selected as Enabled or Disabled,
within the F>x Status cells. The frequency pickup setting, F>x Setting, and time
delays, F>x Time Delay, for each stage should be selected accordingly.
The P341 over frequency settings should be selected to co-ordinate with normal,
transient over frequency excursions following full-load rejection. The generator
manufacturer should declare the expected transient over frequency behaviour, which
should comply with international governor response standards. A typical over
frequency setting would be 10% above nominal.
G.59 in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the
with frequency outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority. For
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 69/116
example in the UK over frequency protection should be set to 50.5Hz with a trip time
of less than 0.5s.
2.20
2.20.1 Introduction
Thermal overload protection can be used to prevent electrical plant from operating at
temperatures in excess of the designed maximum withstand. Prolonged overloading
causes excessive heating, which may result in premature ageing of the insulation, or
in extreme cases, insulation failure.
The P341 relay incorporates a current based thermal replica, using positive and
negative sequence currents to model heating and cooling of the protected plant. The
element can be set with both alarm and trip stages. The P341 thermal protection has
been designed specifically for electrical machines but could also be used for other
items of plant such as transformers or cables.
Overloads can result in stator temperature rises which exceed the thermal limit of the
winding insulation.
Empirical results suggest that the life of insulation is
approximately halved for each 10C rise in temperature above the rated value.
However, the life of insulation is not wholly dependent upon the rise in temperature
but on the time the insulation is maintained at this elevated temperature. Due to the
relatively large heat storage capacity of an electrical machine, infrequent overloads of
short duration may not damage the machine. However, sustained overloads of a few
percent may result in premature ageing and failure of insulation.
The physical and electrical complexity of generator construction result in a complex
thermal relationship. It is not therefore possible to create an accurate mathematical
model of the true thermal characteristics of the machine.
However, if a generator is considered to be a homogeneous body, developing heat
internally at a constant rate and dissipating heat at a rate directly proportional to its
temperature rise, it can be shown that the temperature at any instant is given by:
T
Tmax (1-e-t/t)
Where
Tmax
final steady state temperature
heating time constant
This assumes a thermal equilibrium in the form:

Heat developed = Heat stored + Heat dissipated
Temperature rise is proportional to the current squared:
T
K IR2 (1-e-t/t)
Tmax = K IR2 if t =
Where
IR
the continuous current level which would produce a temperature Tmax in the
generator
For an overload current of I the temperature is given by:

T
KI2 (1-e-t/t)
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 70/116
MiCOM P341
For a machine not to exceed Tmax, the rated temperature, then the time t for which
the machine can withstand the current I can be shown to be given by:
Tmax
K IR2 = KI2 (1-e-t/t)
t. Log e (1/(1-(I R /I)2))
An overload protection element should therefore satisfy the above relationship. The
value of IR may be the full load current or a percentage of it depending on the design.
As previously stated it is an oversimplification to regard a generator as an
homogeneous body. The temperature rise of different parts or even of various points
in the same part may be very uneven. However, it is reasonable to consider that the
current-time relationship follows an inverse characteristic.
A more accurate
representation of the thermal state of the machine can be obtained through the use
of temperature monitoring devices (RTDs) which target specific areas. Also, for short
time overloads the application of RTDs and overcurrent protection can provide better
protection. Note, that the thermal model does not compensate for the effects of
ambient temperature change. So if there is an unusually high ambient temperature
or if the machine cooling is blocked RTDs will also provide better protection.
2.20.2 Thermal replica
The P341 relay models the time-current thermal characteristic of a generator by
internally generating a thermal replica of the machine. The thermal overload
protection can be selectively enabled or disabled. The positive and negative
sequence components of the generator current are measured independently and are
combined together to form an equivalent current, Ieq, which is supplied to the replica
circuit. The heating effect in the thermal replica is produced by Ieq2 and therefore
takes into account the heating effect due to both positive and negative sequence
components of current.
Unbalanced phase currents will cause additional rotor heating that may not be
accounted for by some thermal protection relays based on the measured current only.
Unbalanced loading results in the flow of positive and negative sequence current
components. Load unbalance can arise as a result of single phase loading, nonlinear loads (involving power electronics or arc furnaces, etc.), uncleared or repetitive
asymmetric faults, fuse operation, single-pole tripping and reclosing on transmission
systems, broken overhead line conductors and asymmetric failures of switching
devices. Any negative phase sequence component of stator current will set up a
reverse-rotating component of stator flux that passes the rotor at twice synchronous
speed. Such a flux component will induce double frequency eddy currents in the
rotor, which can cause overheating of the rotor body, main rotor windings, damper
windings etc. This extra heating is not accounted for in the thermal limit curves
supplied by the generator manufacturer as these curves assume positive sequence
currents only that come from a perfectly balanced supply and generator design. The
P340 thermal model may be biased to reflect the additional heating that is caused by
negative sequence current when the machine is running. This biasing is done by
creating an equivalent heating current rather than simply using the phase current.
The M factor is a constant that relates negative sequence rotor resistance to positive
sequence rotor resistance. If an M factor of 0 is used the unbalance biasing is
disabled and the overload curve will time out against the measured generator
positive sequence current. Note, the P340 also includes a negative sequence
overcurrent protection function based on I22t specifically for thermal protection of the
rotor.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 71/116
The equivalent current for operation of the overload protection is in accordance with
the following expression:
Ieq
(I12 + MI22)
Where
I1
positive sequence current
I2
negative sequence current
a user settable constant proportional to the thermal capacity of the machine
As previously described, the temperature of a generator will rise exponentially with

increasing current. Similarly, when the current decreases, the temperature also
decreases in a similar manner. Therefore, in order to achieve close sustained
overload protection, the P341 relay incorporates a wide range of thermal time
constants for heating and cooling.
Furthermore, the thermal withstand capability of the generator is affected by heating
in the winding prior to the overload. The thermal replica is designed to take account
the extremes of zero pre-fault current, known as the cold condition and the full rated
pre-fault current, known as the hot condition. With no pre-fault current the relay will
be operating on the cold curve. When a generator is or has been running at full
load prior to an overload the hot curve is applicable. Therefore, during normal
operation the relay will be operating between these two limits.
The following equation is used to calculate the trip time for a given current. Note that
the relay will trip at a value corresponding to 100% of its thermal state.
The thermal time characteristic is given by:
=
t loge (Ieq2 IP2)/(Ieq2 (Thermal I>)2
time to trip, following application of the overload current, I
heating time constant of the protected plant
Ieq
equivalent current
t
where:
Thermal I> =
IP
relay setting current

steady state pre-load current before application of the overload
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the
overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from 'hot or cold.
The thermal time constant characteristic may be rewritten as:
exp(t/t)
(q 1) / (q q p)
Ieq2/(Thermal I>)2
Ip2/ (Thermal I>)2
where:
q
and
qp
where q is the thermal state and is qp the prefault thermal state.

Note, that the thermal model does not compensate for the effects of ambient
temperature change.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 72/116
MiCOM P341
=
t. Loge (K2-A2/(K2-1))
Ieq/Thermal I>
IP /Thermal I>
t
Where
The Thermal state of the machine can be viewed in the Thermal Overload cell in
the MEASUREMENTS 3 column. The thermal state can be reset by selecting Yes in
the Reset ThermalO/L cell in Measurements 3. Alternatively the thermal state can
be reset by energising DDB 390 Reset ThermalO/L via the relay PSL.
A DDB signal Thermal O/L Trip is also available to indicate tripping of the element
(DDB 499). A further DDB signal Thermal Alarm is generated from the thermal
alarm stage (DDB 399). The state of the DDB signal can be programmed to be
Setting ranges for the thermal overload element are shown in the following table:
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min
Max
Step Size
GROUP 1:
THERMAL OVERLOAD
IThermal
Enabled
Thermal I>
1.2 In A
0.5 In A
2.5 In A
0.01 In A
90%
20%
100%
1%
T-heating
60 mins
1 min
200 mins
1 min
T-cooling
60 mins
1 min
200 mins
1 min
M Factor
10
Thermal Alarm
Disabled, Enabled
2.20.3 Setting guidelines

The current setting is calculated as:
Thermal Trip = Permissible continuous loading of the plant item/CT ratio.
The heating thermal time constant should be chosen so that the overload curve is
always below the thermal limits provided by the manufacturer. This will ensure that
the machine is tripped before the thermal limit is reached. The relay setting,
T-heating", is in minutes.
The cooling thermal time constant should be provided by the manufacturer.
However, unless otherwise specified, the cooling time constant, "T-cooling", setting
should be set equal to the main heating time constant setting, T-heating. The
cooling time constant is applied when the machine is running and the load current is
decreasing. It is therefore practical to assume the cooling time constant is similar to
the heating time constant if information is not available from the manufacturer.
When the machine is not turning the machine will normally cool significantly slower
than when the rotor is turning. The relay setting, "T-cooling", is in minutes.
An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage
of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be "Thermal Alarm" = 70% of thermal
capacity. The thermal alarm could also be used to prevent restarting of the generator
until the alarm level resets. For this application a typical setting may be 20%.
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 73/116
The M Factor is used to increase the influence of negative sequence current on the
thermal replica protection due to unbalanced currents. If it is required to account for
the heating effect of unbalanced currents then this factor should be set equal to the
ratio of negative phase sequence rotor resistance to positive sequence rotor
resistance at rated speed. When an exact setting can not be calculated a setting of 3
should be used. This is a typical setting and will suffice for the majority of
applications for machines. If an M factor of 0 is used the unbalance biasing is
disabled and the overload curve will time out against the measured generator
positive sequence current. The M factor should be set to 0 if the thermal replica
protection is not used to protect machines e.g. for cables or transformers. Note, the
extra heating caused by unbalanced phase currents is not accounted for in the
thermal limit curves supplied by the generator manufacturer as these curves assume
positive sequence currents only that come from a perfectly balanced supply and
generator design, so the default setting is 0.
2.21
Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF)

Following inception of a fault one or more main protection devices will operate and
issue a trip output to the circuit breaker(s) associated with the faulted circuit.
Operation of the circuit breaker is essential to isolate the fault, and prevent
damage/further damage to the power system. For transmission/sub-transmssion
systems, slow fault clearance can also threaten system stability. It is therefore
common practice to install circuit breaker failure protection, which monitors that the
circuit breaker has opened within a reasonable time. If the fault current has not been
interrupted following a set time delay from circuit breaker trip initiation, breaker
failure protection (CBF) will operate.
CBF operation can be used to backtrip upstream circuit breakers to ensure that the
fault is isolated correctly. CBF operation can also reset all start output contacts,
ensuring that any blocks asserted on upstream protection are removed.
2.21.1 Breaker failure protection configurations

The circuit breaker failure protection incorporates two timers, "CB Fail 1 Timer" and
"CB Fail 2 Timer", allowing configuration for the following scenarios:
Simple CBF, where only "CB Fail 1 Timer" is enabled. For any protection trip, the
"CB Fail 1 Timer" is started, and normally reset when the circuit breaker opens to
isolate the fault. If breaker opening is not detected, "CB Fail 1 Timer" times out
and closes an output contact assigned to breaker fail (using the programmable
scheme logic). This contact is used to backtrip upstream switchgear, generally
tripping all infeeds connected to the same busbar section.
A re-tripping scheme, plus delayed backtripping. Here, "CB Fail 1 Timer" is used
to route a trip to a second trip circuit of the same circuit breaker. This requires
duplicated circuit breaker trip coils, and is known as re-tripping. Should retripping fail to open the circuit breaker, a backtrip may be issued following an
additional time delay. The backtrip uses "CB Fail 2 Timer", which is also started at
the instant of the initial protection element trip.
CBF elements "CB Fail 1 Timer" and "CB Fail 2 Timer" can be configured to operate
for trips triggered by protection elements within the relay or via an external protection
trip. The latter is acheived by allocating one of the relay opto-isolated inputs to
"External Trip" using the programmable scheme logic.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 74/116
MiCOM P341
2.21.2 Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers

It is common practice to use low set undercurrent elements in protection relays to
indicate that circuit breaker poles have interrupted the fault or load current, as
required. This covers the following situations:
Where circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are defective, or cannot be relied upon to
definitely indicate that the breaker has tripped.
Where a circuit breaker has started to open but has become jammed. This may
result in continued arcing at the primary contacts, with an additional arcing
resistance in the fault current path. Should this resistance severely limit fault
current, the initiating protection element may reset. Thus, reset of the element
may not give a reliable indication that the circuit breaker has opened fully.
For any protection function requiring current to operate, the relay uses operation of
undercurrent elements (I<) to detect that the necessary circuit breaker poles have
tripped and reset the CB fail timers. However, the undercurrent elements may not be
reliable methods of resetting circuit breaker fail in all applications. For example:
Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage or

under/overfrequency, derives measurements from a line connected voltage
transformer. Here, I< only gives a reliable reset method if the protected circuit
would always have load current flowing. Detecting drop-off of the initiating
protection element might be a more reliable method.
Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage or

under/overfrequency, derives measurements from a busbar connected voltage
transformer. Again using I< would rely upon the feeder normally being loaded.
Also, tripping the circuit breaker may not remove the initiating condition from the
busbar, and hence drop-off of the protection element may not occur. In such
cases, the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts may give the best reset
method.
Resetting of the CBF is possible from a breaker open indication (from the relay's pole
dead logic) or from a protection reset. In these cases resetting is only allowed
provided the undercurrent elements have also reset. The resetting options are
summarised in the following table:
Initiation (Menu Selectable)
CB Fail Timer Reset Mechnaism
Current based protection
The resetting mechanism is fixed

(e.g. 50/51/46/21/87..)
[IA< operates] &
[IB< operates] &
[IC< operates] &
[IN< operates]
Sensitive earth fault element
The resetting mechanism is fixed.

[ISEF< operates]
Non-current based protection

(e.g. 27/59/81/32L..)
Three options are available. The user can

select from the following options.
[All I< and IN< elements operate]
[Protection element reset] AND
CB open (all 3 poles) AND [All I< and IN<
elements operate]
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 75/116
Three options are available.
The user can select any or all of the options.
[External trip reset] AND [All I< and IN<
elements operate]
CB open (all 3 poles) AND [All I< and IN<
elements operate]
External protection
The selection in the relay menu is grouped as follows:

Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Max.
Step Size
NEG SEQ O/C GROUP 1

BREAKER FAIL
{Sub-Heading}
CB Fail 1 Status
Enabled
CB Fail 1 Timer
0.2 s
CB Fail 2 Status
Disabled
CB Fail 2 Timer
0.4 s
Enabled, Disabled
0s
10 s
0.01s
Enabled, Disabled
0s
10 s
0.01s
Volt Prot Reset
CB Open & I<
I< Only, CB Open & I<, Prot Reset & I<
Ext Prot Reset
CB Open & I<
I< Only, CB Open & I<, Prot Reset & I<
UNDERCURRENT
{Sub-Heading}
I< Current Set
0.1In
0.02In
3.2In
0.01In
IN< Current Set
0.1In
0.02In
3.2In
0.01In
0.02In
0.001In
0.8In
0.0005In
ISEF< Current
BLOCKED O/C
{Sub-Heading}
Remove I>
Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Remove IN>
Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
The "Remove I>" and "Remove IN>" settings are used to remove starts issued from
the overcurrent and earth elements respectively following a breaker fail time out
(DDB 628 I> Block Start, DDB 629 IN/SEF> Blk Start). The start is removed when
the cell is set to Enabled. This can be used to remove a blocking signal from an
upstream relay to back trip and clear the fault.
2.22
Typical settings
2.22.1 Breaker fail timer settings

Typical timer settings to use are as follows:
CB Fail Reset Mechanism
tBF Time Delay
Initiating element reset
CB interrupting time +
element reset time (max.)
+ error in tBF timer +
safety margin
CB open
CB auxiliary contacts
opening/closing time
(max.) + error + safety
margin
Typical Delay for

2 Cycle Circuit Breaker
50 + 50 + 10 + 50
= 160 ms
50 + 10 + 50 = 110 ms
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 76/116
MiCOM P341
CB Fail Reset Mechanism

Undercurrent elements
tBF Time Delay

CB interrupting time +
undercurrent element
(max.) + operating time
Typical Delay for

2 Cycle Circuit Breaker
50 + 12 + 50 = 112 ms
Note that all CB Fail resetting involves the operation of the undercurrent elements.
Where element reset or CB open resetting is used the undercurrent time setting
should still be used if this proves to be the worst case.
The examples above consider direct tripping of a 2 cycle circuit breaker. Note that
where auxiliary tripping relays are used, an additional 10-15ms must be added to
allow for trip relay operation.
2.22.2 Breaker fail undercurrent settings
The phase undercurrent settings (I<) must be set less than load current, to ensure
that I< operation indicates that the circuit breaker pole is open. A typical setting for
overhead line or cable circuits is 20% In, with 5% In common for generator circuit
breaker CBF.
The sensitive earth fault protection (SEF) and standard earth fault undercurrent
elements must be set less than the respective trip setting, typically as follows:
ISEF< = (ISEF> trip) / 2

IN<
= (IN> trip) / 2
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 77/116
SETTING [4503] :
DDB #162 : Any Trip (RL3)

OR
CB Fail 1 Timer
DDB #380 : Ext. Trip 3ph
SETTING [4502] :
tbf1
CB Fail 1 Status
AND
DDB #631 : IA< Start
DDB #493 : Bfail1 Trip 3ph
G37-0 : Disabled
0s
G37-1 : Enabled
DDB #632 : IB< Start

AND
SETTING [4505] :
CB Fail 2 Timer
DDB #633 : IC< Start

SETTING [4504] :
tbf2
CB Fail 2 Status
DDB #635 : IN< Start
AND
G37-0 : Disabled
DDB #447 : ISEF>1 Trip
OR
DDB #494 : Bfail2 Trip 3ph

0s
G37-1 : Enabled
OR
AND
DDB #162 : Any Trip (RL3)
DDB #634 : ISEF< Start
DDB #294 : CB Fail Alarm
x 2 Stages
DDB #453, 457 : V< Trip
x 2 Stages
AND
OR
Q
DDB #461, 465 : V> Trip

x 2 Stages
DDB #451, 457 : VN> Trip

x 4 Stages
DDB #469 - 472 : F< Trip
x 2 Stages
DDB #440 : df/dt Trip
S
DDB #441 : V Shift Trip
x 2 Stages
DDB #475, 476 : Power Trip
OR
x 2 Stages
SETTING [4506] :
DDB #495, 496 : SPower Trip
DDB #473, 474 : F > Trip
SETTING [4507] :
AND
Volt Prot Reset
x 2 Stages
G68-0 : I< Only
OR
G68-1 : CB Open & I<

G68-2 : Prot Reset & I<
AND
Ext Prot Reset

OR
G68-0 : I< Only

G68-1 : CB Open & I<
AND
G68-2 : Prot Reset & I<
AND
DDB #757 : All Poles Dead
DDB #380 : Ext. Trip 3ph
P2181enb
Figure 17: CB fail logic

3.
OTHER PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS
3.1
Blocked overcurrent protection

Blocked overcurrent protection involves the use of start contacts from downstream
relays wired onto blocking inputs of upstream relays. This allows identical current
and time settings to be employed on each of the relays involved in the scheme, as the
relay nearest to the fault does not receive a blocking signal and hence trips
discriminatively. This type of scheme therefore reduces the amount of required
grading stages and consequently fault clearance times.
The principle of blocked overcurrent protection may be extended by setting fast acting
overcurrent elements on the P341 which are then arranged to be blocked by start
contacts from the relays protecting the outgoing feeders. The fast acting element is
thus allowed to trip for a fault condition on the busbar but is stable for external feeder
faults by means of the blocking signal. This type of scheme therefore provides much
reduced fault clearance times for busbar faults than would be the case with
conventional time graded overcurrent protection. The availability of multiple
overcurrent and earth fault stages means that back-up time graded overcurrent
protection is also provided. This is shown in Figures 18a and 18b.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 78/116
MiCOM P341
Generator
Block highset element
CB fail backtrip
O/P
from
start
contact
Feeder 1
CB
fail
backtrip
Feeder 2
Feeder 3
Feeder 4
P2184enb
Figure 18a: Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer)

10.0
Time
(secs)
1.0
P3xx IDMT element

IDMT margin
Feeder IDMT element
P3xx high set element
0.1
0.08
0.01
Feeder start contact

1.0
10.0
Time
(secs)
1.0
P341 IDMT element

IDMT margin
Feeder IDMT element
0.1
0.08
0.01
P341 high set element

Feeder start contact
1.0
10.0
Current (kA)
Time to block
100.0
10.0
Time to block
100.0
Current (kA)
P2185enb
Figure 18b: Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer)

The P140/P341 relays have start outputs available from each stage of each of the
overcurrent and earth fault elements, including sensitive earth fault. These start
signals may then be routed to output contacts by programming accordingly. Each
stage is also capable of being blocked by being programmed to the relevant optoisolated input.
Note that the P341 relays provide a 50V field supply for powering the opto-inputs.
Hence, in the unlikely event of the failure of this supply, blocking of that relay would
not be possible. For this reason, the field supply is supervised and if a failure is
detected, it is possible, via the relays programmable scheme logic, to provide an
output alarm contact. This contact can then be used to signal an alarm within the
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 79/116
substation. Alternatively, the relays scheme logic could be arranged to block any of
the overcurrent/earth fault stages that would operate non-discriminatively due to the
blocking signal failure.
For further guidance on the use of blocked overcurrent schemes refer to AREVA T&D.
4.
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
4.1

The voltage transformer supervision (VTS) feature is used to detect failure of the ac
voltage inputs to the relay. This may be caused by internal voltage transformer faults,
overloading, or faults on the interconnecting wiring to relays. This usually results in
one or more VT fuses blowing. Following a failure of the ac voltage input there
would be a misrepresentation of the phase voltages on the power system, as
measured by the relay, which may result in maloperation.
The VTS logic in the relay is designed to detect the voltage failure, and automatically
adjust the configuration of protection elements whose stability would otherwise be
compromised. A time-delayed alarm output is also available.
There are three main aspects to consider regarding the failure of the VT supply.
These are defined below:
1.
Loss of one or two phase voltages.
2.
Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions.
3.
Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation.
The VTS feature within the relay operates on detection of negative phase sequence
(nps) voltage without the presence of negative phase sequence current. This gives
operation for the loss of one or two phase voltages. Stability of the VTS function is
assured during system fault conditions, by the presence of nps current. The use of
negative sequence quantities ensures correct operation even where three-limb or V
connected VTs are used.
Negative Sequence VTS Element:
The negative sequence thresholds used by the element are V2 = 10V (or 40V on a
380/480V rated relay), and I2 = 0.05 to 0.5In settable (defaulted to 0.05In).
4.1.1
Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions

Under the loss of all three phase voltages to the relay, there will be no negative
phase sequence quantities present to operate the VTS function. However, under such
circumstances, a collapse of the three phase voltages will occur. If this is detected
without a corresponding change in any of the phase current signals (which would be
indicative of a fault), then a VTS condition will be raised. In practice, the relay detects
the presence of superimposed current signals, which are changes in the current
applied to the relay. These signals are generated by comparison of the present value
of the current with that exactly one cycle previously. Under normal load conditions,
the value of superimposed current should therefore be zero. Under a fault condition
a superimposed current signal will be generated which will prevent operation of the
VTS.
The phase voltage level detectors are fixed and will drop off at 10V (40V on
380/480V relays) and pickup at 30V (120V on 380/480V relays).
The sensitivity of the superimposed current elements is fixed at 0.1In.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 80/116
4.1.2
MiCOM P341
Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation

If a VT were inadvertently left isolated prior to line energisation, incorrect operation of
voltage dependent elements could result. The previous VTS element detected three
phase VT failure by absence of all 3 phase voltages with no corresponding change in
current. On line energisation there will, however, be a change in current (as a result
of load or line charging current for example). An alternative method of detecting 3
phase VT failure is therefore required on line energisation.
The absence of measured voltage on all 3 phases on line energisation can be as a
result of 2 conditions. The first is a 3 phase VT failure and the second is a close up
three phase fault. The first condition would require blocking of the voltage
dependent function and the second would require tripping. To differentiate between
these 2 conditions an overcurrent level detector (VTS I> Inhibit) is used which will
prevent a VTS block from being issued if it operates. This element should be set in
excess of any non-fault based currents on line energisation (load, line charging
current, transformer inrush current if applicable) but below the level of current
produced by a close up 3 phase fault. If the line is now closed where a 3 phase VT
failure is present the overcurrent detector will not operate and a VTS block will be
applied. Closing onto a three phase fault will result in operation of the overcurrent
detector and prevent a VTS block being applied.
This logic will only be enabled during a live line condition (as indicated by the relays
pole dead logic) to prevent operation under dead system conditions i.e. where no
voltage will be present and the VTS I> Inhibit overcurrent element will not be picked
up.
ALL POLE DEAD
1
&
IA>
IB>
IC>
VA>
VB>
VC>
&
V2>
I2
ANY POLE DEAD
240ms
DIA>
DIB>
DIC>
VTS_MANRESET
VTS_AUTORESET
MCB / VTS OPTO
&
&
&
S
R
tVTS
0
S
R
&
&
SLOW BLOCK
FAST BLOCK
&
VTS_BLOCKING
ANY VOLTAGE
DEPENDENT FUNCTION
ACCELERATE IND
&
&
&
S
R
&
S
R
INDICATION
20ms
0
P2226ENa
Note: The accelerated ind input is not used in the generator protection.
Figure 19: VTS logic
Required to drive the VTS logic are a number of dedicated level detectors as follows:
IA>, IB>, IC>, these level detectors operate in less than 20ms and their settings
should be greater than load current. This setting is specified as the VTS current
threshold. These level detectors pick-up at 100% of setting and drop-off at 95%
of setting.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 81/116
I2>, this level detector operates on negative sequence current and has a user
setting. This level detector picks-up at 100% of setting and drops-off at 95% of
setting.
DIIA>, DIB>, DIC>, these level detectors operate on superimposed phase

currents and have a fixed setting of 10% of nominal. These level detectors are
subject to a count strategy such that 0.5 cycle of operate decisions must have
occured before operation.
VA>, VB>, VC>, these level detectors operate on phase voltages and have a
fixed setting, Pick-up level = 30V (Vn = 100/120V), 120V (Vn = 380/480V),
Drop Off level = 10V (Vn = 100/120V), 40V (Vn = 380/480V).
V2>, this level detector operates on negative sequence voltage, it has a fixed
setting of 10V/40V depending on VT rating (100/120 or 380/480) with pick-up at
100% of setting and drop-off at 95% of setting.
4.1.2.1 Inputs
Signal Name
Description
IA>, IB>, IC>
Phase current levels (Fourier Magnitudes)
I2>
I2 level (Fourier Magnitude)
DIA, DIB, DIC
Phase current samples (current and one cycle

previous)
VA>, VB>, VC>
Phase voltage signals (Fourier Magnitudes)
V2>
Negative Sequence voltage (Fourier

Magnitude)
All Pole Dead
Breaker is open for all phases (driven from

auxiliary contact or pole dead logic)
VTS_Manreset
A VTS reset performed via front panel or

remotely
VTS_Autoreset
A setting to allow the VTS to automatically

reset after this delay
MCB/VTS Opto
To remotely initiate the VTS blocking via an

opto
Any Voltage Dependent Function
Outputs from any function that utilises the

system voltage, if any of these elements
operate before a VTS is detected the VTS is
blocked from operation. The outputs include
starts and trips
Accelerate Ind
Signal from a fast tripping voltage dependent

function used to accelerate indications when
the indicate only option is selected
Any Pole Dead
Breaker is open on one or more than one

phases (driven from auxiliary contact or pole
dead logic)
tVTS
The VTS timer setting for latched operation
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 82/116
MiCOM P341
4.1.2.2 Outputs
Signal Name
4.1.3
Description
VTS Fast Block
Used to block voltage dependent functions
VTS Slow block
Used to block the Any Pole dead signal
VTS Indication
Signal used to indicate a VTS operation
Menu settings
The VTS settings are found in the SUPERVISION column of the relay menu. The
relevant settings are detailed below:
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Max.
Step Size
SUPERVISION
VTS Status
Blocking
Blocking, Indication
VTS Reset Mode
Manual
Manual, Auto
VTS Time Delay
5s
1s
10 s
0.1 s
VTS I> Inhibit
10In
0.08In
32In
0.01In
VTS I2> Inhibit
0.05In
0.05In
0.5In
0.01In
The relay may respond as follows, on operation of any VTS element:
VTS set to provide alarm indication only (DDB 292 VT Fail Alarm);
Optional blocking of voltage dependent protection elements (DDB 736 VTS Fast
Block, DDB 737 VTS Slow Block);
Optional conversion of directional overcurrent, earth fault and SEF elements to

non-directional protection (available when VTS set to Blocking mode only). These
settings are found in the Function Links cell of the relevant protection element
columns in the menu.
Time delayed protection elements (Directional SEF, Directional Earth Fault, Power,
Sensitive Power) are blocked after the VTS Time Delay on operation of the VTS Slow
Block. Fast operating protection elements (Neutral Voltage Displacement, Directional
Overcurrent, Undervoltage) are blocked on operation of the VTS Fast Block.
Other protections can be selectively blocked by customising the PSL, integrating DDB
736 VTS Fast Block and DDB 737 VTS Slow Block with the protection function logic.
The VTS I> Inhibit or VTS I2> Inhibit elements are used to override a VTS block in
the event of a fault occurring on the system which could trigger the VTS logic. Once
the VTS block has been established, however, it would be undesirable for subsequent
system faults to override the block. The VTS block will therefore be latched after a
user settable time delay VTS Time Delay.
Once the signal has latched then two methods of resetting are available. The first is
manually via the front panel interface (or remote communications) provided the VTS
condition has been removed and secondly, when in Auto mode, by the restoration
of the 3 phase voltages above the phase level detector settings mentioned previously.
A VTS indication will be given after the VTS Time Delay has expired. In the case
where the VTS is set to indicate only the relay may potentially maloperate, depending
on which protection elements are enabled. In this case the VTS indication will be
given prior to the VTS time delay expiring if a trip signal is given.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 83/116
Where a miniature circuit breaker (MCB) is used to protect the voltage transformer ac
output circuits, it is common to use MCB auxiliary contacts to indicate a three phase
output disconnection. As previously described, it is possible for the VTS logic to
operate correctly without this input. However, this facility has been provided for
compatibility with various utilities current practices. Energising an opto-isolated input
assigned to MCB Open on the relay will therefore provide the necessary block.
Where directional overcurrent elements are converted to non-directional protection
on VTS operation, it must be ensured that the current pick-up setting of these
elements is higher than full load current.
4.2

The current transformer supervision feature is used to detect failure of one or more of
the ac phase current inputs to the relay. Failure of a phase CT or an open circuit of
the interconnecting wiring can result in incorrect operation of any current operated
element. Additionally, interruption in the ac current circuits risks dangerous CT
secondary voltages being generated.
4.2.1

The CT supervision feature operates on detection of derived residual current, in the
absence of corresponding derived residual voltage that would normally accompany
it.
The CT supervision can be set to operate from the residual voltage measured at the
VNEUTRAL input or the residual voltage derived from the 3 phase-neutral voltage
inputs as selected by the CTS Vn Input setting.
The voltage transformer connection used must be able to refer residual voltages from
the primary to the secondary side. Thus, this element should only be enabled where
the VT is of five limb construction, or comprises three single phase units, and has the
primary star point earthed. A derived residual voltage or a measured residual
voltage is available.
Operation of the element will produce a time-delayed alarm visible on the LCD and
event record (plus DDB 293: CT Fail Alarm), with an instantaneous block (DDB 738:
CTS Block) for inhibition of protection elements. Protection elements operating from
derived quantities are always blocked on operation of the CT supervision element;
other protections can be selectively blocked by customising the PSL, integrating DDB
738: CTS Block with the protection function logic.
CTS block
I N>
&
Time delay
CTS alarm
V N<
P2130ENa
Figure 20: CT supervision function block diagram

The following table shows the relay menu for the CT Supervision element, including
the available setting ranges and factory defaults:
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 84/116
MiCOM P341
Menu Text
Setting Range
Default Setting
Min.
Max.
Step Size
GROUP 1 SUPERVISION
CT Supervision
CTS Status
4.2.2
Sub Heading
Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
N/A
CTS VN< Inhibit
0.5/2V
For
110/440V
respectively
22/88V
For
110/440V
respectively
0.5/2V
For
110/440V
respectively
CTS IN> Set
0.08 x In
4 x In
0.01 x In
CTS Time Delay
0s
10s
1s
Setting the CT supervision element

The residual voltage setting, "CTS Vn< Inhibit" and the residual current setting,
"CTS In> set", should be set to avoid unwanted operation during healthy system
conditions. For example "CTS Vn< Inhibit" should be set to 120% of the maximum
steady state residual voltage. The "CTS In> set" will typically be set below minimum
load current. The time-delayed alarm, "CTS Time Delay", is generally set to 5
seconds.
Where the magnitude of residual voltage during an earth fault is unpredictable, the
element can be disabled to prevent protection elements being blocked during fault
conditions.
4.3
Circuit breaker state monitoring

An operator at a remote location requires a reliable indication of the state of the
switchgear. Without an indication that each circuit breaker is either open or closed,
the operator has insufficient information to decide on switching operations. The relay
incorporates circuit breaker state monitoring, giving an indication of the position of
the circuit breaker, or, if the state is unknown, an alarm is raised.
4.3.1

MiCOM relays can be set to monitor normally open (52a) and normally closed (52b)
auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. Under healthy conditions, these contacts will
be in opposite states. Should both sets of contacts be open, this would indicate one
of the following conditions:
Auxiliary contacts/wiring defective.
Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective.
CB is in isolated position.
Should both sets of contacts be closed, only one of the following two conditions
would apply:
Auxiliary contacts/wiring defective.
Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective.
If any of the above conditions exist, an alarm will be issued after a 5s time delay. A
normally open/normally closed output contact can be assigned to this function via the
programmable scheme logic (PSL). The time delay is set to avoid unwanted
operation during normal switching duties.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 85/116
In the CB CONTROL column of the relay menu there is a setting called CB Status
Input. This cell can be set at one of the following four options:
None
52A
52B
Both 52A and 52B
Where None is selected no CB status will be available. This will directly affect any
function within the relay that requires this signal, for example CB control, autoreclose, etc. Where only 52A is used on its own then the relay will assume a 52B
signal from the absence of the 52A signal. Circuit breaker status information will be
available in this case but no discrepancy alarm will be available. The above is also
true where only a 52B is used. If both 52A and 52B are used then status information
will be available and in addition a discrepancy alarm will be possible, according to
the following table. 52A and 52B inputs are assigned to relay opto-isolated inputs
via the PSL. The CB state monitoring logic is shown in Figure 21.
Auxiliary Contact Position
CB State Detected
Action
52A
52B
Open
Closed
Breaker open
Circuit breaker healthy
Closed
Open
Breaker closed
Circuit breaker healthy
Closed
Closed
CB failure
Alarm raised if the

condition persists for
greater than 5s
Open
Open
State unknown
Alarm raised if the

condition persists for
greater than 5s
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 86/116
MiCOM P341
SETTING [0711] :
CB Status Input
G118-0 : None
G118-1 : 52A
G118-2 : 52B
G118-3 : Both 52A & 52B
AND
DDB #381 : CB Aux 3ph(52-A)
AND
DDB #755 : CB Closed 3ph
OR
AND
OR
DATA [000C] :
Plant Status
XOR
Bit 0 : CB1 Open

Bit 1 : CB1 Closed
AND
OR
AND
OR
DDB #754 : CB Open 3ph
AND
AND
5s
0s
DDB #302 : CB Status Alarm
XOR
DDB #382 : CB Aux 3ph(52-B)
P2227ENa
Figure 21: CB state monitoring

4.4
Pole dead logic

The Pole Dead Logic can be used to give an indication if one or more phases of the
line are dead. It can also be used to selectively block operation of both the under
frequency, under voltage and power elements. The under voltage protection will be
blocked by a pole dead condition provided the Pole Dead Inhibit setting is enabled.
Any of the four under frequency elements can be blocked by setting the relevant F<
function links. The Power and Senistive Power protection will be blocked by a pole
dead condition provided the Pole Dead Inhibit setting is enabled.
A pole dead condition can be determined by either monitoring the status of the circuit
breaker auxiliary contacts or by measuring the line currents and voltages. The status
of the circuit breaker is provided by the CB State Monitoring logic. If a CB Open
signal (DDB 794) is given the relay will automatically initiate a pole dead condition
regardless of the current and voltage measurement. Similarly if both the line current
and voltage fall below a pre-set threshold the relay will also initiate a pole dead
condition. This is necessary so that a pole dead indication is still given even when an
upstream breaker is opened. The under voltage (V<) and under current (I<)
thresholds have the following, fixed, pickup and drop-off levels:
Settings
V< Pick-up and drop off
I< Pick-up and drop off
Range
10V and 30V (100/120V)
40V and 120V (380/480V)
0.05 In and 0.055In
Step Size
Fixed
Fixed
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 87/116
If one or more poles are dead the relay will indicate which phase is dead and will
also assert the ANY POLE DEAD DDB signal (DDB 758). If all phases were dead the
ANY POLE DEAD signal would be accompanied by the ALL POLE DEAD DDB signal
(DDB 757).
In the event that the VT fails a signal is taken from the VTS logic (DDB 737 Slow
Block) to block the pole dead indications that would be generated by the under
voltage and undercurrent thresholds. However, the VTS logic will not block the pole
dead indications if they are initiated by a CB Open signal (DDB 754).
The pole dead logic diagram is shown below:
Ia<
Va<
Ib<
Vb<
Ic<
Vc<
&
20ms
t
0
Pole A Dead
DDB 759
&
20ms
t
0
Pole B Dead
DDB 760
&
20ms
t
0
Pole C Dead
DDB 761
From VTS Logic

VTS Slow Block
DDB 737
Any Pole Dead

DDB 758
&
All Poles Dead

DDB 757
From CB Status
Monitoring Logic
CB Open
DDB 754
P2186ena
Figure 22: Pole dead logic

4.5

Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to ensure that the trip circuit and
mechanism operate correctly, and also that the interrupting capability has not been
compromised due to previous fault interruptions. Generally, such maintenance is
based on a fixed time interval, or a fixed number of fault current interruptions. These
methods of monitoring circuit breaker condition give a rough guide only and can
lead to excessive maintenance.
The P340 relays record various statistics related to each circuit breaker trip operation,
allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be
determined. These monitoring features are discussed in the following section.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 88/116
4.5.1
MiCOM P341
Circuit breaker condition monitoring features

For each circuit breaker trip operation the relay records statistics as shown in the
following table taken from the relay menu. The menu cells shown are counter values
only. The Min/Max values in this case show the range of the counter values. These
cells can not be set:
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min
Max
Step Size
CB CONDITION
CB operations
{3 pole tripping}
10000
Total IA Broken
25000In^
Total IB Broken
25000In^
Total IC Broken
25000In^
1In^
CB operate time
0.5s
0.001
Reset CB Data
No
Yes, No
The above counters may be reset to zero, for example, following a maintenance
inspection and overhaul.
The following table, detailing the options available for the CB condition monitoring, is
taken from the relay menu. It includes the set up of the current broken facility and
those features which can be set to raise an alarm or CB lockout.
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Max.
Step Size
CB MONITOR
SETUP
Broken I^
I^ Maintenance
Alarm disabled
I^ Maintenance
1000In^
I^ Lockout
Alarm disabled
I^ Lockout
2000In^
No CB Ops Maint
Alarm disabled
No CB Ops Maint
10
No CB Ops Lock
Alarm disabled
No CB Ops Lock
20
CB Time Maint
Alarm disabled
CB Time Maint
0.1s
CB Time Lockout
Alarm disabled
CB Time Lockout
0.2s
Fault Freq Lock

Fault Freq Count
Alarm disabled
10
0.1
Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled

1In^
25000In^
1In^

1In^
25000In^
1In^

1
10000

1
10000

0.005s
0.5s
0.001s

0.005s
0.5s
0.001s

1
9999
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 89/116
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Max.
9999s
Step Size
CB MONITOR
SETUP
Fault Freq Time
3600s
1s
The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters will be updated every time the relay
issues a trip command. In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external
protection device it is also possible to update the CB condition monitoring. This is
achieved by allocating one of the relays opto-isolated inputs (via the programmable
scheme logic) to accept a trigger from an external device. The signal that is mapped
to the opto is called Ext Trip 3Ph, DDB 380.
Note that when in Commissioning test mode the CB condition monitoring counters
will not be updated.
4.5.2
Setting guidelines
4.5.2.1 Setting the S I^ thresholds

Where overhead lines are prone to frequent faults and are protected by oil circuit
breakers (OCBs), oil changes account for a large proportion of the life cycle cost of
the switchgear. Generally, oil changes are performed at a fixed interval of circuit
breaker fault operations. However, this may result in premature maintenance where
fault currents tend to be low, and hence oil degradation is slower than expected. The
S I^ counter monitors the cumulative severity of the duty placed on the interrupter
allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be made.
For OCBs, the dielectric withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of
S I2t. This is where I is the fault current broken, and t is the arcing time within the
interrupter tank (not the interrupting time). As the arcing time cannot be determined
accurately, the relay would normally be set to monitor the sum of the broken current
squared, by setting Broken I^ = 2.
For other types of circuit breaker, especially those operating on higher voltage
systems, practical evidence suggests that the value of Broken I^ = 2 may be
inappropriate. In such applications Broken I^ may be set lower, typically 1.4 or
1.5. An alarm in this instance may be indicative of the need for gas/vacuum
interrupter HV pressure testing, for example.
The setting range for Broken I^ is variable between 1.0 and 2.0 in 0.1 steps. It is
imperative that any maintenance programme must be fully compliant with the
switchgear manufacturers instructions.
4.5.2.2 Setting the number of operations thresholds
Every operation of a circuit breaker results in some degree of wear for its
components. Thus, routine maintenance, such as oiling of mechanisms, may be
based upon the number of operations. Suitable setting of the maintenance threshold
will allow an alarm to be raised, indicating when preventative maintenance is due.
Should maintenance not be carried out, the relay can be set to lockout the
autoreclose function on reaching a second operations threshold. This prevents
further reclosure when the circuit breaker has not been maintained to the standard
demanded by the switchgear manufacturers maintenance instructions.
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 90/116
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
Certain circuit breakers, such as oil circuit breakers (OCBs) can only perform a
certain number of fault interruptions before requiring maintenance attention. This is
because each fault interruption causes carbonising of the oil, degrading its dielectric
properties. The maintenance alarm threshold "No CB Ops Maint" may be set to
indicate the requirement for oil sampling for dielectric testing, or for more
comprehensive maintenance. Again, the lockout threshold "No CB Ops Lock" may be
set to disable autoreclosure when repeated further fault interruptions could not be
guaranteed. This minimises the risk of oil fires or explosion.
4.5.2.3 Setting the operating time thresholds
Slow CB operation is also indicative of the need for mechanism maintenance.
Therefore, alarm and lockout thresholds (CB Time Maint/CB Time Lockout) are
provided and are settable in the range of 5 to 500ms. This time is set in relation to
the specified interrupting time of the circuit breaker.
4.5.2.4 Setting the excessive fault frequency thresholds
A circuit breaker may be rated to break fault current a set number of times before
maintenance is required. However, successive circuit breaker operations in a short
period of time may result in the need for increased maintenance. For this reason it is
possible to set a frequent operations counter on the relay which allows the number of
operations "Fault Freq Count" over a set time period "Fault Freq Time" to be
monitored. A separate alarm and lockout threshold can be set.
4.6

The relay includes the following options for control of a single circuit breaker:
Local tripping and closing, via the relay menu.
Local tripping and closing, via relay opto-isolated inputs.
Remote tripping and closing, using the relay communications.
It is recommended that separate relay output contacts are allocated for remote circuit
breaker control and protection tripping. This enables the control outputs to be
selected via a local/remote selector switch as shown in Figure 23. Where this feature
is not required the same output contact(s) can be used for both protection and remote
tripping.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 91/116
+ ve
Protection
trip
Trip
0
Close
Remote
control trip
Remote
control close
Local
Remote
Trip
Close
ve
P0123ENa
Figure 23: Remote control of circuit breaker

The following table is taken from the relay menu and shows the available settings
and commands associated with circuit breaker control. Depending on the relay
model some of the cells may not be visible:
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Min.
Max.
Step Size
CB CONTROL
CB control by
Disabled
Disabled, Local, Remote, Local+Remote, Opto,

Opto+Local, Opto+Remote, Opto+Rem+Local
Close Pulse Time
0.5 s
0.01 s
10 s
0.01 s
Trip Pulse Time
0.5 s
0.01 s
5s
0.01 s
Man Close Delay
10 s
0.01 s
600 s
0.01 s
CB Healthy Time
5s
0.01 s
9999 s
0.01 s
Lockout Reset
No
No, Yes
Reset Lockout By
CB Close
User Interface, CB Close
Man Close RstDly
5s
CB Status Input
None
0.01 s
600 s
0.01 s
None, 52A, 52B, Both 52A and 52B
A manual trip will be permitted provided that the circuit breaker is initially closed.
Likewise, a close command can only be issued if the CB is initially open. To confirm
these states it will be necessary to use the breaker 52A and/or 52B contacts (the
different selection options are given from the CB Status Input cell above). If no CB
auxiliary contacts are available then this cell should be set to None. Under these
circumstances no CB control (manual or auto) will be possible.
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 92/116
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
Once a CB Close command is initiated the output contact can be set to operate
following a user defined time delay (Man Close Delay). This would give personnel
time to move away from the circuit breaker following the close command. This time
delay will apply to all manual CB Close commands.
The length of the trip or close control pulse can be set via the Trip Pulse Time and
Close Pulse Time settings respectively. These should be set long enough to ensure
the breaker has completed its open or close cycle before the pulse has elapsed.
Note that the manual close commands are found in the SYSTEM DATA
column of the menu.
If an attempt to close the breaker is being made, and a protection trip signal is
generated, the protection trip command overrides the close command.
There is also a CB Healthy check if required. This facility accepts an input to one of
the relays opto-isolators to indicate that the breaker is capable of closing (circuit
breaker energy for example). A user settable time delay is included "CB Healthy
Time" for manual closure with this check. If the CB does not indicate a healthy
condition in this time period following a close command then the relay will lockout
and alarm.
If the CB fails to respond to the control command (indicated by no change in the state
of CB Status inputs) a "CB Failed to Trip" or "CB Failed to Close" alarm will be
generated after the relevant trip or close pulses have expired. These alarms can be
viewed on the relay LCD display, remotely via the relay communications, or can be
assigned to operate output contacts for annunciation using the relays programmable
scheme logic (PSL).
The "Lockout Reset" and "Reset Lockout by" setting cells in the menu are applicable to
CB Lockouts associated with manual circuit breaker closure, CB Condition monitoring
(Number of circuit breaker operations, for example).
The lockout alarms can be reset using the Lockout Reset command or the by
pressing the Clear key after reading the alarm or by closing the CB if the Reset
Lockout By setting is set to CB Close or via an opto input using DDB 175, Reset
Lockout. If lockout is reset by closing the CB then there is a time delay after closing
the CB to resetting of lockout, the Man Close RstDly.
4.7

The trip circuit, in most protective schemes, extends beyond the relay enclosure and
passes through components such as fuses, links, relay contacts, auxiliary switches and
other terminal boards. This complex arrangement, coupled with the importance of
the trip circuit, has led to dedicated schemes for its supervision.
Several trip circuit supervision schemes with various features can be produced with
the P340 range. Although there are no dedicated settings for TCS, in the P340, the
following schemes can be produced using the programmable scheme logic (PSL). A
user alarm is used in the PSL to issue an alarm message on the relay front display. If
necessary, the user alarm can be re-named using the menu text editor to indicate that
there is a fault with the trip circuit.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
4.7.1
Page 93/116
TCS scheme 1
4.7.1.1 Scheme description
Optional
P2228ENa
Figure 24: TCS scheme 1

This scheme provides supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open or closed,
however, pre-closing supervision is not provided. This scheme is also incompatible
with latched trip contacts, as a latched contact will short out the opto for greater than
the recommended DDO timer setting of 400ms. If breaker status monitoring is
required a further 1 or 2 opto inputs must be used. Note, a 52a CB auxiliary contact
follows the CB position and a 52b contact is the opposite.
When the breaker is closed, supervision current passes through the opto input,
blocking diode and trip coil. When the breaker is open current still flows through the
opto input and into the trip coil via the 52b auxiliary contact. Hence, no supervision
of the trip path is provided whilst the breaker is open. Any fault in the trip path will
only be detected on CB closing, after a 400ms delay.
Resistor R1 is an optional resistor that can be fitted to prevent mal-operation of the
circuit breaker if the opto input is inadvertently shorted, by limiting the current to
<60mA. The resistor should not be fitted for auxiliary voltage ranges of 30/34 volts
or less, as satisfactory operation can no longer be guaranteed. The table below
shows the appropriate resistor value and voltage setting (OPTO CONFIG menu) for
this scheme.
This TCS scheme will function correctly even without resistor R1, since the opto input
automatically limits the supervision current to less that 10mA. However, if the opto is
accidentally shorted the circuit breaker may trip.
Auxiliary Voltage (Vx)
Resistor R1 (ohms)
Opto Voltage Setting with

R1 Fitted
24/27
30/34
48/54
1.2k
24/27
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 94/116
MiCOM P341
110/250
2.5k
48/54
220/250
5.0k
110/125
Note:
When R1 is not fitted the opto voltage setting must be set equal
to supply voltage of the supervision circuit.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
4.7.2
Page 95/116
Scheme 1 PSL
Figure 25 shows the scheme logic diagram for the TCS scheme 1. Any of the
available opto inputs can be used to indicate whether or not the trip circuit is healthy.
The delay on drop off timer operates as soon as the opto is energised, but will take
400ms to drop off / reset in the event of a trip circuit failure. The 400ms delay
prevents a false alarm due to voltage dips caused by faults in other circuits or during
normal tripping operation when the opto input is shorted by a self-reset trip contact.
When the timer is operated the NC (normally closed) output relay opens and the LED
and user alarms are reset.
The 50ms delay on pick-up timer prevents false LED and user alarm indications
during the relay power up time, following an auxiliary supply interruption.
0
Opto Input
Drop-Off
Straight
400
&
Latching
50
Pick-up
NC Output Relay
LED
User Alarm
P2229ENa
Figure 25: PSL for TCS schemes 1 and 3

4.7.3
TCS scheme 2
Optional
Optional
P2230ENa

Much like scheme 1, this scheme provides supervision of the trip coil with the breaker
open or closed and also does not provide pre-closing supervision. However, using
two opto inputs allows the relay to correctly monitor the circuit breaker status since
they are connected in series with the CB auxiliary contacts. This is achieved by
assigning Opto A to the 52a contact and Opto B to the 52b contact. Provided the
Circuit Breaker Status is set to 52a and 52b (CB CONTROL column) and optos A
and B are connected to CB Aux 3ph (52a) (DDB 381) and CB Aux 3ph (52b) (DDB
382) the relay will correctly monitor the status of the breaker. This scheme is also
fully compatible with latched contacts as the supervision current will be maintained
through the 52b contact when the trip contact is closed.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 96/116
MiCOM P341
When the breaker is closed, supervision current passes through opto input A and the
trip coil. When the breaker is open current flows through opto input B and the trip
coil. As with scheme 1, no supervision of the trip path is provided whilst the breaker
is open. Any fault in the trip path will only be detected on CB closing, after a 400ms
delay.
As with scheme 1, optional resistors R1 and R2 can be added to prevent tripping of
the CB if either opto is shorted. The resistor values of R1 and R2 are equal and can
be set the same as R1 in scheme 1.
4.7.4
Scheme 2 PSL
The PSL for this scheme (Figure 27) is practically the same as that of scheme 1. The
main difference being that both opto inputs must be off before a trip circuit fail alarm
is given.
DDB381
CB Aux 3ph (52a)
Opto Input A
1
Opto Input B
0
Drop-Off
400
0
Straight
0
Output Relay
Latching
LED
DDB382
CB Aux 3ph (52b)
&
0
Pick-Up
50
User Alarm
P2187ENa
Figure 27: PSL for TCS scheme 2

4.7.5
TCS scheme 3
P2231ENa
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 97/116
Scheme 3 is designed to provide supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open or
closed, but unlike schemes 1 and 2, it also provides pre-closing supervision. Since
only one opto input is used, this scheme is not compatible with latched trip contacts.
If circuit breaker status monitoring is required a further 1 or 2 opto inputs must be
used.
When the breaker is closed, supervision current passes through the opto input,
resistor R1 and the trip coil. When the breaker is open current flows through the opto
input, resistors R1 and R2 (in parallel), resistor R3 and the trip coil. Unlike schemes 1
and 2, supervision current is maintained through the trip path with the breaker in
either state, thus giving pre-closing supervision.
As with schemes 1 and 2, resistors R1 and R2 are used to prevent false tripping, if the
opto-input is accidentally shorted. However, unlike the other two schemes, this
scheme is dependent upon the position and value of these resistors. Removing them
would result in incomplete trip circuit monitoring. The table below shows the resistor
values and voltage settings required for satisfactory operation.
Auxiliary Voltage
(Vx)
Resistor R1 & R2
(ohms)
Resistor R3 (ohms)
Opto Voltage
Setting
24/27
30/34
48/54
1.2k
0.6k
24/27
110/250
2.5k
1.2k
48/54
220/250
5.0k
2.5k
110/125
Note:
4.7.6
Scheme 3 is not compatible with auxiliary supply voltages of

30/34 volts and below.
Scheme 3 PSL
The PSL for scheme 3 is identical to that of scheme 1 (see Figure 25).
4.8
Event & fault records

The relay records and time tags up to 250 events and stores them in non-volatile
(battery backed up) memory. This enables the system operator to establish the
sequence of events that occurred within the relay following a particular power system
condition, switching sequence etc. When the available space is exhausted, the oldest
event is automatically overwritten by the new one.
The real time clock within the relay provides the time tag to each event, to a
resolution of 1ms.
The event records are available for viewing either via the frontplate LCD or remotely,
via the communications ports.
Local viewing on the LCD is achieved in the menu column entitled "VIEW RECORDS".
This column allows viewing of event, fault and maintenance records and is shown the
following table:
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 98/116
MiCOM P341
VIEW RECORDS
LCD Reference
Select Event
Description
Setting range from 0 to 249. This selects the required
event record from the possible 250 that may be stored. A
value of 0 corresponds to the latest event and so on.
Time & Date
Time & Date Stamp for the event given by the internal Real
Time Clock
Event Text
Up to 32 Character description of the Event refer to

following sections)
Event Value
Up to 32 Bit Binary Flag or integer representative of the

Event (refer to following sections)
Select Fault
Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required fault

record from the possible 5 that may be stored. A value of 0
corresponds to the latest fault and so on.
The following cells show all the fault flags, protection starts,
protection trips, fault location, measurements etc. associated
with the fault, i.e. the complete fault record.
Select Report
Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required

maintenance report from the possible 5 that may be stored.
A value of 0 corresponds to the latest report and so on.
Report Text
Up to 32 Character description of the occurrence (refer to

following sections)
Report Type
These cells are numbers representative of the occurrence.

They form a specific error code which should be quoted in
any related correspondence to AREVA T&D.
Reset Indication
Either Yes or No. This serves to reset the trip LED indications
provided that the relevant protection element has reset.
For extraction from a remote source via communications, refer to the SCADA
Communications section, where the procedure is fully explained.
Note that a full list of all the event types and the meaning of their values is given in
Appendix A.
4.8.1
Types of event
An event may be a change of state of a control input or output relay, an alarm
condition, setting change etc. The following sections show the various items that
constitute an event:
4.8.1.1 Change of state of opto-isolated inputs

If one or more of the opto (logic) inputs has changed state since the last time that the
protection algorithm ran, the new status is logged as an event. When this event is
selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will become visible as shown
below:
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 99/116
Time & date of event

LOGIC INPUTS
Event Value
0101010101010101
The Event Value is an 8 or 16 bit word showing the status of the opto inputs, where
the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to opto input 1 etc. The same
information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC.
4.8.1.2 Change of state of one or more output relay contacts
If one or more of the output relay contacts has changed state since the last time that
the protection algorithm ran, then the new status is logged as an event. When this
event is selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will become visible
as shown below:
Time & date of event
OUTPUT CONTACTS
Event Value
010101010101010101010
The Event Value is a 7, 14 or 21 bit word showing the status of the output contacts,
where the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to output contact 1 etc. The
same information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC.
4.8.1.3 Relay alarm conditions
Any alarm conditions generated by the relays will also be logged as individual events.
The following table shows examples of some of the alarm conditions and how they
appear in the event list:
Alarm Condition
Resulting Event
Event Text
Event Value
Battery Fail
Battery Fail ON/OFF
Bit position 0 in 32 bit field
Field Voltage Fail
Field V Fail ON/OFF
Setting Group Via Opto

Invalid
Setting Grp Invalid ON/OFF
Protection Disabled
Protn Disabled ON/OFF
Frequency Out of Range
Freq out of Range ON/OFF
VTS Alarm
VT Fail Alarm ON/OFF
CB Trip Fail Protection
CB Fail ON/OFF
User Alarm (Self Reset)
User Alarm 1, 2 ON/OFF
Bit position 29, 30 in 32 bit

field
User Alarm (Manual Reset)
User Alarm 3 ON/OFF
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 100/116
MiCOM P341
The previous table shows the abbreviated description that is given to the various
alarm conditions and also a corresponding value which displays alarms as bit
positions in a 32 bit field. The bit will be set to 1 if the alarm is ON and 0 if it is OFF.
This value is appended to each alarm event in a similar way as for the input and
output events previously described. It is used by the event extraction software, such as
MiCOM S1, to identify the alarm and is therefore invisible if the event is viewed on
the LCD. Either ON or OFF is shown after the description to signify whether the
particular condition has become operated or has reset.
4.8.1.4 Protection element starts and trips
Any operation of protection elements, (either a start or a trip condition), will be
logged as an event record, consisting of a text string indicating the operated element
and an event value. Again, this value is intended for use by the event extraction
software, such as MiCOM S1, rather than for the user, and is therefore invisible when
the event is viewed on the LCD.
4.8.1.5 General events
A number of events come under the heading of General Events - an example is
shown below:
Nature of Event
Level 1 password modified,
either from user interface,
front or rear port
Displayed Text in Event Record
Displayed Value
PW1 edited UI, F or R
6, 11, 16
respectively
A complete list of the General Events is given in Appendix A.

4.8.1.6 Fault records
Each time a fault record is generated, an event is also created. The event simply
states that a fault record was generated, with a corresponding time stamp.
Note that viewing of the actual fault record is carried out in the "Select Fault" cell
further down the "VIEW RECORDS" column, which is selectable from up to 5 records.
These records consist of fault flags, fault location, fault measurements etc. Also note
that the time stamp given in the fault record itself will be more accurate than the
corresponding stamp given in the event record as the event is logged some time after
the actual fault record is generated.
The fault record is triggered from the Fault REC TRIG signal assigned in the default
programmable scheme logic to relay 3, protection trip. Note, the fault measurements
in the fault record are given at the time of the protection start. Also, the fault
recorder does not stop recording until any start or relay 3 (protection trip) resets in
order to record all the protection flags during the fault.
It is recommended that the triggering contact (relay 3 for example) be self reset and
not latching. If a latching contact was chosen the fault record would not be
generated until the contact had fully reset.
4.8.1.7 Maintenance reports
Internal failures detected by the self monitoring circuitry, such as watchdog failure,
field voltage failure etc. are logged into a maintenance report. The Maintenance
Report holds up to 5 such events and is accessed from the "Select Report" cell at the
bottom of the "VIEW RECORDS" column.
Each entry consists of a self explanatory text string and a Type and Data cell, which
are explained in the menu extract at the beginning of this section and in further detail
in Appendix A.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 101/116
Each time a Maintenance Report is generated, an event is also created. The event
simply states that a report was generated, with a corresponding time stamp.
4.8.1.8 Setting changes
Changes to any setting within the relay are logged as an event. Two examples are
shown in the following table:
Type of setting change
Displayed Text in Event Record
Displayed Value
Control/Support Setting
C & S Changed
22
Group 1 Changed
24
Group 1 Change
Note:
4.8.2
Control/Support settings are communications, measurement, CT/VT ratio

settings etc, which are not duplicated within the four setting groups. When
any of these settings are changed, the event record is created
simultaneously. However, changes to protection or disturbance recorder
settings will only generate an event once the settings have been confirmed at
the setting trap.
Resetting of event/fault records
If it is required to delete either the event, fault or maintenance reports, this may be
done from within the "RECORD CONTROL" column.
4.8.3
Viewing event records via MiCOM S1 support software

When the event records are extracted and viewed on a PC they look slightly different
than when viewed on the LCD. The following shows an example of how various
events appear when displayed using MiCOM S1:
- Monday 03 November 1998 15:32:49 GMT I>1 Start ON 2147483881
ALSTOM : MiCOM
Model Number: P141
Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 23
Event Type: Protection operation
- Monday 03 November 1998 15:32:52 GMT Fault Recorded 0
ALSTOM : MiCOM
Model Number: P141
Event Type: Fault record
- Monday 03 November 1998 15:33:11 GMT Logic Inputs 00000000
ALSTOM : MiCOM
Model Number: P141
Event Type: Logic input changed state
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 102/116
MiCOM P341
- Monday 03 November 1998 15:34:54 GMT Output Contacts 0010000
ALSTOM : MiCOM
Model Number: P141
Event Type: Relay output changed state
As can be seen, the first line gives the description and time stamp for the event, whilst
the additional information that is displayed below may be collapsed via the +/
symbol.
For further information regarding events and their specific meaning, refer to
Appendix A.
4.8.4
Event filtering
It is possible to disable the reporting of events from any user interface that supports
setting changes. The settings which control the various types of events are in the
Record Control column. The effect of setting each to disabled is as follows:
Alarm Event
None of the occurrences that produce an alarm will result in

an event being generated.
The presence of any alarms is still reported by the alarm LED
flashing and the alarm bit being set in the communications
status byte.
Alarms can still be read using the Read key on the relay front
panel.
Relay O/P Event
No event will be generated for any change in relay output

state.
Opto Input Event
No event will be generated for any change in logic input

state.
General Event
No General Events will be generated.
Fault Rec Event
No event will be generated for any fault that produces a fault

record.
The fault records can still be viewed by operating the Select
Fault setting in column 0100.
Maint Rec Event
No event will be generated for any occurrence that produces

a maintenance record.
The maintenance records can still be viewed by operating the
Select Maint setting in column 0100.
Protection Event
Any operation of protection elements will not be logged as an

event.
Note that some occurrences will result in more than one type of event, e.g. a battery
failure will produce an alarm event and a maintenance record event.
If the Protection Event setting is Enabled a further set of settings is revealed which
allow the event generation by individual DDB signals to be enabled 1 or disabled
0.
As can be seen, the first line gives the description and time stamp for the event, whilst
the additional information that is displayed below may be collapsed via the +/
symbol.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 103/116
For further information regarding events and their specific meaning, refer to
Appendix A.
4.9
The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside for
record storage. The number of records that may be stored by COURIER MODBUS
and DNP3.0 relays is dependent upon the selected recording duration but the relays
typically have the capability of storing a minimum of 20 records, each of 10.5 second
duration. VDEW relays, which have an un-compressed disturbance recorder, can
only store 8 records of typically 1.8 seconds at 50 Hz or 8 records of approximately
1.5 seconds duration at 60 Hz. Disturbance records continue to be recorded until the
available memory is exhausted, at which time the oldest record(s) are overwritten to
make space for the newest one.
The recorder stores actual samples which are taken at a rate of 12 samples per cycle.
Each disturbance record consists of eight analog data channels and thirty-two digital
data channels. Note that the relevant CT and VT ratios for the analog channels are
also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities). Note that if a CT ratio is set
less than unity, the relay will choose a scaling factor of zero for the appropriate
channel.
The "DISTURBANCE RECORDER" menu column is shown in the following table:
Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Step Size
Min.
Max.
1.5 s
0.1 s
10.5 s
0.01 s
Trigger Position
33.3%
100%
0.1%
Trigger Mode
Single
Single or Extended
Analog Channel 1
VAN
VAN, VBN, VCN, VCHECKSYNC, IA, IB, IC,

IN, IN SEF
Analog Channel 2
VBN
As above
Analog Channel 3
VCN
As above
Analog Channel 4
VN
As above
Analog Channel 5
IA
As above
Analog Channel 6
IB
As above
Analog Channel 7
IC
As above
Analog Channel 8
IN SEF
As above
Digital Inputs 1 to 32
Relays 1 to 7/14
and
Optos 1 to 8/16
Any of 7 or 14 O/P Contacts or

Any of 8 or 16 Opto Inputs or
Internal Digital Signals
Inputs 1 to 32 Trigger
No Trigger
except Dedicated
Trip Relay O/Ps
which are set to
Trigger L/H
DISTURB RECORDER
Duration
Note:
No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L
The available analog and digital signals will differ between relay types and
models and so the individual courier database in the SCADA
Communications section should be referred to when determining default
settings etc.
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 104/116
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
The pre and post fault recording times are set by a combination of the "Duration" and
"Trigger Position" cells. "Duration" sets the overall recording time and the "Trigger
Position" sets the trigger point as a percentage of the duration. For example, the
default settings show that the overall recording time is set to 1.5s with the trigger
point being at 33.3% of this, giving 0.5s pre-fault and 1s post fault recording times.
If a further trigger occurs whilst a recording is taking place, the recorder will ignore
the trigger if the "Trigger Mode" has been set to "Single". However, if this has been
set to "Extended", the post trigger timer will be reset to zero, thereby extending the
recording time.
As can be seen from the menu, each of the analog channels is selectable from the
available analog inputs to the relay. The digital channels may be mapped to any of
the opto isolated inputs or output contacts, in addition to a number of internal relay
digital signals, such as protection starts, LEDs etc. The complete list of these signals
may be found by viewing the available settings in the relay menu or via a setting file
in MiCOM S1. Any of the digital channels may be selected to trigger the disturbance
recorder on either a low to high or a high to low transition, via the "Input Trigger" cell.
The default trigger settings are that any dedicated trip output contacts (e.g. relay 3)
will trigger the recorder.
It is not possible to view the disturbance records locally via the LCD; they must be
extracted using suitable software such as MiCOM S1. This process is fully explained
in the SCADA Communications section.
4.10
Measurements
The relay produces a variety of both directly measured and calculated power system
quantities. These measurement values are updated on a per second basis and are
summarised below:
Phase Voltages and Currents
Phase to Phase Voltage and Currents
Sequence Voltages and Currents
Power and Energy Quantities
Rms. Voltages and Currents
Peak, Fixed and Rolling Demand Values
4.10.1 Measured voltages and currents

The relay produces both phase to ground and phase to phase voltage and current
values. The are produced directly from the DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) used by
the relay protection functions and present both magnitude and phase angle
measurement.
4.10.2 Sequence voltages and currents
Sequence quantities are produced by the relay from the measured Fourier values;
these are displayed as magnitude values.
4.10.3 Power and energy quantities
Using the measured voltages and currents the relay calculates the apparent, real and
reactive power quantities. These are produced on a phase by phase basis together
with three-phase values based on the sum of the three individual phase values. The
signing of the real and reactive power measurements can be controlled using the
measurement mode setting. The four options are defined in the table below:
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 105/116
Measurement Mode
Parameter
Signing
0 (Default)
Export Power
Import Power
Lagging Vars
Leading VArs
Export Power
Import Power
Lagging Vars
Leading VArs
Export Power
Import Power
Lagging Vars
Leading VArs
Export Power
Import Power
Lagging Vars
Leading VArs
Table 2:
+
+
Measurement mode
In addition to the measured power quantities the relay calculates the power factor on
a phase by phase basis in addition to a three-phase power factor.
These power values are also used to increment the total real and reactive energy
measurements. Separate energy measurements are maintained for the total exported
and imported energy. The energy measurements are incremented up to maximum
values of 1000GWhr or 1000GVARhr at which point they will reset to zero, it is also
possible to reset these values using the menu or remote interfaces using the Reset
Demand cell.
4.10.4 Rms. voltages and currents
Rms. Phase voltage and current values are calculated by the relay using the sum of
the samples squared over a cycle of sampled data.
4.10.5 Demand values
The relay produces fixed, rolling and peak demand values, using the Reset Demand
menu cell it is possible to reset these quantities via the User Interface or the remote
communications.
4.10.5.1Fixed demand values
The fixed demand value is the average value of a quantity over the specified interval;
values are produced for each phase current and for three phase real and reactive
power. The fixed demand values displayed by the relay are those for the previous
interval, the values are updated at the end of the fixed demand period.
4.10.5.2Rolling demand values
The rolling demand values are similar to the fixed demand values, the difference
being that a sliding window is used. The rolling demand window consists of a
number of smaller sub-periods. The resolution of the sliding window is the subperiod length, with the displayed values being updated at the end of each of the subperiods.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 106/116
MiCOM P341
4.10.5.3Peak demand values

Peak demand values are produced for each phase current and the real and reactive
power quantities. These display the maximum value of the measured quantity since
the last reset of the demand values.
4.10.6 Settings
The following settings under the heading Measurement setup can be used to
configure the relay measurement function.
Measurement Setup
Default Value
Options/Limits
Description
Description/Plant Reference/
Frequency/Access Level/3Ph + N
Current/3Ph Voltage/Power/Date and time
Local Values
Primary
Primary/Secondary
Remote Values
Primary
Primary/Secondary
VA
VA/VB/VC/IA/IB/IC
0 to 3 Step 1
Fix Dem Period
30 minutes
1 to 99 minutes step 1 minute
Roll Sub Period
30 minutes
1 to 99 minutes step 1 minute
1 to 15 step 1
Distance Unit*
Km
Km/miles
Fault Location*
Distance
Distance/ohms/% of Line
Default Display
Measurement Ref
Measurement Mode
Num Sub Periods
* Note these settings are available for products with integral fault location.
4.10.6.1Default display
This setting can be used to select the default display from a range of options, note
that it is also possible to view the other default displays whilst at the default level
using the and keys. However once the 15 minute timeout elapses the default
display will revert to that selected by this setting.
4.10.6.2Local values
This setting controls whether measured values via the front panel user interface and
the front Courier port are displayed as primary or secondary quantities.
4.10.6.3Remote values
This setting controls whether measured values via the rear communication port are
displayed as primary or secondary quantities.
4.10.6.4Measurement ref
Using this setting the phase reference for all angular measurements by the relay can
be selected.
4.10.6.5Measurement mode
This setting is used to control the signing of the real and reactive power quantities;
the signing convention used is defined in Table 2, section 4.10.3.
4.10.6.6Fixed demand period
This setting defines the length of the fixed demand window.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 107/116
4.10.6.7Rolling sub-period and number of sub-periods

These two settings are used to set the length of the window used for the calculation of
rolling demand quantities and the resolution of the slide for this window.
4.11
Changing setting groups

The setting groups can be changed either via opto inputs or via a menu selection. In
the Configuration column if 'Setting Group - Select Via Optos' is selected then optos 1
and 2, which are dedicated for setting group selection, can be used to select the
setting group as shown in the table below. If 'Setting Group - Select Via Menu' is
selected then in the Configuration column the 'Active Settings - Group1/2/3/4' can be
used to select the setting group. If this option is used then opto inputs 1 and 2 can be
used for other functions in the programmable scheme logic.
OPTO 1
OPTO 2
Selected Setting Group
Note:
4.12
Setting groups comprise both Settings and Programmable Scheme Logic.

Each is independent per group - not shared as common. The settings are
generated in the Settings and Records application within MiCOM S1, or can
be applied directly from the relay front panel menu. The programmable
scheme logic can only be set using the PSL Editor application within MiCOM
S1, generating files with extension ".psl". It is essential that where the
installation needs application-specific PSL, that the appropriate .psl file is
downloaded (sent) to the relay, for each and every setting group that will be
used. If the user fails to download the required .psl file to any setting group
that may be brought into service, then factory default PSL will still be
resident. This may have severe operational and safety consequences.
Control inputs
Menu Text
Default
Setting
Setting Range
Step Size
CONTROL INPUTS
Ctrl I/P Status
00000000000000000000000000000000
Control Input 1
No Operation
No Operation, Set, Reset
Control Input 2 to 32
No Operation
No Operation, Set, Reset
The Control Input commands can be found in the Control Input menu. In the Ctrl
I/P status menu cell there is a 32 bit word which represent the 32 control input
commands. The status of the 32 control inputs can be read from this 32 bit word.
The 32 control inputs can also be set and reset from this cell by setting a 1 to set or 0
to reset a particular control input. Alternatively, each of the 32 Control Inputs can
can be set and reset using the individual menu setting cells Control Input 1, 2, 3, etc.
The Control Inputs are available through the relay menu as described above and also
via the rear communications.
In the programmable scheme logic editor 32 Control Input signals, DDB 832-863,
which can be set to a logic 1 or On state, as described above, are available to
perform control functions defined by the user.
P341/EN AP/D22
Page 108/116
4.13
Application Notes
MiCOM P341
VT connections
4.13.1 Open delta (vee connected) VT's

The P341 relay can be used with vee connected VTs by connecting the VT secondaries
to C19, C20 and C21 input terminals, with the C22 input left unconnected (see
Figures 2 and 17 in Appendix B).
This type of VT arrangement cannot pass zero-sequence (residual) voltage to the
relay, or provide any phase to neutral voltage quantities. Therefore any protection
that is dependent upon zero sequence voltage measurements should be disabled
unless a direct measurement can be made via the measured VN input (C23-C24).
Therefore, neutral displacement protection, sensitive directional earth fault protection,
directional earth fault protection and CT supervision should be disabled unless the
residual voltage is measured directly from the secondary of the earthing transformer
or from a broken delta VT winding on a 5 limb VT.
The under and over voltage protection can be set as phase-to-phase measurement
with vee connected VTs. The directional overcurrent protection uses phase-phase
voltages anyway, therefore the accuracy should not be affected. The protection
functions which use phase-neutral voltages are the power, sensitive power protection
and voltage vector shift protection; all are for detecting abnormal generator
operation under 3-phase balanced conditions, therefore the 'neutral' point, although
'floating' will be approximately at the centre of the three phase voltage vectors.
The accuracy of single phase voltage measurements can be impaired when using vee
connected VTs. The relay attempts to derive the phase to neutral voltages from the
phase to phase voltage vectors. If the impedance of the voltage inputs were perfectly
matched the phase to neutral voltage measurements would be correct, provided the
phase to phase voltage vectors were balanced. However, in practice there are small
differences in the impedance of the voltage inputs, which can cause small errors in
the phase to neutral voltage measurements. This may give rise to an apparent
residual voltage. This problem also extends to single phase power and impedance
measurements that are also dependent upon their respective single phase voltages.
The phase to neutral voltage measurement accuracy can be improved by connecting
3, well matched, load resistors between the phase voltage inputs (C19, C20, C21)
and neutral C22, thus creating a virtual neutral point. The load resistor values must
be chosen so that their power consumption is within the limits of the VT. It is
recommended that 10kW 1% (6W) resistors are used for the 110V (Vn) rated relay,
assuming the VT can supply this burden.
4.13.2 VT single point earthing
The P340 range will function correctly with conventional 3 phase VTs earthed at any
one point on the VT secondary circuit. Typical earthing examples being neutral
earthing and yellow phase earthing.
4.14

The trip LED can be reset when the flags for the last fault are displayed. The flags are
displayed automatically after a trip occurs, or can be selected in the fault record
menu. The reset of trip LED and the fault records is performed by pressing the 0 key
once the fault record has been read.
Setting Sys Fn Links (SYSTEM DATA Column) to logic 1 sets the trip LED to
automatic reset. Resetting will occur when the circuit is reclosed and the Any Pole
Dead signal (DDB 758) has been reset for three seconds. Resetting, however, will
be prevented if the Any start signal is active after the breaker closes.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 109/116
S
Q
R
Tr3Ph (Any Trip)

Reset (Command)
Reset (Logic Input)
SETTING:
SELF RESET
ENABLE
DISABLE
&
Trip LED
3s
0
Any Pole Dead

Any Start
P2129ENa
Figure 29: Trip LED logic diagram

5.
CT/VT REQUIREMENTS
The CT requirements for P341 are as shown below.
The current transformer requirements are based on a maximum prospective fault
current of 50 times the relay rated current (In) and the relay having an instantaneous
setting of 25 times rated current (In). The current transformer requirements are
designed to provide operation of all protection elements.
Where the criteria for a specific application are in excess of those detailed above, or
the actual lead resistance exceeds the limiting value quoted, the CT requirements may
need to be increased according to the formulae in the following sections.
Nominal
Rating
Nominal
Output
Accuracy
Class
Accuracy
Limited Factor
Limiting Lead
Resistance
1A
2.5VA
10P
20
1.3 ohms
5A
7.5VA
10P
20
0.11 ohms
Separate requirements for Restricted Earth Fault and reverse power protection are
given in section 5.6 and 5.7.
5.1
Non-directional definite time/IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection
5.1.1

VK
5.1.2
Icp/2 * (RCT + RL + Rrp)

VK
Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
5.2
Non-directional instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection
5.2.1

VK
5.2.2
Isp * (RCT + RL + Rrp)

VK
Isn * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
5.3
Directional definite time/IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection
5.3.1

VK
Icp/2 * (RCT + RL + Rrp)
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 110/116
5.3.2
MiCOM P341

VK
5.4
Directional instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection
5.4.1

VK
5.4.2
Ifp/2 * (RCT + RL + Rrp)

VK
Ifn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
5.5
Non-directional/directional definite time/IDMT sensitive earth fault (SEF)

protection
5.5.1
Non-directional time delayed SEF protection (residually connected)

VK
5.5.2
Isn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
Directional instantaneous SEF protection (residually connected)

VK
5.5.5
Directional time delayed SEF protection (residually connected)

VK
5.5.4
Non-directional instantaneous SEF protection (residually connected)

VK
5.5.3
Ifn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
SEF protection - as fed from a core-balance CT

Core balance current transformers of metering class accuracy are required and
should have a limiting secondary voltage satisfying the formulae given below:
Directional non-directional time delayed element:
VK
Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrn)
Directional instantaneous element:

VK
Ifn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrn)
Non-directional instantaneous element

VK
Isn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrn)
Note that, in addition, it should be ensured that the phase error of the applied core
balance current transformer is less than 90 minutes at 10% of rated current and less
than 150 minutes at 1% of rated current.
Abbreviations used in the previous formulae are explained below:
where
VK
Required CT knee-point voltage (volts)
Ifn
Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current (amps)
Ifp
Maximum prospective secondary phase fault current (amps)
Icn
Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current or 31 times

I> setting (whichever is lower) (amps)
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
5.6
Page 111/116
Icp
Maximum prospective secondary phase fault current or 31 times

I> setting (whichever is lower) (amps)
Isn
Stage 2 & 3 Earth Fault setting (amps)
Isp
Stage 2 and 3 setting (amps)
RCT =
Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms)
RL
Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms)
Rrp
Impedance of relay phase current input at 30In (ohms)
Rrn
Impedance of the relay neutral current input at 30In (ohms)

The High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault element shall maintain stability for
through faults and operate in less than 40ms for internal faults provided the following
equations are met in determining CT requirements and the value of the associated
stabilising resistor:
IF (RCT + 2RL)
Rst
VK
4 * Is * Rs
VK
Required CT knee-point voltage (volts)
Rst
Value of Stabilising resistor (ohms)
If
Maximum through fault current level (amps)
VK
CT knee point voltage (volts)
IS
Current setting of REF element (amps), (IREF>Is)
Is
where
5.7
RCT =
Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms)
RL
Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms)
Reverse and low forward power protection functions

For both reverse and low forward power protection function settings greater than 3%
Pn, the phase angle errors of suitable protection class current transformers will not
result in any risk of mal-operation or failure to operate. However, for the sensitive
power protection if settings less than 3% are used, it is recommended that the current
input is driven by a correctly loaded metering class current transformer.
5.7.1
Protection class current transformers

For less sensitive power function settings (>3%Pn), the phase current input of the
P340 should be driven by a correctly loaded class 5P protection current transformer.
To correctly load the current transformer, its VA rating should match the VA burden
(at rated current) of the external secondary circuit through which it is required to drive
current.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 112/116
5.7.2
MiCOM P341

For low Power settings (<3%Pn), the In Sensitive current input of the P340 should be
driven by a correctly loaded metering class current transformer. The current
transformer accuracy class will be dependent on the reverse power and low forward
power sensitivity required. The table below indicates the metering class current
transformer required for various power settings below 3%Pn.
To correctly load the current transformer, its VA rating should match the VA burden
(at rated current) of the external secondary circuit through which it is required to drive
current. Use of the P340 sensitive power phase shift compensation feature will help
in this situation.
Reverse and Low Forward Power Settings
%Pn
Metering CT Class
0.5
0.1
0.6
0.8
1.0
0.2
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.5
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
1.0
Sensitive power current transformer requirements

5.8
Converting an IEC185 current transformer standard protection classification

to a kneepoint voltage
The suitability of an IEC standard protection class current transformer can be checked
against the kneepoint voltage requirements specified previously.
If, for example, the available current transformers have a 15VA 5P 10 designation,
then an estimated kneepoint voltage can be obtained as follows:
Vk
VA x ALF
In
+ ALF x In x Rct
where:
Vk
Required kneepoint voltage
VA =
Current transformer rated burden (VA)
ALF =
Accuracy limit factor
In
Current transformer secondary rated current (A)
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 113/116
Rct =
Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (W)
If Rct is not available, then the second term in the above equation can be ignored.
Example: 400/5A, 15VA 5P 10, Rct = 0.2W
Vk
=
=
5.9
15 x 10
5
+ 10 x 5 x 0.2
40V
Converting IEC185 current transformer standard protection classification to

an ANSI/IEEE standard voltage rating
MiCOM Px40 series protection is compatible with ANSI/IEEE current transformers as
specified in the IEEE C57.13 standard. The applicable class for protection is class
"C", which specifies a non air-gapped core. The CT design is identical to IEC class P,
or British Standard class X, but the rating is specified differently.
The ANSI/IEEE C Class standard voltage rating required will be lower than an IEC
knee point voltage. This is because the ANSI/IEEE voltage rating is defined in terms
of useful output voltage at the terminals of the CT, whereas the IEC knee point
voltage includes the voltage drop across the internal resistance of the CT secondary
winding added to the useful output. The IEC/BS knee point is also typically 5% higher
than the ANSI/IEEE knee point.
Therefore
Vc
[ Vk - Internal voltage drop ] / 1.05
[ Vk - (In . RCT . ALF) ] / 1.05
Vc
C Class standard voltage rating
Vk
IEC Knee point voltage required
In
CT rated current = 5A in USA
Where
RCT =
CT secondary winding resistance
(for 5A CTs, the typical resistance is 0.002 ohms/secondary turn)

ALF =
The CT accuracy limit factor, the rated dynamic current output of a "C"
class CT (Kssc) is always 20 x In
The IEC accuracy limit factor is identical to the 20 times secondary current ANSI/IEEE
rating.
Therefore
Vc
6.
[ Vk - (100 . RCT ) ] / 1.05
COMMISSIONING TEST MENU

To help minimise the time required to test MiCOM relays the relay provides several
test facilities under the COMMISSION TESTS menu heading. There are menu cells
which allow the status of the opto-isolated inputs, output relay contacts, internal
digital data bus (DDB) signals and user-programmable LEDs to be monitored.
Additionally there are cells to test the operation of the output contacts and userprogrammable LEDs.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 114/116
MiCOM P341
The following table shows the relay menu of commissioning tests, including the
Menu Text
Default Setting
Settings
COMMISSION TESTS
Opto I/P Status
Relay O/P Status
Test Port Status
LED Status
Monitor Bit 1
64 (LED 1)
Monitor Bit 2
65 (LED 2)
Monitor Bit 3
66 (LED 3)
Monitor Bit 4
67 (LED 4)
Monitor Bit 5
68 (LED 5)
Monitor Bit 6
69 (LED 6)
Monitor Bit 7
70 (LED 7)
Monitor Bit 8
71 (LED 8)
0 to 511
See Appendix A
for details of digital
data bus signals
Test Mode
Disabled
Disabled
Test Mode
Contacts Blocked
Test Pattern
All bits set to 0
0 = Not Operated
1 = Operated
Contact Test
No Operation
No Operation
Apply Test
Remove Test
Test LEDs
No Operation
No Operation
Apply Test
Table 3
6.1
Opto I/P status

This menu cell displays the status of the relays opto-isolated inputs as a binary string,
a 1 indicating an energised opto-isolated input and a 0 a de-energised one. If the
cursor is moved along the binary numbers the corresponding label text will be
displayed for each logic input.
It can be used during commissioning or routine testing to monitor the status of the
opto-isolated inputs whilst they are sequentially energised with a suitable dc voltage.
6.2
Relay O/P status

This menu cell displays the status of the digital data bus (DDB) signals that result in
energisation of the output relays as a binary string, a 1 indicating an operated state
and 0 a non-operated state. If the cursor is moved along the binary numbers the
corresponding label text will be displayed for each relay output.
The information displayed can be used during commissioning or routine testing to
indicate the status of the output relays when the relay is in service. Additionally fault
finding for output relay damage can be performed by comparing the status of the
output contact under investigation with its associated bit.
Application Notes
P341/EN AP/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 115/116
Note:
6.3
When the Test Mode cell is set to Enabled this cell will
continue to indicate which contacts would operate if the relay
was in-service, it does not show the actual status of the output
relays.
Test port status

This menu cell displays the status of the eight digital data bus (DDB) signals that have
been allocated in the Monitor Bit cells. If the cursor is moved along the binary
numbers the corresponding DDB signal text string will be displayed for each monitor
bit.
By using this cell with suitable monitor bit settings, the state of the DDB signals can be
displayed as various operating conditions or sequences are applied to the relay.
Thus the programmable scheme logic can be tested.
As an alternative to using this cell, the optional monitor/download port test box can
be plugged into the monitor/download port located behind the bottom access cover.
Details of the monitor/download port test box can be found in section 6.10 of these
Application Notes.
6.4
LED status
The LED Status cell is an eight bit binary string that indicates which of the
user-programmable LEDs on the relay are illuminated when accessing the relay from
a remote location, a 1 indicating a particular LED is lit and a 0 not lit.
6.5
Monitor bits 1 to 8
The eight Monitor Bit cells allow the user to select the status of which digital data bus
signals can be observed in the Test Port Status cell or via the monitor/download
port.
Each Monitor Bit is set by entering the required digital data bus (DDB) signal
number (0 511) from the list of available DDB signals in Appendix A of this guide.
The pins of the monitor/download port used for monitor bits are given in the table
overleaf. The signal ground is available on pins 18, 19, 22 and 25.
Monitor Bit
Monitor/ Download Port Pin
11
12
15
13
20
21
23
24
Table 4
THE MONITOR/DOWNLOAD PORT DOES NOT HAVE ELECTRICAL ISOLATED
AGAINST INDUCED VOLTAGES ON THE COMMUNICATIONS CHANNEL. IT
SHOULD THEREFORE ONLY BE USED FOR LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS.
6.6
Test mode
This menu cell is used to allow secondary injection testing to be performed on the
relay without operation of the trip contacts. It also enables a facility to directly test the
output contacts by applying menu controlled test signals. To select test mode this cell
should be set to Enabled which takes the relay out of service causing an alarm
condition to be recorded and the yellow Out of Service LED to illuminate. Once
testing is complete the cell must be set back to Disabled to restore the relay back to
service.
P341/EN AP/D22
Application Notes
Page 116/116
MiCOM P341
WHEN THE TEST MODE CELL IS SET TO ENABLED THE RELAY SCHEME
LOGIC DOES NOT DRIVE THE OUTPUT RELAYS AND HENCE THE
PROTECTION WILL NOT TRIP THE ASSOCIATED CIRCUIT BREAKER IF A FAULT
OCCURS.
HOWEVER, THE COMMUNICATIONS CHANNELS WITH REMOTE RELAYS
REMAIN ACTIVE WHICH, IF SUITABLE PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT TAKEN,
COULD LEAD TO THE REMOTE ENDS TRIPPING WHEN CURRENT
TRANSFORMERS ARE ISOLATED OR INJECTION TESTS ARE PERFORMED.
6.7
Test pattern
The Test Pattern cell is used to select the output relay contacts that will be tested
when the Contact Test cell is set to Apply Test. The cell has a binary string with
one bit for each user-configurable output contact which can be set to 1 to operate
the output under test conditions and 0 to not operate it.
6.8
Contact test
When the Apply Test command in this cell is issued the contacts set for operation
(set to 1) in the Test Pattern cell change state. After the test has been applied the
command text on the LCD will change to No Operation and the contacts will remain
in the Test State until reset issuing the Remove Test command. The command text on
the LCD will again revert to No Operation after the Remove Test command has
been issued.
Note:
6.9
When the Test Mode cell is set to Enabled the Relay O/P
Status cell does not show the current status of the output relays
and hence can not be used to confirm operation of the output
relays. Therefore it will be necessary to monitor the state of each
contact in turn.
Test LEDs
When the Apply Test command in this cell is issued the eight user-programmable
LEDs will illuminate for approximately 2 seconds before they extinguish and the
command text on the LCD reverts to No Operation.
6.10
Using a monitor/download port test box

A monitor/download port test box containing 8 LEDs and a switchable audible
indicator is available from AREVA T&D, or one of their regional sales offices. It is
housed in a small plastic box with a 25-pin male D-connector that plugs directly into
the relays monitor/download port. There is also a 25-pin female D-connector which
allows other connections to be made to the monitor/download port whilst the
monitor/download port test box is in place.
Each LED corresponds to one of the monitor bit pins on the monitor/download port
with Monitor Bit 1 being on the left hand side when viewing from the front of the
relay. The audible indicator can either be selected to sound if a voltage appears any
of the eight monitor pins or remain silent so that indication of state is by LED alone.
Relay Description
P341/EN HW/D22
MiCOM P341
RELAY DESCRIPTION
P341/EN HW/D22
Relay Description
MiCOM P341
Relay Description
P341/EN HW/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 1/16
CONTENT
1.
RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1
Hardware overview
1.1.1
Processor board
1.1.2
Input module
1.1.3
Power supply module
1.1.4
IRIG-B board
1.2
Software overview
1.2.1
Real-time operating system
1.2.2
System services software
1.2.3
Platform software
1.2.4
Protection & control software
1.2.5
2.
HARDWARE MODULES
2.1
Processor board
2.2
Internal communication buses
2.3
Input module
2.3.1
Transformer board
2.3.2
Input board
2.3.3
2.4
Power supply module (including output relays)
2.4.1
Power supply board (including EIA(RS)485 communication interface)
2.4.2
Output relay board
2.5
IRIG-B board
2.6
Mechanical layout
3.
RELAY SOFTWARE
10
3.1
10
3.2
11
3.3
Platform software
11
3.3.1
Record logging
11
3.3.2
Settings database
11
3.3.3
Database interface
11
3.4
12
P341/EN HW/D22
Page 2/16
Relay Description
MiCOM P341
3.4.1
Overview - protection & control scheduling
12
3.4.2
Signal processing
12
3.4.3
13
3.4.3.1
PSL data
13
3.4.4
Event, fault & maintenance recording
13
3.4.5
14
4.
SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS
14
4.1
Start-up self-testing
14
4.1.1
System boot
15
4.1.2
Initialisation software
15
4.1.3
Platform software initialisation & monitoring
15
4.2
15
Figure 1:
Relay modules and information flow
Figure 2:
Main input board
Figure 3:
Relay software structure
10
Relay Description
P341/EN HW/D22
MiCOM P341
1.
RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1
Hardware overview
Page 3/16
The relay hardware is based on a modular design whereby the relay is made up of
an assemblage of several modules which are drawn from a standard range. Some
modules are essential while others are optional depending on the users
requirements.
The different modules that can be present in the relay are as follows:
1.1.1
Processor board
Processor board which performs all calculations for the relay and controls the
operation of all other modules within the relay. The processor board also contains
and controls the user interfaces (LCD, LEDs, keypad and communication interfaces).
1.1.2
Input module
The input module converts the information contained in the analogue and digital
input signals into a format suitable for processing by the processor board. The
standard input module consists of two boards: a transformer board to provide
electrical isolation and a main input board which provides analogue to digital
conversion and the isolated digital inputs.
1.1.3
Power supply module

The power supply module provides a power supply to all of the other modules in the
relay, at three different voltage levels. The power supply board also provides the
EIA(RS)485 electrical connection for the rear communication port. On a second
board the power supply module contains the relays which provide the output
contacts.
1.1.4
IRIG-B board
This board, which is optional, can be used where an IRIG-B signal is available to
provide an accurate time reference for the relay. There is also an option on this
board to specify a fibre optic rear communication port, for use with IEC 60870
communication only.
All modules are connected by a parallel data and address bus which allows the
processor board to send and receive information to and from the other modules as
required. There is also a separate serial data bus for conveying sample data from
the input module to the processor. Figure 1 shows the modules of the relay and the
flow of information between them.
P341/EN HW/D22
Relay Description
Page 4/16
MiCOM P341
Executable software
Present
values
of all
settings
Alarm, event, fault,

disturbance &
maintenance
records
Battery
backed-up
SRAM
Front LCD panel
code & data, setting

database data
E 2PROM
Flash
EPROM
SRAM
RS232 Front comms port

Parallel test port
LEDs
Default settings &

parameters, language text,
software code
CPU
Main processor board

Timing data
IRIG-B board
optional
IRIG-B signal
Serial data bus

(sample data)
Fibre optic
rear comms
port optional
Parallel data bus
ADC
Input
board
Power supply (3 voltages),

rear comms data
Analogue input signals
Power supply board
Power
supply
Digital inputs (x8)
Relay board
inputs
Digital input values
Opto-isolated
Output relays
Output relay contacts (x7)
Power supply, rear comms

data, output relay status
Watchdog
contacts
Field
voltage
Transformer board
Rear RS485
communication port
Current & voltage inputs up to 9 (for feeder)
P0126ENa
Figure 1:
1.2
Relay modules and information flow
Software overview
The software for the relay can be conceptually split into four elements: the real-time
operating system, the system services software, the platform software and the
protection and control software. These four elements are not distinguishable to the
user, and are all processed by the same processor board. The distinction between
the four parts of the software is made purely for the purpose of explanation here:
Relay Description
MiCOM P341
1.2.1
P341/EN HW/D22
Page 5/16

The real time operating system is used to provide a framework for the different parts
of the relays software to operate within. To this end the software is split into tasks.
The real-time operating system is responsible for scheduling the processing of these
tasks such that they are carried out in the time available and in the desired order of
priority. The operating system is also responsible for the exchange of information
between tasks, in the form of messages.
1.2.2

The system services software provides the low-level control of the relay hardware. For
example, the system services software controls the boot of the relays software from
the non-volatile flash EPROM memory at power-on, and provides driver software for
the user interface via the LCD and keypad, and via the serial communication ports.
The system services software provides an interface layer between the control of the
relays hardware and the rest of the relay software.
1.2.3
Platform software
The platform software deals with the management of the relay settings, the user
interfaces and logging of event, alarm, fault and maintenance records. All of the
relay settings are stored in a database within the relay which provides direct
compatibility with Courier communications. For all other interfaces (i.e. the front
panel keypad and LCD interface, Modbus and IEC60870-5-103 and DNP3.0) the
platform software converts the information from the database into the format
required. The platform software notifies the protection & control software of all
settings changes and logs data as specified by the protection & control software.
1.2.4

The protection and control software performs the calculations for all of the protection
algorithms of the relay. This includes digital signal processing such as Fourier
filtering and ancillary tasks such as the measurements. The protection & control
software interfaces with the platform software for settings changes and logging of
records, and with the system services software for acquisition of sample data and
access to output relays and digital opto-isolated inputs.
1.2.5
The analogue values and logic signals are routed from the protection and control
software to the disturbance recorder software. This software compresses the data to
allow a greater number of records to be stored. The platform software interfaces to
the disturbance recorder to allow extraction of the stored records.
2.
HARDWARE MODULES
The relay is based on a modular hardware design where each module performs a
separate function within the relays operation. This section describes the functional
operation of the various hardware modules.
2.1
Processor board
The relay is based around a TMS320C32 floating point, 32-bit digital signal
processor (DSP) operating at a clock frequency of 20MHz. This processor performs
all of the calculations for the relay, including the protection functions, control of the
data communication and user interfaces including the operation of the LCD, keypad
and LEDs.
P341/EN HW/D22
Page 6/16
Relay Description
MiCOM P341
The processor board is located directly behind the relays front panel which allows the
LCD and LEDs to be mounted on the processor board along with the front panel
communication ports. These comprise the 9-pin D-connector for EIA(RS)232 serial
communications (e.g. using MiCOM S1 and Courier communications) and the
25-pin D-connector relay test port for parallel communication.
All serial
communication is handled using a two-channel 85C30 serial communications
controller (SCC).
The memory provided on the main processor board is split into two categories,
volatile and non-volatile: the volatile memory is fast access (zero wait state) SRAM
which is used for the storage and execution of the processor software, and data
storage as required during the processors calculations. The non-volatile memory is
sub-divided into 3 groups: 2MB of flash memory for non-volatile storage of software
code and text, 256kB of battery backed-up SRAM for the storage of disturbance,
event and fault record data, and 32kB of E2PROM memory for the storage of
configuration data, including the present setting values.
2.2
Internal communication buses

The relay has two internal buses for the communication of data between different
modules. The main bus is a parallel link which is part of a 64-way ribbon cable. The
ribbon cable carries the data and address bus signals in addition to control signals
and all power supply lines. Operation of the bus is driven by the main processor
board which operates as a master while all other modules within the relay are slaves.
The second bus is a serial link which is used exclusively for communicating the digital
sample values from the input module to the main processor board. The DSP
processor has a built-in serial port which is used to read the sample data from the
serial bus. The serial bus is also carried on the 64-way ribbon cable.
2.3
Input module
The input module provides the interface between the relay processor board(s) and the
analogue and digital signals coming into the relay. The input module consists of two
PCBs; the main input board and a transformer board. The P341 relay provides four
voltage inputs and four current inputs.
2.3.1
Transformer board
The standard transformer board holds up to four voltage transformers (VTs) and up
to five current transformers (CTs). The current inputs will accept either 1A or 5A
nominal current (menu and wiring options) and the voltage inputs can be specified
for either 110V or 440V nominal voltage (order option). The transformers are used
both to step-down the currents and voltages to levels appropriate to the relays
electronic circuitry and to provide effective isolation between the relay and the power
system. The connection arrangements of both the current and voltage transformer
secondaries provide differential input signals to the main input board to reduce noise.
2.3.2
Input board
The main input board is shown as a block diagram in Figure 2. It provides the
circuitry for the digital input signals and the analogue-to-digital conversion for the
analogue signals. Hence it takes the differential analogue signals from the CTs and
VTs on the transformer board(s), converts these to digital samples and transmits the
samples to the main processor board via the serial data bus. On the input board the
analogue signals are passed through an anti-alias filter before being multiplexed into
a single analogue-to-digital converter chip. The A-D converter provides 16-bit
resolution and a serial data stream output. The digital input signals are opto isolated
on this board to prevent excessive voltages on these inputs causing damage to the
relay's internal circuitry.
Relay Description
P341/EN HW/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 7/16
The signal multiplexing arrangement provides for 16 analogue channels to be

sampled. The P341 provides 4 current inputs and 4 voltage inputs. 3 spare
channels are used to sample 3 different reference voltages for the purpose of
continually checking the operation of the multiplexer and the accuracy of the A-D
converter. The sample rate is maintained at 24 samples per cycle of the power
waveform by a logic control circuit which which is driven by the frequency tracking
function on the main processor board. The calibration E2PROM holds the calibration
coefficients which are used by the processor board to correct for any amplitude or
phase error introduced by the transformers and analogue circuitry.
The other function of the input board is to read the state of the signals present on the
digital inputs and present this to the parallel data bus for processing. The input
board holds 8 optical isolators for the connection of up to eight digital input signals.
The opto-isolators are used with the digital signals for the same reason as the
transformers with the analogue signals; to isolate the relays electronics from the
power system environment. A 48V field voltage supply is provided at the back of
the relay for use in driving the digital opto-inputs.
Anti-alias filters
Up to 9 current inputs
VT
Diffn
to
single
Low
pass
filter
CT
Diffn
to
single
Low
pass
filter
8 digital inputs
8
Optical
isolator
Noise
filter
Noise
filter
Buffer
Buffer
16-bit
ADC
Serial
Interface
Sample
control
Up to 9
Up to 9
Diffn
to
single
Serial sample
data bus
Trigger from processor

board
Up to 9
Calibration
E2 PROM
CT
Optical
isolator
Parallel bus
Low
pass
filter
16:1
Multiplexer
Transformer board
4 voltage inputs
VT
Input board
Diffn
to
single
Parallel bus
Low
pass
filter
P0127ENb
Figure 2:
Main input board
The input board provides some hardware filtering of the digital signals to remove
unwanted noise before buffering the signals for reading on the parallel data bus.
Depending on the relay model, more than 8 digital input signals can be accepted by
the relay. This is achieved by the use of an additional opto-board which contains the
same provision for 8 isolated digital inputs as the main input board, but does not
contain any of the circuits for analogue signals which are provided on the main input
board.
2.3.3

The P340 series relays are fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be
programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part.
They nominally provide a Logic 1 or On value for Voltages 80% of the set lower
nominal voltage and a Logic 0 or Off value for the voltages 60% of the set higher
nominal voltage. This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during
P341/EN HW/D22
Relay Description
Page 8/16
MiCOM P341
a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery
voltage across an input.
Each input also has a pre-set filter of cycle which renders the input immune to
induced noise on the wiring: although this method is secure it can be slow,
particularly for intertripping.
For the P341 interconnection protection relay, the protection task is executed two
times per cycle, i.e. after every 12 samples for the sample rate of 24 samples per
power cycle used by the relay. Therefore, the time taken to register a change in the
state of an opto input can vary between a half to one cycle. The time to register the
change of state will depend on if the opto input changes state at the start or end of a
protection task cycle with the additional half cycle filtering time.
In the Opto Config menu the nominal battery voltage can be selected for all opto
inputs by selecting one of the five standard ratings in the Global Nominal V settings.
If Custom is selected then each opto input can individually be set to a nominal
voltage value.
Menu Text
Setting Range
Default Setting
Min
Max
Step Size
OPTO CONFIG
2.4
Global Nominal V
24-27
24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250,

Custom
Opto Input 1
24-27
24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250
Opto Input 2-32
24-27
24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250
Power supply module (including output relays)

The power supply module contains two PCBs, one for the power supply unit itself and
the other for the output relays. The power supply board also contains the input and
output hardware for the rear communication port which provides an RS485
communication interface.
2.4.1
Power supply board (including EIA(RS)485 communication interface)

One of three different configurations of the power supply board can be fitted to the
relay. This will be specified at the time of order and depends on the nature of the
supply voltage that will be connected to the relay. The three options are shown in
table 1 below:
Nominal dc Range
Nominal ac Range
24/54V
dc only
48/125V
30/100V rms
110/250V
100/240V rms
Table 1:
Power supply options
The output from all versions of the power supply module are used to provide isolated
power supply rails to all of the other modules within the relay. Three voltage levels
are used within the relay, 5.1V for all of the digital circuits, 16V for the analogue
electronics, e.g. on the input board, and 22V for driving the output relay coils. All
power supply voltages including the 0V earth line are distributed around the relay via
the 64-way ribbon cable. One further voltage level is provided by the power supply
board which is the field voltage of 48V. This is brought out to terminals on the back
of the relay so that it can be used to drive the optically isolated digital inputs.
Relay Description
MiCOM P341
P341/EN HW/D22
Page 9/16
The two other functions provided by the power supply board are the EIA(RS)485
communications interface and the watchdog contacts for the relay. The EIA(RS)485
interface is used with the relays rear communication port to provide communication
using one of either Courier, Modbus, DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-103 protocols. The
EIA(RS)485 hardware supports half-duplex communication and provides optical
isolation of the serial data being transmitted and received.
All internal
communication of data from the power supply board is conducted via the output
relay board which is connected to the parallel bus.
The watchdog facility provides two output relay contacts, one normally open and one
normally closed which are driven by the main processor board. These are provided
to give an indication that the relay is in a healthy state.
2.4.2
Output relay board

There are 2 versions of the output relay board one with seven relays, three normally
open contacts and four changeover contacts and one with eight relays, two normally
open contacts and six changeover contacts.
For relay models with suffix A hardware, only the 7 output relay boards were
available. For equivalent relay models in suffix B hardware or greater the base
numbers of output contacts, using the 7 output relay boards, is being maintained for
compatibility. The 8 output relay board is only used for new relay models or existing
relay models available in new case sizes or to provide additional output contacts to
existing models for suffix issue B or greater hardware. Note, the model number suffix
letter refers to the hardware version.
The relays are driven from the 22V power supply line. The relays state is written to
or read from using the parallel data bus. Depending on the relay model, more than
seven output contacts may be provided, through the use of up to three extra relay
boards. Each additional relay board provides a further seven or eight output relays.
2.5
IRIG-B board
The IRIG-B board is an order option which can be fitted to provide a timing reference
for the relay. This can be used wherever an IRIG-B signal is available. The IRIG-B
signal is connected to the board via a BNC connector on the back of the relay. The
timing information is used to synchronise the relays internal real-time clock to an
accuracy of 1ms. The internal clock is then used for the time tagging of the event,
fault maintenance and disturbance records.
The IRIG-B board can also be specified with a fibre optic transmitter/receiver which
can be used for the rear communication port instead of the EIA(RS)485 electrical
connection (IEC 60870 only).
2.6
Mechanical layout
The case materials of the relay are constructed from pre-finished steel which has a
conductive covering of aluminium and zinc. This provides good earthing at all joints
giving a low impedance path to earth which is essential for performance in the
presence of external noise. The boards and modules use a multi-point earthing
strategy to improve the immunity to external noise and minimise the effect of circuit
noise. Ground planes are used on boards to reduce impedance paths and spring
clips are used to ground the module metalwork.
Heavy duty terminal blocks are used at the rear of the relay for the current and
voltage signal connections. Medium duty terminal blocks are used for the digital
logic input signals, the output relay contacts, the power supply and the rear
communication port. A BNC connector is used for the optional IRIG-B signal. 9-pin
P341/EN HW/D22
Relay Description
Page 10/16
MiCOM P341
and 25-pin female D-connectors are used at the front of the relay for data
communication.
Inside the relay the PCBs plug into the connector blocks at the rear, and can be
removed from the front of the relay only. The connector blocks to the relays CT
inputs are provided with internal shorting links inside the relay which will
automatically short the current transformer circuits before they are broken when the
board is removed.
The front panel consists of a membrane keypad with tactile dome keys, an LCD and
12 LEDs mounted on an aluminium backing plate.
3.
RELAY SOFTWARE
The relay software was introduced in the overview of the relay at the start of this
section. The software can be considered to be made up of four sections:
the real-time operating system
the system services software
the platform software
the protection & control software
This section describes in detail the latter two of these, the platform software and the
protection & control software, which between them control the functional behaviour of
the relay. Figure 3 shows the structure of the relay software.
Protection & Control
Software
Measurements and event, fault

& disturbance records
Disturbance
recorder task
Protection
task
Programable &
fixed scheme logic
Platform Software
Fourier signal
processing
Protection
algorithms
Event, fault,
disturbance,
maintenance record
logging
Supervisor task
Sampling function copies samples into

2 cycle buffer
Remote
communications
interface IEC60870-5-103
Protection & control settings
Control of output contacts and

programmable LEDs
Sample data & digital

logic inputs
Settings
database
Remote
communications
interface - Modbus
Front panel
interface - LCD &
keypad
Local & Remote

communications
interface - Courier
Control of interfaces to keypad, LCD,

LEDs, front & rear comms ports.
Self-checking maintenance records
Relay hardware
P0128ENa
Figure 3:
3.1
Relay software structure

The software is split into tasks; the real-time operating system is used to schedule the
processing of the tasks to ensure that they are processed in the time available and in
the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible in part for
controlling the communication between the software tasks through the use of
operating system messages.
Relay Description
MiCOM P341
3.2
P341/EN HW/D22
Page 11/16

As shown in Figure 3, the system services software provides the interface between the
relays hardware and the higher-level functionality of the platform software and the
protection & control software. For example, the system services software provides
drivers for items such as the LCD display, the keypad and the remote communication
ports, and controls the boot of the processor and downloading of the processor code
into SRAM from non-volatile flash EPROM at power up.
3.3
Platform software
The platform software has three main functions:
3.3.1
to control the logging of all records that are generated by the protection software,
including alarms and event, fault, disturbance and maintenance records.
to store and maintain a database of all of the relays settings in non-volatile

memory.
to provide the internal interface between the settings database and each of the
relays user interfaces, i.e. the front panel interface and the front and rear
communication ports, using whichever communication protocol has been
specified (Courier, Modbus, DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-103).
Record logging
The logging function is provided to store all alarms, events, faults and maintenance
records. The records for all of these incidents are logged in battery backed-up SRAM
in order to provide a non-volatile log of what has happened. The relay maintains
four logs: one each for up to 32 alarms, 250 event records, 5 fault records and 5
maintenance records. The logs are maintained such that the oldest record is
overwritten with the newest record. The logging function can be initiated from the
protection software or the platform software is responsible for logging of a
maintenance record in the event of a relay failure. This includes errors that have
been detected by the platform software itself or error that are detected by either the
system services or the protection software function. See also the section on
supervision and diagnostics later in this section.
3.3.2
Settings database
The settings database contains all of the settings and data for the relay, including the
protection, disturbance recorder and control & support settings groups. The settings
The platform softwares
are maintained in non-volatile E2PROM memory.
management of the settings database includes the responsibility of ensuring that only
one user interface modifies the settings of the database at any one time. This feature
is employed to avoid confusion between different parts of the software during a
setting change. For changes to protection settings and disturbance recorder settings,
the platform software operates a scratchpad in SRAM memory. This allows a
number of setting changes to be made in any order but applied to the protection
elements, and saved in the database in E2PROM, at the same time (see also section
P341/EN IT/C22 on the user interface). If a setting change affects the protection &
control task, the database advises it of the new values.
3.3.3
Database interface
The other function of the platform software is to implement the relays internal
interface between the database and each of the relays user interfaces. The database
of settings and measurements must be accessible from all of the relays user
interfaces to allow read and modify operations. The platform software presents the
data in the appropriate format for each user interface.
P341/EN HW/D22
Page 12/16
3.4
Relay Description
MiCOM P341

The protection and control software task is responsible for processing all of the
protection elements and measurement functions of the relay. To achieve this it has to
communicate with both the system services software and the platform software as well
as organise its own operations. The protection software has the highest priority of
any of the software tasks in the relay in order to provide the fastest possible
protection response. The protection & control software has a supervisor task which
controls the start-up of the task and deals with the exchange of messages between
the task and the platform software.
3.4.1
Overview - protection & control scheduling

After initialisation at start-up, the protection & control task is suspended until there
are sufficient samples available for it to process. The acquisition of samples is
controlled by a sampling function which is called by the system services software
and takes each set of new samples from the input module and stores them in a twocycle buffer. The protection & control software resumes execution when the number
of unprocessed samples in the buffer reaches a certain number. For the P341
generator loss of mains protection relay, the protection task is executed twice per
cycle, i.e. after every 12 samples for the sample rate of 24 samples per power cycle
used by the relay. The protection and control software is suspended again when all
of its processing on a set of samples is complete. This allows operations by other
software tasks to take place.
3.4.2
Signal processing
The sampling function provides filtering of the digital input signals from the optoisolators and frequency tracking of the analogue signals. The digital inputs are
checked against their previous value over a period of half a cycle. Hence a change
in the state of one of the inputs must be maintained over at least half a cycle before it
is registered with the protection & control software.
The frequency tracking of the analogue input signals is achieved by a recursive
Fourier algorithm which is applied to one of the input signals, and works by detecting
a change in the measured signals phase angle. The calculated value of the
frequency is used to modify the sample rate being used by the input module so as to
achieve a constant sample rate of 24 samples per cycle of the power waveform. The
value of the frequency is also stored for use by the protection & control task.
When the protection & control task is re-started by the sampling function, it calculates
the Fourier components for the analogue signals. The Fourier components are
calculated using a one-cycle, 24-sample Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). The DFT
is always calculated using the last cycle of samples from the 2-cycle buffer, i.e. the
most recent data is used. The DFT used in this way extracts the power frequency
fundamental component from the signal and produces the magnitude and phase
angle of the fundamental in rectangular component format. The DFT provides an
accurate measurement of the fundamental frequency component, and effective
filtering of harmonic frequencies and noise. This performance is achieved in
conjunction with the relay input module which provides hardware anti-alias filtering
to attenuate frequencies above the half sample rate, and frequency tracking to
maintain a sample rate of 24 samples per cycle. The Fourier components of the
input current and voltage signals are stored in memory so that they can be accessed
by all of the protection elements algorithms. The samples from the input module are
also used in an unprocessed form by the disturbance recorder for waveform
recording and to calculate true rms values of current, voltage and power for metering
purposes.
Relay Description
P341/EN HW/D22
MiCOM P341
3.4.3
Page 13/16

The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (PSL) is to allow the relay user to
configure an individual protection scheme to suit their own particular application.
This is achieved through the use of programmable logic gates and delay timers.
The input to the PSL is any combination of the status of the digital input signals from
the opto-isolators on the input board, the outputs of the protection elements, e.g.
protection starts and trips, and the outputs of the fixed protection scheme logic. The
fixed scheme logic provides the relays standard protection schemes. The PSL itself
consists of software logic gates and timers. The logic gates can be programmed to
perform a range of different logic functions and can accept any number of inputs.
The timers are used either to create a programmable delay, and/or to condition the
logic outputs, e.g. to create a pulse of fixed duration on the output regardless of the
length of the pulse on the input. The outputs of the PSL are the LEDs on the front
panel of the relay and the output contacts at the rear.
The execution of the PSL logic is event driven; the logic is processed whenever any of
its inputs change, for example as a result of a change in one of the digital input
signals or a trip output from a protection element. Also, only the part of the PSL logic
that is affected by the particular input change that has occurred is processed. This
reduces the amount of processing time that is used by the PSL. The protection &
control software updates the logic delay timers and checks for a change in the PSL
input signals every time it runs.
This system provides flexibility for the user to create their own scheme logic design.
However, it also means that the PSL can be configured into a very complex system,
and because of this setting of the PSL is implemented through the PC support
package MiCOM S1.
3.4.3.1 PSL data

In the PSL editor in MiCOM S1 when a PSL file is downloaded to the relay the user
can specify the group to download the file and a 32 character PSL reference
description. This PSL reference is shown in the Grp1/2/3/4 PSL Ref cell in the PSL
DATA menu in the relay. The download date and time and file checksum for each
groups PSL file is also shown in the PSL DATA menu in cells Date/Time and Grp
1/2/3/4 PSL ID. The PSL data can be used to indicate if a PSL has been changed
and thus be useful in providing information for version control of PSL files.
The default PSL Reference description is Default PSL followed by the model number
e.g. Default PSL P34x??????0yy0? where x refers to the model e.g. 1, 2, 3 and yy
refers to the software version e.g. 05. This is the same for all protection setting
groups (since the default PSL is the same for all groups). Since the LCD display
(bottom line) only has space for 16 characters the display must be scrolled to see all
32 characters of the PSL Reference description.
The default date and time is the date and time when the defaults were loaded from
flash into EEPROM.
Note:
3.4.4
The PSL DATA column information is only supported by Courier

and Modbus, but not DNP3 or IEC60870-5-103.
Event, fault & maintenance recording

A change in any digital input signal or protection element output signal is used to
indicate that an event has taken place. When this happens, the protection & control
task sends a message to the supervisor task to indicate that an event is available to
be processed and writes the event data to a fast buffer in SRAM which is controlled by
the supervisor task. When the supervisor task receives either an event or fault record
P341/EN HW/D22
Page 14/16
Relay Description
MiCOM P341
message, it instructs the platform software to create the appropriate log in battery
backed-up SRAM. The operation of the record logging to battery backed-up SRAM is
slower than the supervisors buffer. This means that the protection software is not
delayed waiting for the records to be logged by the platform software. However, in
the rare case when a large number of records to be logged are created in a short
period of time, it is possible that some will be lost if the supervisors buffer is full
before the platform software is able to create a new log in battery backed-up SRAM.
If this occurs then an event is logged to indicate this loss of information.
Maintenance records are created in a similar manner with the supervisor task
instructing the platform software to log a record when it receives a maintenance
record message. However, it is possible that a maintenance record may be triggered
by a fatal error in the relay in which case it may not be possible to successfully store a
maintenance record, depending on the nature of the problem. See also the section
on self supervision & diagnostics later in this section.
3.4.5
The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection & control
task. It can record the waveforms for up to 8 analogue channels and the values of
up to 32 digital signals. The recording time is user selectable up to a maximum of
10 seconds. The disturbance recorder is supplied with data by the protection &
control task once per cycle. The disturbance recorder collates the data that it receives
into the required length disturbance record. It attempts to limit the demands it places
on memory space by saving the analogue data in compressed format whenever
possible. This is done by detecting changes in the analogue input signals and
compressing the recording of the waveform when it is in a steady-state condition.
The compressed disturbance records can be decompressed by MiCOM S1 which can
also store the data in COMTRADE format, thus allowing the use of other packages to
view the recorded data.
4.
SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS

The relay includes a number of self-monitoring functions to check the operation of its
hardware and software when it is in service. These are included so that if an error or
fault occurs within the relays hardware or software, the relay is able to detect and
report the problem and attempt to resolve it by performing a re-boot. This involves
the relay being out of service for a short period of time which is indicated by the
Healthy LED on the front of the relay being extinguished and the watchdog contact
at the rear operating. If the restart fails to resolve the problem, then the relay will
take itself permanently out of service. Again this will be indicated by the LED and
watchdog contact.
If a problem is detected by the self-monitoring functions, the relay attempts to store a
maintenance record in battery backed-up SRAM to allow the nature of the problem to
be notified to the user.
The self-monitoring is implemented in two stages: firstly a thorough diagnostic check
which is performed when the relay is booted-up, e.g. at power-on, and secondly a
continuous self-checking operation which checks the operation of the relays critical
functions whilst it is in service.
4.1
Start-up self-testing
The self-testing which is carried out when the relay is started takes a few seconds to
complete, during which time the relays protection is unavailable. This is signalled by
the Healthy LED on the front of the relay which will illuminate when the relay has
passed all of the tests and entered operation. If the testing detects a problem, the
relay will remain out of service until it is manually restored to working order.
Relay Description
MiCOM P341
P341/EN HW/D22
Page 15/16
The operations that are performed at start-up are as follows:

4.1.1
System boot
The integrity of the flash EPROM memory is verified using a checksum before the
program code and data stored in it is copied into SRAM to be used for execution by
the processor. When this has been completed the data then held in SRAM is
compared to that in the flash EPROM to ensure that the two are the same and that no
errors have occurred in the transfer of data from flash EPROM to SRAM. The entry
point of the software code in SRAM is then called which is the relay initialisation code.
4.1.2
Initialisation software
The initialisation process includes the operations of initialising the processor registers
and interrupts, starting the watchdog timers (used by the hardware to determine
whether the software is still running), starting the real-time operating system and
creating and starting the supervisor task. In the course of the initialisation process the
relay checks:
the status of the battery.
the integrity of the battery backed-up SRAM that is used to store event, fault and
disturbance records.
the voltage level of the field voltage supply which is used to drive the opto-isolated
inputs.
the operation of the LCD controller.
the watchdog operation.
At the conclusion of the initialisation software the supervisor task begins the process
of starting the platform software.
4.1.3
Platform software initialisation & monitoring

In starting the platform software, the relay checks the integrity of the data held in
E2PROM with a checksum, the operation of the real-time clock, and the IRIG-B board
if fitted. The final test that is made concerns the input and output of data; the
presence and healthy condition of the input board is checked and the analogue data
acquisition system is checked through sampling the reference voltage.
At the successful conclusion of all of these tests the relay is entered into service and
the protection started-up.
4.2
When the relay is in service, it continually checks the operation of the critical parts of
its hardware and software. The checking is carried out by the system services
software (see section on relay software earlier in this section) and the results reported
to the platform software. The functions that are checked are as follows:
the flash EPROM containing all program code and language text is verified by a
checksum.
the code and constant data held in SRAM is checked against the corresponding
data in flash EPROM to check for data corruption.
the SRAM containing all data other than the code and constant data is verified
with a checksum.
the E2PROM containing setting values is verified by a checksum, whenever its

data is accessed.
P341/EN HW/D22
Page 16/16
Relay Description
MiCOM P341
the battery status.
the level of the field voltage.
the integrity of the digital signal I/O data from the opto-isolated inputs and the
relay contacts, is checked by the data acquisition function every time it is executed.
The operation of the analogue data acquisition system is continuously checked by
the acquisition function every time it is executed, by means of sampling the
reference voltage on a spare multiplexed channel.
the operation of the IRIG-B board is checked, where it is fitted, by the software
that reads the time and date from the board.
In the unlikely event that one of the checks detects an error within the relays
subsystems, the platform software is notified and it will attempt to log a maintenance
record in battery backed-up SRAM. If the problem is with the battery status or the
IRIG-B board, the relay will continue in operation. However, for problems detected in
any other area the relay will initiate a shutdown and re-boot. This will result in a
period of up to 5 seconds when the protection is unavailable, but the complete restart
of the relay including all initialisations should clear most problems that could occur.
As described above, an integral part of the start-up procedure is a thorough
diagnostic self-check. If this detects the same problem that caused the relay to
restart, i.e. the restart has not cleared the problem, then the relay will take itself
permanently out of service. This is indicated by the Healthy LED on the front of the
relay, which will extinguish, and the watchdog contact which will operate.
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
TECHNICAL DATA
P341/EN TD/D22
Technical Data
MiCOM P341
Technical Data
MiCOM P341
P341/EN TD/D22
Page 1/42
CONTENT
1.
RATINGS
1.1
Currents
1.2
Voltages
1.3
Auxiliary voltage
1.4
Frequency
1.5
1.6
1.7
Field voltage
1.8
Loop through connections
1.9
Wiring requirements
2.
BURDENS
2.1
Current circuit
2.2
Voltage circuit
10
2.3
Auxiliary supply
10
2.4
10
3.
ACCURACY
10
3.1
Reference conditions
10
3.2
Influencing quantities
11
4.
HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND
11
4.1
Dielectric withstand
11
4.2
Impulse
12
4.3
Insulation resistance
12
4.4
ANSI dielectric withstand
12
5.
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
12
5.1
Performance criteria
12
5.1.1
Class A
12
5.1.2
Class B
12
5.1.3
Class C
13
5.2
Auxiliary supply tests, dc interruption, etc.
13
5.2.1
DC voltage interruptions
13
5.2.2
DC voltage fluctuations
13
P341/EN TD/D22
Page 2/42
Technical Data
MiCOM P341
5.3
AC voltage dips and short interruptions
13
5.3.1
AC voltage short interruptions
13
5.3.2
AC voltage dips
13
5.4
High frequency disturbance
14
5.5
Fast transients
14
5.6
Conducted/radiated emissions
14
5.6.1
Conducted emissions
14
5.6.2
Radiated emissions
14
5.7
Conducted/radiated immunity
15
5.7.1
Conducted immunity
15
5.7.2
Radiated immunity
15
5.7.3
Radiated immunity from digital radio telephones
15
5.8
Electrostatic discharge
15
5.9
Surge immunity
15
5.10
Power frequency magnetic field
16
5.11
Power frequency interference
16
5.12
Surge withstand capability (SWC)
16
5.13
Radiated immunity
16
6.
ATMOSPHERIC ENVIRONMENT
17
6.1
Temperature
17
6.2
Humidity
17
6.3
Enclosure protection
17
7.
MECHANICAL ENVIRONMENT
17
7.1
17
7.1.1
Severity classes
18
7.1.2
Vibration (sinusoidal)
18
7.1.3
Shock and bump
18
7.1.4
Seismic
18
8.
EC EMC COMPLIANCE
19
9.
EC LVD COMPLIANCE
19
10.
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
19
10.1
Three phase non-directional/directional overcurrent protection (50/51)

(67)
19
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 3/42
10.1.1
Setting ranges
19
10.1.2
Time delay settings
20
10.1.3
Transient overreach and overshoot
20
10.1.3.1 Accuracy
20
10.2
Inverse time (IDMT) characteristic
20
10.2.1
Time multiplier settings for IEC/UK curves
21
10.2.1.1 Time dial settings for IEEE/US curves
21
10.2.1.2 Definite time characteristic
21
10.2.1.3 Reset characteristics
21
10.2.2
Accuracy
22
10.3
Earth fault & sensitive earth fault protection (50N/51N) (67N) (64)
25
10.3.1
Setting ranges
25
10.3.1.1 Earth fault, sensitive earth fault
25
10.3.1.2 Polarising quantities for earth fault measuring elements
25
10.3.1.3 Restricted earth fault (low impedance)
26
10.3.1.4 Restricted earth fault (high impedance)
26
10.3.2
EF and SEF time delay characteristics
26
10.3.3
Wattmetric SEF settings (zero sequence power settings)
26
10.3.4
Accuracy
27
10.3.4.1 Earth fault 1
27
10.3.4.2 Earth fault 2
27
10.3.4.3 SEF
27
10.3.4.4 REF
28
10.3.4.5 Wattmetric SEF
28
10.3.4.6 Polarising quantities
28
10.4
Neutral displacement/residual overvoltage (59N)
28
10.4.1
Setting ranges
28
10.4.2
Time delay settings
29
10.4.3
Accuracy
29
10.5
Under voltage (27)
29
10.5.1
Level settings
29
10.5.2
Under voltage protection time delay characteristics
29
10.5.3
Accuracy
30
10.6
Over voltage (59)
30
10.6.1
Level settings
30
P341/EN TD/D22
Technical Data
Page 4/42
MiCOM P341
10.6.2
Over voltage protection time delay characteristics
30
10.6.3
Accuracy
31
10.7
Under frequency (81U)
31
10.7.1
Accuracy
31
10.8
Over frequency (81O)
31
10.8.1
Accuracy
31
10.9
Reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O)
32
10.9.1
Accuracy
32
10.10
Sensitive reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O) 33
10.10.1 Accuracy
33
10.11
34
Rate of change of frequency
10.11.1 Setting range
34
10.11.2 Accuracy
34
10.12
34
Reconnection time delay
34
10.12.2 Accuracy
34
10.13
34
Voltage vector shift
34
10.13.2 Accuracy
34
10.14
35
10.14.1 Accuracy
35
11.
SUPERVISORY FUNCTIONS
35
11.1
Voltage transformer supervision
35
11.1.1
Accuracy
35
11.2
36
11.2.1
Accuracy
36
12.
PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC
36
12.1
Level settings
36
12.2
Accuracy
36
13.
MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING FACILITIES
37
13.1
Measurements
37
13.2
IRIG-B and real time clock
37
13.2.1
Features
37
13.2.2
Performance
37
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 5/42
14.
DISTURBANCE RECORDS
38
14.1
Level settings
38
14.2
Accuracy
38
15.
PLANT SUPERVISION
38
15.1
CB state monitoring control and condition monitoring
38
15.1.1
CB monitor settings
38
15.1.2
CB control settings
38
15.1.3
Accuracy
38
15.2
CB fail and backtrip breaker fail
39
15.2.1
Timer settings
39
15.2.2
Timer accuracy
39
15.2.3
Undercurrent settings
39
15.2.4
Undercurrent accuracy
39
16.
INPUT AND OUTPUT SETTING RANGES
39
16.1
CT and VT ratio settings
39
17.
BATTERY LIFE
40
18.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE
40
19.
LOCAL AND REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS
41
19.1
Front port
41
19.2
Rear port
41
19.2.1
Performance
41
Figure 1:
IEC inverse time curves
23
Figure 2:
American inverse time curves
24
Figure 3:
Biased REF characteristic
26
Figure 4:
Frequency response
40
P341/EN TD/D22
Page 6/42
Technical Data
MiCOM P341
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 7/42
1.
RATINGS
1.1
Currents
In = 1A or 5A ac rms.
Separate terminals are provided for the 1A and 5A windings, with the neutral input of
each winding sharing one terminal.
1.2
CT Type
Operating Range
Standard
0 to 64 n
Sensitive
0 to 2 n
Duration
Withstand
Continuous rating
4 n
10 minutes
4.5 n
5 minutes
5 n
3 minutes
6 n
2 minutes
7 n
10 seconds
30 n
1 second
100 n
Voltages
Maximum rated voltage relate to earth 300Vdc or 300Vrms.
1.3
Nominal Voltage Vn
Short Term Above Vn
100 120Vph - ph rms
0 to 200Vph - ph rms
380 480Vph - ph rms
0 to 800Vph - ph rms
Duration
Withstand
(Vn = 100/120V)
Withstand
(Vn = 380/480V)
Continuous (2Vn)
240Vph - ph rms
880Vph - ph rms
10 seconds (2.6Vn)
312Vph - ph rms
1144Vph - ph rms
Auxiliary voltage
The relay is available in three auxiliary voltage versions, these are specified in the
table below:
Nominal Ranges
Operative dc
Range
Operative ac
Range
24 48V dc
19 to 65V
48 110V dc (30 100V ac rms) **
37 to 150V
24 to 110V
110 240V dc (100 240V ac rms) **
87 to 300V
80 to 265V
** rated for ac or dc operation.
P341/EN TD/D22
Technical Data
Page 8/42
1.4
MiCOM P341
Frequency
The nominal frequency (Fn) is dual rated at 50 60Hz, the operate range is
40Hz 70Hz.
1.5

The P340 series relays are fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be
programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part.
They nominally provide a Logic 1 or On value for Voltages 80% of the set lower
nominal voltage and a Logic 0 or Off value for the voltages 60% of the set higher
nominal voltage. This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during
a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery
voltage across an input. Each input also has a pre-set filter of cycle which renders
the input immune to induced noise on the wiring.
In the Opto Config menu the nominal battery voltage can be selected for all opto
inputs by selecting one of the five standard ratings in the Global Nominal V settings.
If Custom is selected then each opto input can individually be set to a nominal
voltage value.
Menu Text
Setting Range
Default Setting
Min
Step Size
Max
OPTO CONFIG
Global Nominal V
24-27
24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250,

Custom
Opto Input 1
24-27
24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250
Opto Input 2-32
24-27
24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250
Battery Voltage (V dc)
Logical off (V dc)
Logical on (V dc)
24/27
<16.2
>19.2
30/34
<20.4
>24
48/54
<32.4
>38.4
110/125
<75
>88
220/250
<150
>176
All the logic inputs are independent and isolated. The P341 relay has a base number
of opto inputs of 8 in the 40TE case. One optional board can be added to the P341
to increase its number of opto inputs, the boards available are the 8 opto input
board or the 8 output contact board or the 4 opto input + 4 output contact board.
1.6

There are 2 versions of the output relay board one with seven relays, three normally
open contacts and four changeover contacts and one with eight relays, two normally
open contacts and six changeover contacts.
For relay models with suffix A hardware, only the 7 output relay boards were
available. For equivalent relay models in suffix B hardware or greater the base
numbers of output contacts, using the 7 output relay boards, is being maintained for
compatibility. The 8 output relay board is only used for new relay models or existing
relay models available in new case sizes or to provide additional output contacts to
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 9/42
existing models for suffix issue B or greater hardware. Note, the model number suffix
letter refers to the hardware version.
The P341 has a base number of relay contacts of 7 in the 40TE case. One optional
board can be added to the P341 to increase its number of output contacts, the
boards available are the 8 opto input board or the 8 output contact board or the 4
opto input + 4 output contact board.
Make & Carry
30A for 3s
Carry
250A for 30ms

10A continuous
dc: 50W resistive
dc: 62.5W inductive (L/R = 40ms)
ac: 2500VA resistive (P.F. = 1)
ac: 2500VA inductive (P.F. = 0.7)
Break
Maxima:
10A and 300V
Loaded Contact:
10,000 operation minimum
Unloaded Contact:
100,000 operations minimum
Watchdog Contact
dc: 30W resistive
dc: 15W inductive (L/R = 40ms)
ac: 375VA inductive (P.F. = 0.7)
Break
1.7
Field voltage
The field voltage provided by the relay is nominally 48V dc with a current limit of
112mA. The operating range shall be 40V to 60V with an alarm raised at <35V.
1.8
Loop through connections

Terminals D17 D18 and F17 F18 are internally connected together for
convenience when wiring, maxima 5A and 300V.
1.9
Wiring requirements
The requirements for the wiring of the relay and cable specifications are detailed in
the installation section of the Operation Guide (Volume 2).
2.
BURDENS
2.1
Current circuit
CT burden (At Nominal Current)
Phase
<0.15 VA
Earth
<0.2VA
P341/EN TD/D22
Technical Data
Page 10/42
2.2
MiCOM P341
Voltage circuit
Reference Voltage (Vn)
2.3
Vn = 100 120V
<0.06VA rms at 110V
Vn = 380 480V
<0.06VA rms at 440V
Auxiliary supply
Case Size
Minimum*
Size 8 /40TE
11W or 24 VA
Size 12 /60TE
11W or 24 VA
No output contacts or optos energised

Each additional energised opto input
0.09W (24/27, 30/34, 48/54 V)
0.12W (110/125 V)
0.19W (220/250 V)
Each additional energised output relay

2.4
0.13W
Peak current of opto inputs when energised is 3.5 mA (0-300V).
Maximum input voltage 300 V dc (any setting).
3.
ACCURACY
For all accuracies specified, the repeatability is 2.5% unless otherwise specified.
If no range is specified for the validity of the accuracy, then the specified accuracy is
valid over the full setting range.
3.1
Reference conditions
Quantity
Reference Conditions
Test Tolerance
Ambient temperature
20 C
2C
Atmospheric pressure
86kPa to 106kPa
45 to 75 %
Current
5%
Voltage
Vn
5%
50 or 60Hz
0.5%
DC 48V or 110V
AC 63.5V or 110V
5%
General
Relative humidity
Input energising quantity
Frequency
Auxiliary supply
Settings
Time multiplier setting
Time dial
Reference value
1.0
7
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 11/42
Quantity
Reference Conditions
Test Tolerance
General
Phase angle
3.2
Influencing quantities
No additional errors will be incurred for any of the following influencing quantities:
Quantity
Operative Range (Typical Only)
Environmental
Temperature
25C to +55C
Mechanical (Vibration, Shock,

Bump, Seismic)
According to
IEC 60255-21-1:198
IEC 60255-21-2:1988
IEC 60255-21-3:1995
Quantity
Operative range
Electrical
Frequency
5 Hz to 70 Hz
Harmonics (single)
5% over the range 2nd to 17th
Auxiliary voltage range
0.8 LV to 1.2 HV (dc) 0.8 LV to 1.1 HV (ac)
Aux. supply ripple
12% Vn with a frequency of 2.fn
Point on wave of fault waveform
0 to 360
DC offset of fault waveform
No offset to fully offset
Phase angle
90 to + 90
Magnetising inrush
No operation with OC elements set to 35%

of peak anticipated inrush level.
4.
HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND
4.1
Dielectric withstand
IEC60255-5:1997
2.0kVrms for one minute between all terminals and case earth.
2.0kVrms for one minute between all terminals of each independent circuit grouped
together, and all other terminals. This includes the output contacts and loop through
connections D17/D18 and F17/F18.
1.5kVrms for one minute across dedicated normally open contacts of output relays.
1.0kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts of changeover and watchdog
output relays.
P341/EN TD/D22
Page 12/42
4.2
Technical Data
MiCOM P341
Impulse
IEC60255-5:1997
The product will withstand without damage impulses of 5kV peak, 1.2/50s, 0.5J
across:
Each independent circuit and the case with the terminals of each independent circuit
connected together.
Independent circuits with the terminals of each independent circuit connected
together.
Terminals of the same circuit except normally open metallic contacts.
4.3
Insulation resistance
IEC60255-5:1997
The insulation resistance is greater than 100 M at 500Vdc.
4.4
ANSI dielectric withstand

ANSI/IEEE C37.90. (1989) (Reaff. 1994)
1kV rms. for 1 minute across open contacts of the watchdog contacts.
1kV rms. for 1 minute across open contacts of changeover output contacts.
1.5kV rms. for 1 minute across normally open output contacts.
5.
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
5.1
The following three classes of performance criteria are used within sections 5.2 to
5.13 (where applicable) to specify the performance of the MiCOM relay when
subjected to the electrical interference. The performance criteria are based on the
performance criteria specified in EN 50082-2:1995.
5.1.1
Class A
During the testing the relay will not maloperate, upon completion of the testing the
relay will function as specified. A maloperation will include a transient operation of
the output contacts, operation of the watchdog contacts, reset of any of the relays
microprocessors or an alarm indication.
The relay communications and IRIG-B signal must continue uncorrupted via the
communications ports and IRIG-B port respectively during the test, however relay
communications and the IRIG-B signal may be momentarily interrupted during the
tests, provided that they recover with no external intervention.
5.1.2
Class B
During the testing the relay will not maloperate, upon completion of the testing the
relay will function as specified. A maloperation will include a transient operation of
the output contacts, operation of the watchdog contacts, reset of any of the relays
microprocessors or an alarm indication. A transitory operation of the output LEDs is
acceptable provided no permanent false indications are recorded.
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 13/42
The relay communications and IRIG-B signal must continue uncorrupted via the
communications ports and IRIG-B port respectively during the test, however relay
communications and the IRIG-B signal may be momentarily interrupted during the
tests, provided that they recover with no external intervention.
5.1.3
Class C
The relay will power down and power up again in a controlled manner within 5
seconds. The output relays are permitted to change state during the test as long as
they reset once the relay powers up.
Communications to relay may be suspended during the testing as long as
communication recovers with no external intervention after the testing.
5.2
Auxiliary supply tests, dc interruption, etc.
5.2.1
DC voltage interruptions
IEC 60255-11:1979.
DC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 2, 5, 10, 20ms.
Performance criteria - Class A.
DC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 50, 100, 200ms, 40s.
Performance criteria - Class C.
5.2.2
DC voltage fluctuations
IEC 60255-11:1979.
AC 100Hz ripple superimposed on DC max. and min. auxiliary supply at 12% of
highest rated DC.
5.3
AC voltage dips and short interruptions
5.3.1
AC voltage short interruptions

IEC 61000-4-11:1994.
AC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 2, 5, 10, 20ms.
AC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 50, 100, 200ms, 1s, 40s.
5.3.2
AC voltage dips
IEC 61000-4-11:1994
AC Auxiliary Supply 100% Voltage Dips 2, 5, 10, 20ms.
Performance criteria Class A.
AC Auxiliary Supply 100% Voltage Dips 50, 100, 200ms, 1s, 40s.
P341/EN TD/D22
Page 14/42
Technical Data
MiCOM P341
5.4
High frequency disturbance

IEC 60255-22-1:1988 Class III.
1MHz burst disturbance test.
2.5kV common mode.
Power supply, field voltage, CTs, VTs, opto inputs, output contacts, IRIG-B and
terminal block communications connections.
1kV differential mode.
Power supply, field voltage, CTs, VTs, opto inputs and output contacts.
5.5
Fast transients
IEC 60255-22-4:1992 (EN 61000-4-4:1995), Class III and Class IV.
2kV 5kHz (Class III) and 4kV 2.5kHz (Class IV) direct coupling.
Power supply, field voltage, opto inputs, output contacts, CTs, VTs.
2kV 5kHz (Class III) and 4kV 2.5kHz (Class IV) capacitive clamp.
IRIG-B and terminal block communications connections.
5.6
Conducted/radiated emissions
5.6.1
Conducted emissions
EN 55011:1998 Class A, EN 55022:1994 Class A.
0.15 - 0.5MHz, 79dBV (quasi peak) 66dBV (average).
0.5 - 30MHz, 73dBV (quasi peak) 60dBV (average).
5.6.2
Radiated emissions
EN 55011:1998 Class A, EN 55022:1994 Class A.
30 - 230MHz, 40dBV/m at 10m measurement distance.
230 - 1000MHz, 47dBV/m at 10m measurement distance.
Technical Data
MiCOM P341
5.7
Conducted/radiated immunity
5.7.1
Conducted immunity
P341/EN TD/D22
Page 15/42
EN 61000-4-6:1996 Level 3.
10V emf @ 1kHz 80% am, 150kHz to 80MHz. Spot tests at 27MHz, 68MHz.
5.7.2
Radiated immunity
IEC 60255-22-3:1989 Class III (EN 61000-4-3: 1997 Level 3).
10 V/m 80MHz - 1GHz @ 1kHz 80% am.
Spot tests at 80MHz, 160MHz, 450MHz, 900MHz.
5.7.3
Radiated immunity from digital radio telephones

ENV 50204:1995
10 V/m 900MHz 5 MHz and 1.89GHz 5MHz, 200Hz rep. Freq., 50% duty cycle
pulse modulated.
5.8
Electrostatic discharge
IEC 60255-22-2:1996 Class 3 & Class 4.
Class 4: 15kV air discharge.
Class 3: 6kV contact discharge.
Tests carried out both with and without cover fitted.
5.9
Surge immunity
IEC 61000-4-5:1995 Level 4.
4kV common mode 12 source impedance, 2kV differential mode 2 source
impedance.
Power supply, field voltage, VTs.
The CT inputs are immune to all levels of common mode surge as per IEC 61000-45: 1995 Level 4. Total immunity to differential surges to Level 4 can be achieved by
adding a time delay of at least 20ms. Note, routing the CT wires as a pair reduces
the likelihood of a differential surge.
4kV common mode 42 source impedance, 2kV differential mode 42 source
impedance.
Opto inputs, output contacts.
4kV common mode 2 source impedance applied to cable screen.
Terminal block communications connections and IRIG-B.
Performance criteria Class A under reference conditions.
P341/EN TD/D22
Page 16/42
5.10
Technical Data
MiCOM P341
Power frequency magnetic field

IEC 61000-4-8:1994 Level 5.
100A/m field applied continuously in all planes for the EUT in a quiescent state and
tripping state
1000A/m field applied for 3s in all planes for the EUT in a quiescent state and
tripping state
5.11
Power frequency interference

NGTS* 2.13 Issue 3 April 1998, section 5.5.6.9.
500V rms. common mode.
250V rms. differential mode.
Voltage applied to all non-mains frequency inputs. Permanently connected
communications circuits tested to Class 3 (100-1000m) test level 50mV
* National Grid Technical Specification
5.12
Surge withstand capability (SWC)

ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 (1990) (Reaff. 1994)
Oscillatory SWC Test.
2.5kV 3kV, 1 - 1.5MHz - common and differential mode applied to all circuits
except for IRIG-B and terminal block communications, which are tested common
mode only via the cable screen.
Fast Transient SWC Tests
4 - 5kV crest voltage - common and differential mode - applied to all circuits except
for IRIG-B and terminal block communications, which are tested common mode only
via the cable screen.
Performance criteria Class A
5.13
Radiated immunity
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 1995
35 V/m 25MHz - 1GHz no modulation applied to all sides.
35 V/m 25MHz - 1GHz, 100% pulse modulated, front only.
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 17/42
6.
ATMOSPHERIC ENVIRONMENT
6.1
Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1:1990/A2:1994 - Cold
IEC 60068-2-2:1974/A2:1994 - Dry heat
IEC 60255-6:1988.
Operating Temperature Range C
(Time Period in Hours)
6.2
Storage Temperature Range C

(Time Period in Hours)
Cold
Temperature
Dry Heat
Temperature
Cold
Temperature
Dry Heat
Temperature
-25 (96)
55 (96)
-25 (96)
70 (96)
Humidity
IEC 60068-2-3:1969
Damp heat, steady state, 40 C 2 C and 93% relative humidity (RH) +2% -3%,
duration 56 days.
IEC 60068-2-30:1980.
Damp heat cyclic, six (12 + 12 hour cycles) of 55C 2C 93% 3% RH and 25C
3C 93% 3% RH.
6.3
Enclosure protection
IEC 60529:1989.
IP52 Category 2.
IP5x Protected against dust, limited ingress permitted.
IPx2 Protected against vertically falling drops of water with the product in 4 fixed
positions of 15 tilt with a flow rate of 3mm/minute for 2.5 minutes.
7.
MECHANICAL ENVIRONMENT
7.1
The following two classes of performance criteria are used within sections to (where
applicable) to specify the performance of the MiCOM relay when subjected to
mechanical testing.
P341/EN TD/D22
Technical Data
Page 18/42
7.1.1
MiCOM P341
Severity classes
The following table details the Class and Typical Applications of the vibration, shock
bump and seismic tests detailed previously:
Class
7.1.2
Typical Application
Measuring relays and protection equipment for normal use in

power plants, substations and industrial plants and for normal
transportation conditions
Measuring relays and protection equipment for which a very high

security margin is required or where the vibration (shock and
bump) (seismic shock) levels are very high, e.g. shipboard
application and for severe transportation conditions.
Vibration (sinusoidal)
IEC 60255-21-1:1988
Cross over frequency - 58 to 60 Hz
Vibration response
Severity
Class
Peak Displacement
Below Cross Over
Frequency (mm)
Peak Acceleration
Above Cross Over
Frequency (gn)
Number of
Sweeps in
Each Axis
Frequency
Range (Hz)
0.075
10 150
Vibration endurance
7.1.3
Severity
Class
Peak Acceleration
(gn)
Number of Sweeps
in Each Axis
Frequency Range
(Hz)
2.0
20
10 150
Shock and bump

IEC 60255-21-2:1988
IEC 60255-21-2:1988
7.1.4
Type of
Test
Severity
Class
Peak Acceleration
( gn)
Duration of
Pulse ( ms )
Number of Pulses
in Each Direction
Shock
Response
10
11
Shock
withstand
15
11
Bump
10
16
1000
Seismic
IEC 60255-21-3:1993
Cross over frequency - 8 to 9Hz
x = horizontal axis, y = vertical axis
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 19/42
Severity
Class
Peak Displacement
Below Cross Over
Frequency (mm)
8.
Peak Acceleration
Above Cross
Over Frequency
(gn)
7.5
3.5
2.0
1.0
Number of
Sweep Cycles
in Each Axis
Frequency
Range
(Hz)
1- 35
EC EMC COMPLIANCE
Compliance to the European Community Directive 89/336/EEC amended by
93/68/EEC is claimed via the Technical Construction File route.
The Competent Body has issued a Technical Certificate and a Declaration of
Conformity has been completed.
The following Generic Standards used to establish conformity:
EN 50081-2:1994
EN 50082-2:1995.
9.
EC LVD COMPLIANCE
Compliance with European Community Directive on Low Voltage 73/23/EEC is
demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards:
EN 61010-1:1993/A2: 1995
EN 60950:1992/A11 1997
10.
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
10.1
Three phase non-directional/directional overcurrent protection (50/51) (67)
10.1.1 Setting ranges

Setting
Stage
Range
Step Size
>1 Current Set
1st Stage
0.08 - 4.0n
0.01n
>2 Current Set
2nd Stage
0.08 - 4.0n
0.01n
>3 Current Set
3rd Stage
0.08 - 32n
0.01n
>4 Current Set
4th Stage
0.08 - 32n
0.01n
Directional overcurrent settings:
Relay characteristic angle
Range
Step Size
-95 to +95
The directional elements polarising is fixed and uses a cross polarised quantity, if the
polarising voltage falls to less than 0.5V synchronous memory polarising is available
for 3.2s.
P341/EN TD/D22
Technical Data
Page 20/42
MiCOM P341
10.1.2 Time delay settings

Each overcurrent element has an independent time setting and each time delay is
capable of being blocked by an optically isolated input:
Element
Time Delay Type
1st Stage
Definite Time (DT) or IDMT
2nd Stage
DT or IDMT
3rd Stage
DT
4th Stage
DT
Curve Type
Reset Time Delay
IEC / UK curves
DT only
All other
IDMT or DT
10.1.3 Transient overreach and overshoot

10.1.3.1Accuracy
10.2
Additional tolerance due to increasing

X/R ratios
5% over the X/R ratio of 1 to 90
Overshoot of overcurrent elements
<30ms
Inverse time (IDMT) characteristic

IDMT characteristics are selectable from a choice of four IEC/UK and five IEEE/US
curves as shown in the table below.
The IEC/UK IDMT curves conform to the following formula:
K
+ L
t = T x (/ ) - 1
The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula:

K
+ L
TD
t = x (/ ) - 1
7
s
where
t
= operation time
= constant
= measured current
= current threshold setting
= constant
= ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC/UK curves)
= time multiplier setting for IEC/UK curves
TD
= time dial setting for IEEE/US curves
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 21/42
IDMT characteristics
Standard
K
Constant
Constant
L
Constant
Standard inverse
IEC
0.14
0.02
Very inverse
IEC
13.5
Extremely inverse
IEC
80
Long time inverse
UK
120
Moderately inverse
IEEE
0.0515
0.02
0.114
Very inverse
IEEE
19.61
0.491
Extremely inverse
IEEE
28.2
0.1217
Inverse
US-C08
5.95
0.18
Short time inverse
US-C02
0.02394
0.02
0.01694
IDMT Curve Description
The IEC extremely inverse curve becomes definite time at currents greater than 20 x
setting. The IEC standard, very and long time inverse curves become definite time at
currents greater than 30 x setting.
10.2.1 Time multiplier settings for IEC/UK curves
Name
Range
Step Size
TMS
0.025 to 1.2
0.025
Name
Range
Step Size
TD
0.5 to 15
0.1
Element
Range
Step Size
All stages
0 to 100s
10ms
10.2.1.1Time dial settings for IEEE/US curves
10.2.1.2Definite time characteristic
10.2.1.3Reset characteristics
For all IEC/UK curves, the reset characteristic is definite time only.
For all IEEE/US curves, the reset characteristic can be selected as either inverse curve
or definite time.
The definite time can be set (as defined in IEC) to zero. Range 0 to 100 seconds in
steps of 0.01 seconds.
The Inverse Reset characteristics are dependent upon the selected IEEE/US IDMT
curve as shown in the table below.
All inverse reset curves conform to the following formula:
tr
TD
tReset = x 1 - (/ )
7
s
P341/EN TD/D22
Technical Data
Page 22/42
MiCOM P341
Where
tReset =
reset time
tr
constant
measured current
current threshold setting
constant
TD
time dial Setting (same setting as that employed by IDMT curve)
IEEE/US IDMT Curve Description
Standard
tr Constant
Constant
Moderately Inverse
IEEE
4.85
Very Inverse
IEEE
21.6
Extremely Inverse
IEEE
29.1
Inverse
US-C08
5.95
Short Time Inverse
US-C02
2.261
Inverse Reset Characteristics

10.2.2 Accuracy
Pick-up
Setting 5%
Drop-off
0.95 x Setting 5%
Minimum trip level of IDMT elements
1.05 x Setting 5%
IDMT characteristic shape
5% or 40ms whichever is greater

(under reference conditions)*
IEEE reset
DT operation
DT reset
5%
Directional boundary accuracy (RCA 90)
2 hysteresis 2
Characteristic
UK curves
IEC 60255-3 1998
US curves
IEEE C37.112 1996
Reference conditions TMS=1, TD=7 and > setting of 1A, operating range 2-20n
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 23/42
IEC Curves
1000
Operating Time (s)
100
10
Curve 4
Curve 1
1
Curve 2
Curve 3
0.1
1.0
10.0
100.0
Current (Multiples of Is)

Curve 1
Curve 2
Curve 3
Curve 4
Standard inverse
Very inverse
Extremely inverse
UK long time inverse
P2136ENa
Figure 1:
IEC inverse time curves
P341/EN TD/D22
Technical Data
Page 24/42
MiCOM P341
Amercian Curves
100
Operating Time (s)
10
Curve 5
Curve 6
Curve 9
Curve 7
Curve 8
0.1 1.0
10.0
100.0
Current (Multiples of Is)
Figure 2:
Curve 5
Curve 6
IEEE moderately inverse

IEEE very inverse
Curve 7
Curve 8
Curve 9
IEEE extremely inverse

US inverse
US short time inverse
American inverse time curves
P2137ENa
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
10.3
Page 25/42
Earth fault & sensitive earth fault protection (50N/51N) (67N) (64)
There are two standard earth fault elements, Earth Fault 1 uses measured quantities,
Earth Fault 2 uses derived quantities.

10.3.1.1Earth fault, sensitive earth fault
Range
Step Size
Earth Fault 1
N1>1 Current Set
0.08 - 4.0n
0.01n
(Measured)
N1>2 Current Set
0.08 - 4.0n
0.01n
N1>3 Current Set
0.08 - 32n
0.01n
N1>4 Current Set
0.08 - 32n
0.01n
Earth Fault 2
N2>1 Current Set
0.08 - 4.0n
0.01n
(Derived)
N2>2 Current Set
0.08 - 4.0n
0.01n
N2>3 Current Set
0.08 - 32n
0.01n
N2>4 Current Set
0.08 - 32n
0.01n
Sensitive Earth Fault
SEF>1 Current Set
0.005 - 0.1n
0.00025n
(Measured)
SEF>2 Current Set
0.005 - 0.1n
0.00025n
SEF>3 Current Set
0.005 - 0.8n
0.001n
SEF>4 Current Set
0.005 - 0.8n
0.001n
10.3.1.2Polarising quantities for earth fault measuring elements

The polarising quantity for earth fault elements can be either zero sequence or
negative sequence values. This can be set independently set for Earth Fault 1 and
Earth Fault 2.
Characteristic Angle Settings
Setting
Range
Step Size
N1> Char angle
-95 to +95
N2> Char angle
-95 to +95
SEF> Char angle
-95 to +95
Zero Sequence Voltage Polarisation

Setting
Range
Step Size
N1>VNpol Set (Vn = 100/120 V)
0.5 80V
0.5V
N1>VNpol Set (Vn = 380/480 V)
2.0 320V
2V
Range
Step Size
0.08 - 1.0n
0.01n
N1>V2pol Set (Vn = 100/120 V)
0.5 25V
0.5V
N1>V2pol Set (Vn = 380/480 V)
2.0 100V
2V
Negative Sequence Polarisation

Setting
N1>2pol Set
P341/EN TD/D22
Technical Data
Page 26/42
MiCOM P341
10.3.1.3Restricted earth fault (low impedance)

Setting
Range
Step Size
REF> K1
0% to 20%
1% (minimum)
REF> K2
0% to 150%
1% (minimum)
REF> s1
8% to 100% n
1% n
REF> s2
10% to 150% n
1% n
I DIFF
Trip
k2
No Trip
k1
IS1
I BIAS
I S2
P2171ENb
Figure 3:
Biased REF characteristic
10.3.1.4Restricted earth fault (high impedance)

The High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault protection is mutually exclusive with the
Sensitive Earth Fault protection as the same sensitive current input is used. This
element should be used in conjunction with an external stabilising resistor.
Setting
REF> K1
Range
Step Size
0% to 20%
1% (minimum)
10.3.2 EF and SEF time delay characteristics

The earth-fault measuring elements for EF and SEF are followed by an independently
selectable time delay. These time delays are identical to those of the Phase
Overcurrent time delay. The reset time delay is also the same as the Phase
overcurrent reset time.
10.3.3 Wattmetric SEF settings (zero sequence power settings)
If Wattmetric SEF is selected an additional zero sequence power threshold is applied,
this is settable according to the following table:
Name
PN> Setting
Range
Step Size
0 - 20W (Rating = 1A, 100/120V)
0.05W
0 - 100W (Rating = 5A, 100/120V)
0.25W
0 - 80W (Rating = 1A, 380/440V)
0.20W
0 - 400W (Rating = 5A, 380/440V)
1W
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 27/42
10.3.4 Accuracy
10.3.4.1Earth fault 1
Pick-up
Setting 5%
Drop-off
0.95 x Setting 5%
1.05 x Setting 5%

IEEE reset
DT operation
DT reset
5%
Repeatability
2.5%
* Reference conditions TMS=1, TD=7 and N> setting of 1A, operating range
2-20n.
10.3.4.2Earth fault 2
Pick-up
Setting 5%
Drop-off
>0.85 x Setting
1.05 x Setting 5%

IEEE reset
DT operation
DT reset
Repeatability
5%
* Reference conditions TMS=1, TD=7 and N> setting of 1A, operating range
2 - 20n.
10.3.4.3SEF
Pick-up
Setting 5%
Drop-off
0.95 x Setting 5%
1.05 x Setting 5%

IEEE reset
7.5% or 60ms whichever is greater
DT operation
DT reset
5%
Repeatability
5%
Reference conditions TMS=1, TD=7 and N> setting of 100mA, operating range
2-20s.
P341/EN TD/D22
Technical Data
Page 28/42
MiCOM P341
10.3.4.4REF
Pick-up
Setting formula 5%
Drop-off
0.80 x Setting formula 5%
Low impedance operating time
<60ms
High impedance pick-up
Setting 5%
High impedance operating time
<30ms
Repeatability
<15%
10.3.4.5Wattmetric SEF
Pick-up
Drop-off
For P=0W
SEF> 5%
For P>0W
P> 5%
For P=0W
(0.95 x SEF>) 5%
For P>0W
0.9 x P> 5%
Boundary accuracy
5% with 1 hysteresis
Repeatability
5%
10.3.4.6Polarising quantities
Zero Sequence Polarising
Operating boundary pick-up
2of RCA 90
Hysteresis
<3
VN> Pick-up
Setting 10%
VN> Drop-off
0.9 x Setting 10%
Negative Sequence Polarising
10.4
Operating boundary pick-up
2of RCA 90
Hysteresis
<3
V2> Pick-up
Setting 10%
V2> Drop-off
0.9 x Setting 10%
2> Pick-up
Setting 10%
2> Drop-off
0.9 x Setting 10%
Neutral displacement/residual overvoltage (59N)

Name
Range
Step Size
VN>1 (Vn 100/120V)
1 80V
1V
VN>2 (Vn 100/120V)
1 80V
1V
VN>1 (Vn 380/480V)
4 320V
4V
VN>2 (Vn 380/480V)
4 320V
4V
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 29/42
10.4.2 Time delay settings

The inverse characteristic for VN>1 shall be given by the following formula :
t =
K
(M - 1)
where
K
operating time in seconds
Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs)

Range
Step Size
TMS setting (K)
0.5 100s
0.5
DT reset setting
0 100s
0.01s
10.4.3 Accuracy
Pick-up
10.5
For DT Start
Setting 5%
For IDMT Start
1.05 x Setting 5%
Drop-off
0.95 x Setting 5%
DT operation

Instantaneous operation <55ms
Reset
<35ms
Repeatability
<5%
Under voltage (27)
10.5.1 Level settings

Name
Range
Step Size
V<1 & V<2

(Vn = 100/120V)
10 120V
1V
V<1 & V<2

(Vn = 380/480V)
40 480V
4V
10.5.2 Under voltage protection time delay characteristics

Under voltage measuring elements are followed by an independently selectable time
delay.
The first element have time delay characteristics selectable as either Inverse Time or
Definite Time. The remaining element shall have an associated Definite Time delay
setting.
Each measuring element time delay is capable of being blocked by the operation of a
user defined logic (optical isolated) input.
P341/EN TD/D22
Technical Data
Page 30/42
MiCOM P341
The inverse characteristic shall be given by the following formula :

t =
K
(1 - M)
where
K
operating time in seconds

Range
Step Size
DT setting
0 100s
0.01s
TMS Setting (K)
0.5 100
0.5
Definite time and TMS setting ranges.

10.5.3 Accuracy
Pick-up
10.6
For DT Start
Setting 5%
For IDMT Start
0.95 x Setting 5%
Drop-off
1.05 x Setting 5%
DT operation
Reset
<75ms
Repeatability
<1%
Over voltage (59)
10.6.1 Level settings

Name
Range
Step Size
V>1 & V>2

(Vn = 100/120V)
60 185V
1V
V>1 & V>2

(Vn = 380/480V)
240 740V
4V
10.6.2 Over voltage protection time delay characteristics

Over voltage measuring elements are followed by an independently selectable time
delay.
The first elements have time delay characteristics selectable as either Inverse Time or
Definite Time. The remaining element shall have an associated Definite Time delay
setting.
Each measuring element time delay is capable of being blocked by the operation of a
user defined logic (optical isolated) input.
The inverse characteristics are given by the following formula:
t =
K
(M - 1)
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 31/42
where
K
Operating time in seconds
DT setting
TMS Setting (K)
Range
Step Size
0 100s
0.01s
0.5 100s
0.5
Definite time and TMS setting ranges

10.6.3 Accuracy
Pick-up
10.7
For DT Start
Setting 5%
For IDMT Start
1.05 x Setting 5%
Drop-off
0.95 x Setting 5%
DT operation
Reset
<75ms
Under frequency (81U)

Settings
Range
Step Size
f (for all stages)
45 65 Hz
0.01 Hz
t (for all stages)
0 100s
0.01s
10.7.1 Accuracy
Pick-up
Setting 0.01Hz
Drop-off
(Setting + 0.025Hz) 0.01Hz
DT operation
2% or 50ms whichever is greater*
* The operating will also include a time for the relay to frequency track (20Hz/second)
10.8
Over frequency (81O)

Settings
Range
Step Size
f (for all stages)
45 65 Hz
0.01 Hz
t (for all stages)
0 100s
0.01s
10.8.1 Accuracy
Pick-up
Setting 0.01Hz
Drop-off
(Setting - 0.025Hz) 0.01Hz
DT operation
2% or 50ms whichever is greater*
* The operating will also include a time for the relay to frequency track 20Hz/second)
P341/EN TD/D22
Technical Data
Page 32/42
10.9
MiCOM P341
Reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O)

Settings
Range
Stage 1
Enable/disable
Mode
Reverse/low forward/over
P> (reverse power)
14W 40W (n=1A, Vn=100/120V)

56W 160W (n=1A, Vn=380/480V)
70W 200W (n=5A, Vn=100/120V)
280W 800W (n=5A, Vn=380/480V)
Equivalent Range in %Pn 8% - 21%
P< (low forward power
14W 40W (n=1A, Vn=100/120V)

56W 160W (n=1A, Vn=380/480V)
70W 200W (n=5A, Vn=100/120V)
280W 800W (n=5A, Vn=380/480V)
14W 300W (n=1A, Vn=100/120V)
56W 1200W (n=1A, Vn=380/480V)
70W 1500W (n=5A, Vn=100/120V)
280W 6000W (n=5A, Vn=380/480V)
P> (over power)
Step Size
2W
8W
10W
40W
1%
2W
8W
10W
40W
1%
2W
8W
10W
40W
1%
DT
0 100s
0.01s
DO Timer
0 100s
0.01s
Stage 2
Same as Stage 1
10.9.1 Accuracy
Pick-up
Drop-off
Setting 10%
Reverse/Over Power
0.95 of setting 10%
Low forward Power
1.05 of setting 10%
Pick-up (angle variation)
Expected pick-up angle 1 degree
Drop-off (angle variation)
Expected drop-off angle 2.5 degree
Operating time
Repeatability
<5%
Disengagement time
<50ms
tRESET
5%
Instantaneous operating time
<50ms
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
10.10
Page 33/42
Sensitive reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O)

Settings
Range
Stage 1
Enable/disable
Mode
Reverse/low forward/over
P> (reverse power)
P< (low forward power)
P> (over power)
Step Size
0.3W 15W (n=1A, Vn=100/120V)
0.1W
1.2W 60W (n=1A, Vn=380/480V)
0.4W
1.5W 75W (n=5A, Vn=100/120V)
0.5W
6.0W 300W (n=5A, Vn=380/480V)
2.0W
Equivalent range in %Pn 0.5% 23%
0.2%
0.3W 15W (n=1A, Vn=100/120V)
0.1W
1.2W 60W (n=1A, Vn=380/480V)
0.4W
1.5W 75W (n=5A, Vn=100/120V)
0.5W
6.0W 300W (n=5A, Vn=380/480V)
2.0W
0.2%
0.3W 100W (n=1A, Vn=100/120V)
0.1W
1.2W 400W (n=1A, Vn=380/480V)
0.4W
1.5W 500W (n=5A, Vn=100/120V)
0.5W
6.0W 2000W (n=5A, Vn=380/480V)
2.0W
0.2%
DT
0 100s
0.01s
DO Timer
0 100s
0.01s
Compensation angle C
-5 5
0.1
Stage 2
Same as Stage 1
10.10.1 Accuracy
Pick-up
Drop-off
Setting 10%
Reverse/Over Power
0.9 of setting 10%
Low forward Power
1.1 of setting 10%
Pick-up (angle variation)
Expected pick-up angle 2 degree
Drop-off (angle variation)
Expected drop-off angle 2.5 degree
Operating time
Repeatability
<5%
Disengagement time
<50ms
tRESET
5%
Instantaneous operating time
<50ms
P341/EN TD/D22
Technical Data
Page 34/42
10.11
MiCOM P341

Settings
Range
Step Size
df/dt Status
Enable/Disable
df/dt Setting
0.1 10Hz/s
0.01Hz
0 100s
0.01s
df/dt f Low
45 65Hz
0.01Hz
df/dt f High
45 65Hz
0.01Hz
df/dt Time Delay
10.11.2 Accuracy
Pick-up
Setting 0.5Hz/s
Operating time
Lower deadband operating time
Upper deadband operating time
Operation over deadband
Repeatability
10.12
<5%
Reconnection time delay

Settings
Range
Reconnect Status
Reconnect
Step Size
Enable/Disable
0.1 10Hz/s
0.01Hz
Reconnect delay
0 300s
0.01s
Reconnect pulse
0.03 30s
0.01s
10.12.2 Accuracy
Operating time
10.13
Voltage vector shift

Settings
Range
Step Size
V Shift Status
Enable/Disable
V shift angle
2 30
10.13.2 Accuracy
Pick-up
Setting 0.5
Trip pulse
500ms 2%
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
10.14
Page 35/42

Settings
Range
Step Size
0.5 - 1.5 n
0.01n
20 -100%
1%
T-heating
1 - 200 minutes
1 minute
T-cooling
1 - 200 minutes
1 minute
M Factor
0 - 10
Thermal I>
Thermal Alarm
10.14.1 Accuracy
Pick-up
Thermal alarm
Calculated trip time 5%
Thermal overload
Calculated trip time 5%
Cooling time accuracy
5% of theoretical
Repeatability
<2.5%
11.
SUPERVISORY FUNCTIONS
11.1
Voltage transformer supervision

Name
Range
Step Size
Negative phase sequence

voltage threshold (V2)
10V (100/120V) 40V (380/480V)
Phase overvoltage
P.U.30V, D.O. 10V (100/120V)

P.U.120V, D.O.40V (380/480V)
Fixed
0.1 n
Fixed
VTS 2> Inhibit
0.05 n to 0.5 n
0.01 n
VTS > Inhibit
0.08 n to 32 n
0.01 n
1.0 10s
0.1s
Superimposed current
VTS Time Delay
Fixed
11.1.1 Accuracy
Fast block operation
<25ms
Fast block reset
<30ms
Time delay
Setting 2% or 20ms whichever is greater
P341/EN TD/D22
Technical Data
Page 36/42
11.2
MiCOM P341

The N and VN thresholds take the same values as set for the directional earth fault
element.
Settings
Range
Step Size
VN <
0.5 - 22V (Vn = 100/120V)

2 - 88V (Vn = 380 / 440V)
0.5V
2V
N>
0.08n - 4n
0.01n
Time delay t
0 - 10s
1s
CTS time delay
0 - 10s
1s
11.2.1 Accuracy
Pick-up
Drop-off
N>
Setting 5%
VN <
Setting 5%
N>
0.9 x Setting 5%
VN <
(1.05 x Setting) 5% or 1V whichever is greater
Time delay operation
CTS block operation
< 1 cycle
CTS reset
< 35ms
12.
PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC
12.1
Level settings
Settings
Time delay t
12.2
Range
Step Size
0-14400000ms (4 hrs)
1ms
Accuracy
Output conditioner timer
Dwell conditioner timer
Pulse conditioner timer
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 37/42
13.
MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING FACILITIES
13.1
Measurements
Accuracy under reference conditions.
Measurand
Accuracy
Current
0.05 to 3 n
1.0% of reading
Voltage
0.05 to 2 Vn
1.0% of reading
0.2 to 2 Vn
5% of reading at unity
power factor
Power (W)
Reactive Power (VArs)
Apparent Power (VA)
Energy (Wh)
0.05 to 3 n
0.2 to 2 Vn
0.05 to 3 n
0.2 to 2 Vn
0.05 to 3 n
0.2 to 2 Vn
0.2 to 3 n
0.2 to 2 Vn
5% of reading at zero
power factor
5% of reading
power factor
0.2 to 3 n
power factor
Phase accuracy
0 to 360
0.5
Frequency
5 to 70Hz
0.025Hz
Energy (Varh)
13.2
Range
IRIG-B and real time clock
13.2.1 Features
Real time 24 hour clock settable in hours, minutes and seconds
Calendar settable from January 1994 to December 2092
Clock and calendar maintained via battery after loss of auxiliary supply
Internal clock synchronisation using IRIG-B
Interface for IRIG-B signal is BNC
13.2.2 Performance
Year 2000
Compliant
Real time clock accuracy
< 1 seconds / day
Modulation ratio
1/3 or 1/6
Input signal peak-peak amplitude
200 mV to 20 V
Input impedance at 1000 Hz
6000
External clock synchronisation
Conforms to IRIG standard 200-98, format

B12X
P341/EN TD/D22
Technical Data
Page 38/42
MiCOM P341
14.
DISTURBANCE RECORDS
14.1
Level settings
Settings
Duration
Trigger position
Range
Step Size
0.1 10.5s
10ms
0 100%
0.1%
8 analogue channels, 32 digital channels, single or extended trigger modes

14.2
Accuracy
Magnitude and relative phases
5% of applied quantities
Duration
2%
Trigger position
2% (minimum trigger 100ms)
15.
PLANT SUPERVISION
15.1
CB state monitoring control and condition monitoring
15.1.1 CB monitor settings

Setting
Range
Step
Broken ^ (mult)
12
0.1
^ Maintenance
1 25000 (x (CT ratio^mult)) A
1 (x (CT ratio^mult)) A
^ Lockout
1 25000 (x (CT ratio^mult)) A
1 (x (CT ratio^mult)) A
No CB Ops maintenance
1 10000
No CB Ops lockout
1 10000
CB time maintenance
0.005 0.5s
0.001s
CB time lockout
0.005 0.5s
0.001s
Fault frequency count
0 9999
Fault frequency time
0 9999
15.1.2 CB control settings

Setting
Man close RstDly
Range
Step
0.01 600s
0.01s
15.1.3 Accuracy
Timers
Broken current accuracy
5%
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
15.2
Page 39/42
CB fail and backtrip breaker fail
15.2.1 Timer settings

Setting
Range
Step
CB fail 1 timer
0 10s
0.01s
CB fail 2 timer
0 10s
0.01s
The timers are reset by:
undercurrent elements operating, or
initiating element drop-off (loss of external initiating signal), or
circuit breaker open auxiliary contact. (If current operation/external device is not
applicable)
15.2.2 Timer accuracy

Timers
Reset time
<30ms
15.2.3 Undercurrent settings

Name
Range
Step Size
Phase <
0.02 - 3.2 n
0.01 n
Earth N<
0.02 - 3.2 n
0.01 n
Sensitive Earth SEF<
0.001 - 0.8 n
0.0005 n
15.2.4 Undercurrent accuracy

Pick-up
10% or 25mA whichever is the greater
Operating time
<12ms (Typical <10ms)
Reset
<15ms (Typical <10ms)
16.
INPUT AND OUTPUT SETTING RANGES
16.1
CT and VT ratio settings

The primary and secondary rating can be independently set for each set of CT or VT
inputs, for example the earth fault CT ratio can be different to that used for the phase
currents.
Primary Range
Secondary Range
Current transformer
1 to 30000 Amps
step size 1A
1 or 5 Amps
Voltage transformer
100V to 1000 kV
step size 1V
80 to 140V (Vn = 100/120V)

320 to 560V (Vn = 380/480V)
P341/EN TD/D22
Technical Data
Page 40/42
17.
MiCOM P341
BATTERY LIFE
Battery life (assuming relay energised for 90% of time) > 10 years
1/2 AA size 3.6 V lithium thionyl chloride battery (SAFT advanced battery reference
LS14250)
FREQUENCY RESPONSE
With the exception of the RMS measurements all other measurements and protection
functions are based on the Fourier derived fundamental component.
The
fundamental component is extracted by using a 24 sample Discrete Fourier
Transform (DFT). This gives good harmonic rejection for frequencies up to the 23rd
harmonic. The 23rd is the first predominant harmonic that is not attenuated by the
Fourier filter and this is known as an Alias. However, the Alias is attenuated by
approximately 85% by an additional, analogue, anti-aliasing filter (low pass filter).
The combined affect of the anti-aliasing and Fourier filters is shown below:
1.2
Magnitude (per unit)
18.
Power frequency (eg 50/60 Hz)
1
Combined response of fourier
and anti-aliasing filters
0.8
0.6
Anti-aliasing filter response
0.4
0.2
0
0
10
15
20
25
Harmonic
P1124ENa
Figure 4:
Frequency response
For power frequencies that are not equal to the selected rated frequency the
harmonics would not be attenuated to zero amplitude. For small deviations of 1Hz,
this is not a problem but to allow for larger deviations, an improvement is obtained
by the addition of frequency tracking.
With frequency tracking the sampling rate of the analogue / digital conversion is
automatically adjusted to match the applied signal. In the absence of a suitable
signal to amplitude track, the sample rate defaults to the selected rated frequency
(Fn). In the presence of a signal within the tracking range (5 to 70Hz), the relay will
lock on to the signal and the measured frequency will coincide with the power
frequency as labelled in the diagram above. The resulting outputs for harmonics up
to the 23rd will be zero.
Technical Data
P341/EN TD/D22
MiCOM P341
19.
Page 41/42
LOCAL AND REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS

The following claims for Local & Remote Communications are applicable to the P34x
range of generator relays.
19.1
Front port
Setting
19.2
Protocol
Courier
Message format
IEC 60870-5 FT1.2
Baud rate
19 200 bits/s
Rear port
Rear Port Settings
Setting Options
Setting Available For:
Physical links
EIA(RS)485 or Fibre optic

EIA(RS)485 only
IEC 60870-5-CS103
only Courier, Modbus
and DNP3.0
Remote address
0 - 255 (step 1)
IEC 60870-5-CS103
and Courier
Modbus address
1 - 247 (step 1)
Modbus only
DNP3.0 address
1 - 65519 (step 1)
DNP3.0 only
Baud rate
9600 or 19200 bits/s
IEC 60870-5-CS103
only
9600/19200/38400
bits/s
Modbus, Courier
1200/2400/4800/9600/
19200/38400 bits/s
DNP3.0
Inactivity timer
1 - 30 minutes (step 1)
Not DNP3.0
Parity
Odd, Even or None
Modbus or DNP3.0
Measurement period
1 - 60 minutes (step 1)
IEC only
Time sync
Enabled / Disabled
DNP3.0
19.2.1 Performance
Front and rear ports conforming to Courier communication protocol
Compliant
Rear ports conforming to Modbus communication protocol
Compliant
Rear ports conforming to IEC 60870-5-CS103 communication

protocol
Compliant
Rear ports conforming to DNP3.0 communication protocol
Compliant
P341/EN TD/D22
Page 42/42
Technical Data
MiCOM P341
P341/EN CT/D22
MiCOM P341
SCADA COMMUNICATIONS
P341/EN CT/D22
MiCOM P341
MiCOM P341
P341/EN CT/D22
Page 1/20
CONTENT
1.
INTRODUCTION
2.
COURIER INTERFACE
2.1
Courier protocol
2.2
Front courier port
2.3
Supported command set
2.4
Relay courier database
2.5
Setting changes
2.5.1
Method 1
2.5.2
Method 2
2.5.3
Relay settings
2.5.4
Setting transfer mode
2.6
Event extraction
2.6.1
Automatic event extraction
2.6.2
Event types
2.6.3
Event format
2.6.4
Manual event record extraction
2.7
Disturbance record extraction
2.8
Programmable logic settings
3.
MODBUS INTERFACE
10
3.1
Communication link
10
3.2
Modbus functions
10
3.3
Response codes
11
3.4
Register mapping
11
3.5
Event extraction
11
3.5.1
Manual selection
11
3.5.2
Automatic extraction
12
3.5.3
Record data
12
3.6
13
3.6.1
Manual selection
13
3.6.2
13
3.6.3
Record data
14
P341/EN CT/D22
Page 2/20
MiCOM P341
3.7
Setting changes
14
3.7.1
Password protection
14
3.7.2
15
3.7.3
Protection and disturbance recorder settings
15
4.
IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
16
4.1
Physical connection and link layer
16
4.2
Initialisation
16
4.3
17
4.4
Spontaneous events
17
4.5
General interrogation
17
4.6
Cyclic measurements
17
4.7
Commands
17
4.8
Test mode
17
4.9
Disturbance records
18
4.10
Blocking of monitor/command direction
18
5.
DNP3 INTERFACE
18
5.1
DNP3 protocol
18
5.2
DNP3 menu setting
18
5.3
Object 1 binary inputs
18
5.4
Object 10 binary outputs
19
5.5
Object 20 binary counters
19
5.6
Object 30 analogue input
19
5.7
DNP3 configuration using MiCOM S1
19
5.7.1
Object 1
20
5.7.2
Object 20
20
5.7.3
Object 30
20
MiCOM P341
1.
P341/EN CT/D22
Page 3/20
INTRODUCTION
This section describes the remote interfaces of the MiCOM relay in enough detail to
allow integration within a substation communication network. As has been outlined
in earlier sections the relay supports a choice of one of three protocols via the rear
communication interface. This is in addition to the front serial interface which
supports the Courier protocol.
The rear EIA(RS)485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection
whichever protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to
32 relays can be daisy chained together using a simple twisted pair electrical
connection.
For each of the three protocol options the supported functions/commands will be
listed together with the database definition. The operation of standard procedures
such as extraction of event, fault and disturbance records or setting changes will also
be described.
It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this section do not aim to
fully detail the protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be
referred to for this information. This section serves to describe the specific
implementation of the protocol on the relay.
2.
COURIER INTERFACE
2.1
Courier protocol
Courier is an AREVA T&D communication protocol. The concept of the protocol is
that a standard set of commands are used to access a database of settings/data
within the relay. This allows a generic master to be able to communicate with
different slave devices. The application specific aspects are contained, within the
database itself rather than the commands used to interrogate it. i.e. the master
station does not need to be pre-configured. The same protocol can be used via two
physical links K-Bus or EIA(RS)232; K-Bus is based on EIA(RS)485 voltage levels and is
synchronous, the EIA(RS)232 interface uses IEC60870 FT1.2 (IEC60870) frame
format. The relay supports an IEC60870 connection on the front, for one to one
connection, this is not suitable for permanent connection. This interface uses a fixed
baud rate, 11 bit frame and a fixed device address. The rear EIA(RS)485 interface is
used to provide a permanent connection for K-Bus and allows multi-drop connection.
It should be noted that although K-Bus is based on EIA(RS)485 voltage levels it is a
synchronous protocol using FM0 encoding. It is not possible to use a standard
EIA(RS)232 to EIA(RS)485 converter to convert IEC60870 to K-Bus.
The following documentation should be referred to for a detailed description of the
Courier protocol, command set and link description.
R6509
K-Bus Interface Guide
R6510
IEC60870 Interface Guide
R6511
Courier Protocol
R6512
Courier User Guide
P341/EN CT/D22
Page 4/20
2.2
MiCOM P341
Front courier port

The front EIA(RS)232 port supports the Courier protocol for one to one
communication.
It is designed for use during installation and
commissioning/maintenance and is not suitable for permanent connection. Since this
interface will not be used to link the relay to a substation communication system some
of the features of Courier are not implemented. These are as follows:
Automatic extraction of Event Records:
Courier Status byte does not support the Event flag
Sent Event/Accept Event commands are not implemented
Automatic extraction of Disturbance records:
Courier Status byte does not support the Disturbance flag
Busy Response Layer:
Courier Status byte does not support the Busy flag, the only response to a
request will be the final data
Fixed Address:
The address of the front Courier port is always 1, the Change Device address
command is not supported.
It should be noted that although automatic extraction of event and disturbance
records is not supported it is possible to manually access this data via the front port.
2.3
Supported command set

The following Courier commands are supported by the relay:
Protocol Layer
Reset Remote Link
Poll Status
Poll Buffer*
Low Level Commands
Send Event*
Accept Event*
Send Block
Store Block Identifier
Store Block Footer
Menu Browsing
Get Column Headings
Get Column Text
Get Column Values
Get Strings
Get Text
P341/EN CT/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 5/20
Get Value
Get Column Setting Limits
Setting Changes
Enter Setting Mode
Preload Setting
Abort Setting
Execute Setting
Reset Menu Cell
Set Value
Control Commands
Select Setting Group
Change Device Address*
Set Real Time
Note:
2.4
Commands indicated with a * are not supported via the front

Courier port.
Relay courier database

The Courier database is two dimensional structure with each cell in the database
being referenced by a row and column address. Both the column and the row can
take a range from 0 to 255. Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimal
values, e.g. 0A02 is column 0A (10 decimal) row 02. Associated settings/data will be
part of the same column, row zero of the column contains a text string to identify the
contents of the column.
Appendix A contains the complete database definition for the relay for each cell
location the following information is stated:
-
Cell Text
Cell Datatype
Cell value
Whether if the cell is settable, if so

-
Minimum value
Maximum value
Step size
Password Level required to allow setting changes
String information (for Indexed String or Binary flag cells)
P341/EN CT/D22
Page 6/20
2.5
MiCOM P341
Setting changes
(See Courier User Guide Chapter 9)
Courier provides two mechanisms for making setting changes, both of these are
supported by the relay. Either method can be used for editing any of the settings
within the relay database.
2.5.1
Method 1
This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change:
Enter Setting Mode - checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits
Preload Setting - Places a new value to the cell, this value is echoed to ensure that
setting corruption has not taken place, the validity of the setting is not checked by this
action.
Execute Setting - Confirms the setting change, if the change is valid then a positive
response will be returned, if the setting change fails then an error response will be
returned.
Abort Setting - This command can be used to abandon the setting change.
This is the most secure method and is ideally suited to on-line editors as the setting
limits are taken from the relay before the setting change is made. However this
method can be slow if many settings are being changed as three commands are
required for each change.
2.5.2
Method 2
The Set Value command can be used to directly change a setting, the response to this
command will be either a positive confirm or an error code to indicate the nature of a
failure. This command can be used to implement a setting more rapidly then the
previous method, however the limits are not extracted from the relay.
This method is most suitable for off-line setting editors such as MiCOM S1.
2.5.3
Relay settings
There are three categories of settings within the relay database
-
Control and Support
Disturbance Recorder
Protection Settings Group
Setting changes made to the control and support settings are implemented
immediately and stored in non-volatile memory. Settings made to either the
Disturbance recorder settings or the Protection Settings Groups are stored in
scratchpad memory only and are not immediately implemented by the relay.
To action setting changes made to these areas of the relay database the Save
Changes cell in the Configuration column must be written to. This allows the
changes to either be confirmed and stored within non-volatile memory or the setting
changes to be aborted.
P341/EN CT/D22
MiCOM P341
2.5.4
Page 7/20
Setting transfer mode

If it is necessary to transfer all of the relay settings to or from the relay a cell within the
Communication System Data column can be used. This cell (location BF03) when set
to 1 makes all of the relay settings visible. Any setting changes made with the relay
set in this mode are stored in scratchpad memory (including control and support
settings). When the value of BF03 is set back to 0 any setting changes are confirmed
and stored in non-volatile memory.
2.6
Event extraction
Events can be extracted either automatically (rear port only) or manually (either
Courier port). For automatic extraction all events are extracted in sequential order
using the standard Courier mechanism, this includes fault/maintenance data if
appropriate. The manual approach allows the user to select events, faults or
maintenance data at random from the stored records.
2.6.1
Automatic event extraction

(See Chapter 7 Courier User Guide)
This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it
is produced, it is only supported via the rear Courier port.
When new event information is created the Event bit is set within the Status byte, this
indicates to the Master device that event information is available. The oldest,
unextracted event can be extracted from the relay using the Send Event command.
The relay will respond with the event data, which will be either a Courier Type 0 or
Type 3 event. The Type 3 event is used for fault records and maintenance records.
Once an event has been extracted from the relay the Accept Event can be used to
confirm that the event has been successfully extracted. If all events have been
extracted then the event bit will reset, if there are more events still to be extracted the
next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as before.
2.6.2
Event types
Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances:
-
Change of state of output contact
Change of state of opto input
Protection element operation
Alarm condition
Setting Change
Password entered/timed-out
Fault Record (Type 3 Courier Event)
Maintenance record (Type 3 Courier Event)
P341/EN CT/D22
Page 8/20
2.6.3
MiCOM P341
Event format
The Send Event command results in the following fields being returned by the relay:
-
Cell Reference
Timestamp
Cell Text
Cell Value
Appendix B contains a table of the events created by the relay and indicates how the
contents of the above fields are interpreted. Fault records and Maintenance records
will return a Courier Type 3 event which contains the above fields together with two
additional fields:
-
Event extraction column
Event number
These events contain additional information which is extracted from the relay using
the referenced extraction column. Row 01 of the extraction column contains a setting
which allows the fault/maintenance record to be selected. This setting should be set
to the event number value returned within the record, the extended data can be
extracted from the relay by uploading the text and data from the column.
2.6.4
Manual event record extraction

Column 01 of the database can be used for manual viewing of event, fault and
maintenance records. The contents of this column will depend of the nature of the
record selected. It is possible to select by event number, or to directly select a fault
record or maintenance record.
Event Record selection (Row 01) - This cell can be set to a value between 0 to 249 to
select which of the 250 stored events is selected, 0 will select the most recent record;
249 the oldest stored record. For simple event records (Type 0) cells 0102 to 0105
contain the event details. A single cell is used to represent each of the event fields. If
the event selected is a fault or maintenance record (Type 3) then the remainder of the
column will contain the additional information.
Fault Record Selection (Row 05) - This cell can be used to directly select a fault record
using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of up to five stored fault records (0 will
be the most recent fault and 4 will be the oldest). The column will then contain the
details of the fault record selected.
Maintenance Record Selection (Row F0) - This cell can be used to select a
maintenance record using a value between 0 and 4 and operates in a similar way to
the fault record selection.
It should be noted that if this column is used to extract event information from the
relay the number associated with a particular record will change when a new event or
fault occurs.
2.7

The stored disturbance records within the relay are accessible in a compressed format
via the Courier interface. The records are extracted using column B4, it should be
noted that cells required for extraction of uncompressed disturbance records are not
supported.
P341/EN CT/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 9/20
Select Record Number (Row 01) - This cell can be used to select the record to be
extracted. Record 0 will be the oldest unextracted record, older records will be
assigned positive values, and negative values will be used for more recent records.
To facilitate automatic extraction via the rear port the Disturbance bit of the Status
byte is set by the relay whenever there are unextracted disturbance records.
Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the
record can be read from cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be extracted using
the block transfer mechanism from cell B00B. It should be noted that the file extracted
from the relay is in a compressed format, it will be necessary to use MiCOM S1 to decompress this file and save the disturbance record in the COMTRADE format.
As has been stated the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extract
disturbance records as they occur. This operates using the standard Courier
mechanism defined in Chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide. The front Courier port
does not support automatic extraction although disturbance record data can be
extracted manually from this port.
2.8
Programmable logic settings

The programmable logic settings can be uploaded from and downloaded to the relay
using the block transfer mechanism defined in Chapter 12 of the Courier User Guide.
The following cells are used to perform the extraction
-
B204 Domain: Used to select either PSL settings (Upload or download) or PSL
configuration data (Upload only)
B208 Sub-Domain: Used to select the Protection Setting Group to be

uploaded/downloaded.
B20C Version: Used on a download to check the compatibility of the file to be

downloaded with the relay.
B21C Transfer Mode: Used to set-up the transfer process
B120 Data Transfer Cell: Used to perform upload/download.
The Programmable scheme logic settings can be uploaded and downloaded to and
from the relay using this mechanism. If it is necessary to edit the settings MiCOM S1
must be used as the data format is compressed. MiCOM S1 also performs checks on
the validity of the settings before they are downloaded to the relay.
P341/EN CT/D22
Page 10/20
3.
MiCOM P341
MODBUS INTERFACE
The Modbus interface is a master/slave protocol, it is defined by MODICON Inc by
the following document:
Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide
3.1
PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E
Communication link
This interface also uses the rear EIA(RS)485 port for communication using RTU mode
communication rather than ASCII mode as this provides more efficient use of the
communication bandwidth. This mode of communication is defined in page 7 of the
Modbus Guide.
The following parameters can be configured for this port using either the front panel
interface or the front Courier port:
3.2
Baud Rate
Device Address
Parity
Inactivity Time
Modbus functions
The following Modbus function codes are supported by the relay:
01
Read Coil Status
02
Read Input Status
03
Read Holding Registers
04
Read Input Registers
06
Preset Single Register
08
Diagnostics
11
Fetch Communication Event Counter
12
Fetch Communication Event Log
16
Preset Multiple Registers 127 max
These are interpreted by the MiCOM relay in the following way:

01
Read status of output contacts (0xxxx addresses)
02
Read status of opto inputs (1xxxx addresses)
03
Read Setting values (4xxxx addresses)
04
Read Measured values (3xxxx addresses
06
Write single setting value (4xxxx addresses)
16
Write multiple setting values (4xxxx addresses)
P341/EN CT/D22
MiCOM P341
3.3
3.4
Page 11/20
Response codes
Code
Modbus description
MiCOM interpretation
01
Illegal Function Code
The function code transmitted is not

supported by the slave
02
Illegal Data Address
The start data address in the request is not an

allowable value. If any of the cells in the
range to be written to cannot be accessed
due to password protection then all changes
within the request are discarded and this
error response will be returned. Note: If the
start address is correct but the range includes
non - implemented addresses this response is
not produced.
03
Illegal Value
A value referenced in the data field

transmitted by the master is not within range.
Other values transmitted within the same
packet will be executed if inside range.
06
Slave Device Busy
The write command cannot be implemented

due to the database being locked by another
interface. This response is also produced if
the relay software is busy executing a
previous request.
Register mapping
The relay supports the following memory page references:Memory Page
Interpretation
0xxxx
Read and write access of the Output Relays.
1xxxx
Read only access of the Opto Inputs.
3xxxx
Read only access of Data.
4xxxx
Read and write access of Settings.
where xxxx represents the addresses available in the page (0 to 9999).

Note that the extended memory file (6xxxx) is not supported.
A complete map of the Modbus addresses supported by the relay is contained in
Appendix 1 of this service manual.
3.5
Event extraction
The relay supports two methods of event extraction providing either automatic or
manual extraction of the stored event, fault and maintenance records.
3.5.1
Manual selection
The following registers can be read to indicate the numbers of the various types of
record stored.
30100 - Number of stored records
30101 - Number of stored fault records
30102 - Number of stored maintenance records
P341/EN CT/D22
Page 12/20
MiCOM P341
There are three registers available to manually select stored records.

40100 - Select Event, 0 to 249
40101 - Select Fault, 0 to 4
40102 - Select Maintenance Record, 0 to 4
For each of the above registers a value of 0 represents the most recent stored record.
Each fault or maintenance record logged causes an event record to be created by the
relay. If this event record is selected the additional registers allowing the fault or
maintenance record details will also become populated. (See 3.5.3 for details)
3.5.2
The automatic extraction facilities allow all types of record to be extracted as they
occur. Event records are extracted in sequential order including any fault or
maintenance data that may be associated with the event.
The Modbus master can determine whether the relay has any events stored that have
not yet been extracted. This is performed by reading the relay status register 30001
(G26 data type). If the event bit of this register is set then the relay has unextracted
events available. To select the next event for sequential extraction the master station
writes a value of 1 to the record selection register 40400 (G18 data type). The event
data together with any fault/maintenance data can be read from the registers
specified below. Once the data has been read the event record can be marked as
having been read by writing a value of 2 to register 40400. The process can then be
repeated untill all events have been extracted.
3.5.3
Record data
The location and format of the registers used to access the record data is the same
whether they have been selected using either of the two mechanisms detailed above.
Event
Description
Modbus
Address
Length
Comments
Time and
Date
30103
See G12 data type
Event Type
30107
See G13 data type. Indicates type of event
Event Value
30108
Nature of Value depends on Event Type.

This will contain the status as a binary flag
for Contact, Opto, Alarm and protection
events.
Modbus
Address
30110
This indicates the Modbus Register address

where the change occurred.
Alarm 30011
Relays 30723
Optos 30725
Protection events Like the Relay and Opto
addresses this will map onto the Modbus
address of the South Park extensions
depending on which bit of the DDB the
change occurred. These will range from
30727 to 30785.
For Platform events, Fault events and
Maintenance events the default is 0.
P341/EN CT/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 13/20
Event
Description
Modbus
Address
Length
Comments
Event Index
30111
This register will contain the DDB No for

protection events or the bit No for alarm
events. The direction of the change will be
indicated by the MSB
Additional
Data Present
30112
0 means that there is no additional data

1 means fault record data can be read from
30113 to 30199 (number of registers
depends on the product)
2 means maintenance record data can be
read from 30036 to 30039
If a fault record or maintenance record is directly selected using the manual

mechanism then the data can be read from the register ranges specified above, the
event record data in cells 30103 to 30111 will not be available.
It is possible using register 40401(G6 data type) to clear independently the stored
relay event/fault and maintenance records. This register also provides an option to
reset the relay indications, this has the same effect on the relay as pressing the clear
key within the alarm viewer using the front panel menu.
3.6

The relay provides facilities for both manual and automatic extraction of disturbance
records. The two methods differ only in the mechanism for selecting a disturbance
record, the method for extracting the data and the format of the data are identical.
3.6.1
Manual selection
Each disturbance record has a unique identifier which increments for each stored
record and resets at a value of 65535. The following registers can be used to
determine the identifiers for the stored records
30800 - The number of stored disturbance records
30801 - The identifier for the oldest stored record
A record can be selected by writing the required record identifier to register 40250. It
is possible to read the timestamp of the selected record and in this way produce a list
of all the stored records.
3.6.2
The Modbus master station can determine the presence of unread disturbance
records by polling register 30001 (G26 data type). When the disturbance bit of this
register is set disturbance records are available for extraction. To select the next
disturbance record write a value of 0 x 0004 to cell 40400 (G18 data type). Once
the disturbance record data has been read by the master station this record can be
marked as having been read by writing a value of 0 x 0008 to register 40400.
P341/EN CT/D22
Page 14/20
3.6.3
MiCOM P341
Record data
The timestamp for a record selected using either of the above means can be read
from registers 30930 to 30933. The disturbance record data itself is stored in a
compressed format, due to the size of the disturbance record it must be read using a
paging system.
The number of pages required to extract a record will depend on the configured size
of the record.
When a record is first selected the first page of data will be available in registers
30803 to 30929 (the number of registers required for the current page can be read
from register 30802, this will be 127 for all but the last page in the record). Once
the first page has been read the next page can be selected by writing a value of
0x0010 to register 40400. If this action is performed on the last page for the
disturbance record an illegal value error response will be returned. This error
response can be used by the Modbus master to indicate that the last page of the
disturbance record has been read.
3.7
Setting changes
The relay settings can be split into two categories:
-
control and support settings
disturbance record settings and protection setting groups
Changes to settings within the control and support area are executed immediately.
Changes to either the protection setting groups or the disturbance recorder are stored
in a temporary area and must be confirmed before they are implemented. All the
relay settings are edited via Modbus using 4xxxx addresses. The following points
should be noted when settings are being edited:
3.7.1
Settings implemented using multiple registers must be written to using a multiregister write operation.
The first address for a multi-register write must be a valid address, if there are
unmapped addresses within the range being written to then the data associated
with these addresses will be discarded.
If a write operation is performed with values that are out of range then the
illegal data response will be produced. Valid setting values within the same
write operation will be executed.
If a write operation is performed attempting to change registers that require a

higher level of password access than is currently enabled then all setting
changes in the write operation will be discarded.
Password protection
As described in the introduction to this service manual the relay settings can be
subject to Password protection. The level of password protection required to edit a
setting is indicated in relay setting database (Appendix A). Level 2 is the highest level
of password access, level 0 indicates that no password is required for editing.
P341/EN CT/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 15/20
The following registers are available to control Password protection:
3.7.2
40001&40002
Password Entry
40022
Default Password Level
40023&40024
Setting to Change password level 1
40025&40026
Setting to Change password level 2
30010
Can be read to indicate current access level

Control and support settings are executed immediately on the write operation.
3.7.3
Protection and disturbance recorder settings

Setting changes to either of these areas are stored in a scratchpad area and will not
be used by the relay unless a confirm or to abort operation is performed. Register
40405 can be used to either to confirm or abort the setting changes within the
scratchpad area. It should be noted that the relay supports four groups of protection
settings. The Modbus addresses for each of the four groups are repeated within the
following address ranges:
Group 1
41000-42999
Group 2
43000-44999
Group 3
45000-46999
Group 4
47000-48999
In addition to the basic editing of the protection setting groups the following functions
are provided.
-
Default values can be restored to a setting group or to all of the relay settings
by writing to register 40402.
It is possible to copy the contents of one setting group to another by writing the
source group to register 40406 and the target group to 40407.
It should be noted that the setting changes performed by either of the two operations
defined above are made to the scratchpad area. These changes must be confirmed
by writing to register 40405.
The active protection setting groups can be selected by writing to register 40404. An
illegal data response will be returned if an attempt is made to set the active group to
one that has been disabled.
P341/EN CT/D22
Page 16/20
4.
MiCOM P341
IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device.
This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol.
The relay conforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
4.1
Initialisation (Reset)
Time Synchronisation
Event Record Extraction
General Interrogation
Cyclic Measurements
General Commands
Disturbance Record Extraction
Private Codes
Physical connection and link layer

Two connection options are available for IEC60870-5-103, either the rear
EIA(RS)485 port or an optional rear fibre optic port. Should the fibre optic port be
fitted the selection of the active port can be made via the front panel menu or the
front Courier port, however the selection will only be effective following the next relay
power up.
For either of the two modes of connection it is possible to select both the relay
address and baud rate using the front panel menu/front Courier. Following a
change to either of these two settings a reset command is required to re-establish
communications.
4.2
Initialisation
Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have
been changed a reset command is required to initialise the communications. The
relay will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the
difference being that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relays
transmit buffer.
The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message
ASDU 5, the Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or
Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command. The following information
will be contained in the data section of this ASDU:
Manufacturer Name:
AREVA T&D
The Software Identification Section will contain the first four characters of the relay
model number to identify the type of relay, e.g. P141 and the software reference.
In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it
will also produce a power up event.
MiCOM P341
4.3
P341/EN CT/D22
Page 17/20
The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as
specified in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronisation message is sent as a
send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. Whether the time
synchronisation message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply)
message, a time synchronisation message will be returned as Class 1 data.
If the relay clock is being synchronised using the IRIG-B input then it will not be
possible to set the relay time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. An attempt to set
the time via the interface will cause the relay to create an event with the current date
and time taken from the IRIG-B synchronised internal clock.
4.4
Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be passed using the standard function
type/information numbers to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. Private codes are
used, thus any events that cannot be passed using the standardised messages can be
sent using Private Codes.
Events are categorised using the following information:
-
Function Type
Information number
Appendix A contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay.

4.5
General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and
information numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are indicated in
Appendix A.
4.6
Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be
read from the relay using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used). The rate at which
the relay produces new measured values can be controlled using the Measurement
Period setting. This setting can be edited from the front panel menu/front Courier
port and is active immediately following a change.
It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a
proportion of either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value of the analog value.
The selection of either 1.2 or 2.4 for a particular value is indicated in Appendix A.
4.7
Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in Appendix A. The relay will respond
to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative
acknowledgement of a command.
4.8
Test mode
It is possible using either the front panel menu or the front Courier port to disable the
relay output contacts to allow secondary injection testing to be performed.
This is interpreted as test mode by the IEC60870-5-103 standard. An event will be
produced to indicate both entry to and exit from test mode. Spontaneous events and
cyclic measured data transmitted whilst the relay is in test mode will have a COT of
test mode.
P341/EN CT/D22
Page 18/20
4.9
MiCOM P341
Disturbance records
The disturbance records stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using
the standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103.
4.10
Blocking of monitor/command direction

The relay does support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction and also
in the Command direction.
5.
DNP3 INTERFACE
5.1
DNP3 protocol
The DNP3 protocol is defined and administered by the DNP Users Group.
Information about the user group, DNP3 in general and the protocol specifications
can be found on their website:
www.dnp.org
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany the device profile document
which is included in Appendix A. The DNP3 protocol is not described here, please
refer to the documentation available from the user group. The device profile
document specifies the full details of the DNP3 implementation for the relay. This is
the standard format DNP3 document which specifies which objects, variations and
qualifiers are supported. The device profile document also specifies what data is
available from the relay via DNP3. The relay operates as a DNP3 slave and supports
subset level 2 of the protocol, plus some of the features from level 3.
DNP3 communication uses the EIA(RS)485 communication port at the rear of the
relay. The data format is 8 data bits, 1 start bit and 1 stop bit. Parity is configurable
(see menu settings below).
5.2
DNP3 menu setting

The settings shown below are available in the menu for DNP3 in the
Communications column.
5.3
Setting
Range
Description
Remote Address
0 65534
DNP3 address of relay (decimal)
Baud Rate
1200, 2400,
4800, 9600,
19200, 38400
Selectable baud rate for DNP3

communication
Parity
None, Odd,
Even
Parity setting
Time Sync
Enabled,
Disabled
Enables or disables the relay requesting time

sync from the master via IIN bit 4 word 1
Object 1 binary inputs

Object 1, binary inputs, contains information describing the state of signals within the
relay which mostly form part of the digital data bus (DDB). In general these include
the state of the output contacts and input optos, alarm signals and protection start
and trip signals. The DDB number column in the device profile document provides
the DDB numbers for the DNP3 point data. These can be used to cross-reference to
the DDB definition list which is also found in Appendix A. The binary input points can
also be read as change events via object 2 and object 60.
MiCOM P341
5.4
P341/EN CT/D22
Page 19/20
Object 10 binary outputs

Object 10, binary outputs, contains commands which can be operated via DNP3. As
such all points accept commands of type pulse on and latch on and execute the
command once for either command. Pulse off and latch off are also accepted but
result in no action being taken. The other fields ignored (queue, clear, trip/close, in
time and off time). A read of object 10 will give a value of zero at all times since the
commands do not have a data value. Due to that fact that many of the relays
functions are configurable, it may be the case that some of the object 10 commands
are not available for operation. For example a test auto-reclose command when
the auto-reclose function is disabled. In the case of a read from object 10 this will
result in the point being reported as off-line and for an operate command to object
12 will generate an error response.
5.5
Object 20 binary counters

Object 20, binary counters, contains cumulative counters and measurements. The
binary counters can be read as their present running value from object 20, or as a
frozen value from object 21. The running counters of object 20 accept the read,
freeze and freeze and clear functions. The freeze function takes the current value of
the object 20 running counter and stores is it the corresponding object 21 frozen
counter. The freeze and clear function resets the object 20 running counter to zero
after freezing its value.
5.6
Object 30 analogue input

Object 30, analogue inputs, contains information from the relays measurements
columns in the menu. All object 30 points are reported via DNP3 as fixed point
values although they are stored inside the relay in floating point format. The
conversion to fixed point format requires the use of a scaling factor, which differs for
the various types of data within the relay e.g. current, voltage, phase angle etc. The
data types supported are listed at the end of the device profile document with each
type allocated a D number, i.e. D1, D2, etc. In the object 30 point list each data
point has a D number data type assigned to it which defines the scaling factor,
default deadband setting and the range and resolution of the deadband setting. The
deadband is the setting used to determine whether a change event should be
generated for each point. The change events can be read via object 32 or object 60
and will be generated for any point whose value has changed by more than the
deadband setting since the last time the data value was reported.
Any analogue measurement that is unavailable at the time it is read will be reported
as offline, e.g. the thermal state when the thermal protection is disabled in the
configuration column. Note that all object 30 points are reported as secondary
values in DNP3 (with respect to CT and VT ratios).
5.7
DNP3 configuration using MiCOM S1

A PC support package for DNP3 is available as part of the Settings and Records
module of MiCOM S1. The S1 module allows configuration of the relays DNP3
response. The PC is connected to the relay via a serial cable to the 9-pin front part of
the relay see section P341/EN IT/C22, Introduction. The configuration data is
uploaded from the relay to the PC in a block of compressed format data and
downloaded to the relay in a similar manner after modification. The new DNP3
configuration takes effect in the relay after the download is complete. The default
configuration can be restored at any time by choosing All Settings from the Restore
Defaults cell in the menu Configuration column. In S1 the DNP3 data is displayed
on three tabbed screen, one for each object1, 20 and 30. Object 10 is not
configurable.
P341/EN CT/D22
Page 20/20
5.7.1
MiCOM P341
Object 1
For every point included in the device profile document there is a check box for
membership of class 0 and radio buttons for class 1, 2 or 3 membership. Any point
which is in class 0 must be a member of one of the change event classes, 1, 2 or 3.
Points which are configured out of class 0 are by default not capable of generating
change events. Furthermore, points that are not part of class 0 are effectively
removed from the DNP3 response by renumbering the points that are in class 0 into
a contiguous list starting at point number 0. The renumbered point numbers are
shown at the left hand side of the screen in S1 and can be printed out to form a
revised device profile for the relay. This mechanism allows best use of available
bandwidth by only reporting the data points required by the user when a poll for all
points is made.
5.7.2
Object 20
The running counter value of object 20 points can be configured to be in or out of
class 0. Any running counter that is in class 0 can have its frozen value selected to be
in or out of the DNP3 response, but a frozen counter cannot be included without the
corresponding running counter. As with object 1, the class 0 response will be
renumbered into a contiguous list of points based on the selection of running
counters. The frozen counters will also be renumbered based on the selection; note
that if some of the counters that are selected as running are not also selected as
frozen then the renumbering will result in the frozen counters having different point
numbers to their running counterparts. For example, object 20 point 3 (running
counter) might have its frozen value reported as object 21 point 1.
5.7.3
Object 30
For the analogue inputs, object 30, the same selection options for classes 0, 1, 2 and
3 are available as for object 1. In addition to these options, which behave in exactly
the same way as for object 1, it is possible to change the deadband setting for each
point. The minimum and maximum values and the resolution of the deadband
settings are defined in the device profile document; MiCOM S1 will allow the
deadband to be set to any value within these constraints.
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
RELAY MENU DATABASE
P341/EN GC/D22
Relay Menu Database

MiCOM P341
MiCOM P341 Guide

Relay Menu Database
This version of the Relay Menu Database is specific to the following
models
Model Number
Software Number
P341------0050B
P341------0050-A/B/C
For other models / software versions, please contact AREVA T&D for the
relevant information.
(Software versions P341------0010*, P341------0020*, P341------0030*,
P341------0040* are not supported by this menu database, see
P341/EN T/B11 (0020 0040) and TG8617A (0010) for information
on the menu database for these software versions).
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 1/158
RELAY MENU DATABASE

This database is split into several sections, these are as follows:
Menu Database for Courier, User Interface and Modbus
Menu Datatype Definition
Event Data for Courier, User Interface and Modbus
IEC60870-5-103 Interoperability Guide
Internal Digital Signals
DNP3.0 Device Profile Document
Default Programmable Logic
Menu database
This database defines the structure of the relay menu for the courier interface, the
front panel user interface and the Modbus interface. This includes all the relay
settings and measurements. Datatypes for Modbus and indexed strings for Courier
and the user interface are cross-referenced to the Menu Datatype Definition section
(using a G Number). For all settable cells the setting limits and default value are also
defined within this database.
Note:
The following labels are used within the database
Label
Description
Value
V1
Main VT Rating
1 (120/110V) 4 (380/480V)
V2
Checksynch VT Rating
1 (100/110V) 4 (380/480V)
V3
NVD VT Rating
1 (100/110V) 4 (380/480V)
Phase CT Rating
1 or 5 (Setting 0A08)
Earth Fault CT Rating
1 or 5 (Setting 0A0A)
Sensitive CT Rating
1 or 5 (Setting 0A0C)
Mutual CT Rating
1 or 5 (Setting 0A0E)
Menu datatype definition

This table defines the datatypes used for Modbus (the datatypes for the Courier and
user interface are defined within the Menu Database itself using the standard Courier
Datatypes). This section also defines the indexed string setting options for all
interfaces. The datatypes defined within this section are cross-referenced to from the
menu Database using a G number.
Event data
This section specifies all the event information that can be produced by the relay. It
details exactly how each event will be presented via the Courier, User and Modbus
interfaces.
IEC60870-5-103 interoperability guide
This table fully defines the operation of the IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) interface for the
relay it should be read in conjunction with the relevant section of the Communications
section of this manual.
P341/EN GC/D22
Relay Menu Database
Page 2/158
MiCOM P341
Internal digital signals

This table defines all of the relay internal digital signals (opto inputs, output contacts
and protection inputs and outputs). A relay may have up to 512 internal signals each
referenced by a numeric index as shown in this table. This numeric index is used to
select a signal for the commissioning monitor port. It is also used to explicitly define
protection events produced by the relay (see the Event Data section).
DNP3.0 device profile document
This table defines all of the objects, functions and/or qualifiers supported.
Default programmable logic
This section documents the default programmable logic for the various models of the
relay. This default logic for each model of the relay is supplied with the MiCOM S1
Scheme Logic Editor PC support software.
References
Section 1 Introduction: User Interface operation and connections to the relay
Section 5 Communications: Overview of communication interfaces
Courier User Guide R6512
Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide
PI-MBUS-300 Rev E
IEC60870-5-103 Telecontrol Equipment and Systems Transmission Protocols

Companion Standard for the informative interface of Protection Equipment
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 3/158
UI
SYSTEM DATA
Courier
Col
Row
00
00
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Language
01
Indexed String
G19
Password
02
ASCII Password(4 chars)
G20
40001
Sys Fn Links
03
Binary Flag (8 bits)
G95
40003
Description
04
ASCII Text(16 chars)
G3
40004
40011
G3
Plant Reference
05
G3
40012
40019
Model Number
06
G3
30020
30035
Serial Number
08
ASCII Text(7 chars)
G3
30044
30051
40002
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
*
*
*
G19
English
Setting
G20
AAAA
Setting
65
90
Setting
MiCOM P34*
Setting
32
163
G3
ALSTOM
Setting
32
163
G3
Model Number
Data
G3
Serial Number
Data
G1
G95
Comment
Indexed Strings
Frequency
09
Unsigned Integer(8 bits)
50
Setting
Comms Level
0A
Data
Relay Address
0B
255
Setting
Binary Flag(16 bits)
30001
G26
Data
Plant Status
0C
30002
G4
Data
Control Status
0D
30004
G5
Data
Active Group
0E
30006
G1
Data
UNUSED
0F
40021
G55
CB Trip/Close
40020
50
60
255
10
10
Indexed String(2)
G55
10
Indexed String(2)
G55
Software Ref. 1
11
30052
30059
G3
Data
Opto I/P Status
20
30084
30085
G8
Data
30008
30009
G9
Data
30011
30012
G96
Data
CB Trip/Close
N/A
No Operation
Command
No Operation
Command
* = 1 for Model 1, 2 for Model 2,

3 for Model 3
Needs to be address of interface

Rear Courier Address available
via LCD
Relay status (repeat of Courier
Status byte without the busy flag
Visible to LCD+Front Port

Visible to Rear Port
Indexed String
Relay O/P Status
21

Indexed String
Alarm Status 1
22

Indexed String
UNUSED
23
Access Level
D0
G1
30010
G1
Password Control
D1
G22
40022
G22
Setting
Password Level 1
D2
G20
40023
40024
G20
AAAA
Setting
65
90
D3
G20
40025
40026
G20
AAAA
Setting
65
90
Password Level 2
VIEW RECORDS
01
Select Event
00
G1
No of event records stored
30101
G1
Number of Fault records stored
30102
G1
40100
02
Cell Reference
30107
Time & Date
03
IEC870 Time & Date
30103
Event Text
04
Ascii String (32 chars)
N/A
*
*
30100
01
Menu Cell Ref
Data
30106
Setting
G13
(From Record)
Data
G12
(From Record)
249
Max value is oldest record

*
Indicates type of event.
Data
See Event sheet
Data
See Event sheet
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 4/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
Event Value
05
Unsigned Int / Binary Flag (32 bits)
30108
Select Fault
06
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
40101
Started Phase
End
30109
Modbus
Database
G27
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Data
Setting
Allows Fault Record to be selected
30110
G1
Data
Modbus address where change

occurred Alarm 330011; Relay
30723; Opto 30725 Protection
30727-30754
30111
G1
Data
Status of current 16 DDB elements
30112
G1
Data
Additional data present
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
ABCN
Tripped Phase
A/B/C/N Visible if Start A/B/C/N
ABCN
Gen Differential
Comment
Note DTL depends on event type
binary flag for o/p, opto, alarm &
prot. See event sheet of
Spreadsheet
A/B/C/N Visible if Trip A/B/C/N

*
Trip
Power
Start 1 2
Power
1/2 visible if Start 1/2
Trip 1 2
Field Failure
1/2 visible if Trip 1/2
Alarm
Field Failure
Start 1 2
Field Failure
Trip 1 2
NPS Thermal
1/2 visible if Trip 1/2
Alarm Trip
Volt Dep O/C
Start Trip
Underimedance
Start Z< 12
Underimedance
1/2 visible if Start Z< 1/2
Trip Z< 12
Overcurrent
1/2 visible if Trip Z< 1/2
Start I> 1234

Overcurrent
1/2/3/4 Visible if Start I>1/2/3/4
Trip I> 1234

Earth Fault
1/2/3/4 Visible if Trip I>1/2/3/4

1/2/3/4 visible if Start
IN>1/2/3/4
Start IN> 1234

Earth Fault
N/A
Data
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 5/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Trip IN> 1234

Sensitive E/F
N/A
Data
*
1/2/3/4 visible if Start
ISEF>1/2/3/4
Start ISEF> 1234

Sensitive E/F
N/A
Data
*
1/2/3/4 visible if Trip
ISEF>1/2/3/4
Trip ISEF> 1234

Restricted E/F
Comment
1/2/3/4 visible if Trip
IN>1/2/3/4
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
Ph-Ph or Ph-N
N/A
Data
Ph-Ph or Ph-N
N/A
Data
Ph-Ph or Ph-N
N/A
Data
Ph-Ph or Ph-N
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
Trip IREF>
Sensitive Power
Start 1 2
Sensitive Power
Trip 1 2
Residual O/V NVD
1/2 visible if trip 1/2
Start VN> 1 2
Residual O/V NVD
1/2 visible if Start VN>1/2
Trip VN> 1 2
100% Stator EF
1/2 visible if Trip VN>1/2

*
Start Trip
V/Hz
Alarm Start Trip

df/dt
Start Trip
V Vector Shift
Trip
Dead Machine
Trip
U/Voltage start
V< 1 2 AB BC CA
U/Voltage Trip
1/2 visible if Start V<1/2
V< 1 2 AB BC CA
O/Voltage Start
1/2 visible if Trip V<1/2
V> 1 2 AB BC CA
O/Voltage Trip
1/2 visible if Start V>1/2
V> 1 2 AB BC CA
Underfrequency
1/2 visible if Trip V>1/2
Start F< 1234

Underfrequency
1/2/3/4 visible if Start F<1/2/3/4
Trip F< 1234

Overfrequency
1/2/3/4 visible if Trip F<1/2/3/4
Start F> 1 2
Overfrequency
Trip F> 1 2
1/2 visible if Start F>1/2

1/2 visible if Trip F>1/2
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
RTD Alarm
Page 6/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
Comment
RTD 1 label
RTD Alarm
RTD 2 label
RTD Alarm
RTD 3 label
RTD Alarm
RTD 4 label
RTD Alarm
RTD5 label
RTD Alarm
RTD6 label
RTD Alarm
RTD7 label
RTD Alarm
RTD8 label
RTD Alarm
RTD9 label
RTD Alarm
RTD10 label
RTD Trip
RTD 1 label
RTD Trip
RTD 2 label
RTD Trip
RTD 3 label
RTD Trip
RTD 4 label
RTD Trip
RTD5 label
RTD Trip
RTD6 label
RTD Trip
RTD7 label
RTD Trip
RTD8 label
RTD Trip
RTD9 label
RTD Trip
RTD10 label
Breaker Fail
CB Fail 1 2
Supervision
VTS CTS
1/2 visible if CB Fail 1/2

VTS/CTS visible if AlarmVTS/CTS
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 7/158
UI
PoleSlip z based
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
Data
Comment
Start Z1 Z2
PoleSlip z based
Trip Z1 Z2
Thermal Overload
Alarm Trip
Faulted Phase
N/A
07
Binary Flag (8 Bits)
G16
30113
G16
Data
Started phases + tripped phases
Start Elements1
N/A
08
G84
30114
30115
G84
Data
Started Elements
G107
30116
30117
G107
Data
Started Elements
G85
30118
30119
G85
Data
Tripped main elements
G86
30120
30121
G86
Data
Tripped secondary elements
G87
30122
30123
G87
Data
Faullt Alarms/Warnings
30127
G12
Indexed String
Start Elements2
N/A
09

Indexed String
Trip Elements1
N/A
0A

Indexed String
Trip Elements2
N/A
0B

Indexed String
Fault Alarms
N/A
0C

Indexed String
Fault Time
0D
IEC870 Time & Date
30124
Active Group
0E
Unsigned Integer
30128
System Frequency
0F
Courier Number (frequency)
30129
Fault Duration
10
Courier Number (time)
30130
CB Operate Time
11
30132
30131
Data
G1
(From Record)
Data
G30
Data
G24
Data
G25
Data
*
*
Relay Trip Time
12
30133
30134
G24
Data
IA
13
Courier Number (current)
30135
30136
G24
Data
14
30137
30138
G24
Data
15
30139
30140
G24
Data
VAB
16
Courier Number (voltage)
30141
30142
G24
Data
VBC
17
30143
30144
G24
Data
VCA
18
30145
30146
G24
Data
VAN
19
30147
30148
G24
Data
VBN
1A
30149
30150
G24
Data
IA-1
IB
IB-1
IC
IC-1
VCN
1B
30151
30152
G24
Data
IA-2
1C
30153
30154
G24
Data
IB-2
IC-2
IA Differential
1D
1E
1F

30155
30157
30159
30156
30158
30160
G24
G24
G24
Data
Data
Data
*
*
*
IB Differential
20
30161
30162
G24
Data
IC Differential
21
30163
30164
G24
Data
VN Measured
22
30165
30166
G24
Data
VN Derived
23
30167
30168
G24
Data
IN Measured
24
30169
30170
G24
Data
IN Derived
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 8/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
I Sensitive
25
30171
30172
G24
Data
IREF Diff
26
30173
30174
G24
IREF Bias
27
30175
30176
G24
I2
28
30177
30178
3 Phase Watts
29
Courier Number (Power)
30179
3 Phase VArs
2A
Courier Number (VAr)
30181
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
*
Data
Data
G24
Data
30180
G125
Data
30182
G125
Data
3Ph Power Factor
2B
Courier Number (Decimal)
30183
G30
Data
RTD 1 Label
2C
Courier Number (Temperature)
30184
G10
Data
RTD 2 Label
2D
30185
G10
Data
RTD 3 Label
2E
30186
G10
Data
RTD 4 Label
2F
30187
G10
Data
RTD 5 Label
30
30188
G10
Data
RTD 6 Label
31
30189
G10
Data
RTD 7 Label
32
30190
G10
Data
RTD 8 Label
33
30191
G10
Data
RTD 9 Label
34
30192
G10
Data
RTD 10 Label
35
30193
G10
Data
df/dt
36
Courier Number (Hz/s)
30194
G25
Data
V Vector Shift
37
Courier Number (Angle)
30195
G30
Select Maint
F0
40102
G1
Data
Manual override to
select a fault record.
Setting
*
0
Maint Text
F1
Ascii Text (32 chars)
Data
Maint Type
F2
Unsigned integer (32 bits)
30036
30037
G27
Data
Maint Data
F3
30038
30039
G27
Data
Reset Indication
FF
Indexed String
MEASUREMENTS 1
IA Magnitude
02
G11
No
Command
00
01
30200
30201
30201
IA-1 Magnitude
01
30200
IA Phase Angle
02
Courier Number (angle)
30202
IA-1 Phase Angle
02
30202
IB Magnitude
03
30203
30204
30204
IB-1 Magnitude
03
30203
IB Phase Angle
04
30205
IB-1 Phase Angle
04
30205
IC Magnitude
05
30206
30207
30207
IC-1 Magnitude
05
30206
IC Phase Angle
06
30208
IC-1 Phase Angle
06
30208
IN Measured Mag
07
30209
IN Measured Ang
08
30211
IN Derived Mag
09
30212
IN Derived Angle
0A
30214
I Sen Magnitude
0B
30215
I Sen Angle
0C
Courier Number (degrees)
30217
I1 Magnitude
0D
30218
30210
30213
30216
30219
G24
Data
G24
Data
G30
Data
G30
Data
G24
Data
G24
Data
G30
Data
G30
Data
G24
Data
Comment
*
*
*
*
G24
Data
G30
Data
G30
Data
G24
Data
G30
Data
G24
Data
G30
Data
G24
Data
G30
Data
G24
Data
Allows Self Test Report to be

selected
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 9/158
UI
Courier
Col
I2 Magnitude
Row
0E
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
30220
30221
G24
Default Setting
Cell Type
Data
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
*
I0 Magnitude
0F
30222
30223
G24
Data
IA RMS
10
30224
30225
G24
Data
IB RMS
11
30226
30227
G24
Data
IC RMS
12
30228
30229
G24
Data
VAB Magnitude
14
30230
30231
G24
Data
VAB Phase Angle
15
30232
G30
Data
VBC Magnitude
16
30233
VBC Phase Angle
17
30235
VCA Magnitude
18
30236
VCA Phase Angle
19
30238
VAN Magnitude
1A
30239
VAN Phase Angle
1B
30241
VBN Magnitude
1C
30242
VBN Phase Angle
1D
30244
VCN Magnitude
1E
30245
VCN Phase Angle
1F
30247
VN Measured Mag
20
30248
VN Measured Ang
21
30250
VN Derived Mag
22
30251
VN Derived Ang
23
30252
V1 Magnitude
24
30253
V2 Magnitude
25
30255
V0 Magnitude
26
VAN RMS
27
30234
30237
30240
30243
30246
30249
30252
G24
Data
G30
Data
G24
Data
G30
Data
G24
Data
G30
Data
G24
Data
G30
Data
G24
Data
G30
Data
G24
Data
G30
Data
G24
Data
G30
Data
30254
G24
Data
30256
G24
Data
30257
30258
G24
Data
30259
30260
G24
Data
*
*
VBN RMS
28
30261
30262
G24
Data
VCN RMS
29
30263
30264
G24
Data
Frequency
MEASUREMENTS 2
A Phase Watts
2D
00
01
30265
G30
Data
30300
30302
G29
Data
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
B Phase Watts
02
30303
30305
G29
Data
C Phase Watts
03
30306
30308
G29
Data
A Phase VArs
04
30309
30311
G29
Data
B Phase VArs
05
30312
30314
G29
Data
C Phase VArs
06
30315
30317
G29
Data
A Phase VA
07
Courier Number (VA)
30318
30320
G29
Data
B Phase VA
08
Courier Number (VA)
30321
30323
G29
Data
C Phase VA
09
Courier Number (VA)
30324
30326
G29
Data
3 Phase Watts
0A
30327
30329
G29
Data
3 Phase VArs
0B
30330
30332
G29
Data
3 Phase VA
0C
Courier Number (VA)
30333
30335
G29
Data
3Ph Power Factor
0E
Courier Number (decimal)
30339
G30
Data
APh Power Factor
0F
30340
G30
Data
BPh Power Factor
10
30341
G30
Data
CPh Power Factor
11
30342
G30
Data
03
Comment
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 10/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Comment
3Ph WHours Fwd
12
Courier Number (Wh)
30343
30345
G29
Data
3 Phase Watt - Hours (Forward)
3Ph WHours Rev
13
Courier Number (Wh)
30346
30348
G29
Data
3 Phase Watts - Hours (Reverse)
3Ph VArHours Fwd
14
Courier Number (VArh)
30349
30351
G29
Data
3 Phase VAr - Hours (Forward)
3Ph VArHours Rev
15
Courier Number (VArh)
30352
30354
G29
Data
3 Phase VAr - Hours (Reverse)
3Ph W Fix Demand
16
30355
30357
G29
Data
3 Phase Watts - Fixed Demand
3Ph VArs Fix Dem
17
Courier Number (Vars)
30358
30360
G29
Data
3 Phase VArs - Fixed Demand
IA Fixed Demand
18
Courier Number (Current)
30361
30362
G24
Data
IB Fixed Demand
19
30363
30364
G24
Data
IC Fixed Demand
1A
30365
30366
G24
Data
3 Ph W Roll Dem
1B
30367
30369
G29
Data
3 Phase Watts - Rolling Demand
3Ph VArs RollDem
1C
30370
30372
G29
Data
3 Phase VArs - Rolling Demand
IA Roll Demand
1D
30373
30374
G24
Data
IB Roll Demand
1E
30375
30376
G24
Data
IC Roll Demand
1F
30377
30378
G24
Data
3Ph W Peak Dem
20
30379
30381
G29
Data
3 Phase Watts - Peak Demand
3Ph VAr Peak Dem
21
30382
30384
G29
Data
3 Phase VArs - Peak Demand
IA Peak Demand
22
30385
30386
G24
Data
IB Peak Demand
23
30387
30388
G24
Data
IC Peak Demand
24
30389
30390
G24
Data
Reset Demand
25
Indexed String
G11
40103
G11
No
Command
N/A
30391
30392
G125
Data
A Phase Watts (see [0301])
N/A
30393
30394
G125
Data
B Phase Watts (see [0302])
N/A
30395
30396
G125
Data
C Phase Watts (see [0303])
N/A
30397
30398
G125
Data
A Phase VArs (see [0304])
N/A
30399
30400
G125
Data
B Phase VArs (see [0305])
N/A
30401
30402
G125
Data
C Phase VArs (see [0306])
N/A
30403
30404
G125
Data
A Phase VA (see [0307])
N/A
30405
30406
G125
Data
B Phase VA (see [0308])
N/A
30407
30408
G125
Data
C Phase VA (see [0309])
N/A
30409
30410
G125
Data
3 Phase Watts (see [030A])
N/A
30411
30412
G125
Data
3 Phase VArs (see [030B])
N/A
30413
30414
G125
Data
N/A
30415
30416
G125
Data
N/A
30417
30418
G125
Data
N/A
30419
30420
G125
Data
N/A
30421
30422
G125
Data
N/A
30423
30424
G125
Data
N/A
30425
30426
G125
Data
3 Phase VA (see [030C])

3 Phase WHours Fwd
(see [0312])
3 Phase WHours Rev
(see [0313])
3 Phase VArHours Fwd
(see [0314])
3 Phase VArHours Rev
(see [0315])
3 Phase W Fix Demand
(see [0316])
3 Phase VArs Fix Demand
(see [0317])
3 Phase W Roll Demand
(see [031B])
3 Phase VArs Roll Demand
(see [031C])
N/A
30427
30428
G125
Data
N/A
30429
30430
G125
Data
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 11/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
N/A
N/A
MEASUREMENTS 3
04
00
MEASUREMENTS 3
04
00
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
30431
30432
G125
Data
30433
30434
G125
Data
*
Visible if (0915=2) II ((0911=1
&& (x650 = 1))
IA-2 Magnitude
01
30435
IA-2 Phase Angle
02
30437
IB-2 Magnitude
03
30438
IB-2 Phase Angle
04
30440
IC-2 Magnitude
05
30441
IC-2 Phase Angle
06
30443
IA Differential
07
30444
IB Differential
08
IC Differential
09
IA Bias
0A
IB Bias
30436
G24
Data
G30
Data
G24
Data
G30
Data
G24
Data
G30
Data
30445
G24
Data
30446
30447
G24
Data
30448
30449
G24
Data
30450
30451
G24
Data
0B
30452
30453
G24
Data
IC Bias
0C
30454
30455
G24
Data
IREF Diff
0D
30456
30457
G24
Data
IREF Bias
0E
30458
30459
G24
Data
VN 3rd Harmonic
0F
Courier Number (Voltage)
30460
30461
G24
Data
NPS Thermal
10
Courier Number (Percentage)
30462
G1
Data
Reset NPSThermal
11
Indexed String
40104
G11
RTD 1
12
30463
G10
Data
RTD 2
13
30464
G10
RTD 3
14
30465
RTD 4
15
RTD 5
16
RTD 6
30439
30442
Comment
3 Phase W Peak Demand
(see [0320])
3 Phase VArs Peak Demand
(see [0321])
Visible if (090B=1) &&

(X001 = 1)
(X001 = 1)
(X001 = 1)
*
*
*
Visible if (0915=1) &&

(XA01 >= 3)
(XA01 >= 3)
*
*
Visible if (090E=1) &&

(X304 = 1)
Visible if (090E=1) &&
(X304 = 1)
Courier text = RTD lable setting
Data
G10
Data
30466
G10
Data
30467
G10
Data
17
30468
G10
Data
RTD 7
18
30469
G10
Data
RTD 8
19
30470
G10
Data
RTD 9
1A
30471
G10
Data
RTD 10
1B
30472
G10
Data
RTD Open Cct
1C
G108
30473
G108
Data
RTD Short Cct
1D
G109
30474
G109
Data
G110
30475
G110
Data
G11
40105
G11
G11
No
Command
Indexed String
Indexed String
RTD Data Error
1E

Indexed String
Reset RTD Flags
1F
Indexed string
No
Command
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 12/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Comment
CB Operations
01
Unsigned Integer
30600
G1
Data
Total IA Broken
02
30601
30602
G24
Data
Visible only when Spower is

selected in the Configuration
column
column
column
(X650 = 1)
(X650 = 1)
CB CONDITION MONITORING
Number of Circuit Breaker
Operations
Broken Current A Phase
Total IB Broken
03
30603
30604
G24
Data
Broken Current B Phase
Total IC Broken
04
30605
30606
G24
Data
Broken Current C Phase
CB Operate Time
05
30607
G25
Data
Circuit Breaker operating time
06
Indexed String
40150
G11
Reset All Values
APh Sen Watts
20
30476
30477
G125
Data
APh Sen Vars
21
Courier Number (Var)
30478
30479
G125
Data
APh Power Angle
22
30480
G30
Data
Thermal Overload
23
Reset ThermalO/L
24
Indexed String
CB CONDITION
06
Reset CB Data
CB CONTROL
07
G11
30481
G1
40106
G11
Data
No
Command
00
G11
No
Command
00
CB Control by
01
Indexed String
Close Pulse Time
02
Courier Number (Time)
G99
40200
G99
Disabled
Setting
40201
G2
0.5
Setting
0.1
10
0.01
Trip Pulse Time
03
40202
G2
0.5
Setting
0.1
0.01
Man Close Delay
05
40203
G2
10
Setting
0.01
600
0.01
CB Healthy Time
06
40204
G35
Setting
0.01
9999
0.01
Lockout Reset
08
Indexed String
G11
40206
G11
No
Command
Reset Lockout by
09
Indexed String
G81
40207
G81
CB Close
Setting
Man Close RstDly
0A
40208
G2
Setting
0.01
600
0.01
CB Status Input
11
Indexed String
40209
G118
None
Setting
IEC870 Time & Date
40300
N/A
Front Panel Menu only
N/A
Front Panel Menu only
DATE AND TIME

Date/Time
08
N/A
00
01
Date
40205
40303
G12
Setting
Manual Close Delay
Manual Close Reset Delay
12-Jan-98
Time
12:00
IRIG-B Sync
04
Indexed String
G37
40304
G37
IRIG-B Status
05
Indexed String
G17
30090
G17
Data
Battery Status
06
Indexed String
G59
30091
G59
Data
Battery Alarm
07
Indexed String
G37
40305
G37
Enabled
Setting
*
*
CONFIGURATION
09
Disabled
Setting
Restore Defaults
01
00
Indexed String
G53
40402
G53
No Operation
Command
Setting Group
02
Indexed String
G61
40403
G61
Menu
Setting
Active Settings
03
Indexed String
G90
40404
G90
Setting
Save Changes
04
Indexed String
G62
40405
G62
No Operation
Command
Copy From
05
Indexed String
G90
40406
G90
Group 1
Setting
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 13/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
No Operation
Command
Copy To
06
Indexed String
G98
40407
G98
Setting Group 1
07
Indexed String
G37
40408
G37
Enabled
Setting
Setting Group 2
08
Indexed String
G37
40409
G37
Disabled
Setting
Setting Group 3
09
Indexed String
G37
40410
G37
Disbaled
Setting
Setting Group 4
0A
Indexed String
G37
40411
G37
Disabled
Setting
*
*
Gen Differential
0B
Indexed String
G37
40412
Enabled
Setting
Power
0C
Indexed String
G37
40413
Enabled
Setting
Field Failure
0D
Indexed String
G37
40414
Enabled
Setting
NPS Thermal
0E
Indexed String
G37
40415
Enabled
Setting
System Backup
0F
Indexed String
G37
40416
Enabled
Setting
Overcurrent
10
Indexed String
G37
40417
Enabled
Setting
Thermal Overload
11
Indexed String
G37
40433
Disabled
Setting
NOT USED
12
Indexed String
G37
40418
Enabled
Setting
Indexed String
G114
40419
Disabled
Setting
*
*
Earth Fault
13
NOT USED
14
SEF/REF/SPower
15
Comment
SEF/REF
Residual O/V NVD
16
Indexed String
G37
40420
Enabled
Setting
100% Stator EF
17
Indexed String
G37
40421
Disabled
Setting
V/Hz
18
Indexed String
G37
40422
Disabled
Setting
df/dt
19
Indexed String
G37
40423
Enabled
Setting
V Vector Shift
1A
Indexed String
G37
40424
Disabled
Setting
Dead Machine
1B
Indexed String
G37
40425
Disabled
Setting
Reconnect Delay
1C
Indexed String
G37
40426
Disabled
Setting
Volt Protection
1D
Indexed String
G37
40427
Enabled
Setting
Freq Protection
1E
Indexed String
G37
40428
Enabled
Setting
RTD Inputs
1F
Indexed String
G37
40429
Enabled
Setting
CB Fail
20
Indexed String
G37
40430
Disabled
Setting
Supervision
21
Indexed String
G37
40431
Disabled
Setting
NOT USED
22
NOT USED
23
Residual Overvoltage
*
*
*
NOT USED
Pole Slipping
24
Indexed String
G37
Enabled
Setting
Input Labels
25
Indexed String
G80
40432
Visible
Setting
Output Labels
26
Indexed String
G80
Visible
Setting
RTD Labels
27
Indexed String
G80
Visible
Setting
CT & VT Ratios
28
Indexed String
G80
Visible
Setting
Recorder Control
29
Indexed String
G80
Invisible
Setting
Disturb Recorder
2A
Indexed String
G80
Invisible
Setting
Measure't Setup
2B
Indexed String
G80
Invisible
Setting
Comms Settings
2C
Indexed String
G80
Visible
Setting
Commission Tests
2D
Indexed String
G80
Visible
Setting
Setting Values
2E
Indexed String
G54
Primary
Setting
NOT USED
2F
*
40400
G18
Record selection command

register
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 14/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
40401
CT AND VT RATIOS
0A
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
G6
00
Main VT Primary
01
40500
Main VT Sec'y
02
40502
NVD VT Primary
05
40506
NVD VT Secondary
06
Phase CT Primary
07
Phase CT Sec'y
08
E/F CT Primary
40501
40507
G35
110
Setting
100
1000000
G2
110
Setting
80*V1
140*V1
1*V1
Comment
Record control command register
values for multiplier see mult
column
Label V1=Main VT Rating/110
Label M1=0A01/0A02
Neutral Displacement VT Primary
Label V3=Neutral Disp VT
Rating/110
G35
110
Setting
100
1000000
40508
G2
110
Setting
80*V3
140*V3
1*V3
Neutral Displacement VT
Secondary Label M3=0A05/0A06
40509
G2
Setting
30000
I1=Phase CT secondary rating
40510
G2
Setting
09
40511
G2
Setting
30000
E/F CT Secondary
0A
40512
G2
Setting
SEF CT Primary
0B
40513
G2
Setting
30000
SEF CT Secondary
0C
40514
G2
Setting
Label M4=0A07/0A08
Label I2=E/F CT secondary rating
Label M5=0A09/0A0A
Label I3=SEF CT secondary rating
Label M6=0A0B/0A0C
RECORD CONTROL
0B
00
Clear Events
01
Indexed String
G11
No
Command
Clear Faults
02
Indexed String
G11
No
Command
Clear Maint
03
Indexed String
G11
No
Command
Alarm Event
0B
04
Indexed String
G37
40520
G37
Enabled
Setting
Output Event
0B
05
Indexed String
G37
40521
G37
Enabled
Setting
Opto Input Event
0B
06
Indexed String
G37
40522
G37
Enabled
Setting
Relay Sys Event
0B
07
Indexed String
G37
40523
G37
Enabled
Setting
Fault Rec Event
0B
08
Indexed String
G37
40524
G37
Enabled
Setting
Maint Rec Event
0B
09
Indexed String
G37
40525
G37
Enabled
Setting
Protection Event
0B
0A
Indexed String
G37
40526
G37
Enabled
Setting
DDB 31 - 0
0B
0B
G27
40527
40528
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 63 - 32
0B
0C
G27
40529
40530
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 95 - 64
0B
0D
G27
40531
40532
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 127 - 96
0B
0E
G27
40533
40534
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 159 - 128
0B
0F
G27
40535
40536
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 191 - 160
0B
10
G27
40537
40538
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 223 - 192
0B
11
G27
40539
40540
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 255 - 224
0B
12
G27
40541
40542
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 287 - 256
0B
13
G27
40543
40544
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 319 - 288
0B
14
G27
40545
40546
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 351 - 320
0B
15
G27
40547
40548
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 383 - 352
0B
16
G27
40549
40550
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 15/158
UI
Courier
Modbus Address
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
G27
40551
40552
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
G27
40553
40554
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
G27
40555
40556
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
G27
40557
40558
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
Data Type
Strings
Col
Row
DDB 415 - 384
0B
17
DDB 447 - 416
0B
18
DDB 479 - 448
0B
19
DDB 511 - 480
0B
1A
DDB 543 - 512
0B
1B
G27
40559
40560
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 575 - 544
0B
1C
G27
40561
40562
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 607 - 576
0B
1D
G27
40563
40564
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 639 - 608
0B
1E
G27
40565
40566
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 671 - 640
0B
1F
G27
40567
40568
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 703 - 672
0B
20
G27
40569
40570
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 735 - 704
0B
21
G27
40571
40572
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 767 - 736
0B
22
G27
40573
40574
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 799 - 768
0B
23
G27
40575
40576
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 831 - 800
0B
24
G27
40577
40578
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 863 - 832
0B
25
G27
40579
40580
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 895 - 864
0B
26
G27
40581
40582
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 927 - 896
0B
27
G27
40583
40584
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 959 - 928
0B
28
G27
40585
40586
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 991 - 960
0B
29
G27
40587
40588
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DDB 1022 - 992
0B
2A
G27
40589
40590
G27
0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
0xFFFFFFFF
32
DISTURB RECORDER
0C
00
G2
1.5
Setting
0.1
10.5
0.01
Setting
100
0.1
Duration
01
40600
Trigger Position
02
Courier Number (%)
40601
G2
33.3
Trigger Mode
03
Indexed String
G34
40602
G34
Single
Analog Channel 1
04
Indexed String
G31
40603
G31
VAN
Setting
**
Analog Channel 2
05
Indexed String
G31
40604
G31
VBN
Setting
**
Analog Channel 3
06
Indexed String
G31
40605
G31
VCN
Setting
**
Analog Channel 4
07
Indexed String
G31
40606
G31
VN
Setting
**
Analog Channel 5
08
Indexed String
G31
40607
G31
IA
Setting
**
Analog Channel 6
09
Indexed String
G31
40608
G31
IB
Setting
**
Analog Channel 7
0A
Indexed String
G31
40609
G31
IC
Setting
**
Analog Channel 8
0B
Indexed String
G31
40610
G31
IN SEF
Setting
**
Digital Input 1
0C
Indexed String
G32
40611
G32
Relay 1
Setting
DDB Size
Input 1 Trigger
0D
Indexed String
G66
40612
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 2
0E
Indexed String
G32
40613
G32
Relay 2
Setting
DDB Size
Input 2 Trigger
0F
Indexed String
G66
40614
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 3
10
Indexed String
G32
40615
G32
Relay 3
Setting
DDB Size
Input 3 Trigger
11
Indexed String
G66
40616
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 4
12
Indexed String
G32
40617
G32
Relay 4
Setting
DDB Size
Input 4 Trigger
13
Indexed String
G66
40618
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Comment
DISTURBANCE RECORDER
** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for

Model2, 11 for Model3
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 16/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
DDB Size
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Digital Input 5
14
Indexed String
G32
40619
G32
Relay 5
Setting
Input 5 Trigger
15
Indexed String
G66
40620
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 6
16
Indexed String
G32
40621
G32
Relay 6
Setting
DDB Size
Input 6 Trigger
17
Indexed String
G66
40622
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 7
18
Indexed String
G32
40623
G32
Relay 7
Setting
DDB Size
*
*
Input 7 Trigger
19
Indexed String
G66
40624
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 8
1A
Indexed String
G32
40625
G32
Opto Input 1
Setting
DDB Size
Input 8 Trigger
1B
Indexed String
G66
40626
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 9
1C
Indexed String
G32
40627
G32
Opto Input 2
Setting
DDB Size
Input 9 Trigger
1D
Indexed String
G66
40628
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 10
1E
Indexed String
G32
40629
G32
Opto Input 3
Setting
DDB Size
Input 10 Trigger
1F
Indexed String
G66
40630
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 11
20
Indexed String
G32
40631
G32
Opto Input 4
Setting
DDB Size
Input 11 Trigger
21
Indexed String
G66
40632
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 12
22
Indexed String
G32
40633
G32
Opto Input 5
Setting
DDB Size
Input 12 Trigger
23
Indexed String
G66
40634
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 13
24
Indexed String
G32
40635
G32
Opto Input 6
Setting
DDB Size
Input 13 Trigger
25
Indexed String
G66
40636
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 14
26
Indexed String
G32
40637
G32
Opto Input 7
Setting
DDB Size
Input 14 Trigger
27
Indexed String
G66
40638
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 15
28
Indexed String
G32
40639
G32
Opto Input 8
Setting
DDB Size
Input 15 Trigger
29
Indexed String
G66
40640
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 16
2A
Indexed String
G32
40641
G32
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
Input 16 Trigger
2B
Indexed String
G66
40642
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 17
2C
Indexed String
G32
40643
G32
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
Input 17 Trigger
2D
Indexed String
G66
40644
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 18
2E
Indexed String
G32
40645
G32
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
Input 18 Trigger
2F
Indexed String
G66
40646
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 19
30
Indexed String
G32
40647
G32
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
Input 19 Trigger
31
Indexed String
G66
40648
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 20
32
Indexed String
G32
40649
G32
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
Input 20 Trigger
33
Indexed String
G66
40650
G66
Setting
Relay 8
Relay 9
*
*
Relay 10
*
*
Relay 11
*
*
Relay 12
*
*
Relay 13
*
*
Relay 14
*
*
Opto Input 1
*
*
Opto Input 2
*
*
Opto Input 3
*
*
Opto Input 4
*
*
Opto Input 5
*
*
Opto Input 6
No Trigger
*
*
*
Comment
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 17/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
Digital Input 21
34
Indexed String
G32
40651
G32
Input 21 Trigger
35
Indexed String
G66
40652
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 22
36
Indexed String
G32
40653
G32
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
Input 22 Trigger
37
Indexed String
G66
40654
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 23
38
Indexed String
G32
40655
G32
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
Input 23 Trigger
39
Indexed String
G66
40656
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 24
3A
Indexed String
G32
40657
G32
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
Input 24 Trigger
3B
Indexed String
G66
40658
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 25
3C
Indexed String
G32
40659
G32
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
Input 25 Trigger
3D
Indexed String
G66
40660
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 26
3E
Indexed String
G32
40661
G32
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
Input 26 Trigger
3F
Indexed String
G66
40662
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 27
40
Indexed String
G32
40663
G32
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
Input 27 Trigger
41
Indexed String
G66
40664
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 28
42
Indexed String
G32
40665
G32
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
Input 28 Trigger
43
Indexed String
G66
40666
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 29
44
Indexed String
G32
40667
G32
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
Input 29 Trigger
45
Indexed String
G66
40668
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 30
46
Indexed String
G32
40669
G32
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
Input 30 Trigger
47
Indexed String
G66
40670
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 31
48
Indexed String
G32
40671
G32
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
Opto Input 7
Opto Input 8
*
*
Opto Input 9
*
*
Opto Input 10
*
*
Opto Input 11
*
*
Opto Input 12
*
*
Opto Input 13
*
*
Opto Input 14
*
*
Opto Input 15
*
*
Opto Input 16
*
*
Input 31 Trigger
49
Indexed String
G66
40672
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Digital Input 32
4A
Indexed String
G32
40673
G32
Not Used
Setting
DDB Size
4B
Indexed String
G66
40674
G66
No Trigger
Setting
Input 32 Trigger
MEASURE'T SETUP
0D
Comment
00
MEASUREMENT SETTINGS
Default Display
01
Indexed String
G52
40700
G52
Description
Setting
Local Values
02
Indexed String
G54
40701
G54
Primary
Setting
Local Measurement Values
Remote Values
03
Indexed String
G54
40702
G54
Primary
Setting
Remote Measurement Values
Measurement Ref
04
Indexed String
G56
40703
G56
VA
Setting
Measurement Phase Reference
Measurement Mode
05
Unsigned Integer
40705
G1
Setting
Fix Dem Period
06
Courier Number (time-minutes)
40706
G2
15
Setting
99
Fixed Demand Interval
Roll Sub Period
07
Courier Number (time-minutes)
40707
G2
Setting
99
Rolling demand sub period
08
Unsigned Integer
40708
G1
15
Setting
15
Number of rolling sub-periods
Num Sub Periods

COMMUNICATIONS
Rear Protocol
0E
00
01
Indexed String
G71
Data
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 18/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Comment
Remote Address
02
255
Setting
255
Build = Courier
Remote Address
02
Setting
247
Build = Modbus
Remote Address
02
Setting
254
Build = IEC60870-5-103
Remote Address
02
Setting
65534
Build=DNP 3.0
Inactivity Timer
03
Courier Number (Time-minutes)
15
Setting
30
Build = Courier
Inactivity Timer
03
15
Setting
30
Build = Modbus
Inactivity Timer
03
15
Setting
30
Build = IEC60870-5-103
Baud Rate
04
Indexed String
G38m
19200 bits/s
Setting
Build = Modbus
Baud Rate
04
Indexed String
G38v
19200 bits/s
Setting
Build = IEC60870-5-103
Baud Rate
04
Indexed String
G38d
19200 bits/s
Setting
Build = DNP 3.0
Parity
05
Indexed String
G39
None
Setting
Build = Modbus
G39
None
Setting
Build = DNP 3.0
15
Setting
60
G21
RS485
Setting
*
*
Build = IEC60870-5-103
Build=IEC60870-5-103 and
Fibre Optic Board fitted
Build=DNP 3.0 visible when IRIGB is disabled
Build=IEC60870-5-103
Default Modbus address is 1
Parity
05
Indexed String
Measure't Period
06
Physical Link
07
Indexed String
Time Sync
08
Indexed String
G37
Disabled
Setting
CS103 Blocking
0A
Indexed String
G210
Disabled
Setting
COMMISSION TESTS
0F
Opto I/P Status
00
01
G8
Data
G9
Data
0-7
Data
Indexed String
Relay O/P Status
02

Indexed String
Test Port Status
03
Binary Flag(8 bits)

Indexed String
LED Status
04
Binary Flag(8 bits)
Monitor Bit 1
05
Unsigned Integer
40850
G1
64
Setting
1022
Monitor Bit 2
06
Unsigned Integer
40851
G1
65
Setting
1022
Monitor Bit 3
07
Unsigned Integer
40852
G1
66
Setting
1022
Monitor Bit 4
08
Unsigned Integer
40853
G1
67
Setting
1022
Monitor Bit 5
09
Unsigned Integer
40854
G1
68
Setting
1022
Monitor Bit 6
0A
Unsigned Integer
40855
G1
69
Setting
1022
Monitor Bit 7
0B
Unsigned Integer
40856
G1
70
Setting
1022
Monitor Bit 8
0C
Unsigned Integer
40857
G1
71
Setting
1022
Test Mode
0D
Indexed String
G119
40858
G119
Disabled
Setting
IEC60870 Test Mode Change
Test Pattern
0E
G9
40859
G9
Setting
20

Binary Flag (21bits)
0-7
0-7
40860
Data
Indexed String
Contact Test
0F
Indexed String
G93
40861
G93
No Operation
Command
Test LEDs
10
Binary Flag (8bits)
G94
40862
G94
No Operation
Command
Indexed String
DDB 31 - 0
N/A
20
Binary Flag(32)
30723
30724
G27
Data
DDB 63 - 32
N/A
21
Binary Flag(32)
30725
30726
G27
Data
DDB 95 - 64
N/A
22
Binary Flag(32)
30727
30728
G27
Data
DDB Elements 0-31
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 19/158
Courier
Modbus Address
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Binary Flag(32)
30729
30730
G27
Data
24
Binary Flag(32)
30731
30732
G27
Data
25
Binary Flag(32)
30733
30734
G27
Data
N/A
26
Binary Flag(32)
30735
30736
G27
Data
DDB 255 - 224
N/A
27
Binary Flag(32)
30737
30738
G27
Data
DDB 287 - 256
N/A
28
Binary Flag(32)
30739
30740
G27
Data
DDB 319 - 288
N/A
29
Binary Flag(32)
30741
30742
G27
Data
DDB 351 - 320
N/A
2A
Binary Flag(32)
30743
30744
G27
Data
DDB 383 - 352
N/A
2B
Binary Flag(32)
30745
30746
G27
Data
DDB 415 - 384
N/A
2C
Binary Flag(32)
30747
30748
G27
Data
DDB 447 - 416
N/A
2D
Binary Flag(32)
30749
30750
G27
Data
DDB 479 - 448
N/A
2E
Binary Flag(32)
30751
30752
G27
Data
DDB 511 - 480
N/A
2F
Binary Flag(32)
30753
30754
G27
Data
DDB 543 - 512
N/A
30
Binary Flag(32)
30755
30756
G27
Data
DDB 575 - 544
N/A
31
Binary Flag(32)
30757
30758
G27
Data
DDB 607 - 576
N/A
32
Binary Flag(32)
30759
30760
G27
Data
DDB 639 - 608
N/A
33
Binary Flag(32)
30761
30762
G27
Data
DDB 671 - 640
N/A
34
Binary Flag(32)
30763
30764
G27
Data
DDB 703 - 672
N/A
35
Binary Flag(32)
30765
30766
G27
Data
DDB 735 - 704
N/A
36
Binary Flag(32)
30767
30768
G27
Data
DDB 767 - 736
N/A
37
Binary Flag(32)
30769
30770
G27
Data
DDB 799 - 768
N/A
38
Binary Flag(32)
30771
30772
G27
Data
DDB 831 - 800
N/A
39
Binary Flag(32)
30773
30774
G27
Data
DDB 863 - 832
N/A
3A
Binary Flag(32)
30775
30776
G27
Data
DDB 895 - 864
N/A
3B
Binary Flag(32)
30777
30778
G27
Data
DDB 927 - 896
N/A
3C
Binary Flag(32)
30779
30780
G27
Data
DDB 959 - 928
N/A
3D
Binary Flag(32)
30781
30782
G27
Data
DDB 991 - 960
N/A
3E
Binary Flag(32)
30783
30784
G27
Data
DDB 1022 - 992
N/A
3F
Binary Flag(32)
30785
30786
G27
Data
N/A
Binary Flag(16)
30701
G26
Data
N/A
30702
30703
G24
Data
Relay Status (repeat of Courier

status)
IA Magnitude
N/A
30704
30705
G24
Data
IB Magnitude
N/A
30706
30707
G24
Data
IC Magnitude
N/A
30708
30709
G24
Data
VAB Magnitude
N/A
30710
30711
G24
Data
VBC Magnitude
N/A
30712
30713
G24
Data
VCA Magnitude
N/A
Courier Number (power)
30714
30716
G29
Data
3 Phase Watts
N/A
Courier Number (power)
30717
30719
G29
Data
3 Phase VArs
N/A
30720
G30
Data
3 Phase Power Factor
N/A
30721
G30
Data
Frequency
N/A
Binary Flag(8)
30722
G1
Data
Relay Test Port Status
Courier Text
UI
DDB 127 - 96
N/A
23
DDB 159 - 128
N/A
DDB 191 - 160
N/A
DDB 223 - 192
CB MONITOR SETUP
Broken I^
Col
10
Row
Data Type
Strings
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
00
01
40151
G2
Setting
0.1
Comment
Broken Current Index
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 20/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
I^ Maintenance
02
Indexed String
I^ Maintenance
03
I^ Lockout
04
Indexed String
I^ Lockout
05
No. CB Ops Maint
06
Indexed String
No. CB Ops Maint
07
Unsigned Integer
No. CB Ops Lock
08
Indexed String
No. CB Ops Lock
09
Unsigned Integer
CB Time Maint
0A
Indexed String
CB Time Maint
0B
CB Time Lockout
0C
Indexed String
CB Time Lockout
0D
Fault Freq Lock
0E
Indexed String
Fault Freq Count
0F
Fault Freq Time
10
OPTO CONFIG
11
Strings
G88
Modbus Address
Start
40152
40153
G88
40154
40155
40156
G88
End
40157
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
G88
Alarm Disabled
Setting
G35
1000
Setting
25000
*
*
G88
Alarm Disabled
Setting
G35
2000
Setting
25000
40158
G88
Alarm Disabled
Setting
40159
G1
10
Setting
10000
*
*
Comment
Broken Current to cause maint.
alarm
IX Maintenance Alarm
Broken Current to cause lockout
alarm
IX Maintenance Lockout
40160
G88
Alarm Disabled
Setting
40161
G1
20
Setting
10000
40162
G88
Alarm Disabled
Setting
G35
0.1
Setting
0.005
0.5
0.001
G88
Alarm Disabled
Setting
G35
0.2
Setting
0.005
0.5
0.001
40168
G88
Alarm Disabled
Setting
CB Trips to cause maint. alarm

Number of CB Trips for maint.
alarm
CB Trips to cause lockout alarm
Number of CB Trips for lockout
alarm
CB Oper. Time to cause maint.
alarm
CB Operating time for maint.
alarm
CB Oper. Time to cause lockout
alarm
CB Operating time for lockout
alarm
Excessive fault frequency
Unsigned Integer
40169
G1
10
Setting
9999
Excessive Fault Frequency Counter
40170
G35
3600
Setting
9999
Excessive Fault Frequency Time

Visible for Model Number design
suffix 'B' and beyond
Select Custom to select individual
Opto Threshold Voltages
G88
G88
40163
G88
40165
40166
G88
40164
40167
40171
00
Global Nominal V
01
Indexed String
G200
40900
G200
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 1
02
Indexed String
G201
40901
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 2
03
Indexed String
G201
40902
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 3
04
Indexed String
G201
40903
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 4
05
Indexed String
G201
40904
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 5
06
Indexed String
G201
40905
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 6
07
Indexed String
G201
40906
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 7
08
Indexed String
G201
40907
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 8
09
Indexed String
G201
40908
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 9
0A
Indexed String
G201
40909
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 10
0B
Indexed String
G201
40910
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 11
0C
Indexed String
G201
40911
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 12
0D
Indexed String
G201
40912
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 13
0E
Indexed String
G201
40913
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 14
0F
Indexed String
G201
40914
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 15
10
Indexed String
G201
40915
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 16
11
Indexed String
G201
40916
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 17
12
Indexed String
G201
40917
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 18
13
Indexed String
G201
40918
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 19
14
Indexed String
G201
40919
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 20
15
Indexed String
G201
40920
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 21
16
Indexed String
G201
40921
G201
48-54V
Setting
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 21/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Opto Input 22
17
Indexed String
G201
40922
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 23
18
Indexed String
G201
40923
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 24
19
Indexed String
G201
40924
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 25
1A
Indexed String
G201
40925
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 26
1B
Indexed String
G201
40926
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 27
1C
Indexed String
G201
40927
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 28
1D
Indexed String
G201
40928
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 29
1E
Indexed String
G201
40929
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 30
1F
Indexed String
G201
40930
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 31
20
Indexed String
G201
40931
G201
48-54V
Setting
Opto Input 32
21
Indexed String
G201
40932
G201
48-54V
Setting
CONTROL INPUTS
12
00
40951
G202
Setting
*
*
Ctrl I/P Status
01
G202
40950
Control Input 1
02
Indexed String
G203
40952
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 2
03
Indexed String
G203
40953
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 3
04
Indexed String
G203
40954
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 4
05
Indexed String
G203
40955
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 5
06
Indexed String
G203
40956
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 6
07
Indexed String
G203
40957
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 7
Control Input 8
Control Input 9
08
09
0A
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
G203
G203
G203
40958
40959
40960
G203
G203
G203
No Operation
No Operation
No Operation
Command
Command
Command
0
0
0
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Control Input 10
0B
Indexed String
G203
40961
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 11
0C
Indexed String
G203
40962
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 12
0D
Indexed String
G203
40963
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 13
0E
Indexed String
G203
40964
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 14
0F
Indexed String
G203
40965
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 15
10
Indexed String
G203
40966
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 16
11
Indexed String
G203
40967
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 17
12
Indexed String
G203
40968
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 18
13
Indexed String
G203
40969
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 19
14
Indexed String
G203
40970
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 20
15
Indexed String
G203
40971
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 21
16
Indexed String
G203
40972
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 22
17
Indexed String
G203
40973
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 23
18
Indexed String
G203
40974
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 24
19
Indexed String
G203
40975
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 25
1A
Indexed String
G203
40976
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 26
1B
Indexed String
G203
40977
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 27
1C
Indexed String
G203
40978
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 28
1D
Indexed String
G203
40979
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 29
1E
Indexed String
G203
40980
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 30
1F
Indexed String
G203
40981
G203
No Operation
Command
Control Input 31
20
Indexed String
G203
40982
G203
No Operation
Command
Comment
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 22/158
UI
Courier
Col
Control Input 32
GROUP 1
Row
21
30
Data Type
Strings
Indexed String
G203
Modbus Address
Start
40983
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
G203
No Operation
Command
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
2
00
*
*
GEN DIFF
GenDiff Function
01
Indexed String
41000
G101
Percentage Bias
Setting
Gen Diff Is1
02
G101
41001
G2
0.1
Setting
0.05*I1
0.5*I1
0.01*I1
*
*
Gen Diff k1
03
41002
G2
Setting
20
Gen Diff Is2
04
41003
G2
1.2
Setting
1*I1
5*I1
0.1*I1
Gen Diff k2
05
41004
G2
150
Setting
20
150
10
GROUP 1
31
00
POWER
Power1 Function
01
Indexed String
G102
41050
G102
Over
Setting
Setting
14*V1*I1
40*V1*I1
2*V1*I1
4*V1*I1
40*V1*I1
0.5*V1*I1
Setting
14*V1*I1
40*V1*I1
2*V1*I1
4*V1*I1
40*V1*I1
0.5*V1*I1
Setting
14*V1*I1
300*V1*I1
2*V1*I1
Reverse
-P>1 Setting
02
41051
G2
20
P<1 Setting
03
41052
G2
20
P>1 Setting
04
41053
G2
120
Power1 TimeDelay
05
41054
G2
Power1 DO Timer
06
41055
P1 Poledead Inh
07
Indexed String
G37
41056
Power2 Function
08
Indexed String
G102
41057
G102
-P>2 Setting
09
41058
G2
20
P<2 Setting
0A
41059
G2
20
P>2 Setting
0B
41060
G2
120
Power2 TimeDelay
0C
41061
G2
Power2 DO Timer
0D
P2 Poledead Inh
0E
Indexed String
5
10
120
*
*
4*V1*I1
300*V1*I1
0.5*V1*I1
Setting
100
0.01
G2
Setting
100
0.01
G37
Enabled
Setting
Disabled
Setting
*
*
Setting
14*V1*I1
40*V1*I1
2*V1*I1
4*V1*I1
40*V1*I1
0.5*V1*I1
Setting
14*V1*I1
40*V1*I1
2*V1*I1
4*V1*I1
40*V1*I1
0.5*V1*I1
Setting
14*V1*I1
300*V1*I1
2*V1*I1
Low Forward
5
10
120
GROUP 1
32
G37
*
*
4*V1*I1
300*V1*I1
0.5*V1*I1
Setting
100
0.01
*
*
41062
G2
Setting
100
0.01
41063
G37
Enabled
Setting
00
FIELD FAILURE
FFail Alm Status
01
Indexed String
FFail Alm Angle
02
FFail Alm Delay
03
FFail1 Status
04
Indexed String
FFail1 -Xa1
05
FFail1 Xb1
G37
41100
G37
Disabled
Setting
41101
G2
15
Setting
15
75
41102
G2
Setting
100
0.01
41103
G37
Enabled
Setting
Courier Number (Impedance)
41104
G2
20
Setting
40*V1/I1
0.5*V1/I1
06
41105
G2
220
Setting
25*V1/I1
325*V1/I1
1*V1/I1
FFail1 TimeDelay
07
41106
G2
Setting
100
0.01
FFail1 DO Timer
08
FFail2 Status
09
Indexed String
FFail2 -Xa2
0A
FFail2 Xb2
0B
G37
41107
G2
Setting
100
0.01
41108
G37
Disabled
Setting
41109
G2
20
Setting
40*V1/I1
0.5*V1/I1
41110
G2
110
Setting
25*V1/I1
325*V1/I1
1*V1/I1
G37
Comment
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 23/158
UI
Courier
Col
FFail2 TimeDelay
FFail2 DO Timer
GROUP 1
33
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
0C
41111
G2
Setting
100
0.01
0D
41112
G2
Setting
100
0.01
00
*
*
Comment
NPS THERMAL
I2>1 Alarm
01
Indexed String
41150
G37
Enabled
Setting
I2>1 Current Set
02
G37
41151
G2
0.05
Setting
0.03*I1
0.5*I1
0.01*I1
I2>1 Time Delay
03
41152
G2
20s
Setting
100
0.01
*
*
I2>2 Trip
04
Indexed String
41153
G37
Enabled
Setting
I2>2 Current Set
05
41154
G2
0.1
Setting
0.05*I1
0.5*I1
0.01*I1
I2>2 k Setting
06
41155
G2
15
Setting
40
0.1
I2>2 kRESET
07
41156
G2
15
Setting
40
0.1
I2>2 tMAX
08
41157
G2
1000
Setting
500
2000
I2>2 tMIN
09
41158
G2
0.25
Setting
100
0.01
*
*
GROUP 1
34
G37
00
SYSTEM BACKUP
Backup Function
01
Indexed String
G103
41200
G103
Voltage controlled
Setting
Vector Rotation
02
Indexed String
G104
41201
G104
None
Setting
V Dep OC Char
03
Indexed String
G111
41202
G111
IEC S Inverse
Setting
V Dep OC I> Set
04
41203
G2
Setting
0.8*I1
4*I1
0.01*I1
V Dep OC T Dial
05
41204
G2
Setting
0.5
15
0.1
V Dep OC Reset
06
Indexed String
41205
G60
DT
Setting
OC reset characteritic selection.

Apply to US curves only.
V Dep OC Delay
07
41206
G2
Setting
100
0.01
Apply to DT trip characteristic only
V Dep OC TMS
08
41207
G2
Setting
0.025
1.2
0.025
V Dep OC tRESET
09
41208
G2
Setting
100
0.01
4>=3403>=1
(4>=3403>=0 OR
3406=0)&&(3401>1)
V Dep OC V<1 Set
0A
41209
G2
80
Setting
20*V1
120*V1
1*V1
V Dep OC V<2 Set
0B
41210
G2
60
Setting
20*V1
120*V1
1*V1
V Dep OC k Set
0C
41211
G2
0.25
Setting
0.25
0.05
Z<1 Setting
0D
41212
G2
70
Setting
2*V1/I1
120*V1/I1
0.5*V1/I1
Z<1 Time Delay
0E
41213
G2
Setting
100
0.01
Z<1 tRESET
0F
Z< Stage 2
10
Indexed String
Z<2 Setting
11
Z<2 Time Delay
12
13
41218
Z<2 tRESET
GROUP 1
35
G37
41214
G2
Setting
100
0.01
41215
G37
Disabled
Setting
41216
G2
70
Setting
2*V1/I1
120*V1/I1
0.5*V1/I1
41217
G2
Setting
100
0.01
G2
Setting
100
0.01
00
Optional 2nd Stage

Underimpedance Phase 2.12
OVERCURRENT
I>1 Function
01
Indexed String
G43
41250
G43
Disabled
Setting
10
IEC S Inverse
G44
I>1 Direction
02
Indexed String
41251
G44
Non-Directional
Setting
I>1 Current Set
03
41252
G2
Setting
0.08*I1
4.0*I1
0.01*I1
*
*
I>1 Current Setting
I>1 Time Delay
04
41253
G2
Setting
100
0.01
I>1 Definite Time
I>1 TMS
05
41254
G2
Setting
0.025
1.2
0.025
5>=3501>=2
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 24/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
I>1 Time Dial
06
I>1 Reset Char
07
Indexed String
I>1 tRESET
08
I>2 Function
09
Indexed String
Strings
G60
G43
Modbus Address
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
41255
G2
Setting
0.5
15
0.1
Start
0A
Indexed String
I>2 Current Set
0B
G44
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
2
G60
DT
Setting
G2
Setting
100
0.01
41258
G43
Disabled
Setting
10
G105
DT
41259
G44
Non-Directional
Setting
41260
G2
Setting
0.08*I1
4.0*I1
0.01*I1
0.08*I1
10.0*I1
0.01*I1
I>2 Time Delay
0C
41261
G2
Setting
100
0.01
I>2 TMS
0D
41262
G2
Setting
0.025
1.2
0.025
I>2 Time Dial
0E
41263
G2
Setting
0.5
15
0.1
I>2 Reset Char
0F
Indexed String
I>2 tRESET
10
I>3 Status
11
Indexed String
G37
G44
41264
G60
DT
Setting
41265
G2
Setting
100
0.01
41266
G37
Disabled
Setting
*
*
I>3 Direction
12
Indexed String
41267
G44
Non-Directional
Setting
I>3 Current Set
13
41268
G2
20
Setting
0.08*I1
32*I1
0.01*I1
I>3 Time Delay
14
41269
G2
Setting
100
0.01
I>4 Status
16
Indexed String
G37
41270
G37
Disabled
Setting
I>4 Direction
17
Indexed String
G44
41271
G44
Non-Directional
Setting
I>4 Current Set
18
41272
G2
20
Setting
0.08*I1
32*I1
0.01*I1
I>4 Time Delay
19
41273
G2
Setting
100
0.01
I> Char Angle
1A
41274
G2
30
Setting
-95
95
I> Function Link
1B
Binary Flag
41275
G14
15
Setting
15
GROUP 1
36
G14
00
Comment
41256
10
G60
41257
G105
I>2 Direction
End
5>=3501>=1 OR 3507=0
I>2 Overcurrent Status
5>=3509>=2
5>=3509>=1 OR 350F=0
I> Characteristic Angle
THERMAL OVERLOAD
Thermal
50
Indexed String
41308
G37
Enabled
Setting
Thermal I>
55
41309
G2
1.2
Setting
0.5*I1
2.5*I1
0.01*I1
Thermal Alarm
5A
41310
G2
90
Setting
20
100
T-heating
5F
Courier Number (Time, minutes)
41311
G2
60
Setting
200
T-cooling
64
Courier Number (Time, minutes)
41312
G2
60
Setting
200
M Factor
69
41313
G2
Setting
10
GROUP 1
37
00
38
00
G37
Thermal overload (I2t

characteristic)
Not Used
GROUP 1
EARTH FAULT
IN Input
01
Indexed String
G49
G49
Derived
Data
Measured
IN>1 Function
02
Indexed String
G43
IN>1 Direction
03
Indexed String
G44
IN>1 Current
04
41400
G43
IEC S Inverse
Setting
10
41401
G44
Non-Directional
Setting
41402
G2
0.2
Setting
0.08*I1
4.0*I1
0.01*I1
0.02*I2
4.0*I2
0.01*I2
IN>1 Time Delay
05
41403
G2
Setting
200
0.01
Change scaling factor for Models

2&3
I>1 Definite Time
IN>1 TMS
06
41404
G2
Setting
0.025
1.2
0.025
5>=3802>=2
0.1
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 25/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
IN>1 Time Dial
07
IN>1 Reset Char
08
Indexed String
IN>1 tRESET
09
IN>2 Function
0A
Indexed String
IN>2 Direction
0B
Indexed String
IN>2 Current
0C
Strings
G60
G43
Modbus Address
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
41405
G2
Setting
0.5
15
0.1
Start
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
2
G60
DT
Setting
G2
Setting
100
0.01
41408
G43
Disabled
Setting
10
*
*
G105
Disabled
41409
G44
Non-Directional
Setting
41410
G2
0.2
Setting
0.08*I1
4.0*I1
0.01*I1
0.02*I2
10.0*I2
0.01*I2
Setting
200
0.01
IN>2 Time Delay
0D
41411
G2
IN>2 TMS
0E
41412
G2
Setting
0.025
1.2
0.025
IN>2 Time Dial
0F
41413
G2
Setting
0.5
15
0.1
IN>2 Reset Char
10
Indexed String
IN>2 tRESET
11
IN>3 Status
12
Indexed String
G37
IN>3 Direction
13
Indexed String
G44
IN>3 Current
14
IN>3 Time Delay
15
41419
41414
G60
DT
Setting
41415
G2
Setting
100
0.01
41416
G37
Disabled
Setting
41417
G44
Non-Directional
Setting
41418
G2
0.5
Setting
0.08*I1
32*I1
0.01*I1
G2
Setting
200
0.01
IN>4 Status
16
Indexed String
G37
41420
G37
Disabled
Setting
IN>4 Direction
17
Indexed String
G44
41421
G44
Non-Directional
Setting
IN>4 Current
18
41422
G2
0.5
Setting
0.08*I1
32*I1
0.01*I1
IN>4 Time Delay
19
41423
G2
Setting
200
0.01
IN> Func Link
1A
Binary Flags
41424
G63
15
Setting
15
IN> DIRECTIONAL
1B
(Sub Heading)
IN> Char Angle
1C
Courier Number(Angle)
41425
G2
-60
Setting
-95
95
IN> Pol
1D
Indexed String
G46
41426
G46
Zero Sequence
Setting
IN> VNpol Input
1E
Indexed String
G49
41427
G49
Measured
Setting
IN> VNpol Set
1F
41428
G2
Setting
G63
0.5*V1
80*V1
0.5*V1
0.5*V3
80*V3
0.5*V3
20
41429
G2
Setting
0.5*V1
25*V1
0.5*V1
IN> I2pol Set
21
41430
G2
0.08
Setting
0.08*I1
1*I1
0.01*I1
39
00
3A
00
5>=3802>=1 OR 3808=0
Change scaling factor for Models

2&3
5>=380A>=2
5>=380A>=1 OR 3810=0
IN> V0 Polarising Setting

Change scaling factor
IN> V2pol Set

GROUP 1
Comment
41406
0.45
G60
41407
G105
G44
End
IN> V2 Polarising Setting
Not Used
GROUP 1
SEF/REF PROT'N
SEF/REF Options
ISEF>1 Function
01
02
Indexed String
Indexed String
G58
G43
41500
41501
G105
ISEF>1 Direction
03
Indexed String
ISEF>1 Current
04
ISEF>1 Delay
05
ISEF>1 TMS
06
ISEF>1 Time Dial
07
G44
G58
G43
SEF
DT
Setting
Setting
2
2
10
Setting
G105
41502
0
0
Protection Options
(3A01<=3) OR (3A01>=6)
ISEF>1 Directionality
G44
Non-Directional
41503
G2
0.05
Setting
0.005*I3
0.1*I3
0.00025*I3
ISEF>1 Current Setting
41504
G2
Setting
200
0.01
ISEF>1 Definite Time
41505
G2
Setting
0.025
1.2
0.025
41506
G2
Setting
0.5
15
0.1
5>=3A02>=2
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 26/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
G60
Modbus Address
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
41507
G60
DT
Setting
41508
G2
Setting
100
0.01
41509
41510
41511
G43
G44
G2
Disabled
Non-Directional
0.05
Setting
Setting
Setting
0
0
0.005*I3
10
2
0.1*I3
1
1
0.00025*I3
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
Start
End
ISEF>1 Reset Chr
08
Indexed String
ISEF>1 tRESET
09
ISEF>2 Function
ISEF>2 Direction
ISEF>2 Current
0A
0B
0C
Indexed String
Indexed String
ISEF>2 Delay
0D
41512
G2
Setting
200
0.01
ISEF>2 TMS
0E
41513
G2
Setting
0.025
1.2
0.025
ISEF>2 Time Dial
0F
41514
G2
Setting
0.5
15
0.1
ISEF>2 Reset Chr
10
Indexed String
41515
G60
DT
Setting
ISEF>2 tRESET
11
41516
G2
Setting
100
0.01
G43
G44
G60
Comment
(5>=3A02>=1 OR
3A08=0)&&(3A01<=3)
5>=3A0A>=2
(5>=3A0A>=1 OR
3A10=0)&&(3A01<=3)
ISEF>3 Status
12
Indexed String
G37
41517
G37
Disabled
Setting
ISEF>3 Direction
13
Indexed String
G44
41518
G44
Non-Directional
Setting
ISEF>3 Current
14
41519
G2
0.4
Setting
0.005*I3
0.8*I3
0.001*I3
ISEF>3 Delay
15
41520
G2
0.5
Setting
200
0.01
ISEF>4 Status
16
Indexed String
G37
41521
G37
Disabled
Setting
ISEF>4 Direction
17
Indexed String
G44
41522
G44
Non-Directional
Setting
ISEF>4 Current
18
41523
G2
0.6
Setting
0.005*I3
0.8*I3
0.001*I3
ISEF>4 Delay
19
41524
G2
0.25
Setting
200
0.01
ISEF> Func Link
1A
Binary Flags
41525
G64
15
Setting
15
ISEF DIRECTIONAL
1B
(Sub Heading)
ISEF> Char Angle
1C
Courier Number(Angle)
ISEF>VNpol Input
1D
Indexed String
ISEF> VNpol Set
1E
WATTMETRIC SEF
1F
(Sub Heading)
PN> Setting
20
G64
G49
(3A01<=3) OR (3A01>=6)
(3A01<=3) OR (3A01>=6)
41526
G2
90
Setting
-95
95
(3A01<=3) OR (3A01>=6)
41527
G49
Measured
Setting
(3A01<=3) OR (3A01>=6)
41528
G2
Setting
0.5*V1
80*V1
0.5*V1
0.5*V3
80*V3
0.5*V3
(3A01<=3) OR (3A01>=6)
Change scaling factor for
measured VN
(3A01=3) OR (3A01=6)
0.0*V1*I3
20*V1*I3
0.05*V1*I3
0.0*V3*I3
20*V3*I3
0.05*V3*I3
RESTRICTED E/F
21
(Sub Heading)
(3A01=3) OR (3A01=6)
Change scaling factor for
Measured VN
Restricted Earth Fault
IREF> k1
22
41530
G2
20
Setting
20
REF K1, applied to L Impedance
IREF> k2
23
41531
G2
150
Setting
150
REF K2, applied to L impedance
IREF> Is1
24
41532
G2
0.2
Setting
0.05*I1
1.0*I1
0.01*I1
REF Is1, applied to L impedance
IREF> Is2
25
41533
G2
Setting
0.1*I1
1.5*I1
0.01*I1
REF Is2, applied to L impedance
IREF> Is
26
41534
G2
0.2
Setting
0.05*I3
1.0*I3
0.01*I3
REF Is, applied to H impedance
*
*
GROUP 1
3B
41529
G2
Setting
00
RESIDUAL O/V NVD

VN Input
01
Indexed String
G49
41550
G49
Measured
Setting
VN>1 Function
02
Indexed String
G23
41551
G23
DT
Setting
VN>1 Voltage Set
03
41552
G2
Setting
1*V1
50*V1
1*V1
1*V3
50*V3
1*V3
VN>1 Time Delay
04
41553
G2
Setting
100
0.01
VN>1 TMS
05
41554
G2
Setting
0.5
100
0.5
VN>1 tReset
06
41555
G2
Setting
100
0.01
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 27/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
VN>2 Status
07
Indexed String
VN>2 Voltage Set
08
VN>2 Time Delay

GROUP 1
09
3C
Strings
G37
Modbus Address
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
41556
G37
Disabled
Setting
41557
G2
10
Setting
Start
41558
End
G2
10
Setting
1*V1
50*V1
1*V1
1*V3
50*V3
1*V3
100
0.01
00
100% STATOR EF
100%St EF Status
01
Indexed String
41600
G112
1 (Undervoltage)
Setting
100% St EF VN3H<
02
41601
G2
Setting
0.3*V3
20*V3
0.1*V3
VN3H< Delay
03
41602
G2
Setting
100
0.01
V<Inhibit set
04
41603
G2
80
Setting
30*V1
120*V1
1*V1
P< Inhibit
05
Indexed String
G37
41604
G37
Disabled
Setting
P<Inhibit set
06
41605
G2
Setting
4*V1*I1
200*V1*I1
0.5*V1*I1
Q< Inhibit
07
Indexed String
G37
41606
G37
Disabled
Setting
Q<Inhibit set
08
S< Inhibit
09
Indexed String
S<Inhibit set
0A
100% St EF VN3H>
0B
VN3H> Delay
0C
GROUP 1
3D
G112
41607
G2
Setting
4*V1*I1
200*V1*I1
0.5*V1*I1
41608
G37
Disabled
Setting
Courier Number (VA)
41609
G2
Setting
4*V1*I1
200*V1*I1
0.5*V1*I1
41610
G2
Setting
0.3*V3
20*V3
0.1*V3
41611
G2
Setting
100
0.01
G37
00
VOLTS/HZ
V/Hz Alm Status
01
Indexed String
V/Hz Alarm Set
02
Courier Number (Volts/Hz)
V/Hz Alarm Delay
03
V/Hz Trip Func
04
Indexed String
V/Hz Trip Set
05
Courier Number (Volts/Hz)
V/Hz Trip TMS
06
41655
G2
Setting
V/Hz Trip Delay
07
41656
G2
Setting
GROUP 1
3E
G37
G23
41650
G37
Enabled
Setting
41651
G2
2.31
Setting
1.5*V1
3.5*V1
0.01*V1
*
*
41652
G2
10
Setting
100
0.01
41653
G23
DT
Setting
41654
G2
2.42
Setting
1.5*V1
3.5*V1
0.01*V1
63
100
0.01
00
DF/DT
G37
df/dt Status
01
Indexed String
41700
G37
Enabled
Setting
df/dt Setting
02
41701
G2
0.2
Setting
0.1
10
0.01
df/dt Time Delay
03
41702
G2
0.5
Setting
100
0.01
df/dt f Low
04
Courier Number (Frequency)
41703
G2
49.5
Setting
45
65
0.01
df/dt f High
05
41704
G2
50.5
Setting
45
65
0.01
GROUP 1
3F
00
V VECTOR SHIFT
V Shift Status
01
Indexed String
V Shift Angle
02
GROUP 1
40
G37
41750
G37
Enabled
Setting
41751
G2
10
Setting
30
00
DEAD MACHINE
G37
Comment
Dead Mach Status
01
Indexed String
41800
G37
Disabled
Setting
Dead Mach I>
02
41801
G2
0.1
Setting
0.08*I1
4*I1
0.01*I1
*
*
Dead Mach V<
03
41802
G2
80
Setting
10*V1
120*V1
1*V1
Dead Mach tPU
04
41803
G2
Setting
10
0.1
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 28/158
UI
Courier
Col
Dead Mach tDO

GROUP 1
Row
05
41
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
41804
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
G2
0.5
Setting
10
0.1
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
2
00
Comment
*
*
RECONNECT DELAY
Reconnect Status
01
Indexed String
41850
G37
Enabled
Setting
Reconnect Delay
02
41852
G2
60
Setting
300
0.01
Reconnect tPULSE
03
41853
G2
Setting
0.01
30
0.01
GROUP 1
42
G37
00
VOLT PROTECTION
UNDER VOLTAGE
01
(Sub Heading)
V< Measur't Mode
02
Indexed String
G47
41950
G47
Phase-Neutral
Setting
V< Operate Mode
03
Indexed String
G48
41951
G48
Any Phase
Setting
V<1 Function
04
Indexed String
G23
41952
G23
DT
Setting
V<1 Voltage Set
05
41953
G2
50
Setting
10*V1
120*V1
1*V1
V<1 Time Delay
06
41954
G2
10
Setting
100
0.01
V<1 TMS
07
41955
G2
Setting
0.5
100
0.5
V<1 Poledead Inh
08
Indexed String
G37
41956
G37
Enabled
Setting
V<2 Status
09
Indexed String
G37
41957
G37
Disabled
Setting
V<2 Voltage Set
0A
41958
G2
38
Setting
10*V1
70*V1
1*V1
V<2 Time Delay
0B
41959
G2
Setting
100
0.01
41960
G37
Enabled
Setting
V<2 Poledead Inh
0C
Indexed String
OVERVOLTAGE
0D
(Sub Heading)
G37
V> Measur't Mode
0E
Indexed String
G47
41961
G47
Phase-Phase
Setting
V> Operate Mode
0F
Indexed String
G48
41962
G48
Any Phase
Setting
G23
V>1 Function
10
Indexed String
41963
G23
DT
Setting
V>1 Voltage Set
11
41964
G2
130
Setting
60*V1
185*V1
1*V1
V>1 Time Delay
12
41965
G2
10
Setting
100
0.01
V>1 TMS
13
V>2 Status
14
Indexed String
V>2 Voltage Set
15
V>2 Time Delay
16
GROUP 1
43
G37
41966
G2
Setting
0.5
100
0.5
41967
G37
Disabled
Setting
41968
G2
150
Setting
60*V1
185*V1
1*V1
41969
G2
0.5
Setting
100
0.01
*
*
00
FREQ PROTECTION
UNDER FREQUENCY
01
(Sub Heading)
F<1 Status
02
Indexed String
F<1 Setting
03
F<1 Time Delay
04
F<2 Status
05
Indexed String
F<2 Setting
06
F<2 Time Delay
07
F<3 Status
08
Indexed String
F<3 Setting
09
F<3 Time Delay
0A
F<4 Status
0B
Indexed String
F<4 Setting
0C
F<4 Time Delay
0D
G37
G37
G37
42000
G37
Enabled
Setting
42001
G2
49.5
Setting
45
65
0.01
*
*
42002
G2
Setting
100
0.01
42003
G37
Disabled
Setting
42004
G2
49
Setting
45
65
0.01
*
*
42005
G2
Setting
100
0.01
42006
G37
Disabled
Setting
42007
G2
48.5
Setting
45
65
0.01
*
*
42008
G2
Setting
100
0.01
42009
G37
Disabled
Setting
42010
G2
48
Setting
45
65
0.01
42011
G2
Setting
100
0.01
G37
Range covers Ph-N & Ph-Ph
Phase-Neutral
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 29/158
UI
Courier
Col
F< Function Link
Row
Data Type
0E
OVER FREQUENCY
0F
(Sub Heading)
F>1 Status
10
Indexed String
F>1 Setting
11
F>1 Time Delay
12
F>2 Status
13
Indexed String
F>2 Setting
14
15
F>2 Time Delay

GROUP 1
44
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
G65
42012
G65
16
Setting
15
G37
42013
G37
Enabled
Setting
42014
G2
50.5
Setting
45
65
0.01
*
*
42015
G2
Setting
100
0.01
42016
G37
Disabled
Setting
42017
G2
51
Setting
45
65
0.01
42018
G2
Setting
100
0.01
G37
00
*
*
RTD PROTECTION
Select RTD
01
Binary Flags(10 bits)Indexed String
42053
G50
Setting
1023
10
RTD 1 Alarm Set
02
G50
42054
G1
80
Setting
200
RTD 1 Alarm Dly
03
42055
G1
10
Setting
100
RTD 1 Trip Set
04
42056
G1
85
Setting
200
RTD 1 Trip Dly
05
42057
G1
Setting
100
RTD 2 Alarm Set
06
42058
G1
80
Setting
200
RTD 2 Alarm Dly
07
42059
G1
10
Setting
100
RTD 2 Trip Set
08
42060
G1
85
Setting
200
RTD 2 Trip Dly
09
42061
G1
Setting
100
RTD 3 Alarm Set
0A
42062
G1
80
Setting
200
RTD 3 Alarm Dly
0B
42063
G1
10
Setting
100
RTD 3 Trip Set
0C
42064
G1
85
Setting
200
RTD 3 Trip Dly
0D
42065
G1
Setting
100
RTD 4 Alarm Set
0E
42066
G1
80
Setting
200
RTD 4 Alarm Dly
0F
42067
G1
10
Setting
100
RTD 4 Trip Set
10
42068
G1
85
Setting
200
RTD 4 Trip Dly
11
42069
G1
Setting
100
RTD 5 Alarm Set
12
42070
G1
80
Setting
200
RTD 5 Alarm Dly
13
42071
G1
10
Setting
100
RTD 5 Trip Set
14
42072
G1
85
Setting
200
RTD 5 Trip Dly
15
42073
G1
Setting
100
RTD 6 Alarm Set
16
42074
G1
80
Setting
200
RTD 6 Alarm Dly
17
42075
G1
10
Setting
100
RTD 6 Trip Set
18
42076
G1
85
Setting
200
RTD 6 Trip Dly
19
42077
G1
Setting
100
RTD 7 Alarm Set
1A
42078
G1
80
Setting
200
RTD 7 Alarm Dly
1B
42079
G1
10
Setting
100
RTD 7 Trip Set
1C
42080
G1
85
Setting
200
RTD 7 Trip Dly
1D
42081
G1
Setting
100
RTD 8 Alarm Set
1E
42082
G1
80
Setting
200
RTD 8 Alarm Dly
1F
42083
G1
10
Setting
100
RTD 8 Trip Set
20
42084
G1
85
Setting
200
RTD 8 Trip Dly
21
42085
G1
Setting
100
RTD 9 Alarm Set
22
42086
G1
80
Setting
200
RTD 9 Alarm Dly
23
42087
G1
10
Setting
100
Comment
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 30/158
UI
Courier
Col
RTD 9 Trip Set
Row
24
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
85
Setting
200
*
*
42088
G1
RTD 9 Trip Dly
25
42089
G1
Setting
100
RTD 10 Alarm Set
26
42090
G1
80
Setting
200
RTD 10 Alarm Dly
27
42091
G1
10
Setting
100
RTD 10 Trip Set
28
42092
G1
85
Setting
200
RTD 10 Trip Dly
29
42093
G1
Setting
100
GROUP 1
45
00
Comment
CB FAIL & I<

BREAKER FAIL
01
(Sub Heading)
CB Fail 1 Status
02
Indexed String
CB Fail 1 Timer
03
CB Fail 2 Status
04
Indexed String
G37
G37
42100
G37
Enabled
Setting
42101
G2
0.2
Setting
10
0.01
42102
G37
Disabled
Setting
CB Fail 2 Timer
05
42103
G2
0.4
Setting
10
0.01
CBF Non I Reset
06
Indexed String
G68
42104
G68
CB Open & I<
Setting
G68
42105
G68
CB Open & I<
Setting
CBF Ext Reset
07
Indexed String
UNDER CURRENT
08
(Sub Heading)
I< Current Set
09
42106
G2
0.1
Setting
0.02*I1
3.2*I1
0.01*I1
IN< Current Set
0A
42107
G2
0.1
Setting
0.02*I2
3.2*I2
0.01*I2
ISEF< Current
0B
42108
G2
0.02
Setting
0.001*I3
0.8*I3
0.0005*I3
BLOCKED O/C
0C
(Sub Heading)
Remove I> Start
0D
Indexed String
G37
42109
G37
Disabled
Setting
0E
Indexed String
G37
42110
G37
Disabled
Setting
Remove IN> Start

GROUP 1
46
00
P341 does not have IN input

Blocked Overcurrent Schemes
*
*
*
SUPERVISION
VT SUPERVISION
01
(Sub Heading)
VTS Status
02
Indexed String
G7
42150
G7
Blocking
Setting
VTS Reset Mode
03
Indexed String
G69
42151
G69
Manual
Setting
VTS Time Delay
04
42152
G2
Setting
10
0.1
VTS I> Inhibit
05
42153
G2
10
Setting
0.08*I1
32*I1
0.01*I1
VTS I2> Inhibit
06
42154
G2
0.05
Setting
0.05*I1
0.5*I1
0.01*I1
CT SUPERVISION
07
(Sub Heading)
CTS Status
08
Indexed String
G37
42155
G37
Disabled
Setting
CTS VN Input
09
Indexed String
G49
42156
G49
Derived
Setting
CTS VN< Inhibit
0A
42157
G2
Setting
CTS IN> Set

CTS Time Delay
GROUP 1
47
0.5*V1
22*V1
0.5*V1
0.5*V3
22*V3
0.5*V3
0B
42158
G2
0.2
Setting
0.08*I1
4*I1
0.01*I1
0C
42159
G2
Setting
10
00
SENSITIVE POWER
Comp Angle
01
Sen Power1 Func
02
Indexed String
42175
G2
Setting
-5
0.1
42176
G102
Reverse
Setting
Sen -P>1 Setting
03
42177
G2
0.5*V1*I3
Setting
0.3*V1*I3
15*V1*I3
0.1*V1*I3
Sen P<1 Setting
04
42178
G2
0.5*V1*I3
Setting
0.3*V1*I3
15*V1*I3
0.1*V1*I3
Sen P>1 Setting
05
42179
G2
50*V1*I3
Setting
0.3*V1*I3
100*V1*I3
0.1*V1*I3
Sen Power1 Delay
06
42180
G2
Setting
100
0.01
G102
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 31/158
UI
Courier
Col
Power1 DO Timer
Row
07
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
42181
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
G2
Setting
100
0.01
*
*
P1 PoleDead Inh
08
Indexed String
G37
42182
G37
Enabled
Setting
Sen Power2 Func
09
Indexed String
G102
42183
G102
Low Forward
Setting
Sen -P>2 Setting
0A
42184
G2
0.5*V1*I3
Setting
0.3*V1*I3
15*V1*I3
0.1*V1*I3
Sen P<2 Setting
0B
42185
G2
0.5*V1*I3
Setting
0.3*V1*I3
15*V1*I3
0.1*V1*I3
Sen P>2 Setting
0C
42186
G2
50*V1*I3
Setting
0.3*V1*I3
100*V1*I3
0.1*V1*I3
Sen Power2 Delay
0D
42187
G2
Setting
100
0.01
Power2 DO Timer
0E
42188
G2
Setting
100
0.01
P2 PoleDead Inh
0F
Indexed String
42189
G37
Enabled
Setting
GROUP 1
48
00
49
00
G37
Comment
NOT USED
GROUP 1
POLE SLIPPING
PSlip Function
01
Indexed String
Z Based PoleSlip
02
(Sub Heading)
Pole Slip Mode
03
Indexed String
42251
G113
Generating
Setting
PSlip Za Forward
04
42252
G2
100*V1/I1
Setting
0.5*V1/I1
350*V1/I1
0.5*V1/I1
PSlip Zb Reverse
05
42253
G2
150*V1/I1
Setting
0.5*V1/I1
350*V1/I1
0.5*V1/I1
Lens Angle
06
42254
G2
120
Setting
90
150
PSlip Timer T1
07
42255
G2
0.015
Setting
0.005
PSlip Timer T2
08
42256
G2
0.015
Setting
0.005
Blinder Angle
09
42257
G2
75
Setting
20
90
PSlip Zc
0A
42258
G2
50*V1/I1
Setting
0.5*V1/I1
350*V1/I1
0.5*V1/I1
Zone1 Slip Count
0B
Unsigned Integer
G1
42259
G1
Setting
20
G1
Zone2 Slip Count
0C
Unsigned Integer
PSlip Reset Time
0D
GROUP 1
4A
G37
42250
G37
Enabled
Setting
*
*
G113
42260
G1
Setting
20
42261
G2
30
Setting
100
0.01
00
*
*
INPUT LABELS
Opto Input 1
01
ASCII Text (16 chars)
42300
42307
G3
**
Setting
32
163
** Refer to Default PSL Settings
Opto Input 2
02
42308
42315
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 3
03
42316
42323
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 4
04
42324
42331
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 5
05
42332
42339
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 6
06
42340
42347
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 7
07
42348
42355
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 8
08
42356
42363
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 9
09
42364
42371
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 10
0A
42372
42379
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 11
0B
42380
42387
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 12
0C
42388
42395
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 13
0D
42396
42403
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 14
0E
42404
42411
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 15
0F
42412
42419
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 16
10
42420
42427
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 17
11
42428
42435
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 32/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Comment
Opto Input 18
12
42436
42443
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 19
13
42444
42451
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 20
14
42452
42459
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 21
15
42460
42467
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 22
16
42468
42475
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 23
17
42476
42483
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 24
18
42484
42491
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 25
19
42492
42499
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 26
1A
42500
42507
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 27
1B
42508
42515
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 28
1C
42516
42523
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 29
1D
42524
42531
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 30
1E
42532
42539
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 31
1F
42540
42547
G3
**
Setting
32
163
20
42548
42555
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Opto Input 32
GROUP 1
4B
00
OUTPUT LABELS
Relay 1
01
42556
42563
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 2
02
42564
42571
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 3
03
42572
42579
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 4
04
42580
42587
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 5
05
42588
42595
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 6
06
42596
42603
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 7
07
42604
42611
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 8
08
42612
42619
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 9
09
42620
42627
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 10
0A
42628
42635
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 11
0B
42636
42643
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 12
0C
42644
42651
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 13
0D
42652
42659
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 14
0E
42660
42667
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 15
0F
42668
42675
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 16
10
42676
42683
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 17
11
42684
42691
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 18
12
42692
42699
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 19
13
42700
42707
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 20
14
42708
42715
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 21
15
42716
42723
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 22
16
42724
42731
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 23
17
42732
42739
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 24
18
42740
42747
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 25
19
42748
42755
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 26
1A
42756
42763
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 27
1B
42764
42771
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 28
1C
42772
42779
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 33/158
Courier Text
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Comment
Relay 29
1D
42780
42787
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 30
1E
42788
42795
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 31
1F
42796
42803
G3
**
Setting
32
163
Relay 32
20
42804
42811
G3
**
Setting
32
163
0927=1 AND 091F=1 AND
GROUP 1
4C
00
RTD LABELS
0006="P34????B*"
RTD 1
01
42812
42819
G3
RTD 1
Setting
32
163
RTD 2
02
42820
42827
G3
RTD 2
Setting
32
163
RTD 3
03
42828
42835
G3
RTD 3
Setting
32
163
RTD 4
04
42836
42843
G3
RTD 4
Setting
32
163
RTD 5
05
42844
42851
G3
RTD 5
Setting
32
163
RTD 6
06
42852
42859
G3
RTD 6
Setting
32
163
RTD 7
07
42860
42867
G3
RTD 7
Setting
32
163
RTD 8
08
42868
42875
G3
RTD 8
Setting
32
163
RTD 9
09
42876
42883
G3
RTD 9
Setting
32
163
RTD 10
0A
42884
42891
G3
RTD 10
Setting
32
163
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
GROUP 2 PROTECTION SETTINGS

50
Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows
00
43000
44999

70
00
45000
46999

90
00
N/A B0
00
Auto extraction Event Record Column
Select Record
01
Unsigned Integer(2)
Faulted Phase
02
Binary Flag (8 bits) Indexed String
Start Elements1
03
Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed String
0..31
0..31
Start Elements2
04
0..31
0..31
Trip Elements1
05
0..31
0..31
Trip Elements2
06
0..31
0..31
Fault Alarms
07
0..31
0..31
Data
Fault Time
08
IEC870 Time & Date
Data
(No Header)
47000
48999
Setting
1 bit per elementLSB

String..MSB String
String..MSB String
String..MSB String
String..MSB String
String..MSB String
65535
Active Group
09
Unsigned Integer
Data
System Frequency
0A
Data
Fault Duration
0B
Data
CB Operate Time
0C
Data
Relay Trip Time
0D
Data
IA
0E
Data
IA-1
0E
Data
IB
0F
Data
IB-1
0F
Data
*
*
Unique cyclical fault number(from

event)
Product Specific Bit Flags
Targetting
Targetting
Targetting
Targetting
Targetting
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 34/158
UI
Courier
Col
IC
Row
10
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Data
IC-1
10
Data
VAB
11
Data
VBC
12
Data
VCA
13
Data
VAN
14
Data
VBN
15
Data
VCN
16
Data
IA-2
17
Data
IB-2
18
Data
IC-2
19
Data
IA Differential
1A
Data
IB Differential
1B
Data
IC Differential
1C
Data
VN Measured
1D
Data
VN Derived
1E
Data
IN Measured
1F
Data
IN Derived
1F
Data
I Sensitive
20
Data
IREF Diff
21
Data
IREF Bias
22
Data
I2
23
Data
3 Phase Watts
24
Courier Number (Watts)
Data
3 Phase VARs
25
Courier Number (VARs)
Data
3 Phase Power Factor
26
Courier Number (No unit)
Data
RTD 1 label
27
Data
RTD 2 label
28
Data
RTD 3 label
29
Data
RTD 4 label
2A
Data
RTD 5 label
2B
Data
RTD 6 label
2C
Data
RTD 7 label
2D
Data
RTD 8 label
2E
Data
RTD 9 label
2F
Data
RTD 10 label
30
Data
df/dt
31
Data
32
Data
V Vector Shift
No Header
N/A B1
*
*
00
Select Record
01
UINT16
Time and Date
02
IEC Date and Time
Data
Record Text
03
ASCII Text
Data
Text Description of Error
Error No1
04
UINT32
Data
Error Code
Error No2
05
UINT32
Data
Error Code
DATA TRANSFER
Domain
(No N/A B2
Setting
Comment
65535
00
04
Indexed String
G57
PSL Settings
Setting
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 35/158
UI
Courier
Col
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
G90
Group 1
Setting
256
Setting
65535
Sub-Domain
08
Indexed String
Version
0C
Unsigned Integer (2 Bytes)
Start
10
Not Used
Length
14
Not Used
Data Transfer Reference
18
Transfer Mode
1C
Unsigned Integer Indexed Strings
Data Transfer
20
Repeated groups of Unsigned Integers
*
*
RECORDER CONTROL
N/A B3
G76
G76
Setting
Setting
00
UNUSED
01
Recorder Source
02
03-1F
00
Reserved for future use

RECORDER EXTRACTION
Select Record
N/A B4
01
Indexed String
Unsigned Integer
Samples
Data
Setting
-199
199
Comment
Only settable if Domain = PSL

Settings
Trigger Time
02
IEC870 Time & Date
Data
Active Channels
03
Binary Flag
Data
Channel Types
04
Binary Flag
Data
Channel Offsets
05
Data
Channel Scaling
06
Data
Channel SkewVal
07
Integer
Data
Channel MinVal
08
Integer
Data
Channel MaxVal
09
Integer
Data
Format
0A
Unsigned Integer
Data
0B
Unsigned Integer
Data
0 = uncompressed,
1 = compressed
Unused when Build=IEC60870-5103
Upload
UNUSED
0C-0F
No. Of Samples
10
Unsigned Integer
Data
Trig Position
11
Unsigned Integer
Data
Time Base
12
Data
UNUSED
13
Unsigned Integer
Data
Sample Timer
UNUSED
14
15-1F
Dist. Channel 1
20
Integer
Data
Dist. Channel 2
21
Integer
Data
Dist. Channel 3
22
Integer
Data
Dist. Channel 4
23
Integer
Data
Dist. Channel 5
24
Integer
Data
Dist. Channel 6
25
Integer
Data
Dist. Channel 7
26
Integer
Data
Dist. Channel 8
27
Integer
Data
Dist. Channel 9
28
Integer
Data
Dist. Channel 10
29
Integer
Data
Dist. Channel 11
2A
Integer
Data
Dist. Channel 12
2B
Integer
Data
Dist. Channel 13
2C
Integer
Data
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 36/158
UI
Courier
Col
UNUSED
Row
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Comment
2D-3D
Dist. Channel 31
3E
Binary Flag
Data
Dist. Channel 32
3F
Binary Flag
Data
No. of Disturbance Records
(0 to 200)
Oldest Stored Dist. Record
(1 to 65535)
Number of Registers in Current
Page
Disturbance Record Page
(0 to 65535)
Select Disturbance Record
30800
G1
Data
30801
G1
Data
30802
G1
Data
30803
30929
40250
30930
Calibration Coefficients
30933
G1
Data
G1
Setting
G12
Data
(Hi N/A B5
65535
Timestamp of selected record
Cal Soft Version
01
ASCII text 16 chars
Cal Date and Time
02
IEC Date and time
Channel Types
03
Repeated Group 16 * Binary Flag 8 bits
Cal Coeffs
04
Block transfer Repeated Group of UINT32 (4 coeffs voltage channel, 8 coeffs current channel)
00
Note: No text in column text
Bus Comms Err Count Front
01
UINT32
Bus Message Count Front
02
UINT32
Protocol Err Count Front
03
UINT32
Slave Message Count Front
04
UNIT32
Comms Diagnostics
(HN/A B6
Reset front count
05
(Reset Menu Cell cmd only)
Bus Comms Err Count Rear
06
UINT32
Protocol Err Count Rear
07
UINT32
Slave Message Count Rear
08
UINT32
Busy Count Rear
09
UINT32
Reset Rear Count
0A
(Reset Menu Cell cmd only)
PSL DATA
B7
00
Grp 1 PSL Ref
01
ASCII Text (32 Chars)
31000
31015
G3
Data
Date/Time
02
IEC 870 Date & Time
31016
31019
G12
Data
Grp 1 PSL ID
03
31020
31021
G27
Data
Grp 2 PSL Ref
11
31022
31037
G3
Data
Date/Time
12
IEC 870 Date & Time
31038
31041
G12
Data
Grp 2 PSL ID
13
31042
31043
G27
Data
Grp 3 PSL Ref
21
31044
31059
G3
Data
Date/Time
22
IEC 870 Date & Time
31060
31063
G12
Data
Grp 3 PSL ID
23
31064
31065
G27
Data
Grp 4 PSL Ref
31
31066
31079
G3
Data
Date/Time
32
IEC 870 Date & Time
31082
31085
G12
Data
Grp 4 PSL ID
33
31086
31087
G27
Data
*
*
COMMS SYS DATA
N/A BF
00
Dist Record Cntrl Ref
01
Menu Cell(2)
B300
Data
Dist Record Extract Ref
02
Menu Cell(2)
B400
Data
Setting Transfer
03
Unsigned Integer
Setting
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Courier Text
Page 37/158
UI
Courier
Col
Reset Demand
Row
04
UNUSED
05
Block Xfer Ref
06
DIAGNOSTICS (hidden)
E0
Data Type
Strings
Modbus Address
Start
End
Modbus
Database
None (Reset Menu Cell)
Default Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Model
Password
Level
P341 P342 P343
Data(but supports Reset Menu cell)
Menu Cell(2)
B200
Data
00
G11
01
Indexed String
11
G25
Data
CPU Load-Average
12
G25
Data
CPU Load-Min
13
G25
Data
CPU Load-Max
14
G25
Data
CPU Load Reset
1F
Indexed String
0 (No)
Setting
CPU Load-Instant
G11
0 (No)
Enable Column
G11
G11
Setting
DDB to set:
21
Setting
1022
DDB to reset:
22
Setting
1022
DDB to pulse:
23
Setting
1022
UINT32 - 1
31
Setting
2^32-1
UINT32 - 2
32
Setting
2^32-1
UINT32 - 3
33
Setting
2^32-1
UINT32 - 4
34
Setting
2^32-1
UINT32 - 5
35
Setting
2^32-1
INT32 - 1
41
Signed Integer (32 bits)
Data
INT32 - 2
42
Data
INT32 - 3
43
Data
INT32 - 4
44
Data
INT32 - 5
45
Data
BIN32 - 1
51
Data
BIN32 - 2
52
Data
BIN32 - 3
53
Data
BIN32 - 4
54
Data
BIN32 - 5
55
Data
FLT32 - 1
61
Courier Number (meters)
G24
Data
FLT32 - 2
62
G24
Data
FLT32 - 3
63
G24
Data
FLT32 - 4
64
G24
Data
FLT32 - 5
65
G24
Data
Comment
CPU Load Measurements
Manual DDB Control for tests
Debug variables - default: Not

used
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 38/158
Data Types
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
G1
UNSIGNED INTEGER
eg. 5678 stored as 5678
G2
NUMERIC SETTING
Modbus value = (relay setting - minimum
setting)/step size
G3
ASCII TEXT CHARACTERS

0x00FF
Second character
0xFF00
First character
G4
PLANT STATUS (2 REGISTERS)

(Second reg, First Reg)
0x0000,0x0001
CB1 Open (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0000,0x0002
CB1 Closed (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0000,0x0004
Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0000,0x0008
0x0000,0x0010
0x0000,0x0020
0x0000,0x0040
0x0000,0x0080
0x0000,0x0100
0x0000,0x0200
0x0000,0x0400
0x0000,0x0800
0x0000,0x1000
0x0000,0x2000
0x0000,0x4000
0x0000,0x8000
G5

CONTROL STATUS (2 REGISTERS)
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 39/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
0x0000,0x0001
0x0000,0x0002
0x0000,0x0004
0x0000,0x0008
0x0000,0x0010
0x0000,0x0020
0x0000,0x0040
0x0000,0x0080
0x0000,0x0100
0x0000,0x0200
0x0000,0x0400
0x0000,0x0800
0x0000,0x1000
0x0000,0x2000
0x0000,0x4000
0x0000,0x8000
G6

Record Control Command Register
No operation
Clear Event records
Clear Fault Record
Clear Maintenance Records
Reset Indications
Blocking
Indication
G7
VTS Indicate/Block
LOGIC INPUT STATUS
G8
P341
P342
P343
0x0000,0x0001
Opto 1 Input State (0=Off, 1=On)
0x0000,0x0002
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 40/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
0x0000,0x0004
0x0000,0x0008
0x0000,0x0010
0x0000,0x0020
0x0000,0x0040
0x0000,0x0080
0x0000,0x0100
0x0000,0x0200
0x0000,0x0400
0x0000,0x0800
0x0000,0x1000
0x0000,0x2000
0x0000,0x4000
0x0000,0x8000
0x0001,0x0000
0x0002,0x0000
0x0004,0x0000
0x0008,0x0000
0x0010,0x0000
0x0020,0x0000
0x0040,0x0000
0x0080,0x0000
0x0100,0x0000
0x0200,0x0000
0x0400,0x0000
0x0800,0x0000
0x1000,0x0000
0x2000,0x0000
0x4000,0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 41/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
0x8000,0x0000
Not Used
Not Used

RELAY OUTPUT STATUS
G9
P341
P342
P343
0x0000,0x0001
Relay 1 (0=Off, 1=On)
0x0000,0x0002
0x0000,0x0004
0x0000,0x0008
0x0000,0x0010
0x0000,0x0020
0x0000,0x0040
0x0000,0x0080
0x0000,0x0100
0x0000,0x0200
0x0000,0x0400
0x0000,0x0800
0x0000,0x1000
0x0000,0x2000
0x0000,0x4000
0x0000,0x8000
0x0001,0x0000
0x0002,0x0000
0x0004,0x0000
0x0008,0x0000
0x0010,0x0000
0x0020,0x0000
0x0040,0x0000
0x0080,0x0000
0x0100,0x0000
0x0200,0x0000
0x0400,0x0000
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 42/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
0x0800,0x0000
0x1000,0x0000
0x2000,0x0000
0x4000,0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
G10

SIGNED FIXED POINT NUMBER - 1 DECIMAL PLACE
-3276.8 to 3276.7 e.g. display of temperature
G11
YES/NO
0
No
Yes
G12
TIME AND DATE (4 REGISTERS - IEC870 FORMAT)

0x007F
First register - Years
0x0FFF
Second register - Month of year / Day of month / Day of week
0x9FBF
Third Register - Summertime and hours / Validity and minutes
0xFFFF
Fourth Register - Milli-seconds
G13
EVENT RECORD TYPE

0
Latched alarm active
Latched alarm inactive
Self reset alarm active
Self reset alarm inactive
Relay event
Opto event
Protection event
Platform event
Fault logged event
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 43/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
9
Maintenance record logged event

I> FUNCTION LINK
G14
P341
P343
I>1 VTS Block (0=Non-dir, I=VTS Blk)
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 1
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 2
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 3
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 4
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 5
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 6
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 7
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
No Record
Un-extracted
Extracted
G15
DISTURBANCE RECORD INDEX STATUS
G16
FAULTED PHASE
0x0001
Start A
0x0002
Start B
0x0004
Start C
0x0008
Start N
0x0010
Trip A
0x0020
Trip B
0x0040
Trip C
0x0080
G17
G18
P342
Bit 0
Trip N
IRIG-B STATUS
Card not fitted
Card failed
Signal healthy
No signal
Record Selection Command Register (MODBUS)
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 44/158
0x0000
No Operation
0x0001
Select next event
0x0002
Accept Event
0x0004
Select next Disurbance Record
0x0008
Accept disturbance record
0x0010
Select Next Disturbance record page
G19
G20
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
LANGUAGE
0
English
Francais
Deutsch
Espanol
PASSWORD (2 REGISTERS)
0x0000, 0x00FF
First password character
0x0000, 0xFF00
Second password character
0x00FF, 0x0000
Third password character
0xFF00, 0x0000
Fourth password character

NOTE THAT WHEN REGISTERS OF THIS TYPE ARE READ THE SLAVE WILL
ALWAYS INDICATE AN "*" IN EACH CHARACTER POSITION TO PRESERVE
THE PASSWORD SECURITY.
G21
IEC60870 Interface
0
RS485
Fibre Optic
G22
PASSWORD CONTROL ACCESS LEVEL

0
Level 0 - Passwords required for levels 1 & 2.
Level 1 - Password required for level 2.
Level 2 - No passwords required.
G23
Voltage and V/Hz Curve selection

0
Disabled
DT
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 45/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
G24
2 REGISTERS
DESCRIPTION
IDMT
UNSIGNED LONG VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES
High order word of long stored in 1st register
Low order word of long stored in 2nd register
Example 123456.789 stored as 123456789
G25
1 REGISTER
UNSIGNED VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES

Example 50.050 stored as 50050
G26
RELAY STATUS
0x0001
Out of Service
0x0002
Minor self test failure
0x0004
Event
0x0008
0x0010
DISTURB Flag
0x0020
Fault
0x0040
Unused
0x0080
Unused
0x0100
Unused
0x0200
Unused
0x0400
Unused
0x0800
Unused
0x1000
Unused
0x2000
Unused
0x4000
Unused
0x8000
G27
2 REGISTERS
Unused
UNSIGNED LONG VALUE
High order word of long stored in 1st register
Low order word of long stored in 2nd register
Example 123456 stored as 123456
G28
1 REGISTER
SIGNED VALUE POWER & WATT-HOURS
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 46/158
TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
G29
3 REGISTER
DESCRIPTION
Power = (Secondary power/CT secondary) * (100/VT secondary)
POWER MULTIPLER
All power measurments use a signed value of type G28 and a
2 register unsigned long multiplier of type G27
Value = Real Value*110/(CTsecondary*VTsecondary)
For Primary Power Multipler = CTprimary * VTprimary/110
For Secondary Power Multipler = CTsecondary * VTsecondary/110
G30
1 REGISTER
G31
SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES

ANALOGUE CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR
P341
P342
P343
VAN
VAN
VBN
VBN
VBN
VCN
VCN
VCN
VN
VN
VN
IA
IA
IA-1
IB
IB
IB-1
IC
IC
IC-1
IN Sensitive
IN
IN
IN Sensitive
IN Sensitive
VAN
IA-2
10
IB-2
11
IC-2
DIGITAL CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR
G32
P341
P342
P343
Unused
Unused
Unused
R1 IN>1 Start
R1 Trip CB
R1 Trip CB
R2 I>1 Start
R2 Trip PrimeMov
R2 Trip PrimeMov
R3 Any Trip
R3 Any Trip
R3 Any Trip
R4 General Alarm
R4 General Alarm
R4 General Alarm
R5 CB Fail
R5 CB Fail
R5 CB Fail
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 47/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
6
R6 Control Close
R6 E/F trip
R6 E/F Trip
R7 Control Trip
R7 V or F Trip
R7 Volt Trip
R8 Not Used
R8 Not Used
R8 Freq Trip
R9 Not Used
R9 Not Used
R9 Diff Trip
10
R10 Not Used
R10 Not Used
R10 SysBack Trip
11
R11 Not Used
R11 Not Used
R11 NPS Trip
12
R12 Not Used
R12 Not Used
R12 Ffail Trip
13
R13 Not Used
R13 Not Used
R13 Power trip
14
R14 Not Used
R14 Not Used
R14 V/Hz trip
15
R15 Not Used
R15 Not Used
R15 Not Used
16
R16 Not Used
R16 Not Used
R16 Not Used
17
R17 Not Used
R17 Not Used
R17 Not Used
18
R18 Not Used
R18 Not Used
R18 Not Used
19
R19 Not Used
R19 Not Used
R19 Not Used
20
R20 Not Used
R20 Not Used
R20 Not Used
21
R21 Not Used
R21 Not Used
R21 Not Used
22
R22 Not Used
R22 Not Used
R22 Not Used
23
R23 Not Used
R23 Not Used
R23 Not Used
24
R24 Not Used
R24 Not Used
R24 Not Used
25
L1 Setting group
L1 Setting Group
R25 Not Used
26
L2 Setting group
L2 Setting Group
R26 Not Used
27
L3 Block IN>3&4
L3 Block IN>2
R27 Not Used
28
L4 Block I> 3&4
L4 Block I>2
R28 Not Used
29
L5 Reset
L5 Reset
R29 Not Used
30
L6 Ext Prot Trip
L6 Ext Prot Trip
R30 Not Used
31
L7 52a
L7 52a
R31 Not Used
32
L8 52b
L8 52b
R32 Not Used
33
L9 Not Used
L9 Not Used
L1 Setting Group
34
L10 Not Used
L10 Not Used
L2 Setting Group
35
L11 Not Used
L11 Not Used
L3 Block IN>2
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 48/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
36
L12 Not Used
L12 Not Used
L4 Block I>2
37
L13 Not Used
L13 Not Used
L5 Reset
38
L14 Not Used
L14 Not Used
L6 Ext Prot Trip
39
L15 Not Used
L15 Not Used
L7 52a
40
L16 Not Used
L16 Not Used
L8 52b
41
L17 Not Used
L17 Not Used
L9 Not Used
42
L18 Not Used
L18 Not Used
L10 Not Used
43
L19 Not Used
L19 Not Used
L11 Not Used
44
L20 Not Used
L20 Not Used
L12 Not Used
45
L21 Not Used
L21 Not Used
L13 Not Used
46
L22 Not Used
L22 Not Used
L14 Not Used
47
L23 Not Used
L23 Not Used
L15 Not Used
48
L24 Not Used
L24 Not Used
L16 Not Used
49
LED 1
LED 1
L17 Not Used
50
LED 2
LED 2
L18 Not Used
51
LED 3
LED 3
L19 Not Used
52
LED 4
LED 4
L20 Not Used
53
LED 5
LED 5
L21 Not Used
54
LED 6
LED 6
L22 Not Used
55
LED 7
LED 7
L23 Not Used
56
LED 8
LED 8
L24 Not Used
57
SG-opto Invalid
SG-opto Invalid
L25 Not Used
58
Prot'n Disabled
Prot'n Disabled
L26 Not Used
59
VT Fail Alarm
VT Fail Alarm
L27 Not Used
60
CT Fail Alarm
CT Fail Alarm
L28 Not Used
61
CB Fail Alarm
CB Fail Alarm
L29 Not Used
62
I^ Maint Alarm
I^ Maint Alarm
L30 Not Used
63
I^ Lockout Alarm
I^ Lockout Alarm
L31 Not Used
64
CB Ops Maint
CB Ops Maint
L32 Not Used
65
CB Ops Lockout
CB Ops Lockout
LED 1
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 49/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
66
CB Op Time Maint
CB Op Time Maint
LED 2
67
CB Op Time Lock
CB Op Time Lock
LED 3
68
Fault Freq Lock
Fault Freq Lock
LED 4
69
CB Status Alarm
CB Status Alarm
LED 5
70
Man CB Trip Fail
Man CB Trip Fail
LED 6
71
Man CB Cls Fail
Man CB Cls Fail
LED 7
72
Man CB Unhealthy
Man CB Unhealthy
LED 8
73
F out of Range
NPS Alarm
SG-opto Invalid
74
Thermal Alarm
Thermal Alarm
Prot'n Disabled
75
Freq Prot Alm
V/Hz Alarm
VT Fail Alarm
76
Voltage Prot Alm
Field Fail Alarm
CT Fail Alarm
77
User Alarm 1
RTD Thermal Alm
CB Fail Alarm
78
User Alarm 2
RTD Open Cct
I^ Maint Alarm
79
User Alarm 3
RTD short Cct
I^ Lockout Alarm
80
df/dt Trip
RTD Data Error
CB Ops Maint
81
V Shift Trip
RTD Board Fail
CB Ops Lockout
82
IN>1 Trip
Freq Prot Alm
CB Op Time Maint
83
IN>2 Trip
Voltage Prot Alm
CB Op Time Lock
84
IN>3 Trip
User Alarm 1
Fault Freq Lock
85
IN>4 Trip
User Alarm 2
CB Status Alarm
86
IREF> Trip
User Alarm 3
Man CB Trip Fail
87
ISEF>1 Trip
Field Fail1 Trip
Man CB Cls Fail
88
ISEF>2 Trip
Field Fail2 Trip
Man CB Unhealthy
89
ISEF>3 Trip
NPS Trip
NPS Alarm
90
ISEF>4 Trip
V Dep OC Trip
Thermal Alarm
91
VN>1 Trip
V Dep OC Trip A
V/Hz Alarm
92
VN>2 Trip
V Dep OC Trip B
Field Fail Alarm
93
V<1 Trip
V Dep OC Trip C
RTD Thermal Alm
94
V<1 Trip A/AB
V/Hz Trip
RTD Open Cct
95
V<1 Trip B/BC
RTD 1 Trip
RTD short Cct
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 50/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
96
V<1 Trip C/CA
RTD 2 Trip
RTD Data Error
97
V<2 Trip
RTD 3 Trip
RTD Board Fail
98
V<2 Trip A/AB
RTD 4 Trip
Freq Prot Alm
99
V<2 Trip B/BC
RTD 5 Trip
Voltage Prot Alm
100
V<2 Trip C/CA
RTD 6 Trip
User Alarm 1
101
V>1 Trip
RTD 7 Trip
User Alarm 2
102
V>1 Trip A/AB
RTD 8 Trip
User Alarm 3
103
V>1 Trip B/BC
RTD 9 Trip
100% ST EF Trip
104
V>1 Trip C/CA
RTD 10 Trip
DeadMachine Trip
105
V>2 Trip
Any RTD Trip
Gen Diff Trip
106
V>2 Trip A/AB
IN>1 Trip
Gen Diff Trip A
107
V>2 Trip B/BC
IN>2 Trip
Gen Diff Trip B
108
V>2 Trip C/CA
IREF> Trip
Gen Diff Trip C
109
F<1 Trip
ISEF>1 Trip
Field Fail1 Trip
110
F<2 Trip
VN>1 Trip
Field Fail2 Trip
111
F<3 Trip
VN>2 Trip
NPS Trip
112
F<4 Trip
V<1 Trip
V Dep OC Trip
113
F>1 Trip
V<1 Trip A/AB
V Dep OC Trip A
114
F>2 Trip
V<1 Trip B/BC
V Dep OC Trip B
115
Power1 Trip
V<1 Trip C/CA
V Dep OC Trip C
116
Power2 Trip
V<2 Trip
V/Hz Trip
117
I>1 Trip
V<2 Trip A/AB
RTD 1 Trip
118
I>1 Trip A
V<2 Trip B/BC
RTD 2 Trip
119
I>1 Trip B
V<2 Trip C/CA
RTD 3 Trip
120
I>1 Trip C
V>1 Trip
RTD 4 Trip
121
I>2 Trip
V>1 Trip A/AB
RTD 5 Trip
122
I>2 Trip A
V>1 Trip B/BC
RTD 6 Trip
123
I>2 Trip B
V>1 Trip C/CA
RTD 7 Trip
124
I>2 Trip C
V>2 Trip
RTD 8 Trip
125
I>3 Trip
V>2 Trip A/AB
RTD 9 Trip
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 51/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
126
I>3 Trip A
V>2 Trip B/BC
RTD 10 Trip
127
I>3 Trip B
V>2 Trip C/CA
Any RTD Trip
128
I>3 Trip C
F<1 Trip
IN>1 Trip
129
I>4 Trip
F<2 Trip
IN>2 Trip
130
I>4 Trip A
F<3 Trip
IREF> Trip
131
I>4 Trip B
F<4 Trip
ISEF>1 Trip
132
I>4 Trip C
F>1 Trip
VN>1 Trip
133
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
F>2 Trip
VN>2 Trip
134
Bfail2 Trip 3ph
Power1 Trip
V<1 Trip
135
SPower1 Trip
Power2 Trip
V<1 Trip A/AB
136
SPower2 Trip
I>1 Trip
V<1 Trip B/BC
137
Thermal O/L Trip
I>1 Trip A
V<1 Trip C/CA
138
Any Start
I>1 Trip B
V<2 Trip
139
VN>1 Start
I>1 Trip C
V<2 Trip A/AB
140
VN>2 Start
I>2 Trip
V<2 Trip B/BC
141
V<1 Start
I>2 Trip A
V<2 Trip C/CA
142
V<1 Start A/AB
I>2 Trip B
V>1 Trip
143
V<1 Start B/BC
I>2 Trip C
V>1 Trip A/AB
144
V<1 Start C/CA
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
V>1 Trip B/BC
145
V<2 Start
Bfail2 Trip 3ph
V>1 Trip C/CA
146
V<2 Start A/AB
SPower1 Trip
V>2 Trip
147
V<2 Start B/BC
SPower2 Trip
V>2 Trip A/AB
148
V<2 Start C/CA
Thermal O/L Trip
V>2 Trip B/BC
149
V>1 Start
Z<1 Trip
V>2 Trip C/CA
150
V>1 Start A/AB
Z<1 Trip A
F<1 Trip
151
V>1 Start B/BC
Z<1 Trip B
F<2 Trip
152
V>1 Start C/CA
Z<1 Trip C
F<3 Trip
153
V>2 Start
Z<2 Trip
F<4 Trip
154
V>2 Start A/AB
Z<2 Trip A
F>1 Trip
155
V>2 Start B/BC
Z<2 Trip B
F>2 Trip
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 52/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
156
V>2 Start C/CA
Z<2 Trip C
Power1 Trip
157
Power1 Start
Any Start
Power2 Trip
158
Power2 Start
VN>1 Start
I>1 Trip
159
I>1 Start
VN>2 Start
I>1 Trip A
160
I>1 Start A
V<1 Start
I>1 Trip B
161
I>1 Start B
V<1 Start A/AB
I>1 Trip C
162
I>1 Start C
V<1 Start B/BC
I>2 Trip
163
I>2 Start
V<1 Start C/CA
I>2 Trip A
164
I>2 Start A
V<2 Start
I>2 Trip B
165
I>2 Start B
V<2 Start A/AB
I>2 Trip C
166
I>2 Start C
V<2 Start B/BC
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
167
I>3 Start
V<2 Start C/CA
Bfail2 Trip 3ph
168
I>3 Start A
V>1 Start
SPower1 Trip
169
I>3 Start B
V>1 Start A/AB
SPower2 Trip
170
I>3 Start C
V>1 Start B/BC
PSlipz Z1 Trip
171
I>4 Start
V>1 Start C/CA
PSlipz Z2 Trip
172
I>4 Start A
V>2 Start
Thermal O/L Trip
173
I>4 Start B
V>2 Start A/AB
Z<1 Trip
174
I>4 Start C
V>2 Start B/BC
Z<1 Trip A
175
IN>1 Start
V>2 Start C/CA
Z<1 Trip B
176
IN>2 Start
Power1 Start
Z<1 Trip C
177
IN>3 Start
Power2 Start
Z<2 Trip
178
IN>4 Start
I>1 Start
Z<2 Trip A
179
ISEF>1 Start
I>1 Start A
Z<2 Trip B
180
ISEF>2 Start
I>1 Start B
Z<2 Trip C
181
ISEF>3 Start
I>1 Start C
Any Start
182
ISEF>4 Start
I>2 Start
VN>1 Start
183
F<1 Start
I>2 Start A
VN>2 Start
184
F<2 Start
I>2 Start B
V<1 Start
185
F<3 Start
I>2 Start C
V<1 Start A/AB
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 53/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
186
F<4 Start
IN>1 Start
V<1 Start B/BC
187
F>1 Start
IN>2 Start
V<1 Start C/CA
188
F>2 Start
ISEF>1 Start
V<2 Start
189
I> BlockStart
F<1 Start
V<2 Start A/AB
190
IN/SEF>Blk Start
F<2 Start
V<2 Start B/BC
191
df/dt Start
F<3 Start
V<2 Start C/CA
192
IA< Start
F<4 Start
V>1 Start
193
IB< Start
F>1 Start
V>1 Start A/AB
194
IC< Start
F>2 Start
V>1 Start B/BC
195
ISEF< Start
IA< Start
V>1 Start C/CA
196
SPower1 Start
IB< Start
V>2 Start
197
SPower2 Start
IC< Start
V>2 Start A/AB
198
VTS Fast Block
ISEF< Start
V>2 Start B/BC
199
VTS Slow Block
IN< Start
V>2 Start C/CA
200
CTS Block
V/Hz Start
Power1 Start
201
Control Trip
FFail1 Start
Power2 Start
202
Control Close
FFail2 Start
I>1 Start
203
Close in Prog
V Dep OC Start
I>1 Start A
204
Reconnection
V Dep OC Start A
I>1 Start B
205
Lockout Alarm
V Dep OC Start B
I>1 Start C
206
CB Open 3 ph
V Dep OC Start C
I>2 Start
207
CB Closed 3 ph
SPower1 Start
I>2 Start A
208
Field volts fail
SPower2 Start
I>2 Start B
209
All Poles Dead
Z<1 Start
I>2 Start C
210
Any Pole Dead
Z<1 Start A
IN>1 Start
211
Pole Dead A
Z<1 Start B
IN>2 Start
212
Pole Dead B
Z<1 Start C
ISEF>1 Start
213
Pole Dead C
Z<2 Start
100% ST EF Start
214
Z<2 Start A
F<1 Start
215
Z<2 Start B
F<2 Start
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 54/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
216
Z<2 Start C
F<3 Start
217
VTS Fast Block
F<4 Start
218
VTS Slow Block
F>1 Start
219
CTS Block
F>2 Start
220
RTD 1 Alarm
IA< Start
221
RTD 2 Alarm
IB< Start
222
RTD 3 Alarm
IC< Start
223
RTD 4 Alarm
ISEF< Start
224
RTD 5 Alarm
IN< Start
225
RTD 6 Alarm
V/Hz Start
226
RTD 7 Alarm
FFail1 Start
227
RTD 8 Alarm
FFail2 Start
228
RTD 9 Alarm
V Dep OC Start
229
RTD 10 Alarm
V Dep OC Start A
230
Lockout Alarm
V Dep OC Start B
231
CB Open 3 ph
V Dep OC Start C
232
CB Closed 3 ph
SPower1 Start
233
Field volts fail
SPower2 Start
234
All Poles Dead
PSlipz Z1 Start
235
Any Pole Dead
PSlipz Z2 Start
236
Pole Dead A
PSlipz LensStart
237
Pole Dead B
PSlipz BlindStrt
238
Pole Dead C
PSlipz ReactStrt
239
Z<1 Start
240
Z<1 Start A
241
Z<1 Start B
242
Z<1 Start C
243
Z<2 Start
244
Z<2 Start A
245
Z<2 Start B
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 55/158
246
Z<2 Start C
247
VTS Fast Block
248
VTS Slow Block
249
CTS Block
250
RTD 1 Alarm
251
RTD 2 Alarm
252
RTD 3 Alarm
253
RTD 4 Alarm
254
RTD 5 Alarm
255
RTD 6 Alarm
256
RTD 7 Alarm
257
RTD 8 Alarm
258
RTD 9 Alarm
259
RTD 10 Alarm
260
Lockout Alarm
261
CB Open 3 ph
262
CB Closed 3 ph
263
Field volts fail
264
All Poles Dead
265
Any Pole Dead
266
Pole Dead A
267
Pole Dead B
268
Pole Dead C
G33
Not Used
G34
G35
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
TRIGGER MODE
0
Single
Extended
Numeric Setting (as G2 but 2 registers)
Number of steps from minimum value
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 56/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
expressed as 2 register 32 bit unsigned int
G36
REAL NUMBERS
0
Polar
Rectangular
Disabled
G37
ENABLED / DISABLED
1
G38m
Enabled
COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (MODBUS)
9600 bits/s
19200 bits/s
38400 bits/s
G38v
COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (IEC 60870)

0
9600 bits/s
19200 bits/s
G38d
COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (DNP 3.0)

0
1200 bits/s
2400 bits/s
4800 bits/s
9600 bits/s
19200 bits/s
38400 bits/s
Odd
Even
None
A-N
B-N
C-N
A-B
G39
COMMUNICATIONS PARITY
G40
CHECK SYNC INPUT SELECTION
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 57/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
4
B-C
C-A
None
Undervoltage
Differential
Both
None
Timer
Frequency
Both
Disabled
DT
IEC S Inverse
IEC V Inverse
IEC E Inverse
UK LT Inverse
IEEE M Inverse
IEEE V Inverse
IEEE E Inverse
US Inverse
G41
CHECK SYNC VOLTAGE BLOCKING
G42
CHECK SYNC SLIP CONTROL
G43
IDMT CURVE TYPE
10
G44
US ST Inverse
DIRECTION
Non-Directional
Directional Fwd
Directional Rev
Block
G45
VTS BLOCK
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 58/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
1
G46
Non-Directional
POLARISATION
Zero Sequence
Neg Sequence
Phase-Phase
Phase-Neutral
Any Phase
Three Phase
G47
MEASURING MODE
G48
OPERATION MODE
G49
VN OR IN INPUT
0
Measured
Derived
G50
RTD SELECT
0x0001
RTD Input #1
0x0002
RTD Input #2
0x0004
RTD Input #3
0x0008
RTD Input #4
0x0010
RTD Input #5
0x0020
RTD Input #6
0x0040
RTD Input #7
0x0080
RTD Input #8
0x0100
RTD Input #9
0x0200
G51
RTD Input #10

FAULT LOCATION
Distance
Ohms
% of Line
3Ph + N Current
G52
DEFAULT DISPLAY
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 59/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
1
3 Ph-neutral Voltage
Power
Date and Time
Description
Plant Reference
Frequency
Access Level
No Operation
All Settings
Setting Group 1
Setting Group 2
Setting Group 3
Setting Group 4
G53
SELECT FACTORY DEFAULTS
G54
SELECT PRIMARY SECONDARY MEASUREMENTS

0
Primary
Secondary
No Operation
Trip
Close
G55
CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL
G56
PHASE MEASUREMENT REFERENCE

0
VA
VB
VC
IA
IB
IC
PSL Settings
G57
Data Transfer Domain
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 60/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
1
PSL Configuration
SEF/REF SELECTION
G58
P341
P342
SEF
SEF cos(PHI)
SEF cos(PHI)
SEF cos(PHI)
SEF sin (PHI)
SEF sin (PHI)
SEF sin (PHI)
Wattmetric
Wattmetric
Wattmetric
Hi Z REF
Hi Z REF
Hi Z REF
Lo Z REF
Lo Z REF
Lo Z REF+SEF
Lo Z REF+SEF
Lo Z REF+Wattmet
Lo Z REF+Wattmet
G59
SEF
P343
SEF
BATTERY STATUS
0
Dead
Healthy
G60
Time Delay Selection

0
DT
Inverse
Select via Menu
Select via Opto
No Operation
Save
Abort
G61
ACTIVE GROUP CONTROL
G62
SAVE AS
IN> Function Link
G63
P341
P342
P343
Bit 0
IN>1 VTS Block(0=Non-dir, 1=VTS blk)
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 1
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 2
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 3
Not Used
Not Used
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 61/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
Bit 4
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 5
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 6
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 7
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
ISEF> Func Link
G64
P341
P342
P343
Bit 0
ISEF>1 VTS Block(0=Non-dir,1=Block)
Bit 1
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 2
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 3
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 4
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 5
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 6
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Bit 7
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
G65
F< Function Link

Bit 0
F<1 Poledead Blk
Bit 1
F<2 Poledead Blk
Bit 2
F<3 Poledead Blk
Bit 3
F<4 Poledead Blk
Bit 4
Not Used
Bit 5
Not Used
Bit 6
Not Used
Bit 7
Not Used
G66
DISTURBANCE RECORDER DIGITAL CHANNEL TRIGGER

0
No Trigger
Trigger L/H
Trigger H/L
Single
G67
THERMAL OVERLOAD
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 62/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
1
G68
Dual
CB Fail Reset Options
I< Only
CB Open & I<
Prot Reset & I<
G69
VTS RESET MODE

0
Manual
Auto
Opto set
Auto
User Set
Pulse Set
Courier
IEC870-5-103
Modbus
DNP 3.0
G70
AUTORECLOSE MODE
G71
PROTOCOL
G72
START DEAD TIME

0
Protection Reset
CB Trips
On Prot Start
No Operation
User Interface
Select NonAuto
Enabled
G73
AUTORECLOSE RECLAIM TIME EXTENSION
G74
RESET LOCKOUT
G75
Auto-Reclose after Manual Close
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 63/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
1
G76
Inhibited
TRANSFER MODE
Prepare Rx
Complete Rx
Prepare Tx
Complete Tx
Rx Prepared
Tx Prepared
OK
Error
G77
Auto-Reclose
0
Out of Service
In Service
No Operation
Auto
Non-auto
Disabled
Basic
Complete
Invisible
Visible
User Interface
CB Close
No Block
G78
Autoreclose Telecontrol commands
G79
Custom Settings
G80
Visible/Invisible
G81
Reset Lockout by
G82
Autoreclose Protection blocking
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 64/158
1
G83
G84
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
Block Inst Prot
Autoreclose Status
0
Auto Mode
Non-auto Mode
Live Line
Started Elements (1)
Modbus value+bit pos

P341
0x0000,0x0001
General Start
0x0000,0x0002
Start Power1
0x0000,0x0004
Start Power2
P342
P343
0x0000,0x0008
Start FFail1
Start FFail1
0x0000,0x0010
Start FFail2
Start FFail2
0x0000,0x0020
Start V Dep O/C
Start V Dep O/C
0x0000,0x0040
Start I>1
Start I>1
Start I>1
0x0000,0x0080
Start I>2
Start I>2
Start I>2
0x0000,0x0100
Start I>3
0x0000,0x0200
Start I>4
0x0000,0x0400
Start IN>1
Start IN>1
Start IN>1
0x0000,0x0800
Start IN>2
Start IN>2
Start IN>2
0x0000,0x1000
Start IN>3
0x0000,0x2000
Start IN>4
0x0000,0x4000
Start ISEF>1
Start ISEF>1
Start ISEF>1
0x0000,0x8000
Start ISEF>2
0x0001,0x0000
Start ISEF>3
0x0002,0x0000
Start ISEF>4
0x0004,0x0000
Start NVD VN>1
0x0008,0x0000
Start NVD VN>2
0x0010,0x0000
Start 100% ST EF
0x0020,0x0000
Start Sen Power1
Start Sen Power1
Start Sen Power1
0x0040,0x0000
Start Sen Power2
Start Sen Power2
Start Sen Power2
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 65/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
0x0080,0x0000
Start z PSlip Z1
0x0100,0x0000
Start z PSlip Z2
0x0200,0x0000
Start Z<1
Start Z<1
Start Z<1
0x0400,0x0000
Start Z<1
Start Z<1
Start Z<1
0x0800,0x0000
0x1000,0x0000
0x2000,0x0000
0x4000,0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
G85
Tripped Elements (1)

0x0000,0x0001
P341
Any Trip
0x0000,0x0002
P342
P343
Any Trip
Any Trip
Trip Gen Diff
Trip Gen Diff
0x0000,0x0004
Trip Power1
Trip Power1
Trip Power1
0x0000,0x0008
Trip Power2
Trip Power2
Trip Power2
0x0000,0x0010
Trip FFail1
Trip FFail1
0x0000,0x0020
Trip FFail2
Trip FFail2
0x0000,0x0040
Trip NPS
Trip NPS
0x0000,0x0080
Trip V Dep O/C
Trip V Dep O/C
0x0000,0x0100
Trip I>1
Trip I>1
Trip I>1
0x0000,0x0200
Trip I>2
Trip I>2
Trip I>2
0x0000,0x0400
Trip I>3
0x0000,0x0800
Trip I>4
0x0000,0x1000
Trip IN>1
Trip IN>1
Trip IN>1
0x0000,0x2000
Trip IN>2
Trip IN>2
Trip IN>2
0x0000,0x4000
Trip IN>3
0x0000,0x8000
Trip IN>4
0x0001,0x0000
Trip ISEF>1
Trip ISEF>1
Trip ISEF>1
0x0002,0x0000
Trip ISEF>2
0x0004,0x0000
Trip ISEF>3
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 66/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
0x0008,0x0000
Trip ISEF>4
0x0010,0x0000
Trip IREF>
Trip IREF>
Trip IREF>
0x0020,0x0000
Trip NVD VN>1
Trip NVD VN>1
Trip NVD VN>1
0x0040,0x0000
Trip NVD VN>2
Trip NVD VN>2
Trip NVD VN>2
0x0080,0x0000
Trip 100% ST EF
0x0100,0x0000
Trip Dead Mach
0x0200,0x0000
Trip Sen Power1
Trip Sen Power1
0x0400,0x0000
Trip Sen Power2
Trip Sen Power2
Trip Sen Power1

Trip Sen Power2
0x0800,0x0000
Trip z PSlip Z1
0x1000,0x0000
G86
Trip z PSlip Z2
0x2000,0x0000
Trip Thermal O/L
Trip Thermal O/L
Trip Thermal O/L
0x4000,0x0000
Trip Z<1
Trip Z<1
Trip Z<1
0x8000,0x0000
Trip Z<2
Trip Z<2
Trip Z<2
Tripped Elements (2)
Bit Description
P341
P342
P343
0x0000,0x0001
Trip V<1
Trip V<1
0x0000,0x0002
Trip V<2
Trip V<2
Trip V<1
Trip V<2
0x0000,0x0004
Trip V< A/AB
Trip V< A/AB
Trip V< A/AB
0x0000,0x0008
Trip V< B/BC
Trip V< B/BC
Trip V< B/BC
0x0000,0x0010
Trip V< C/CA
Trip V< C/CA
Trip V< C/CA
0x0000,0x0020
Trip V>1
Trip V>1
Trip V>1
0x0000,0x0040
Trip V>2
Trip V>2
Trip V>2
0x0000,0x0080
Trip V> A/AB
Trip V> A/AB
Trip V> A/AB
0x0000,0x0100
Trip V> B/BC
Trip V> B/BC
Trip V> B/BC
0x0000,0x0200
Trip V> C/CA
Trip V> C/CA
Trip V> C/CA
0x0000,0x0400
Trip F<1
Trip F<1
Trip F<1
0x0000,0x0800
Trip F<2
Trip F<2
Trip F<2
0x0000,0x1000
Trip F<3
Trip F<3
Trip F<3
0x0000,0x2000
Trip F<4
Trip F<4
Trip F<4
0x0000,0x4000
Trip F>1
Trip F>1
Trip F>1
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 67/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
0x0000,0x8000
Trip F>2
Trip F>2
Trip F>2
Trip V/Hz
Trip V/Hz
0x0008,0x0000
Trip RTD 1
Trip RTD 1
0x0010,0x0000
Trip RTD 2
Trip RTD 2
0x0020,0x0000
Trip RTD 3
Trip RTD 3
0x0040,0x0000
Trip RTD 4
Trip RTD 4
0x0080,0x0000
Trip RTD 5
Trip RTD 5
0x0100,0x0000
Trip RTD 6
Trip RTD 6
0x0200,0x0000
Trip RTD 7
Trip RTD 7
0x0400,0x0000
Trip RTD 8
Trip RTD 8
0x0800,0x0000
Trip RTD 9
Trip RTD 9
0x1000,0x0000
Trip RTD 10
Trip RTD 10
0x0001,0x0000
0x0002,0x0000
Trip df/dt
0x0004,0x0000
Trip V Shift
0x2000,0x0000
0x4000,0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
G87
Bit Description
Fault Alarms

0x0000,0x0001
CB Fail 1
CB Fail 1
CB Fail 1
0x0000,0x0002
CB Fail 2
CB Fail 2
CB Fail 2
0x0000,0x0004
VTS
VTS
VTS
0x0000,0x0008
CTS
CTS
CTS
0x0000,0x0010
Alarm FFail
Alarm FFail
0x0000,0x0020
Alarm NPS
Alarm NPS
0x0000,0x0040
Alarm V/Hz
Alarm V/Hz
0x0000,0x0080
Alarm RTD 1
Alarm RTD 1
0x0000,0x0100
Alarm RTD 2
Alarm RTD 2
0x0000,0x0200
Alarm RTD 3
Alarm RTD 3
0x0000,0x0400
Alarm RTD 4
Alarm RTD 4
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 68/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
0x0000,0x0800
Alarm RTD 5
Alarm RTD 5
0x0000,0x1000
Alarm RTD 6
Alarm RTD 6
0x0000,0x2000
Alarm RTD 7
Alarm RTD 7
0x0000,0x4000
Alarm RTD 8
Alarm RTD 8
0x0000,0x8000
Alarm RTD 9
Alarm RTD 9
0x0001,0x0000
Alarm RTD 10
Alarm RTD 10
Alarm Thermal
Alarm Thermal
0x0002,0x0000
Alarm Thermal
0x0004,0x0000
0x0008,0x0000
0x0010,0x0000
0x0020,0x0000
0x0040,0x0000
0x0080,0x0000
0x0100,0x0000
0x0200,0x0000
0x0400,0x0000
0x0800,0x0000
0x1000,0x0000
0x2000,0x0000
0x4000,0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
G88
Alarms
0
Alarm Disabled
Alarm Enabled
Line
Bus
Group 1
Group 2
G89
Main VT Location
G90
Group Selection
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 69/158
Group 3
Group 4
Allow Tripping
Block Tripping
G91
A/R Protection Blocking
G92
Lockout
0
No Lockout
Lockout
No Operation
Apply Test
Remove Test
No Operation
Apply Test
G93
Commission Test
G94
Commission Test
G95
G96
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
System Function Links

Bit 0
Trip led self reset (1 = enable self reset)
Bit 1
Not Used
Bit 2
Not Used
Bit 3
Not used
Bit 4
Not Used
Bit 5
Not Used
Bit 6
Not Used
Bit 7
Not Used
Indexed Strings
Bit Position
P341
P342
Battery Fail
P343
Battery Fail
Battery Fail
Field Volt Fail
Field Volt Fail
Field Volt Fail
SG-opto Invalid
SG-opto Invalid
SG-opto Invalid
Prot'n Disabled
Prot'n Disabled
Prot'n Disabled
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 70/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
4
VT Fail Alarm
VT Fail Alarm
VT Fail Alarm
CTS Fail Alarm
CTS Fail Alarm
CTS Fail Alarm
CB Fail
CB Fail
CB Fail
I^ Maint Alarm
I^ Maint Alarm
I^ Maint Alarm
I^ Maint Lockout
I^ Maint Lockout
I^ Maint Lockout
CB OPs Maint
CB OPs Maint
CB OPs Maint
10
CB OPs Lock
CB OPs Lock
CB OPs Lock
11
CB Time Maint
CB Time Maint
CB Time Maint
12
CB Time Lockout
CB Time Lockout
CB Time Lockout
13
Fault Freq Lock
Fault Freq Lock
Fault Freq Lock
14
CB Status Alarm
CB Status Alarm
CB Status Alarm
15
CB Trip Fail
16
CB Close Fail
17
Man CB Unhealthy
18
F out of Range
NPS Alarm
NPS Alarm
19
Thermal Alarm
Thermal Alarm
Thermal Alarm
20
V/Hz Alarm
V/Hz Alarm
21
Field Fail Alarm
Field Fail Alarm
22
RTD Thermal Alm
RTD Thermal Alm
23
RTD Open Cct
RTD Open Cct
24
RTD short Cct
RTD short Cct
25
RTD Data Error
RTD Data Error
26
RTD Board Fail
RTD Board Fail

Freq Prot Alm
27
Freq Prot Alm
Freq Prot Alm
28
Voltage Prot Alm
Voltage Prot Alm
Voltage Prot Alm
29
User Alarm 1
User Alarm 1
User Alarm 1
30
User Alarm 2
User Alarm 2
User Alarm 2
User Alarm 3
User Alarm 3
User Alarm 3
31
G97
Distance Unit
0
Kilometres
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 71/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
1
G98
Miles
Copy to
No Operation
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Disabled
Local
Remote
Local+Remote
Opto
Opto+local
Opto+Remote
G99
CB Control
7
G101
Opto+Rem+local
Gen Diff Function Select
Disabled
Percentage Bias
2
G102
High Impedance
Power Function Select
Disabled
Reverse
Low Forward
3
G103
Over
System Backup Function Select
Disabled
Underimpedance
Volt controlled
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 72/158
3
G104
Volt restrained
System Backup Vector Rotation
0
1
G105
G107
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
None
Delta-Star
DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT SELECTION
Disabled
DT
Started Elements (2)

P341
P342
P343
0x0000,0x0001
Start V<1
Start V<1
Start V<1
0x0000,0x0002
Start V<2
Start V<2
Start V<2
0x0000,0x0004
Start V< A/AB
Start V< A/AB
Start V< A/AB
0x0000,0x0008
Start V< B/BC
Start V< B/BC
Start V< B/BC
0x0000,0x0010
Start V< C/CA
Start V< C/CA
Start V< C/CA
0x0000,0x0020
Start V>1
Start V>1
Start V>1
0x0000,0x0040
Start V>2
Start V>2
Start V>2
0x0000,0x0080
Start V> A/AB
Start V> A/AB
Start V> A/AB
0x0000,0x0100
Start V> B/BC
Start V> B/BC
Start V> B/BC
0x0000,0x0200
Start V> C/CA
Start V> C/CA
Start V> C/CA
0x0000,0x0400
Start F<1
Start F<1
Start F<1
0x0000,0x0800
Start F<2
Start F<2
Start F<2
0x0000,0x1000
Start F<3
Start F<3
Start F<3
0x0000,0x2000
Start F<4
Start F<4
Start F<4
0x0000,0x4000
Start F>1
Start F>1
Start F>1
0x0000,0x8000
Start F>2
Start F>2
Start F>2
Start V/Hz
Start V/Hz
0x0001,0x0000
0x0002,0x0000
0x0004,0x0000
0x0008,0x0000
0x0010,0x0000
Start df/dt
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 73/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
0x0020,0x0000
0x0040,0x0000
0x0080,0x0000
0x0100,0x0000
0x0200,0x0000
0x0400,0x0000
0x0800,0x0000
0x1000,0x0000
0x2000,0x0000
0x4000,0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
G108
Bit position
RTD 1 label
RTD 2 label
RTD 3 label
RTD 4 label
RTD 5 label
RTD 6 label
RTD 7 label
RTD 8 label
RTD 9 label
9
G109
RTD Open Circuit Flags
Bit position
RTD 10 label
RTD Short Circuit Flags
RTD 1 label
RTD 2 label
RTD 3 label
RTD 4 label
RTD 5 label
RTD 6 label
RTD 7 label
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 74/158
RTD 8 label
RTD 9 label
9
G110
Bit position
RTD 10 label
RTD Data Error
RTD 1 label
RTD 2 label
RTD 3 label
RTD 4 label
RTD 5 label
RTD 6 label
RTD 7 label
RTD 8 label
RTD 9 label
RTD 10 label
G111
IDMT CURVE TYPE

0
DT
IEC S Inverse
IEC V Inverse
IEC E Inverse
UK LT Inverse
IEEE M Inverse
IEEE V Inverse
IEEE E Inverse
US Inverse
US ST Inverse
Disabled
VN3H< Enabled
VN3H> Enabled
G112
G113
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
100% Stator Earth Fault Protection
Pole Slipping Operating Mode
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 75/158
Generating
Motoring
Both
Disabled
SEF/REF
G114
SEF/REF/Spower Selection
2
G118
Sensitive Power
CB Control Logic Input Assignments
None
52A
52B
Both 52A and 52B
G119
G125
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
TEST MODE
0
Disabled
Test Mode
Blocked
2 REGISTERS
IEEE FLOATING POINT FORMAT

Bit 31 = sign
Bits 30-23 = e7 - e0
Implicit 1.
Bits 22-0 = f22 - f0
G200
Global Opto Nominal Voltage Selection

0
24-27V
30-34V
48-54V
110-125V
220-250V
5
G201
Custom
Single Opto Nominal Voltage Selection
24-27V
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 76/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
1
30-34V
48-54V
110-125V
220-250V
G202
Control Input Status (2 REGISTERS)

(2nd Reg, 1st Reg)
0x0000,0x0001
Control Input 1 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0000,0x0002
0x0000,0x0004
0x0000,0x0008
0x0000,0x0010
0x0000,0x0020
0x0000,0x0040
0x0000,0x0080
0x0000,0x0100
0x0000,0x0200
0x0000,0x0400
0x0000,0x0800
0x0000,0x1000
0x0000,0x2000
0x0000,0x4000
0x0000,0x8000
0x0001,0x0000
0x0002,0x0000
0x0004,0x0000
0x0008,0x0000
0x0010,0x0000
0x0020,0x0000
0x0040,0x0000
0x0080,0x0000
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
TYPE
Page 77/158
DESCRIPTION
VALUE/BIT MASK
0x0100,0x0000
0x0200,0x0000
0x0400,0x0000
0x0800,0x0000
0x1000,0x0000
0x2000,0x0000
0x4000,0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
G203

Virtual Input
No Operation
Set
Reset
Disabled
Monitor Blocking
Command Blocking
G210
CS103 Blocking
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 78/158
IEC60870-5-103: Device Profile

Vendor Name:
Alstom T&D Ltd., Protection & Control
Device Name:
P340 Generator Protection
Models Covered:
P341****3**05**
P342****3**05**
P343****3**05**
Compatibility
Level:
Physical Layer
Electrical Interface:
EIA RS-485
Number of Loads:
1 for one protection equipment
Optical Interface
(Order Option)
Plastic fibre BFOC/2.5 type connector
Transmission Speed: 9600 or 19200bps (User Setting)

Application Layer
Common Address of ASDU = Link Address
Compatible Range Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
Model Number
GI
COT
FUN
INF
NO.
10
255
End of General Interrogration
255
224
Reset FCB
224
Reset CU
224
Start/Restart
224
Power On
ASDU TYPE
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
System Functions
Note: Indentification message in ASDU 5: "ALSTOM P" + 16bit model + 8bit major version + 1 character minor version e.g. "ALSTOM P" + 343 + 05 + 'C'
Status Indications
1
1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224
16
Auto-recloser active
1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224
17
Tele-protection active
1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224
18
Protection active
1,7,11,12,20, 21
224
19
LED Reset
9,11
224
20
Monitor direction blocked
9,11
224
21
Test mode
Protection Disabled
9,11
224
22
Local parameter setting
1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224
23
Characteristic 1
PG1 Changed
1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224
24
Characteristic 2
PG2 Changed
1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224
25
Characteristic 3
PG3 Changed
1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224
26
Characteristic 4
PG4 Changed
Reset Indications
391
291
1,7,9,11
224
27
Auxillary input 1
Opto Input 1
32
1,7,9,11
224
28
Auxillary input 2
Opto Input 2
33
1,7,9,11
224
29
Auxillary input 3
Opto Input 3
34
1,7,9,11
224
30
Auxillary input 4
Opto Input 4
35
1,7,9
224
32
Measurand supervision I
1,7,9
224
33
Measurand supervision V
1,7,9
224
35
Phase sequence supervision
1,7,9
224
36
Trip circuit supervision
1,7,9
224
37
I>> back-up supervision
1,7,9
224
38
VT fuse failure
VTS Indication
292
1,7,9
224
39
Teleprotection disturbed
1,7,9
224
46
Group warning
1,7,9
224
47
Group alarm
1,7,9
224
48
Earth Fault L1
1,7,9
224
49
Earth Fault L2
1,7,9
224
50
Earth Fault L3
Supervision Indications
Earth Fault Indications
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 79/158
GI
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN
INF
NO.
1,7,9
224
51
Earth Fault Fwd
1,7,9
224
52
Earth Fault Rev
1,7,9
224
64
Start /pickup L1
1,7,9
224
65
Start /pickup L2
1,7,9
224
66
1,7,9
224
67
1,7
224
68
1,7
224
1,7
224
1,7
1,7
4
2
Description
Model Number
4
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
1st Stage O/C Start A
598
1st Stage O/C Start B
599
Start /pickup L3
1st Stage O/C Start C
600
Start /pickup N
1st Stage EF Start
613
General Trip
Any Trip
162
69
Trip L1
1st Stage O/C Trip A
478
70
Trip L2
1st Stage O/C Trip B
479
224
71
Trip L3
1st Stage O/C Trip C
480
224
72
Trip I>> (back up)
1,7
224
73
Fault Location in ohms
1,7
224
74
Fault forward
1,7
224
75
Fault reverse
1,7
224
76
Teleprotection signal sent
1,7
224
77
Teleprotection signal received
1,7
224
78
Zone 1
1,7
224
79
Zone 2
1,7
224
80
Zone 3
1,7
224
81
Zone 4
1,7
224
82
Zone 5
1,7
224
83
Zone 6
1,7,9
224
84
General Start
Any Start
576
1,7
224
85
Breaker Failure
Breaker Fail Any Trip
294
1,7
224
86
Trip measuring system L1
1,7
224
87
1,7
224
88
1,7
224
89
Trip measuring system E
1,7
224
90
Trip I>
1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph
477
1,7
224
91
Trip I>>
2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph
481
1,7
224
92
Trip IN>
1st Stage EF Trip
442
1,7
224
93
Trip IN>>
2nd Stage EF Trip
443
1,7
224
128 CB 'on' by A/R
1,7
224
129 CB 'on' by long time A/R
1,7,9
224
130 AR blocked
3.1
2,7
224
144 Measurand I
3.2
2,7
224
145 Measurands I,V
3.3
2,7
224
146 Measurands I,V,P,Q
3.4
2,7
224
147 Measurands IN,VEN
2,7
224
148
Note unavailable measurands sent as invalid
10
42,43
224
240 Read Headings
10
42,43
224
241
10
42,43
224
243 Read directory of entry
10
1,2,7,9,11,12,
42,43
224
244 Real attribute of entry
10
10
224
245 End of GGI
10
41,44
224
249 Write entry with confirm
10
40,41
224
250 Write entry with execute
10
40
224
251 Write entry aborted
Fault Indications
Auto-Reclose Indications
Measurands
Measurands
IL1,2,3,VL1,2,3,P,Q,f
Generic Functions
Read attributes of all entries of a
group
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
ASDU TYPE
Page 80/158
COT
FUN
INF
NO.
Description
GI
Model Number
1
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
Compatible Range Information Numbers in Control Direction

Model Number
GI
COT
FUN
INF
NO.
255
Init General Interrogation
255
20
20
224
16
Auto-recloser on/off
20
20
224
17
Teleprotection on/off
20
20
224
18
Protection on/off
20
20
224
19
LED Reset
Reset Indications and Latches
20
20
224
23
Activate characteristic 1
Activate Setting Group 1
20
20
224
24
20
20
224
25
20
20
224
26
21
42
224
240
Read headings of all defined

groups
21
42
224
241
Read single attribute of all entries

of a group
21
42
224
243 Read directory of single entry
21
42
224
244 Read attribute of sngle entry
21
224
245
10
40
224
248 Write entry
10
40
224
249 Write with confirm
10
40
224
250 Write with execute
10
40
224
251 Write entry abort
ASDU TYPE
Description
System Functions
General Commands
Autoreclose in Service
Generic Functions
Generic General Interrogation

(GGI)
Basic Application Functions

Test Mode
Blocking of monitor direction
Disturbance data
Generic services
Private data
Miscellaneous
Max. MVAL = times rated value

1.2
Measurands
2.4
Current L1
Current L2
Current L3
Voltage L1-E
Voltage L2-E
Voltage L3-E
Active Power P
Reactive Power Q
Frequency F
Voltage L1-L2
Private Range Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN NF NO
1,7,9
226
Contact 1
1,7,9
226
Contact 2
1,7,9
226
1,7,9
226
1,7,9
Description
Model Number
GI
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
Output Relay 1
Output Relay 2
Contact 3
Output Relay 3
Contact 4
Output Relay 4
226
Contact 5
Output Relay 5
1,7,9
226
Contact 6
Output Relay 6
1,7,9
226
Contact 7
Output Relay 7
1,7,9
226
Contact 8
Output Relay 8
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 81/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN
INF
NO.
1,7,9
226
Contact 9
1,7,9
226
Contact 10
1,7,9
226
10
1,7,9
226
1,7,9
226
1,7,9
Description
GI
Model Number
3
Output Relay 9
Output Relay 10
Contact 11
Output Relay 11
10
11
Contact 12
Output Relay 12
11
12
Contact 13
Output Relay 13
12
226
13
Contact 14
Output Relay 14
13
1,7,9
226
14
Contact 15
Output Relay 15
14
1,7,9
226
15
Contact 16
Output Relay 16
15
1,7,9
226
16
Contact 17
Output Relay 17
16
1,7,9
226
17
Contact 18
Output Relay 18
17
1,7,9
226
18
Contact 19
Output Relay 19
18
1,7,9
226
19
Contact 20
Output Relay 20
19
1,7,9
226
20
Contact 21
Output Relay 21
20
1,7,9
226
21
Contact 22
Output Relay 22
21
1,7,9
226
22
Contact 23
Output Relay 23
22
1,7,9
226
23
Contact 24
Output Relay 24
23
1,7,9
226
24
Contact 25
Output Relay 25
24
1,7,9
226
25
Contact 26
Output Relay 26
25
1,7,9
226
26
Contact 27
Output Relay 27
26
1,7,9
226
27
Contact 28
Output Relay 28
27
1,7,9
226
28
Contact 29
Output Relay 29
28
1,7,9
226
29
Contact 30
Output Relay 30
29
1,7,9
226
30
Contact 31
Output Relay 31
30
1,7,9
226
31
Contact 32
Output Relay 32
31
1,7,9,11
224
27
Opto 1
Opto Input 1
32
1,7,9,11
224
28
Opto 2
Opto Input 2
33
1,7,9,11
224
29
Opto 3
Opto Input 3
34
1,7,9,11
224
30
Opto 4
Opto Input 4
35
1,7,9,11
226
36
Opto 5
Opto Input 5
36
1,7,9,11
226
37
Opto 6
Opto Input 6
37
1,7,9,11
226
38
Opto 7
Opto Input 7
38
1,7,9,11
226
39
Opto 8
Opto Input 8
39
1,7,9,11
226
40
Opto 9
Opto Input 9
40
1,7,9,11
226
41
Opto 10
Opto Input 10
41
1,7,9,11
226
42
Opto 11
Opto Input 11
42
1,7,9,11
226
43
Opto 12
Opto Input 12
43
1,7,9,11
226
44
Opto 13
Opto Input 13
44
1,7,9,11
226
45
Opto 14
Opto Input 14
45
1,7,9,11
226
46
Opto 15
Opto Input 15
46
1,7,9,11
226
47
Opto 16
Opto Input 16
47
1,7,9,11
226
48
Opto 17
Opto Input 17
48
1,7,9,11
226
49
Opto 18
Opto Input 18
49
1,7,9,11
226
50
Opto 19
Opto Input 19
50
1,7,9,11
226
51
Opto 20
Opto Input 20
51
1,7,9,11
226
52
Opto 21
Opto Input 21
52
1,7,9,11
226
53
Opto 22
Opto Input 22
53
1,7,9,11
226
54
Opto 23
Opto Input 23
54
1,7,9,11
226
55
Opto 24
Opto Input 24
55
1,7,9,11
226
56
Opto 25
Opto Input 25
56
1,7,9,11
226
57
Opto 26
Opto Input 26
57
1,7,9,11
226
58
Opto 27
Opto Input 27
58
1,7,9,11
226
59
Opto 28
Opto Input 28
59
1,7,9,11
226
60
Opto 29
Opto Input 29
60
1,7,9,11
226
61
Opto 30
Opto Input 30
61
1,7,9,11
226
62
Opto 31
Opto Input 31
62
1,7,9,11
226
63
Opto 32
Opto Input 32
63
226
64
LED 1
Programmable LED 1
64
DDB Ordinal
Interpretation
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
ASDU TYPE
Page 82/158
COT
FUN
INF
NO.
226
65
226
66
226
Description
GI
Model Number
3
LED 2
Programmable LED 2
65
LED 3
Programmable LED 3
66
67
LED 4
Programmable LED 4
67
226
68
LED 5
Programmable LED 5
68
226
69
LED 6
Programmable LED 6
69
226
70
LED 7
Programmable LED 7
70
226
71
LED 8
Programmable LED 8
71
226
72
72
226
73
73
226
74
74
226
75
75
226
76
76
226
77
77
226
78
78
226
79
80
DDB Ordinal
226
Interpretation
79
LED Cond IN 1
Input to LED Output

Condition
80
81
226
81
LED Cond IN 2
Input to LED Output

Condition
226
82
LED Cond IN 3
Input to LED Output

Condition
82
226
83
LED Cond IN 4
Input to LED Output

Condition
83
226
84
LED Cond IN 5
Input to LED Output

Condition
84
226
85
LED Cond IN 6
Input to LED Output

Condition
85
226
86
LED Cond IN 7
Input to LED Output

Condition
86
226
87
LED Cond IN 8
Input to LED Output

Condition
87
226
88
88
226
89
89
226
90
90
226
91
91
226
92
92
226
93
93
226
94
94
226
95
95
226
96
96
226
97
97
226
98
98
226
99
99
226
100
100
226
101
101
226
102
102
226
103
103
226
104
104
226
105
105
226
106
106
226
107
107
226
108
108
226
109
109
226
110
110
226
111
111
226
112
112
226
113
113
226
114
114
226
115
115
226
116
116
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
ASDU TYPE
Page 83/158
COT
1,7
GI
Model Number
FUN
INF
NO.
226
117
117
226
118
118
226
119
119
226
120
120
226
121
121
226
122
122
226
123
123
226
124
124
226
125
125
226
126
126
226
127
127
226
128
128
226
129
129
226
130
130
226
131
131
226
132
132
226
133
133
226
134
134
226
135
135
226
136
136
226
137
137
226
138
138
226
139
139
226
140
140
226
141
141
226
142
142
226
143
143
226
144
144
226
145
145
226
146
146
226
147
147
226
148
148
226
149
149
226
150
150
226
151
151
226
152
152
226
153
153
226
154
154
226
155
155
226
156
156
226
157
157
226
158
158
226
159
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
159
226
160 Relay Cond 1
Input to Relay Output

Condition
226
161 Relay Cond 2

Condition
161
224
68
Any Trip

Condition
162
226
163 Relay Cond 4

Condition
163
226
164 Relay Cond 5

Condition
164
165
160
226
165 Relay Cond 6

Condition
226
166 Relay Cond 7

Condition
166
226
167 Relay Cond 8

Condition
167
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
ASDU TYPE
Page 84/158
COT
FUN
INF
NO.
226
Description
GI
Model Number
3
168 Relay Cond 9

Condition
168
226
169 Relay Cond 10

Condition
169
226
170 Relay Cond 11

Condition
170
226
171 Relay Cond 12

Condition
171
226
172 Relay Cond 13

Condition
172
226
173 Relay Cond 14

Condition
173
226
174 Relay Cond 15

Condition
174
226
175 Relay Cond 16

Condition
175
226
176 Relay Cond 17

Condition
176
226
177 Relay Cond 18

Condition
177
226
178 Relay Cond 19

Condition
178
226
179 Relay Cond 20

Condition
179

Condition
180
181
180 Relay Cond 21
DDB Ordinal
226
Interpretation
226
181 Relay Cond 22

Condition
226
182 Relay Cond 23

Condition
182
226
183 Relay Cond 24

Condition
183
226
184 Relay Cond 25

Condition
184
226
185 Relay Cond 26

Condition
185
226
186 Relay Cond 27

Condition
186
226
187 Relay Cond 28

Condition
187
226
188 Relay Cond 29

Condition
188
226
189 Relay Cond 30

Condition
189
226
190 Relay Cond 31

Condition
190
226
191 Relay Cond 32

Condition
191
226
192
192
226
193
193
226
194
194
226
195
195
226
196
196
226
197
197
226
198
198
226
199
199
226
200
200
226
201
201
226
202
202
226
203
203
226
204
204
226
205
205
226
206
206
226
207
207
226
208
208
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
ASDU TYPE
Page 85/158
COT
GI
Model Number
FUN
INF
NO.
226
209
209
226
210
210
226
211
211
226
212
212
226
213
213
226
214
214
226
215
215
226
216
216
226
217
217
226
218
218
226
219
219
226
220
220
226
221
221
226
222
222
226
223
226
224 Timer in 1
Input to Auxiliary Timer 1
224
226
225 Timer in 2
225
226
226 Timer in 3
226
226
227 Timer in 4
227
226
228 Timer in 5
228
226
229 Timer in 6
229
226
230 Timer in 7
230
226
231 Timer in 8
226
232
232
226
233
233
226
234
234
226
235
235
226
236
236
226
237
237
226
238
238
226
239
239
226
240
240
226
241
241
226
242
242
226
243
243
226
244
244
226
245
245
226
246
246
226
247
247
226
248
248
226
249
249
226
250
250
226
251
251
226
252
252
226
253
253
226
254
254
226
255
227
Timer out 1
Output from Auxiliary Timer 1
256
227
Timer out 2
257
227
Timer out 3
258
227
Timer out 4
259
227
Timer out 5
260
227
Timer out 6
261
227
Timer out 7
262
227
Timer out 8
227
264
227
265
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
223
231
255
263
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
ASDU TYPE
Page 86/158
COT
GI
Model Number
FUN
INF
NO.
227
10
266
227
11
267
227
12
268
227
13
269
227
14
270
227
15
271
227
16
272
227
17
273
227
18
274
227
19
275
227
20
276
227
21
277
227
22
278
227
23
279
227
24
280
227
25
281
227
26
282
227
27
283
227
28
284
227
29
285
227
30
286
227
31
227
32
227
33
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
287
Fault REC TRIG
Trigger for Fault Recorder
288
289
1,7,9
227
34
SG-opto Invalid
Setting Group via opto invalid

Alarm
9,11
224
21
Prot'n Disabled
Test Mode Enabled Alarm
291
1,7,9
224
38
VT Fail Alarm
VTS Indication
292
1,7,9
227
37
CT Fail Alarm
CTS Indication
293
1,7
224
85
CB Fail Alarm
294
1,7,9
227
39
I^ Maint Alarm
Broken Current Maintenance

Alarm
295
1,7,9
227
40
I^ Lockout Alarm
Broken Current Lockout

Alarm
296
1,7,9
227
41
CB Ops Maint
No of CB Ops Maintenance
Alarm
297
298
290
1,7,9
227
42
CB Ops Lockout
No of CB Ops Maintenance
Lockout
1,7,9
227
43
CB Op Time Maint
Excessive CB Op Time
Maintenance Alarm
299
1,7,9
227
44
CB Op Time Lock
Excessive CB Op Time
Lockout Alarm
300
1,7,9
227
45
Fault Freq Lock
Excessive Fault Frequency

Lockout Alarm
301
1,7,9
227
46
CB Status Alarm
CB Status Alarm (Invalid CB

auxilliary contacts)
302
1,7
227
47
Man CB Trip Fail
CB Failed to Trip Alarm
303
1,7
227
48
Man CB Cls Fail
CB Failed to Close Alarm
304
1,7
227
49
Man CB Unhealthy
CB Unhealthy on Control
Close Alarm
305
1,7,9
227
50
F out of Range
Frequency out of range
306
Negative Phase Sequence

Alarm
306
307
1,7,9
227
50
NPS Alarm
1,7,9
227
51
Thermal Alarm
Thermal Overload Alarm
1,7,9
227
52
V/Hz Alarm
Volts Per Hz Alarm
308
1,7,9
227
53
Field Fail Alarm
Field failure Alarm
309
1,7,9
227
54
RTD Thermal Alm
RTD thermal Alarm
310
1,7,9
227
55
RTD Open Cct
RTD open circuit failure
311
1,7,9
227
56
RTD short Cct
RTD short circuit failure
312
1,7,9
227
57
RTD Data Error
RTD data inconsistency error
313
1,7,9
227
58
RTD Board Fail
RTD Board failure
314
1,7,9
227
59
Freq Prot Alm
Frequency protection alarm
315
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 87/158
GI
Model Number
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN
INF
NO.
1,7,9
227
60
Voltage Prot Alm
1,7,9
227
61
User Alarm 1
1,7,9
227
62
1,7,9
227
63
227
64
320
227
65
321
227
66
322
227
67
323
227
68
324
227
69
325
227
70
326
227
71
327
227
72
328
227
73
329
227
74
330
227
75
331
227
76
332
227
77
333
227
78
334
227
79
335
227
80
336
227
81
337
227
82
338
227
83
339
227
84
340
227
85
341
227
86
342
227
87
343
227
88
344
227
89
345
227
90
346
227
91
347
227
92
348
227
93
349
227
94
350
227
95
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
Voltage protection alarm
316
User settable alarm 1
317
User Alarm 2
318
User Alarm 3
319
351
227
96
VDepOC Timer Blk
Block Voltage Dependent time

delay
227
97
UnderZ Timer Blk
Block Under Impedance time

delay
353
227
98
I>1 Timer Block
Block Phase Overcurrent

Stage 1 time delay
354
227
99
I>2 Timer Block

Stage 2 time delay
355
227
100 I>3 Timer Block

Stage 3 time delay
356
227
101 I>4 Timer Block

Stage 4 time delay
357
227
102 IN>1 Timer Blk
Block Earth Fault Stage 1 time

delay
358
227
103 IN>2 Timer Blk

delay
359
227
104 IN>3 Timer Blk

delay
360
227
105 IN>4 Timer Blk

delay
361
227
106 ISEF>1 Timer Blk
Block SEF Stage 1 time delay
362
227
363
227
364
227
365
227
110 Init Trip CB
Logic Input Trip CB
366
352
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
ASDU TYPE
Page 88/158
COT
FUN
INF
NO.
227
111 Init Close CB
Description
GI
Model Number
1
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
Logic Input Close CB
367
368
227
112 VN>1 Timer Blk
Block Residual Overvoltage

Stage 1 time delay
227
113 VN>2 Timer Blk
Block Residual Overvoltage

Stage 2 time delay
369
227
114 V<1 Timer Block
Block Phase Undervoltage

Stage 1 time delay
370
227
115 V<2 Timer Block
Block Phase Undervoltage

Stage 2 time delay
371
227
116 V>1 Timer Block
Block Phase Overvoltage

Stage 1 time delay
372
227
117 V>2 Timer Block
Block Phase Overvoltage

Stage 2 time delay
373
227
118 F<1 timer Block
Block Underfrequency Stage 1

Timer
374
227
119 F<2 Timer Block

Timer
375
227
120 F<3 Timer Block

Timer
376
227
121 F<4 Timer Block

Timer
377
227
122 F>1 Timer Block
Block Overfrequency Stage 1

Timer
378
379
227
123 F>2 Timer Block
Block Overfrequency Stage 2

Timer
227
124 Ext. Trip 3ph
External Trip 3ph
380
227
125 CB Aux 3ph(52-A)
52-A (3 phase)
381
227
126 CB Aux 3ph(52-B)
52-B (3 phase)
382
227
127 CB Healthy
CB Healthy
383
227
128 MCB/VTS
MCB/VTS opto
384
385
227
129 Reset Close Dly
Reset Manual CB Close Time

Delay
227
130 Reset Relays/LED
Reset Latched Relays & LEDs
386
227
131 Reset Lockout
Reset Lockout Opto Input
387
227
132 Reset All Values
Reset CB Maintenance Values
388
227
133 Reset I2 Thermal
Reset NPS Thermal State
389
227
134 Reset ThermalO/L
Reset Overload Thermal State
390
IEC60870-5-103 Monitor
Blocking
391
IEC60870-5-103 Command
Blocking
392
9, 11
224
20
Monitor Blocked
9, 11
227
136 Command Blocked
227
137
393
227
138
394
227
139
395
227
140
396
227
141
397
227
142
398
227
143
399
227
144
400
227
145
401
227
146
402
227
147
403
227
148
404
227
149
405
227
150
406
227
151
407
227
152
408
227
153
409
227
154
410
227
155
411
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
ASDU TYPE
Page 89/158
COT
GI
Model Number
FUN
INF
NO.
227
156
412
227
157
413
227
158
414
227
159 Test Mode
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
Input To Initiate Test Mode
415
1,7
227
160 100% ST EF Trip
100% Stator Earth Fault Trip
416
1,7
227
161 DeadMachine Trip
Dead machine protection Trip
417
1,7
227
162 Gen Diff Trip
Generator Differential trip

3ph
418
1,7
227
163 Gen Diff Trip A
Generator Differential Trip A
419
1,7
227
164 Gen Diff Trip B
Generator Differential Trip B
420
1,7
227
165 Gen Diff Trip C
Generator Differential Trip C
421
1,7
227
166 Field Fail1 Trip
Field Failure Stage 1 Trip
422
1,7
227
167 Field Fail2 Trip
423
1,7
227
168 NPS Trip
Negative Phase Sequence Trip
424
Voltage Dependent O/C Trip

3ph
425
426
1,7
227
169 V Dep OC Trip
1,7
227
170 V Dep OC Trip A

A
1,7
227
171 V Dep OC Trip B

B
427
1,7
227
172 V Dep OC Trip C

C
428
1,7
227
173 V/Hz Trip
Volts per Hz Trip
429
1,7
227
174 RTD 1 Trip
RTD 1 TRIP
430
1,7
227
175 RTD 2 Trip
RTD 2 TRIP
431
1,7
227
176 RTD 3 Trip
RTD 3 TRIP
432
1,7
227
177 RTD 4 Trip
RTD 4 TRIP
433
1,7
227
178 RTD 5 Trip
RTD 5 TRIP
434
1,7
227
179 RTD 6 Trip
RTD 6 TRIP
435
1,7
227
180 RTD 7 Trip
RTD 7 TRIP
436
1,7
227
181 RTD 8 Trip
RTD 8 TRIP
437
1,7
227
182 RTD 9 Trip
RTD 9 TRIP
438
1,7
227
183 RTD 10 Trip
RTD 10 TRIP
439
1,7
227
184 Any RTD Trip
1,7
227
184 df/dt Trip
1,7
227
185 V Shift Trip
1,7
224
92
IN>1 Trip
1,7
224
93
IN>2 Trip
2nd Stage EF Trip
443
1,7
227
188 IN>3 Trip
3rd Stage EF Trip
444
1,7
227
189 IN>4 Trip
4th Stage EF Trip
445
1,7
227
190 IREF> Trip
REF Trip
446
1,7
227
191 ISEF>1 Trip
1st Stage SEF Trip
447
1,7
227
192 ISEF>2 Trip
2nd Stage SEF Trip
448
1,7
227
193 ISEF>3 Trip
3rd Stage SEF Trip
449
1,7
227
194 ISEF>4 Trip
4th Stage SEF Trip
450
1,7
227
195 VN>1 Trip
1st Stage Residual O/V Trip
451
1,7
227
196 VN>2 Trip
2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip
452
1,7
227
197 V<1 Trip
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph
453
1,7
227
198 V<1 Trip A/AB
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip

A/AB
454
1,7
227
199 V<1 Trip B/BC

B/BC
455
456
457
Any RTD Trip
440

Trip
440
Voltage vector shift trip
441
1st Stage EF Trip
442
1,7
227
200 V<1 Trip C/CA

C/CA
1,7
227
201 V<2 Trip
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip

3ph
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 90/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN
INF
NO.
1,7
227
1,7
2
2
Description
GI
Model Number
4
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
202 V<2 Trip A/AB

A/AB
458
227
203 V<2 Trip B/BC

B/BC
459
1,7
227
204 V<2 Trip C/CA

C/CA
460
1,7
227
205 V>1 Trip
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph
461
462
1,7
227
206 V>1 Trip A/AB
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip

A/AB
1,7
227
207 V>1 Trip B/BC

B/BC
463
1,7
227
208 V>1 Trip C/CA

C/CA
464
1,7
227
209 V>2 Trip
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip

3ph
465
1,7
227
210 V>2 Trip A/AB

A/AB
466
1,7
227
211 V>2 Trip B/BC

B/BC
467
1,7
227
212 V>2 Trip C/CA

C/CA
468
1,7
227
213 F<1 Trip
Under frequency Stage 1 trip
469
1,7
227
214 F<2 Trip
470
1,7
227
215 F<3 Trip
471
1,7
227
216 F<4 Trip
472
1,7
227
217 F>1 Trip
Over frequency Stage 1 Trip
473
1,7
227
218 F>2 Trip
474
1,7
227
219 Power1 Trip
Power stage 1 trip
475
1,7
227
220 Power2 Trip
Power stage 2 trip
476
1,7
224
90
I>1 Trip
477
1,7
224
69
I>1 Trip A
478
1,7
224
70
I>1 Trip B
479
1,7
224
71
I>1 Trip C
480
1,7
224
91
I>2 Trip
481
1,7
227
226 I>2 Trip A
2nd Stage O/C Trip A
482
1,7
227
227 I>2 Trip B
2nd Stage O/C Trip B
483
1,7
227
228 I>2 Trip C
2nd Stage O/C Trip C
484
1,7
227
229 I>3 Trip
3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph
485
1,7
227
230 I>3 Trip A
3rd Stage O/C Trip A
486
1,7
227
231 I>3 Trip B
3rd Stage O/C Trip B
487
1,7
227
232 I>3 Trip C
3rd Stage O/C Trip C
488
1,7
227
233 I>4 Trip
4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph
489
1,7
227
234 I>4 Trip A
4th Stage O/C Trip A
490
1,7
227
235 I>4 Trip B
4th Stage O/C Trip B
491
1,7
227
236 I>4 Trip C
1,7
227
237 Bfail1 Trip 3ph
1,7
227
238 Bfail2 Trip 3ph
4th Stage O/C Trip C
492
tBF1 Trip 3Ph
493
tBF2 Trip 3Ph
494
495
1,7
227
239 SPower1 Trip
Sensitive A Phase Power Stage

1 Trip
1,7
227
240 SPower2 Trip

2 Trip
496
1,7
227
241 PSlipz Z1 Trip
Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1

Trip
497
1,7
227
242 PSlipz Z2 Trip

Trip
498
1,7
227
243 Thermal O/L Trip
Thermal Overload Trip
499
500
1,7
227
244 Z<1 Trip
Under Impedance Stage 1

Trip 3 Ph
1,7
227
245 Z<1 Trip A

Trip A
501

Trip B
502
1,7
227
246 Z<1 Trip B
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 91/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN
INF
NO.
1,7
227
1,7
Description
GI
Model Number
1
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
247 Z<1 Trip C

Trip C
503
227
248 Z<2 Trip

Trip 3 Ph
504
1,7
227
249 Z<2 Trip A

Trip A
505
1,7
227
250 Z<2 Trip B

Trip B
506
1,7
227
251 Z<2 Trip C

Trip C
507
227
252
508
227
253
509
227
254
510
227
255
511
228
512
228
513
228
514
228
515
228
516
228
517
228
518
228
519
228
520
228
521
228
10
522
228
11
523
228
12
524
228
13
525
228
14
526
228
15
527
228
16
528
228
17
529
228
18
530
228
19
531
228
20
532
228
21
533
228
22
534
228
23
535
228
24
536
228
25
537
228
26
538
228
27
539
228
28
540
228
29
541
228
30
542
228
31
543
228
32
544
228
33
545
228
34
546
228
35
547
228
36
548
228
37
549
228
38
550
228
39
551
228
40
552
228
41
553
228
42
554
228
43
555
228
44
556
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
ASDU TYPE
Page 92/158
COT
GI
Model Number
FUN
INF
NO.
228
45
557
228
46
558
228
47
559
228
48
560
228
49
561
228
50
562
228
51
563
228
52
564
228
53
565
228
54
566
228
55
567
228
56
568
228
57
569
228
58
570
228
59
571
228
60
572
228
61
573
228
62
574
228
63
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
575
1,7,9
224
84
Any Start
Any Start
576
1,7,9
228
65
VN>1 Start
1st Stage Residual O/V Start
577
1,7,9
228
66
VN>2 Start
2nd Stage Residual O/V Start
578
1,7,9
228
67
V<1 Start
1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph
579
580
1,7,9
228
68
V<1 Start A/AB
1st Stage Phase U/V Start

A/AB
1,7,9
228
69
V<1 Start B/BC

B/BC
581
1,7,9
228
70
V<1 Start C/CA

C/CA
582
1,7,9
228
71
V<2 Start
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start

3ph
583
1,7,9
228
72
V<2 Start A/AB

A/AB
584
1,7,9
228
73
V<2 Start B/BC

B/BC
585
1,7,9
228
74
V<2 Start C/CA

C/CA
586
1st Stage Phase O/V Start

3ph
587
588
1,7,9
228
75
V>1 Start
1,7,9
228
76
V>1 Start A/AB

A/AB
1,7,9
228
77
V>1 Start B/BC

B/BC
589
1,7,9
228
78
V>1 Start C/CA

C/CA
590
1,7,9
228
79
V>2 Start
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start

3ph
591
1,7,9
228
80
V>2 Start A/AB

A/AB
592
1,7,9
228
81
V>2 Start B/BC

B/BC
593
1,7,9
228
82
V>2 Start C/CA

C/CA
594
1,7,9
228
83
Power1 Start
Power Stage 1 start
595
1,7,9
228
84
Power2 Start
Power stage 1 start
596
1,7,9
228
85
I>1 Start
1st Stage O/C Start 3ph
597
1,7,9
224
64
I>1 Start A
598
1,7,9
224
65
I>1 Start B
599
1,7,9
224
66
I>1 Start C
600
1,7,9
228
89
I>2 Start
2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph
601
1,7,9
228
90
I>2 Start A
2nd Stage O/C Start A
602
1,7,9
228
91
I>2 Start B
2nd Stage O/C Start B
603
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 93/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN
INF
NO.
1,7,9
228
92
I>2 Start C
1,7,9
228
93
I>3 Start
1,7,9
228
94
1,7,9
228
1,7,9
1,7,9
Description
GI
Model Number
3
2nd Stage O/C Start C
604
3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph
605
I>3 Start A
3rd Stage O/C Start A
606
95
I>3 Start B
3rd Stage O/C Start B
607
228
96
I>3 Start C
3rd Stage O/C Start C
608
228
97
I>4 Start
4th Stage O/C Start 3ph
609
1,7,9
228
98
I>4 Start A
4th Stage O/C Start A
610
1,7,9
228
99
I>4 Start B
4th Stage O/C Start B
611
1,7,9
228
100 I>4 Start C
4th Stage O/C Start C
612
1,7,9
224
67
IN>1 Start
1st Stage EF Start
613
1,7,9
228
102 IN>2 Start
2nd Stage EF Start
614
1,7,9
228
103 IN>3 Start
3rd Stage EF Start
615
1,7,9
228
104 IN>4 Start
4th Stage EF Start
616
1,7,9
228
105 ISEF>1 Start
1st Stage SEF Start
617
1,7,9
228
106 ISEF>2 Start
2nd Stage SEF Start
618
1,7,9
228
107 ISEF>3 Start
3rd Stage SEF Start
619
1,7,9
228
108 ISEF>4 Start
4th Stage SEF Start
620
1,7,9
228
109 100% ST EF Start
100% Stator Earth Fault Start
621
622
DDB Ordinal
Interpretation
1,7,9
228
110 F<1 Start
Under frequency Stage 1

START
1,7,9
228
111 F<2 Start

START
623
1,7,9
228
112 F<3 Start

START
624
1,7,9
228
113 F<4 Start

START
625
1,7,9
228
114 F>1 Start
Over frequency Stage 1

START
626
1,7,9
228
115 F>2 Start
Over frequency Stage 2

START
627
1,7,9
228
116 I> BlockStart
I> Blocked O/C Start,

inhibited by CB Fail
628
1,7,9
228
117 IN/SEF>Blk Start
IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start,

inhibited by CB Fail
629
1,7,9
228
118 df/dt Start

Start
630
228
119 IA< Start
IA< operate
631
228
120 IB< Start
IB< operate
632
228
121 IC< Start
IC< operate
633
228
122 ISEF< Start
ISEF< operate
634
635
228
123 IN< Start
IN< operate
1,7,9
228
124 V/Hz Start
Volts per Hz Start
636
1,7,9
228
125 FFail1 Start
Field failure Stage 1 start
637
1,7,9
228
126 FFail2 Start
638
639
1,7,9
228
127 V Dep OC Start
Voltage Dependent
Overcurrent Start
1,7,9
228
128 V Dep OC Start A
Voltage Dependent
Overcurrent Start A
640
1,7,9
228
129 V Dep OC Start B
Voltage Dependent
Overcurrent Start B
641
1,7,9
228
130 V Dep OC Start C
Voltage Dependent
Overcurrent Start C
642
1,7,9
228
131 SPower1 Start

1 Start
643
1,7,9
228
132 SPower2 Start

2 Start
644
1,7,9
228
133 PSlipz Z1 Start

Start
645
1,7,9
228
134 PSlipz Z2 Start

Start
646
1,7,9
228
135 PSlipz LensStart
Pole Slip (impedance) Lens

Start
647
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 94/158
GI
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN
INF
NO.
1,7,9
228
136 PSlipz BlindStrt
1,7,9
228
137 PSlipz ReactStrt
1,7,9
228
138 Z<1 Start
1,7,9
228
139 Z<1 Start A
1,7,9
228
1,7,9
Description
Model Number
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
Pole Slip (impedance) Blinder

Start
648
Pole Slip (impedance)

Reactance Line Start
649

Start
650

Start A
651
140 Z<1 Start B

Start B
652
228
141 Z<1 Start C

Start C
653
1,7,9
228
142 Z<2 Start

Start
654
1,7,9
228
143 Z<2 Start A

Start A
655
1,7,9
228
144 Z<2 Start B

Start B
656
1,7,9
228
145 Z<2 Start C

Start C
657
228
146
658
228
147
659
228
148
660
228
149
661
228
150
662
228
151
663
228
152
664
228
153
665
228
154
666
228
155
667
228
156
668
228
157
669
228
158
670
228
159
671
228
160
672
228
161
673
228
162
674
228
163
675
228
164
676
228
165
677
228
166
678
228
167
679
228
168
680
228
169
681
228
170
682
228
171
683
228
172
684
228
173
685
228
174
686
228
175
687
228
176
688
228
177
689
228
178
690
228
179
691
228
180
692
228
181
693
228
182
694
228
183
695
228
184
696
228
185
697
228
186
698
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
ASDU TYPE
Page 95/158
COT
GI
Model Number
FUN
INF
NO.
228
187
699
228
188
700
228
189
701
228
190
702
228
191
703
228
192
704
228
193
705
228
194
706
228
195
707
228
196
708
228
197
709
228
198
710
228
199
711
228
200
712
228
201
713
228
202
714
228
203
715
228
204
716
228
205
717
228
206
718
228
207
719
228
208
720
228
209
721
228
210
722
228
211
723
228
212
724
228
213
725
228
214
726
228
215
727
228
216
728
228
217
729
228
218
730
228
219
731
228
220
732
228
221
733
228
222
734
228
223
228
224 VTS Fast Block
VTS Fast Block
228
225 VTS Slow Block
VTS Slow Block
737
228
226 CTS Block
CTS Block
738
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
735
736
1,7
228
227 Control Trip
Control Trip
739
1,7
228
228 Control Close
Control Close
740
1,7
228
229 Close in Prog
Control Close in Progress
741
Reconnection Time Delay

Output
742
1,7
228
230 Reconnection
1,7,9
228
231 RTD 1 Alarm
RTD 1 Alarm
743
1,7,9
228
232 RTD 2 Alarm
RTD 2 Alarm
744
1,7,9
228
233 RTD 3 Alarm
RTD 3 Alarm
745
1,7,9
228
234 RTD 4 Alarm
RTD 4 Alarm
746
1,7,9
228
235 RTD 5 Alarm
RTD 5 Alarm
747
1,7,9
228
236 RTD 6 Alarm
RTD 6 Alarm
748
1,7,9
228
237 RTD 7 Alarm
RTD 7 Alarm
749
1,7,9
228
238 RTD 8 Alarm
RTD 8 Alarm
750
1,7,9
228
239 RTD 9 Alarm
RTD 9 Alarm
751
1,7,9
228
240 RTD 10 Alarm
RTD 10 Alarm
752
228
241 Lockout Alarm
Composite lockout alarm
753
1,7,9
228
242 CB Open 3 ph
3 ph CB Open
754
1,7,9
228
243 CB Closed 3 ph
3 ph CB Closed
755
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 96/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
1,7,9
FUN
INF
NO.
Description
GI
Model Number
1
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
228
244 Field volts fail
Field Voltage Failure
756
228
245 All Poles Dead
All Poles Dead
757
228
246 Any Pole Dead
Any Pole Dead
758
228
247 Pole Dead A
Phase A Pole Dead
759
228
248 Pole Dead B
Phase B Pole Dead
760
228
249 Pole Dead C
Phase C Pole Dead
761
228
250 VTS Acc Ind
Accelerate Ind
762
228
251 VTS Volt Dep
Any Voltage Dependent
763
228
252 VTS IA>
Ia over threshold
764
228
253 VTS IB>
Ib over threshold
765
228
254 VTS IC>
Ic over threshold
766
228
255 VTS VA>
Va over threshold
767
229
VTS VB>
Vb over threshold
768
229
VTS VC>
Vc over threshold
769
229
VTS I2>
I2 over threshold
770
229
VTS V2>
V2 over threshold
771
Superimposed Ia over
threshold
772
773
229
VTS IA delta>
229
VTS IB delta>
Superimposed Ib over
threshold
229
VTS IC delta>
Superimposed Ic over
threshold
774
229
BFail SEF Trip-1
CBF current prot SEF stage

trip
775
229
BFail Non I Tr-1
CBF non current prot stage

trip
776
777
229
BFail SEF Trip
CBF current Prot SEF Trip
229
10
BFail Non I Trip
CBF Non Current Prot Trip
778
229
11
Freq High
Freq High
779
229
12
Freq Low
Freq Low
780
229
13
Freq Not found
Freq Not found
781
229
14
Stop Freq Track
Stop Freq Track
782
1,7
229
15
Recon LOM-1
Reconnect LOM (unqualified)
783
1,7
229
16
Recon Disable-1
Reconnect Disable
(unqualified)
784
1,7
229
17
Recon LOM
Reconnect LOM
785
1,7
229
18
Recon Disable
Reconnect Disable
786
229
19
787
229
20
788
229
21
789
229
22
790
229
23
791
229
24
792
229
25
793
229
26
794
229
27
795
229
28
796
229
29
797
229
30
798
229
31
799
229
32
800
229
33
801
229
34
802
229
35
803
229
36
804
229
37
805
229
38
806
229
39
807
229
40
808
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
ASDU TYPE
Page 97/158
COT
GI
Model Number
FUN
INF
NO.
229
41
809
229
42
810
229
43
811
229
44
812
229
45
813
229
46
814
229
47
815
229
48
816
229
49
817
229
50
818
229
51
819
229
52
820
229
53
821
229
54
822
229
55
823
229
56
824
229
57
825
229
58
826
229
59
827
229
60
828
229
61
829
229
62
830
229
63
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
831
9,11,12,20,21
229
64
Control Input 1
Control Input
832
9,11,12,20,21
229
65
Control Input 2
Control Input
833
9,11,12,20,21
229
66
Control Input 3
Control Input
834
9,11,12,20,21
229
67
Control Input 4
Control Input
835
9,11,12,20,21
229
68
Control Input 5
Control Input
836
9,11,12,20,21
229
69
Control Input 6
Control Input
837
9,11,12,20,21
229
70
Control Input 7
Control Input
838
9,11,12,20,21
229
71
Control Input 8
Control Input
839
9,11,12,20,21
229
72
Control Input 9
Control Input
840
9,11,12,20,21
229
73
Control Input 10
Control Input
841
9,11,12,20,21
229
74
Control Input 11
Control Input
842
9,11,12,20,21
229
75
Control Input 12
Control Input
843
9,11,12,20,21
229
76
Control Input 13
Control Input
844
9,11,12,20,21
229
77
Control Input 14
Control Input
845
9,11,12,20,21
229
78
Control Input 15
Control Input
846
9,11,12,20,21
229
79
Control Input 16
Control Input
847
9,11,12,20,21
229
80
Control Input 17
Control Input
848
9,11,12,20,21
229
81
Control Input 18
Control Input
849
9,11,12,20,21
229
82
Control Input 19
Control Input
850
9,11,12,20,21
229
83
Control Input 20
Control Input
851
9,11,12,20,21
229
84
Control Input 21
Control Input
852
9,11,12,20,21
229
85
Control Input 22
Control Input
853
9,11,12,20,21
229
86
Control Input 23
Control Input
854
9,11,12,20,21
229
87
Control Input 24
Control Input
855
9,11,12,20,21
229
88
Control Input 25
Control Input
856
9,11,12,20,21
229
89
Control Input 26
Control Input
857
9,11,12,20,21
229
90
Control Input 27
Control Input
858
9,11,12,20,21
229
91
Control Input 28
Control Input
859
9,11,12,20,21
229
92
Control Input 29
Control Input
860
9,11,12,20,21
229
93
Control Input 30
Control Input
861
9,11,12,20,21
229
94
Control Input 31
Control Input
862
9,11,12,20,21
229
95
Control Input 32
Control Input
229
96
GOOSE VIP 1
864
229
97
GOOSE VIP 2
865
863
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
ASDU TYPE
Page 98/158
COT
GI
Model Number
FUN
INF
NO.
229
98
GOOSE VIP 3
866
229
99
GOOSE VIP 4
867
229
100 GOOSE VIP 5
868
229
101 GOOSE VIP 6
869
229
102 GOOSE VIP 7
870
229
103 GOOSE VIP 8
871
229
104 GOOSE VIP 9
872
229
105 GOOSE VIP 10
873
229
106 GOOSE VIP 11
874
229
107 GOOSE VIP 12
875
229
108 GOOSE VIP 13
876
229
109 GOOSE VIP 14
877
229
110 GOOSE VIP 15
878
229
111 GOOSE VIP 16
879
229
112 GOOSE VIP 17
880
229
113 GOOSE VIP 18
881
229
114 GOOSE VIP 19
882
229
115 GOOSE VIP 20
883
229
116 GOOSE VIP 21
884
229
117 GOOSE VIP 22
885
229
118 GOOSE VIP 23
886
229
119 GOOSE VIP 24
887
229
120 GOOSE VIP 25
888
229
121 GOOSE VIP 26
889
229
122 GOOSE VIP 27
890
229
123 GOOSE VIP 28
891
229
124 GOOSE VIP 29
892
229
125 GOOSE VIP 30
893
229
126 GOOSE VIP 31
894
229
127 GOOSE VIP 32
895
229
128 GOOSE VOP 1
896
229
129 GOOSE VOP 2
897
229
130 GOOSE VOP 3
898
229
131 GOOSE VOP 4
899
229
132 GOOSE VOP 5
900
229
133 GOOSE VOP 6
901
229
134 GOOSE VOP 7
902
229
135 GOOSE VOP 8
903
229
136 InterLogic I/P 1
904
229
905
229
906
229
907
229
908
229
909
229
910
229
911
229
144 InterLogic O/P 1
912
229
913
229
914
229
915
229
916
229
917
229
918
229
919
229
152 Direct Ctrl 1
920
229
153 Direct Ctrl 2
921
229
154 Direct Ctrl 3
922
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
ASDU TYPE
Page 99/158
COT
GI
Model Number
FUN
INF
NO.
229
155 Direct Ctrl 4
923
229
156 Direct Ctrl 5
924
229
157 Direct Ctrl 6
925
229
158 Direct Ctrl 7
926
229
159 Direct Ctrl 8
229
160 PSL Int. 1
PSL Internal Node 1
928
229
161 PSL Int. 2
PSL Internal Node 2
929
229
162 PSL Int. 3
PSL Internal Node 3
930
229
163 PSL Int. 4
PSL Internal Node 4
931
229
164 PSL Int. 5
PSL Internal Node 5
932
229
165 PSL Int. 6
PSL Internal Node 6
933
229
166 PSL Int. 7
PSL Internal Node 7
934
229
167 PSL Int. 8
PSL Internal Node 8
935
229
168 PSL Int. 9
PSL Internal Node 9
936
229
169 PSL Int. 10
PSL Internal Node 10
937
229
170 PSL Int. 11
938
229
171 PSL Int. 12
939
229
172 PSL Int. 13
940
229
173 PSL Int. 14
941
229
174 PSL Int. 15
942
229
175 PSL Int. 16
943
229
176 PSL Int. 17
944
229
177 PSL Int. 18
945
229
178 PSL Int. 19
946
229
179 PSL Int. 20
947
229
180 PSL Int. 21
948
229
181 PSL Int. 22
949
229
182 PSL Int. 23
950
229
183 PSL Int. 24
951
229
184 PSL Int. 25
952
229
185 PSL Int. 26
953
229
186 PSL Int. 27
954
229
187 PSL Int. 28
955
229
188 PSL Int. 29
956
229
189 PSL Int. 30
957
229
190 PSL Int. 31
958
229
191 PSL Int. 32
959
229
192 PSL Int. 33
960
229
193 PSL Int. 34
961
229
194 PSL Int. 35
962
229
195 PSL Int. 36
963
229
196 PSL Int. 37
964
229
197 PSL Int. 38
965
229
198 PSL Int. 39
966
229
199 PSL Int. 40
967
229
200 PSL Int. 41
968
229
201 PSL Int. 42
969
229
202 PSL Int. 43
970
229
203 PSL Int. 44
971
229
204 PSL Int. 45
972
229
205 PSL Int. 46
973
229
206 PSL Int. 47
974
229
207 PSL Int. 48
975
229
208 PSL Int. 49
976
229
209 PSL Int. 50
977
229
210 PSL Int. 51
978
229
211 PSL Int. 52
979
Description
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
927
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
ASDU TYPE
Page 100/158
COT
1,7
FUN
INF
NO.
229
229
Description
GI
Model Number
4
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
212 PSL Int. 53
980
213 PSL Int. 54
981
229
214 PSL Int. 55
982
229
215 PSL Int. 56
983
229
216 PSL Int. 57
984
229
217 PSL Int. 58
985
229
218 PSL Int. 59
986
229
219 PSL Int. 60
987
229
220 PSL Int. 61
988
229
221 PSL Int. 62
989
229
222 PSL Int. 63
990
229
223 PSL Int. 64
991
229
224 PSL Int. 65
992
229
225 PSL Int. 66
993
229
226 PSL Int. 67
994
229
227 PSL Int. 68
995
229
228 PSL Int. 69
996
229
229 PSL Int. 70
997
229
230 PSL Int. 71
998
229
231 PSL Int. 72
999
229
232 PSL Int. 73
1000
229
233 PSL Int. 74
1001
229
234 PSL Int. 75
1002
229
235 PSL Int. 76
1003
229
236 PSL Int. 77
1004
229
237 PSL Int. 78
1005
229
238 PSL Int. 79
1006
229
239 PSL Int. 80
1007
229
240 PSL Int. 81
1008
229
241 PSL Int. 82
1009
229
242 PSL Int. 83
1010
229
243 PSL Int. 84
1011
229
244 PSL Int. 85
1012
229
245 PSL Int. 86
1013
229
246 PSL Int. 87
1014
229
247 PSL Int. 88
1015
229
248 PSL Int. 89
1016
229
249 PSL Int. 90
1017
229
250 PSL Int. 91
1018
229
251 PSL Int. 92
1019
229
252 PSL Int. 93
1020
229
253 PSL Int. 94
1021
229
254 PSL Int. 95
1022
229
255 Battery Fail
Private Range Information Numbers in Control Direction

ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN
INF
NO.
20
20
229
64
20
20
229
65
20
20
229
20
20
20
Description
Model Number
GI
Interpretation
DDB Ordinal
Control Input 1
Control Input
832
Control Input 2
Control Input
833
66
Control Input 3
Control Input
834
229
67
Control Input 4
Control Input
835
20
229
68
Control Input 5
Control Input
836
20
20
229
69
Control Input 6
Control Input
837
20
20
229
70
Control Input 7
Control Input
838
20
20
229
71
Control Input 8
Control Input
839
20
20
229
72
Control Input 9
Control Input
840
20
20
229
73
Control Input 10
Control Input
841
20
20
229
74
Control Input 11
Control Input
842
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 101/158
ASDU TYPE
COT
FUN
INF
NO.
20
20
229
75
20
20
229
76
20
20
229
20
20
20
Description
GI
Model Number
3
Control Input 12
Control Input
843
Control Input 13
Control Input
844
77
Control Input 14
Control Input
845
229
78
Control Input 15
Control Input
846
20
229
79
Control Input 16
Control Input
847
20
20
229
80
Control Input 17
Control Input
848
20
20
229
81
Control Input 18
Control Input
849
20
20
229
82
Control Input 19
Control Input
850
20
20
229
83
Control Input 20
Control Input
851
20
20
229
84
Control Input 21
Control Input
852
20
20
229
85
Control Input 22
Control Input
853
20
20
229
86
Control Input 23
Control Input
854
20
20
229
87
Control Input 24
Control Input
855
20
20
229
88
Control Input 25
Control Input
856
20
20
229
89
Control Input 26
Control Input
857
20
20
229
90
Control Input 27
Control Input
858
20
20
229
91
Control Input 28
Control Input
859
20
20
229
92
Control Input 29
Control Input
860
20
20
229
93
Control Input 30
Control Input
861
20
20
229
94
Control Input 31
Control Input
862
20
20
229
95
Control Input 32
Control Input
863
ACC
Standard
Interpretation
Global
Null Channel
IL1
IA
IL2
IB
IL3
IC
IN
IN
VL1E
VAN
VL2E
VBN
VL3E
VCN
VEN
VN
64
IN Sensitive
65
IA-2
66
IB-2
67
IC-2
245
SampleTime
DDB Ordinal
Disturbance Data Actual Channel Identifiers
Interpretation
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 102/158
Digital Data Bus

DDB No.
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
Output Condition
Output Relay 1
see 4B01
Output Condition
Output Relay 2
see 4B02
Output Condition
Output Relay 3
see 4B03
Output Condition
Output Relay 4
see 4B04
Output Condition
Output Relay 5
see 4B05
Output Condition
Output Relay 6
see 4B06
Output Condition
Output Relay 7
see 4B07
Output Condition
Output Relay 8
see 4B08
Output Condition
Output Relay 9
see 4B09
Output Condition
Output Relay 10
see 4B0A
10
Output Condition
Output Relay 11
see 4B0B
11
Output Condition
Output Relay 12
see 4B0C
12
Output Condition
Output Relay 13
see 4B0D
13
Output Condition
Output Relay 14
see 4B0E
14
Output Condition
Output Relay 15
see 4B0F
15
Output Condition
Output Relay 16
see 4B10
16
Output Condition
Output Relay 17
see 4B11
17
Output Condition
Output Relay 18
see 4B12
18
Output Condition
Output Relay 19
see 4B13
19
Output Condition
Output Relay 20
see 4B14
20
Output Condition
Output Relay 21
see 4B15
21
Output Condition
Output Relay 22
see 4B16
22
Output Condition
Output Relay 23
see 4B17
23
Output Condition
Output Relay 24
see 4B18
24
Output Condition
Output Relay 25
see 4B19
25
Output Condition
Output Relay 26
see 4B1A
26
Output Condition
Output Relay 27
see 4B1B
27
Output Condition
Output Relay 28
see 4B1C
28
Output Condition
Output Relay 29
see 4B1D
29
Output Condition
Output Relay 30
see 4B1E
30
Output Condition
Output Relay 31
see 4B1F
31
Output Condition
Output Relay 32
see 4B20
32
OPTO
Opto Input 1
see 4A01
33
OPTO
Opto Input 2
see 4A02
34
OPTO
Opto Input 3
see 4A03
35
OPTO
Opto Input 4
see 4A04
36
OPTO
Opto Input 5
see 4A05
37
OPTO
Opto Input 6
see 4A06
38
OPTO
Opto Input 7
see 4A07
39
OPTO
Opto Input 8
see 4A08
40
OPTO
Opto Input 9
see 4A09
41
OPTO
Opto Input 10
see 4A0A
42
OPTO
Opto Input 11
see 4A0B
43
OPTO
Opto Input 12
see 4A0C
44
OPTO
Opto Input 13
see 4A0D
45
OPTO
Opto Input 14
see 4A0E
46
OPTO
Opto Input 15
see 4A0F
47
OPTO
Opto Input 16
see 4A10
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 103/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
48
OPTO
Opto Input 17
see 4A11
49
OPTO
Opto Input 18
see 4A12
50
OPTO
Opto Input 19
see 4A13
51
OPTO
Opto Input 20
see 4A14
52
OPTO
Opto Input 21
see 4A15
53
OPTO
Opto Input 22
see 4A16
54
OPTO
Opto Input 23
see 4A17
55
OPTO
Opto Input 24
see 4A18
56
OPTO
Opto Input 25
see 4A19
57
OPTO
Opto Input 26
see 4A1A
58
OPTO
Opto Input 27
see 4A1B
59
OPTO
Opto Input 28
see 4A1C
60
OPTO
Opto Input 29
see 4A1D
61
OPTO
Opto Input 30
see 4A1E
62
OPTO
Opto Input 31
see 4A1F
63
OPTO
Opto Input 32
see 4A20
64
Output Condition
Programmable LED 1
LED 1
65
Output Condition
Programmable LED 2
LED 2
66
Output Condition
Programmable LED 3
LED 3
67
Output Condition
Programmable LED 4
LED 4
68
Output Condition
Programmable LED 5
LED 5
69
Output Condition
Programmable LED 6
LED 6
70
Output Condition
Programmable LED 7
LED 7
71
Output Condition
Programmable LED 8
LED 8
72
UNUSED
73
UNUSED
74
UNUSED
75
UNUSED
76
UNUSED
77
UNUSED
78
UNUSED
79
UNUSED
80
PSL
Input to LED Output Condition
LED Cond IN 1
81
PSL
LED Cond IN 2
82
PSL
LED Cond IN 3
83
PSL
LED Cond IN 4
84
PSL
LED Cond IN 5
85
PSL
LED Cond IN 6
86
PSL
LED Cond IN 7
87
PSL
LED Cond IN 8
88
UNUSED
89
UNUSED
90
UNUSED
91
UNUSED
92
UNUSED
93
UNUSED
94
UNUSED
95
UNUSED
96
UNUSED
97
UNUSED
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 104/158
Source
98
UNUSED
99
UNUSED
100
UNUSED
101
UNUSED
102
UNUSED
103
UNUSED
104
UNUSED
105
UNUSED
106
UNUSED
107
UNUSED
108
UNUSED
109
UNUSED
110
UNUSED
111
UNUSED
112
UNUSED
113
UNUSED
114
UNUSED
115
UNUSED
116
UNUSED
117
UNUSED
118
UNUSED
119
UNUSED
120
UNUSED
121
UNUSED
122
UNUSED
123
UNUSED
124
UNUSED
125
UNUSED
126
UNUSED
127
UNUSED
128
UNUSED
129
UNUSED
130
UNUSED
131
UNUSED
132
UNUSED
133
UNUSED
134
UNUSED
135
UNUSED
136
UNUSED
137
UNUSED
138
UNUSED
139
UNUSED
140
UNUSED
141
UNUSED
142
UNUSED
143
UNUSED
144
UNUSED
145
UNUSED
146
UNUSED
147
UNUSED
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 105/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
148
UNUSED
149
UNUSED
150
UNUSED
151
UNUSED
152
UNUSED
153
UNUSED
154
UNUSED
155
UNUSED
156
UNUSED
157
UNUSED
158
UNUSED
159
UNUSED
160
PSL
Input to Relay Output Condition
Relay Cond 1
161
PSL
Relay Cond 2
162
PSL
Any Trip
163
PSL
Relay Cond 4
164
PSL
Relay Cond 5
165
PSL
Relay Cond 6
166
PSL
Relay Cond 7
167
PSL
Relay Cond 8
168
PSL
Relay Cond 9
169
PSL
Relay Cond 10
170
PSL
Relay Cond 11
171
PSL
Relay Cond 12
172
PSL
Relay Cond 13
173
PSL
Relay Cond 14
174
PSL
Relay Cond 15
175
PSL
Relay Cond 16
176
PSL
Relay Cond 17
177
PSL
Relay Cond 18
178
PSL
Relay Cond 19
179
PSL
Relay Cond 20
180
PSL
Relay Cond 21
181
PSL
Relay Cond 22
182
PSL
Relay Cond 23
183
PSL
Relay Cond 24
184
PSL
Relay Cond 25
185
PSL
Relay Cond 26
186
PSL
Relay Cond 27
187
PSL
Relay Cond 28
188
PSL
Relay Cond 29
189
PSL
Relay Cond 30
190
PSL
Relay Cond 31
191
PSL
Relay Cond 32
192
UNUSED
193
UNUSED
194
UNUSED
195
UNUSED
196
UNUSED
197
UNUSED
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 106/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
198
UNUSED
199
UNUSED
200
UNUSED
201
UNUSED
202
UNUSED
203
UNUSED
204
UNUSED
205
UNUSED
206
UNUSED
207
UNUSED
208
UNUSED
209
UNUSED
210
UNUSED
211
UNUSED
212
UNUSED
213
UNUSED
214
UNUSED
215
UNUSED
216
UNUSED
217
UNUSED
218
UNUSED
219
UNUSED
220
UNUSED
221
UNUSED
222
UNUSED
223
UNUSED
224
PSL
Timer in 1
225
PSL
Timer in 2
226
PSL
Timer in 3
227
PSL
Timer in 4
228
PSL
Timer in 5
229
PSL
Timer in 6
230
PSL
Timer in 7
231
PSL
Timer in 8
232
UNUSED
233
UNUSED
234
UNUSED
235
UNUSED
236
UNUSED
237
UNUSED
238
UNUSED
239
UNUSED
240
UNUSED
241
UNUSED
242
UNUSED
243
UNUSED
244
UNUSED
245
UNUSED
246
UNUSED
247
UNUSED
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 107/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
248
UNUSED
249
UNUSED
250
UNUSED
251
UNUSED
252
UNUSED
253
UNUSED
254
UNUSED
255
UNUSED
256
Auxiliary Timer
Timer out 1
257
Auxiliary Timer
Timer out 2
258
Auxiliary Timer
Timer out 3
259
Auxiliary Timer
Timer out 4
260
Auxiliary Timer
Timer out 5
261
Auxiliary Timer
Timer out 6
262
Auxiliary Timer
Timer out 7
263
Auxiliary Timer
Timer out 8
264
UNUSED
265
UNUSED
266
UNUSED
267
UNUSED
268
UNUSED
269
UNUSED
270
UNUSED
271
UNUSED
272
UNUSED
273
UNUSED
274
UNUSED
275
UNUSED
276
UNUSED
277
UNUSED
278
UNUSED
279
UNUSED
280
UNUSED
281
UNUSED
282
UNUSED
283
UNUSED
284
UNUSED
285
UNUSED
286
UNUSED
287
UNUSED
288
PSL
Trigger for Fault Recorder
Fault REC TRIG
289
UNUSED
290
Group Selection
Setting Group via opto invalid Alarm
SG-opto Invalid
291
Commission Test
Test Mode Enabled Alarm
Prot'n Disabled
292
VT Supervision
VTS Indication
VT Fail Alarm
293
CT Supervision
CTS Indication
CT Fail Alarm
294
Breaker Fail
CB Fail Alarm
295
CB Monitoring
Broken Current Maintenance Alarm
I^ Maint Alarm
296
CB Monitoring
Broken Current Lockout Alarm
I^ Lockout Alarm
297
CB Monitoring
No of CB Ops Maintenance Alarm
CB Ops Maint
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 108/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
298
CB Monitoring
No of CB Ops Maintenance Lockout
CB Ops Lockout
299
CB Monitoring
Excessive CB Op Time Maintenance Alarm
CB Op Time Maint
300
CB Monitoring
Excessive CB Op Time Lockout Alarm
CB Op Time Lock
301
CB Monitoring
Excessive Fault Frequency Lockout Alarm
Fault Freq Lock
302
CB Status
CB Status Alarm (Invalid CB auxilliary contacts)
CB Status Alarm
303
CB Control
CB Failed to Trip Alarm
Man CB Trip Fail
304
CB Control
CB Failed to Close Alarm
Man CB Cls Fail
305
CB Control
CB Unhealthy on Control Close Alarm
Man CB Unhealthy
306
Frequency Tracking
F out of Range
306
NPS Thermal
Negative Phase Sequence Alarm
NPS Alarm
307
Thermal Overload
Thermal Alarm
308
Overfluxing
Volts Per Hz Alarm
V/Hz Alarm
309
Field Failure
Field failure Alarm
Field Fail Alarm
310
RTD Thermal
RTD thermal Alarm
RTD Thermal Alm
311
RTD Thermal
RTD open circuit failure
RTD Open Cct
312
RTD Thermal
RTD short circuit failure
RTD short Cct
313
RTD Thermal
RTD data inconsistency error
RTD Data Error
314
RTD Thermal
RTD Board failure
RTD Board Fail
315
PSL
Frequency protection alarm
Freq Prot Alm
316
PSL
Voltage protection alarm
Voltage Prot Alm
317
PSL
User Alarm 1
318
PSL
User Alarm 2
319
PSL
User Alarm 3
320
UNUSED
321
UNUSED
322
UNUSED
323
UNUSED
324
UNUSED
325
UNUSED
326
UNUSED
327
UNUSED
328
UNUSED
329
UNUSED
330
UNUSED
331
UNUSED
332
UNUSED
333
UNUSED
334
UNUSED
335
UNUSED
336
UNUSED
337
UNUSED
338
UNUSED
339
UNUSED
340
UNUSED
341
UNUSED
342
UNUSED
343
UNUSED
344
UNUSED
345
UNUSED
346
UNUSED
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 109/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
347
UNUSED
348
UNUSED
349
UNUSED
350
UNUSED
351
UNUSED
352
PSL
Block Voltage Dependent time delay
VDepOC Timer Blk
353
PSL
Block Under Impedance time delay
UnderZ Timer Blk
354
PSL
Block Phase O/C Stage 1 time delay
I>1 Timer Block
355
PSL
Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 2 time delay
I>2 Timer Block
356
PSL
I>3 Timer Block
357
PSL
I>4 Timer Block
358
PSL
Block Earth Fault Stage 1 time delay
IN>1 Timer Blk
359
PSL
IN>2 Timer Blk
360
PSL
IN>3 Timer Blk
361
PSL
IN>4 Timer Blk
362
PSL
ISEF>1 Timer Blk
363
PSL
ISEF>2 Timer Blk
364
PSL
ISEF>3 Timer Blk
365
PSL
ISEF>4 Timer Blk
366
PSL
Logic Input Trip CB
Init Trip CB
367
PSL
Logic Input Close CB
Init Close CB
368
PSL
Block Residual Overvoltage Stage 1 time delay
VN>1 Timer Blk
369
PSL
Block Residual Overvoltage Stage 2 time delay
VN>2 Timer Blk
370
PSL
Block Phase Undervoltage Stage 1 time delay
V<1 Timer Block
371
PSL
Block Phase Undervoltage Stage 2 time delay
V<2 Timer Block
372
PSL
Block Phase Overvoltage Stage 1 time delay
V>1 Timer Block
373
PSL
Block Phase Overvoltage Stage 4 time delay
V>2 Timer Block
374
PSL
Block Underfrequency Stage 1 Timer
F<1 timer Block
375
PSL
F<2 Timer Block
376
PSL
F<3 Timer Block
377
PSL
F<4 Timer Block
378
PSL
Block Overfrequency Stage 1 Timer
F>1 Timer Block
379
PSL
Block Overfrequency Stage 2 Timer
F>2 Timer Block
380
PSL
External Trip 3ph
Ext. Trip 3ph
381
PSL
52-A (3 phase)
CB Aux 3ph(52-A)
382
PSL
52-B (3 phase)
CB Aux 3ph(52-B)
383
PSL
CB Healthy
CB Healthy
384
PSL
MCB/VTS opto
MCB/VTS
385
PSL
Reset Manual CB Close Time Delay
Reset Close Dly
386
PSL
Reset Latched Relays & LEDs
Reset Relays/LED
387
PSL
Reset Lockout Opto Input
Reset Lockout
388
PSL
Reset CB Maintenance Values
Reset All Values
389
PSL
Reset NPS Thermal State
Reset I2 Thermal
390
PSL
Reset Overload Thermal State
Reset ThermalO/L
391
PSL
Blocks most IEC60870-5-103 commands
Monitor Blocked
392
PSL
Blocks IEC60870-5-103 'General Command'.
Command Blocked
393
UNUSED
394
UNUSED
395
UNUSED
396
UNUSED
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 110/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
397
UNUSED
398
UNUSED
399
UNUSED
400
UNUSED
401
UNUSED
402
UNUSED
403
UNUSED
404
UNUSED
405
UNUSED
406
UNUSED
407
UNUSED
408
UNUSED
409
UNUSED
410
UNUSED
411
UNUSED
412
UNUSED
413
UNUSED
414
UNUSED
415
PSL
416
100% Stator Earth Fault
100% ST EF Trip
417
Dead Machine
DeadMachine Trip
418
Generator Differential
Generator Differential trip 3ph
Gen Diff Trip
419
Gen Diff Trip A
420
Gen Diff Trip B
421
Gen Diff Trip C
422
Field Failure
Field Fail1 Trip
423
Field Failure
Field Fail2 Trip
424
NPS Thermal
NPS Trip
425
System Backup
Voltage Dependent O/C Trip 3ph
V Dep OC Trip
426
System Backup
Voltage Dependent O/C Trip A
V Dep OC Trip A
427
System Backup
Voltage Dependent O/C Trip B
V Dep OC Trip B
428
System Backup
Voltage Dependent O/C Trip C
V Dep OC Trip C
429
Overfluxing
Volts per Hz Trip
V/Hz Trip
430
RTD Thermal
RTD 1 TRIP
RTD 1 Trip
431
RTD Thermal
RTD 2 TRIP
RTD 2 Trip
432
RTD Thermal
RTD 3 TRIP
RTD 3 Trip
433
RTD Thermal
RTD 4 TRIP
RTD 4 Trip
434
RTD Thermal
RTD 5 TRIP
RTD 5 Trip
435
RTD Thermal
RTD 6 TRIP
RTD 6 Trip
436
RTD Thermal
RTD 7 TRIP
RTD 7 Trip
437
RTD Thermal
RTD 8 TRIP
RTD 8 Trip
438
RTD Thermal
RTD 9 TRIP
RTD 9 Trip
439
RTD Thermal
RTD 10 TRIP
RTD 10 Trip
440
df/ft
Rate of change of frequency Trip
Any RTD Trip
440
RTD Thermal
Any RTD Trip
df/dt Trip
441
Voltage Vector Shift
V Shift Trip
442
Earth Fault
1st Stage EF Trip
IN>1 Trip
443
Earth Fault
2nd Stage EF Trip
IN>2 Trip
444
Earth Fault
3rd Stage EF Trip
IN>3 Trip
445
Earth Fault
4th Stage EF Trip
IN>4 Trip
Input To Initiate Test Mode
Test Mode
*
*
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 111/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
446
Restricted Earth Fault
REF Trip
IREF> Trip
447
1st Stage SEF Trip
ISEF>1 Trip
448
2nd Stage SEF Trip
ISEF>2 Trip
449
3rd Stage SEF Trip
ISEF>3 Trip
450
4th Stage SEF Trip
ISEF>4 Trip
451
Neutral Displacement
VN>1 Trip
452
Neutral Displacement
VN>2 Trip
453
Under Voltage
V<1 Trip
454
Under Voltage
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB
V<1 Trip A/AB
455
Under Voltage
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC
V<1 Trip B/BC
456
Under Voltage
1st Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA
V<1 Trip C/CA
457
Under Voltage
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph
V<2 Trip
458
Under Voltage
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB
V<2 Trip A/AB
459
Under Voltage
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC
V<2 Trip B/BC
460
Under Voltage
2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA
V<2 Trip C/CA
461
Over Voltage
V>1 Trip
462
Over Voltage
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB
V>1 Trip A/AB
463
Over Voltage
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC
V>1 Trip B/BC
464
Over Voltage
1st Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA
V>1 Trip C/CA
465
Over Voltage
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph
V>2 Trip
466
Over Voltage
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB
V>2 Trip A/AB
467
Over Voltage
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC
V>2 Trip B/BC
468
Over Voltage
2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA
V>2 Trip C/CA
469
Under Frequency
F<1 Trip
470
Under Frequency
F<2 Trip
471
Under Frequency
F<3 Trip
472
Under Frequency
F<4 Trip
473
Over Frequency
F>1 Trip
474
Over Frequency
F>2 Trip
475
Power
Power stage 1 trip
Power1 Trip
476
Power
Power stage 2 trip
Power2 Trip
477
Over Current
I>1 Trip
478
Over Current
I>1 Trip A
479
Over Current
I>1 Trip B
480
Over Current
I>1 Trip C
481
Over Current
I>2 Trip
482
Over Current
I>2 Trip A
483
Over Current
I>2 Trip B
484
Over Current
I>2 Trip C
485
Over Current
I>3 Trip
486
Over Current
I>3 Trip A
487
Over Current
I>3 Trip B
488
Over Current
I>3 Trip C
489
Over Current
I>4 Trip
490
Over Current
I>4 Trip A
491
Over Current
I>4 Trip B
492
Over Current
I>4 Trip C
493
Breaker failure
tBF1 Trip 3Ph
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
494
Breaker failure
tBF2 Trip 3Ph
Bfail2 Trip 3ph
495
Sensitive Power
Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Trip
SPower1 Trip
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 112/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
496
Sensitive Power
SPower2 Trip
497
Z based Pole Slipping
Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Trip
PSlipz Z1 Trip
498
PSlipz Z2 Trip
499
Thermal Overload
Thermal O/L Trip
500
System Backup
Under Impedance Stage 1 Trip 3 Ph
501
System Backup
502
System Backup
503
504
P341 P342 P343

*
*
*
*
Z<1 Trip
Under Impedance Stage 1 Trip A
Z<1 Trip A
Under Impedance Stage 1 Trip B
Z<1 Trip B
System Backup
Under Impedance Stage 1 Trip C
Z<1 Trip C
System Backup
Z<2 Trip
505
System Backup
Z<2 Trip A
506
System Backup
Z<2 Trip B
507
System Backup
Z<2 Trip C
508
UNUSED
509
UNUSED
510
UNUSED
511
UNUSED
512
UNUSED
513
UNUSED
514
UNUSED
515
UNUSED
516
UNUSED
517
UNUSED
518
UNUSED
519
UNUSED
520
UNUSED
521
UNUSED
522
UNUSED
523
UNUSED
524
UNUSED
525
UNUSED
526
UNUSED
527
UNUSED
528
UNUSED
529
UNUSED
530
UNUSED
531
UNUSED
532
UNUSED
533
UNUSED
534
UNUSED
535
UNUSED
536
UNUSED
537
UNUSED
538
UNUSED
539
UNUSED
540
UNUSED
541
UNUSED
542
UNUSED
543
UNUSED
544
UNUSED
545
UNUSED
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 113/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
546
UNUSED
547
UNUSED
548
UNUSED
549
UNUSED
550
UNUSED
551
UNUSED
552
UNUSED
553
UNUSED
554
UNUSED
555
UNUSED
556
UNUSED
557
UNUSED
558
UNUSED
559
UNUSED
560
UNUSED
561
UNUSED
562
UNUSED
563
UNUSED
564
UNUSED
565
UNUSED
566
UNUSED
567
UNUSED
568
UNUSED
569
UNUSED
570
UNUSED
571
UNUSED
572
UNUSED
573
UNUSED
574
UNUSED
575
UNUSED
576
All protection
Any Start
577
Neutral displacement
VN>1 Start
578
Neutral displacement
VN>2 Start
579
Under Voltage
V<1 Start
580
Under Voltage
1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB
V<1 Start A/AB
581
Under Voltage
1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC
V<1 Start B/BC
582
Under Voltage
1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA
V<1 Start C/CA
583
Under Voltage
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph
V<2 Start
584
Under Voltage
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB
V<2 Start A/AB
585
Under Voltage
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC
V<2 Start B/BC
586
Under Voltage
2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA
V<2 Start C/CA
587
Over Voltage
1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph
V>1 Start
588
Over Voltage
1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB
V>1 Start A/AB
589
Over Voltage
1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC
V>1 Start B/BC
590
Over Voltage
1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA
V>1 Start C/CA
591
Over Voltage
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph
V>2 Start
592
Over Voltage
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB
V>2 Start A/AB
593
Over Voltage
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC
V>2 Start B/BC
594
Over Voltage
2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA
V>2 Start C/CA
595
Power
Power Stage 1 start
Power1 Start
Any Start
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 114/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
596
Power
Power stage 1 start
Power2 Start
597
Over Current
I>1 Start
598
Over Current
I>1 Start A
599
Over Current
I>1 Start B
600
Over Current
I>1 Start C
601
Over Current
I>2 Start
602
Over Current
I>2 Start A
603
Over Current
I>2 Start B
604
Over Current
I>2 Start C
605
Over Current
I>3 Start
606
Over Current
I>3 Start A
607
Over Current
I>3 Start B
608
Over Current
I>3 Start C
609
Over Current
I>4 Start
610
Over Current
I>4 Start A
611
Over Current
I>4 Start B
612
Over Current
I>4 Start C
613
Earth Fault
1st Stage EF Start
IN>1 Start
614
Earth Fault
2nd Stage EF Start
IN>2 Start
615
Earth Fault
3rd Stage EF Start
IN>3 Start
616
Earth Fault
4th Stage EF Start
IN>4 Start
617
1st Stage SEF Start
ISEF>1 Start
618
2nd Stage SEF Start
ISEF>2 Start
619
3rd Stage SEF Start
ISEF>3 Start
620
4th Stage SEF Start
ISEF>4 Start
621
100% Stator Earth Fault
100% ST EF Start
622
Under Frequency
Under frequency Stage 1 START
F<1 Start
623
Under Frequency
F<2 Start
624
Under Frequency
F<3 Start
625
Under Frequency
F<4 Start
626
Over Frequency
Over frequency Stage 1 START
F>1 Start
627
Over Frequency
F>2 Start
628
Over Current
I> Blocked O/C Start, inhibited by CB Fail
I> BlockStart
629
Over Current
IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start, inhibited by CB Fail
IN/SEF>Blk Start
630
df/dt
Rate of change of frequency Start
df/dt Start
631
Under Current
IA< operate
IA< Start
632
Under Current
IB< operate
IB< Start
633
Under Current
IC< operate
IC< Start
634
Under Current
ISEF< operate
ISEF< Start
635
Under Current
IN< operate
IN< Start
636
Overfluxing
Volts per Hz Start
V/Hz Start
637
Field Failure
FFail1 Start
638
Field Failure
FFail2 Start
639
System Backup
Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start
V Dep OC Start
640
System Backup
Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start A
V Dep OC Start A
641
System Backup
Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start B
V Dep OC Start B
642
System Backup
Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start C
V Dep OC Start C
643
Sensitive Power
Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Start
SPower1 Start
644
Sensitive Power
SPower2 Start
645
Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Start
PSlipz Z1 Start
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 115/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
646
PSlipz Z2 Start
647
Pole Slip (impedance) Lens Start
PSlipz LensStart
648
Pole Slip (impedance) Blinder Start
PSlipz BlindStrt
649
Pole Slip (impedance) Reactance Line Start
PSlipz ReactStrt
650
System Backup
Under Impedance Stage 1 Start
Z<1 Start
651
System Backup
Under Impedance Stage 1 Start A
Z<1 Start A
652
System Backup
Under Impedance Stage 1 Start B
Z<1 Start B
653
System Backup
Under Impedance Stage 1 Start C
Z<1 Start C
654
System Backup
Z<2 Start
655
System Backup
Z<2 Start A
656
System Backup
Z<2 Start B
657
System Backup
Z<2 Start C
658
UNUSED
659
UNUSED
660
UNUSED
661
UNUSED
662
UNUSED
663
UNUSED
664
UNUSED
665
UNUSED
666
UNUSED
667
UNUSED
668
UNUSED
669
UNUSED
670
UNUSED
671
UNUSED
672
UNUSED
673
UNUSED
674
UNUSED
675
UNUSED
676
UNUSED
677
UNUSED
678
UNUSED
679
UNUSED
680
UNUSED
681
UNUSED
682
UNUSED
683
UNUSED
684
UNUSED
685
UNUSED
686
UNUSED
687
UNUSED
688
UNUSED
689
UNUSED
690
UNUSED
691
UNUSED
692
UNUSED
693
UNUSED
694
UNUSED
695
UNUSED
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 116/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
696
UNUSED
697
UNUSED
698
UNUSED
699
UNUSED
700
UNUSED
701
UNUSED
702
UNUSED
703
UNUSED
704
UNUSED
705
UNUSED
706
UNUSED
707
UNUSED
708
UNUSED
709
UNUSED
710
UNUSED
711
UNUSED
712
UNUSED
713
UNUSED
714
UNUSED
715
UNUSED
716
UNUSED
717
UNUSED
718
UNUSED
719
UNUSED
720
UNUSED
721
UNUSED
722
UNUSED
723
UNUSED
724
UNUSED
725
UNUSED
726
UNUSED
727
UNUSED
728
UNUSED
729
UNUSED
730
UNUSED
731
UNUSED
732
UNUSED
733
UNUSED
734
UNUSED
735
UNUSED
736
VT Supervision
VTS Fast Block
VTS Fast Block
737
VT Supervision
VTS Slow Block
VTS Slow Block
738
CT Supervision
CTS Block
CTS Block
739
CB Control
Control Trip
Control Trip
740
CB Control
Control Close
Control Close
741
CB Control
Close in Prog
742
Reconnection
Reconnection Time Delay Output
Reconnection
743
RTD Thermal
RTD 1 Alarm
RTD 1 Alarm
744
RTD Thermal
RTD 2 Alarm
RTD 2 Alarm
745
RTD Thermal
RTD 3 Alarm
RTD 3 Alarm
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 117/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
746
RTD Thermal
RTD 4 Alarm
RTD 4 Alarm
747
RTD Thermal
RTD 5 Alarm
RTD 5 Alarm
748
RTD Thermal
RTD 6 Alarm
RTD 6 Alarm
749
RTD Thermal
RTD 7 Alarm
RTD 7 Alarm
750
RTD Thermal
RTD 8 Alarm
RTD 8 Alarm
751
RTD Thermal
RTD 9 Alarm
RTD 9 Alarm
752
RTD Thermal
RTD 10 Alarm
RTD 10 Alarm
753
CB Monitoring
Composite lockout alarm
Lockout Alarm
754
CB Status Monitor
3 ph CB Open
CB Open 3 ph
755
CB Status Monitor
3 ph CB Closed
CB Closed 3 ph
756
Field Voltage Monitor
Field volts fail
757
Poledead
All Poles Dead
All Poles Dead
758
Poledead
Any Pole Dead
Any Pole Dead
759
Poledead
Phase A Pole Dead
Pole Dead A
760
Poledead
Phase B Pole Dead
Pole Dead B
761
Poledead
Phase C Pole Dead
Pole Dead C
762
VT Supervision
Accelerate Ind
VTS Acc Ind
763
VT Supervision
Any Voltage Dependent
VTS Volt Dep
764
VT Supervision
Ia over threshold
VTS IA>
765
VT Supervision
Ib over threshold
VTS IB>
766
VT Supervision
Ic over threshold
VTS IC>
767
VT Supervision
Va over threshold
VTS VA>
768
VT Supervision
Vb over threshold
VTS VB>
769
VT Supervision
Vc over threshold
VTS VC>
770
VT Supervision
I2 over threshold
VTS I2>
771
VT Supervision
V2 over threshold
VTS V2>
772
VT Supervision
Superimposed Ia over threshold
VTS IA delta>
773
VT Supervision
Superimposed Ib over threshold
VTS IB delta>
774
VT Supervision
Superimposed Ic over threshold
VTS IC delta>
775
CB Failure
CBF current prot SEF stage trip
BFail SEF Trip-1
776
CB Failure
CBF non current prot stage trip
BFail Non I Tr-1
777
CB Failure
CBF current Prot SEF Trip
BFail SEF Trip
778
CB Failure
CBF Non Current Prot Trip
BFail Non I Trip
779
Frequency tracking
Freq High
Freq High
780
Frequency tracking
Freq Low
Freq Low
781
Frequency tracking
Freq Not found
Freq Not found
782
Frequency tracking
Stop Freq Track
Stop Freq Track
783
Reconnection
Reconnect LOM (unqualified)
Recon LOM-1
784
Reconnection
Reconnect Disable (unqualified)
Recon Disable-1
785
Reconnection
Reconnect LOM
Recon LOM
786
Reconnection
Reconnect Disable
Recon Disable
787
UNUSED
788
UNUSED
789
UNUSED
790
UNUSED
791
UNUSED
792
UNUSED
793
UNUSED
794
UNUSED
795
UNUSED
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 118/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
796
UNUSED
797
UNUSED
798
UNUSED
799
UNUSED
800
UNUSED
801
UNUSED
802
UNUSED
803
UNUSED
804
UNUSED
805
UNUSED
806
UNUSED
807
UNUSED
808
UNUSED
809
UNUSED
810
UNUSED
811
UNUSED
812
UNUSED
813
UNUSED
814
UNUSED
815
UNUSED
816
UNUSED
817
UNUSED
818
UNUSED
819
UNUSED
820
UNUSED
821
UNUSED
822
UNUSED
823
UNUSED
824
UNUSED
825
UNUSED
826
UNUSED
827
UNUSED
828
UNUSED
829
UNUSED
830
UNUSED
831
UNUSED
832
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 1
833
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 2
834
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 3
835
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 4
836
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 5
837
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 6
838
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 7
839
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 8
840
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 9
841
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 10
842
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 11
843
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 12
844
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 13
845
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 14
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 119/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
846
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 15
847
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 16
848
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 17
849
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 18
850
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 19
851
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 20
852
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 21
853
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 22
854
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 23
855
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 24
856
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 25
857
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 26
858
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 27
859
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 28
860
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 29
861
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 30
862
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 31
863
CONTROL
Control Input
Control Input 32
864
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 1
865
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 2
866
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 3
867
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 4
868
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 5
869
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 6
870
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 7
871
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 8
872
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 9
873
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 10
874
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 11
875
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 12
876
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 13
877
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 14
878
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 15
879
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 16
880
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 17
881
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 18
882
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 19
883
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 20
884
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 21
885
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 22
886
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 23
887
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 24
888
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 25
889
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 26
890
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 27
891
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 28
892
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 29
893
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 30
894
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 31
895
UNUSED
GOOSE VIP 32
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 120/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
896
UNUSED
GOOSE VOP 1
897
UNUSED
GOOSE VOP 2
898
UNUSED
GOOSE VOP 3
899
UNUSED
GOOSE VOP 4
900
UNUSED
GOOSE VOP 5
901
UNUSED
GOOSE VOP 6
902
UNUSED
GOOSE VOP 7
903
UNUSED
GOOSE VOP 8
904
UNUSED
InterLogic I/P 1
905
UNUSED
InterLogic I/P 2
906
UNUSED
InterLogic I/P 3
907
UNUSED
InterLogic I/P 4
908
UNUSED
InterLogic I/P 5
909
UNUSED
InterLogic I/P 6
910
UNUSED
InterLogic I/P 7
911
UNUSED
InterLogic I/P 8
912
UNUSED
InterLogic O/P 1
913
UNUSED
InterLogic O/P 2
914
UNUSED
InterLogic O/P 3
915
UNUSED
InterLogic O/P 4
916
UNUSED
InterLogic O/P 5
917
UNUSED
InterLogic O/P 6
918
UNUSED
InterLogic O/P 7
919
UNUSED
InterLogic O/P 8
920
UNUSED
Direct Ctrl 1
921
UNUSED
Direct Ctrl 2
922
UNUSED
Direct Ctrl 3
923
UNUSED
Direct Ctrl 4
924
UNUSED
Direct Ctrl 5
925
UNUSED
Direct Ctrl 6
926
UNUSED
Direct Ctrl 7
927
UNUSED
928
PSLINT
PSL Internal Node 1
PSL Int. 1
929
PSLINT
PSL Internal Node 2
PSL Int. 2
930
PSLINT
PSL Internal Node 3
PSL Int. 3
931
PSLINT
PSL Internal Node 4
PSL Int. 4
932
PSLINT
PSL Internal Node 5
PSL Int. 5
933
PSLINT
PSL Internal Node 6
PSL Int. 6
934
PSLINT
PSL Internal Node 7
PSL Int. 7
935
PSLINT
PSL Internal Node 8
PSL Int. 8
936
PSLINT
PSL Internal Node 9
PSL Int. 9
937
PSLINT
PSL Int. 10
938
PSLINT
PSL Int. 11
939
PSLINT
PSL Int. 12
940
PSLINT
PSL Int. 13
941
PSLINT
PSL Int. 14
942
PSLINT
PSL Int. 15
943
PSLINT
PSL Int. 16
944
PSLINT
PSL Int. 17
945
PSLINT
PSL Int. 18
Direct Ctrl 8
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 121/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
946
PSLINT
PSL Int. 19
947
PSLINT
PSL Int. 20
948
PSLINT
PSL Int. 21
949
PSLINT
PSL Int. 22
950
PSLINT
PSL Int. 23
951
PSLINT
PSL Int. 24
952
PSLINT
PSL Int. 25
953
PSLINT
PSL Int. 26
954
PSLINT
PSL Int. 27
955
PSLINT
PSL Int. 28
956
PSLINT
PSL Int. 29
957
PSLINT
PSL Int. 30
958
PSLINT
PSL Int. 31
959
PSLINT
PSL Int. 32
960
PSLINT
PSL Int. 33
961
PSLINT
PSL Int. 34
962
PSLINT
PSL Int. 35
963
PSLINT
PSL Int. 36
964
PSLINT
PSL Int. 37
965
PSLINT
PSL Int. 38
966
PSLINT
PSL Int. 39
967
PSLINT
PSL Int. 40
968
PSLINT
PSL Int. 41
969
PSLINT
PSL Int. 42
970
PSLINT
PSL Int. 43
971
PSLINT
PSL Int. 44
972
PSLINT
PSL Int. 45
973
PSLINT
PSL Int. 46
974
PSLINT
PSL Int. 47
975
PSLINT
PSL Int. 48
976
PSLINT
PSL Int. 49
977
PSLINT
PSL Int. 50
978
PSLINT
PSL Int. 51
979
PSLINT
PSL Int. 52
980
PSLINT
PSL Int. 53
981
PSLINT
PSL Int. 54
982
PSLINT
PSL Int. 55
983
PSLINT
PSL Int. 56
984
PSLINT
PSL Int. 57
985
PSLINT
PSL Int. 58
986
PSLINT
PSL Int. 59
987
PSLINT
PSL Int. 60
988
PSLINT
PSL Int. 61
989
PSLINT
PSL Int. 62
990
PSLINT
PSL Int. 63
991
PSLINT
PSL Int. 64
992
PSLINT
PSL Int. 65
993
PSLINT
PSL Int. 66
994
PSLINT
PSL Int. 67
995
PSLINT
PSL Int. 68
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
DDB No.
Page 122/158
Source
Description
English Text
0123456789ABCDEF
P341 P342 P343
996
PSLINT
PSL Int. 69
997
PSLINT
PSL Int. 70
998
PSLINT
PSL Int. 71
999
PSLINT
PSL Int. 72
1000
PSLINT
PSL Int. 73
1001
PSLINT
PSL Int. 74
1002
PSLINT
PSL Int. 75
1003
PSLINT
PSL Int. 76
1004
PSLINT
PSL Int. 77
1005
PSLINT
PSL Int. 78
1006
PSLINT
PSL Int. 79
1007
PSLINT
PSL Int. 80
1008
PSLINT
PSL Int. 81
1009
PSLINT
PSL Int. 82
1010
PSLINT
PSL Int. 83
1011
PSLINT
PSL Int. 84
1012
PSLINT
PSL Int. 85
1013
PSLINT
PSL Int. 86
1014
PSLINT
PSL Int. 87
1015
PSLINT
PSL Int. 88
1016
PSLINT
PSL Int. 89
1017
PSLINT
PSL Int. 90
1018
PSLINT
PSL Int. 91
1019
PSLINT
PSL Int. 92
1020
PSLINT
PSL Int. 93
1021
PSLINT
PSL Int. 94
1022
PSLINT
PSL Int. 95
P341/EN GC/D22
Relay M enu D atabase
Page 123/158
M iC O M P341
Event Record Data Format
Event Text
Additional
Text
Event Description
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
0020
Value
Logic Inputs
Changes in opto input status
DDB No.
P341 P342 P343

*
Value contains new opto input status

Output Contacts
Changes in output contact status
0021
Value contains new output contact status

Alarm Events
Bit position for alarm
Battery Fail
ON/OFF
Battery Fail
2/3
0022
Field Volt Fail
ON/OFF
Field Voltage Fail
2/3
0022
SG-opto Invalid
ON/OFF
Setting Group via opto invalid
2/3
0022
Prot'n Disabled
ON/OFF
Protection Disabled
2/3
0022
VT Fail Alarm
ON/OFF
VTS Alarm
2/3
0022
CT Fail Alarm
ON/OFF
CTS Alarm
2/3
0022
CB Fail Alarm
ON/OFF
CB Trip Fail Protection
0/1
0022
I^ Maint Alarm
ON/OFF
2/3
0022
I^ Lockout Alarm
ON/OFF
2/3
0022
CB Ops Maint
ON/OFF
No of CB Ops Maintenance Alarm
2/3
0022
CB Ops Lockout
ON/OFF
No of CB Ops Maintenance Lockout
2/3
0022
10
CB Op Time Maint
ON/OFF
CB Op Time Maintenance Alarm
2/3
0022
11
CB Op Time Lock
ON/OFF
CB Op Time Lockout Alarm
2/3
0022
12
Fault Freq Lock
ON/OFF
2/3
0022
13
CB Status Alarm
ON/OFF
CB Status Alarm
0/1
0022
14
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 124/158
M iC O M P341
Event Text
Additional
Text
Event Description
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
Value
DDB No.
P341 P342 P343
Man CB Trip Fail
ON/OFF
CB Failed to Trip
0/1
0022
15
Man CB Cls Fail
ON/OFF
CB Failed to Close
0/1
0022
16
Man CB Unhealthy
ON/OFF
No Healthy Control Close
0/1
0023
17
*
*
F out of range
ON/OFF
2/3
0022
18
NPS Alarm
ON/OFF
0/1
0022
18
Thermal Alarm
ON/OFF
0/1
0023
19
V/Hz Alarm
ON/OFF
Volts Per Hz Alarm
0/1
0022
Field Fail Alarm
ON/OFF
Field failure Alarm (Latched)
0/1
0022
RTD Thermal Alm
ON/OFF
RTD thermal Alarm (Latched)
0/1
0022
22
RTD Open Cct
ON/OFF
RTD open circuit failure (Latched)
0/1
0022
23
RTD short Cct
ON/OFF
RTD short circuit failure (Latched)
0/1
0022
24
RTD Data Error
ON/OFF
RTD data inconsistency error (Latched)
0/1
0022
25
RTD Board Fail
ON/OFF
RTD Board failure (Latched)
0/1
0022
26
Freq Prot Alm
ON/OFF
User definable frequency protection alarm

(Latched)
0/1
0022
27
Voltage Prot Alm
ON/OFF
User definable voltage protection alarm

(Latched)
0/1
0022
28
User Alarm 1
ON/OFF
User Definable Alarm 1 (Latched)
0/1
0022
29
User Alarm 2
ON/OFF
User Definable Alarm 2 (Latched)
0/1
0022
30
User Alarm 3
ON/OFF
User Definable Alarm 3 (Self Reset)
2/3
0022
31
20
21
Protection Events
Bit position for event
100% ST EF Trip
ON/OFF
0F2D
416
DeadMachine trip
ON/OFF
0F2D
417
Gen Diff Trip
ON/OFF
Generator Differential trip 3ph
0F2D
418
Gen Diff Trip A
ON/OFF
0F2D
419
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 125/158
M iC O M P341
Event Text
Additional
Text
Event Description
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
Value
DDB No.
P341 P342 P343
Gen Diff Trip B
ON/OFF
0F2D
420
Gen Diff Trip C
ON/OFF
0F2D
421
Field Fail1 Trip
ON/OFF
Field failure Stage 1 Trip
0F2D
422
Field Fail2 Trip
ON/OFF
Field failure Stage 2 Trip
0F2D
423
NPS Trip
ON/OFF
0F2D
424
V Dep O/C Trip
ON/OFF
Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Trip 3ph
0F2D
425
V Dep O/C Trip A
ON/OFF
Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Trip A
0F2D
10
426
V Dep O/C Trip B
ON/OFF
Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Trip B
0F2D
11
427
V Dep O/C Trip C
ON/OFF
Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Trip C
0F2D
12
428
V/Hz Trip
ON/OFF
Volts per Hz Trip
0F2D
13
429
RTD 1 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 1 TRIP
0F2D
14
430
RTD 2 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 2 TRIP
0F2D
15
431
RTD 3 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 3 TRIP
0F2D
16
432
RTD 4 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 4 TRIP
0F2D
17
433
RTD 5 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 5 TRIP
0F2D
18
434
RTD 6 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 6 TRIP
0F2D
19
435
RTD 7 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 7 TRIP
0F2D
20
436
RTD 8 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 8 TRIP
0F2D
21
437
RTD 9 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 9 TRIP
0F2D
22
438
RTD 10 Trip
ON/OFF
RTD 10 TRIP
0F2D
23
439
df/dt Trip
ON/OFF
Rate of change of frequency Trip
0F2D
24
440
Any RTD Trip
ON/OFF
Any RTD Trip
0F2D
24
440
V Shift Trip
ON/OFF
0F2D
25
441
IN>1 Trip
ON/OFF
1st Stage EF Trip
0F2D
26
442
IN>2 Trip
ON/OFF
2nd Stage EF Trip
0F2D
27
443
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 126/158
M iC O M P341
Event Text
Additional
Text
Event Description
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
Value
DDB No.
P341 P342 P343
IN>3 Trip
ON/OFF
3rd Stage EF Trip
0F2D
28
444
IN>4 Trip
ON/OFF
4th Stage EF Trip
0F2D
29
445
IREF> Trip
ON/OFF
REF Trip
0F2D
30
446
ISEF>1 Trip
ON/OFF
1st Stage SEF Trip
0F2D
31
447
ISEF>2 Trip
ON/OFF
2nd Stage SEF Trip
0F2E
448
ISEF>3 Trip
ON/OFF
3rd Stage SEF Trip
0F2E
449
ISEF>4 Trip
ON/OFF
4th Stage SEF Trip
0F2E
450
VN>1 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2E
451
VN>2 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2E
452
V<1 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2E
453
V<1 Trip A/AB
ON/OFF
0F2E
454
V<1 Trip B/BC
ON/OFF
0F2E
455
V<1 Trip C/CA
ON/OFF
0F2E
456
V<2 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2E
457
V<2 Trip A/AB
ON/OFF
0F2E
10
458
V<2 Trip B/BC
ON/OFF
0F2E
11
459
V<2 Trip C/CA
ON/OFF
0F2E
12
460
V>1 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2E
13
461
V>1 Trip A/AB
ON/OFF
0F2E
14
462
V>1 Trip B/BC
ON/OFF
0F2E
15
463
V>1 Trip C/CA
ON/OFF
0F2E
16
464
V>2 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2E
17
465
V>2 Trip A/AB
ON/OFF
0F2E
18
466
V>2 Trip B/BC
ON/OFF
0F2E
19
467
V>2 Trip C/CA
ON/OFF
0F2E
20
468
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 127/158
M iC O M P341
Event Text
Additional
Text
Event Description
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
Value
DDB No.
P341 P342 P343
F<1 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2E
21
469
F<2 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2E
22
470
F<3 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2E
23
471
F<4 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2E
24
472
F>1 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2E
25
473
F>2 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2E
26
474
Power1 Trip
ON/OFF
Power stage 1 trip
0F2E
27
475
Power2 Trip
ON/OFF
Power stage 2 trip
0F2E
28
476
I>1 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2E
29
477
I>1 Trip A
ON/OFF
0F2E
30
478
I>1 Trip B
ON/OFF
0F2E
31
479
I>1 Trip C
ON/OFF
0F2F
480
I>2 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2F
481
I>2 Trip A
ON/OFF
0F2F
482
I>2 Trip B
ON/OFF
0F2F
483
I>2 Trip C
ON/OFF
0F2F
484
I>3 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2F
485
I>3 Trip A
ON/OFF
0F2F
486
I>3 Trip B
ON/OFF
0F2F
487
I>3 Trip C
ON/OFF
0F2F
488
I>4 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2F
489
I>4 Trip A
ON/OFF
0F2F
10
490
I>4 Trip B
ON/OFF
0F2F
11
491
I>4 Trip C
ON/OFF
0F2F
12
492
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
ON/OFF
tBF1 Trip 3Ph
0F2F
13
493
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 128/158
M iC O M P341
Event Text
Additional
Text
Event Description
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
Value
DDB No.
P341 P342 P343
Bfail2 Trip 3ph
ON/OFF
tBF2 Trip 3Ph
0F2F
14
494
SPower1 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2F
15
495
SPower2 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2F
16
496
PSlipz Z1 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2F
17
497
PSlipz Z2 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2F
18
498
Thermal O/L Trip
ON/OFF
0F2F
19
499
Z<1 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2F
20
500
Z<1 Trip A
ON/OFF
0F2F
21
501
Z<1 Trip B
ON/OFF
0F2F
22
502
Z<1 Trip C
ON/OFF
0F2F
23
503
Z<2 Trip
ON/OFF
0F2F
24
504
Z<2 Trip A
ON/OFF
0F2F
25
505
Z<2 Trip B
ON/OFF
0F2F
26
506
Z<2 Trip C
ON/OFF
0F2F
27
507
Any Start
ON/OFF
Any Start
0F32
576
VN>1 Start
ON/OFF
0F32
577
VN>2 Start
ON/OFF
0F32
578
V<1 Start
ON/OFF
0F32
579
V<1 Start A/AB
ON/OFF
0F32
580
V<1 Start B/BC
ON/OFF
0F32
581
V<1 Start C/CA
ON/OFF
0F32
582
V<2 Start
ON/OFF
0F32
583
V<2 Start A/AB
ON/OFF
0F32
584
V<2 Start B/BC
ON/OFF
0F32
585
V<2 Start C/CA
ON/OFF
0F32
10
586
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 129/158
M iC O M P341
Event Text
Additional
Text
Event Description
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
Value
DDB No.
P341 P342 P343
V>1 Start
ON/OFF
0F32
11
587
V>1 Start A/AB
ON/OFF
0F32
12
588
V>1 Start B/BC
ON/OFF
0F32
13
589
V>1 Start C/CA
ON/OFF
0F32
14
590
V>2 Start
ON/OFF
0F32
15
591
V>2 Start A/AB
ON/OFF
0F32
16
592
V>2 Start B/BC
ON/OFF
0F32
17
593
V>2 Start C/CA
ON/OFF
0F32
18
594
Power1 Start
ON/OFF
Power Stage 1 start
0F32
19
595
Power2 Start
ON/OFF
Power stage 1 start
0F32
20
596
I>1 Start
ON/OFF
0F32
21
597
I>1 Start A
ON/OFF
0F32
22
598
I>1 Start B
ON/OFF
0F32
23
599
I>1 Start C
ON/OFF
0F32
24
600
I>2 Start
ON/OFF
0F32
25
601
I>2 Start A
ON/OFF
0F32
26
602
I>2 Start B
ON/OFF
0F32
27
603
I>2 Start C
ON/OFF
0F32
28
604
I>3 Start
ON/OFF
0F32
29
605
I>3 Start A
ON/OFF
0F32
30
606
I>3 Start B
ON/OFF
0F32
31
607
I>3 Start C
ON/OFF
0F33
608
I>4 Start
ON/OFF
0F33
609
I>4 Start A
ON/OFF
0F33
610
I>4 Start B
ON/OFF
0F33
611
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 130/158
M iC O M P341
Event Text
Additional
Text
Event Description
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
Value
DDB No.
P341 P342 P343
I>4 Start C
ON/OFF
0F33
612
IN>1 Start
ON/OFF
1st Stage EF Start
0F33
613
IN>2 Start
ON/OFF
2nd Stage EF Start
0F33
614
IN>3 Start
ON/OFF
3rd Stage EF Start
0F33
615
IN>4 Start
ON/OFF
4th Stage EF Start
0F33
616
ISEF>1 Start
ON/OFF
1st Stage SEF Start
0F33
617
ISEF>2 Start
ON/OFF
2nd Stage SEF Start
0F33
10
618
ISEF>3 Start
ON/OFF
3rd Stage SEF Start
0F33
11
619
ISEF>4 Start
ON/OFF
4th Stage SEF Start
0F33
12
620
100% ST EF Start
ON/OFF
0F33
13
621
F<1 Start
ON/OFF
0F33
14
622
F<2 Start
ON/OFF
0F33
15
623
F<3 Start
ON/OFF
0F33
16
624
F<4 Start
ON/OFF
0F33
17
625
F>1 Start
ON/OFF
0F33
18
626
F>2 Start
ON/OFF
0F33
19
627
I> BlockStart
ON/OFF
I> Blocked O/C Start, inhibited by CB Fail
0F33
20
628
IN/SEF>Blk Start
ON/OFF
IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start, inhibited by CB

Fail
0F33
21
629
df/dt Start
ON/OFF
Rate of change of frequency Start
0F33
22
630
IA< Start
ON/OFF
IA< operate
0F33
23
631
IB< Start
ON/OFF
IB< operate
0F33
24
632
IC< Start
ON/OFF
IC< operate
0F33
25
633
ISEF< Start
ON/OFF
ISEF< operate
0F33
26
634
IN< Start
ON/OFF
IN< operate
0F33
27
635
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 131/158
M iC O M P341
Event Text
Additional
Text
Event Description
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
Value
DDB No.
P341 P342 P343
V/Hz Start
ON/OFF
Volts per Hz Start
0F33
28
636
FFail1 Start
ON/OFF
0F33
29
637
FFail2 Start
ON/OFF
0F33
30
638
V Dep OC Start
ON/OFF
Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start
0F33
31
639
V Dep OC Start A
ON/OFF
Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start A
0F34
640
V Dep OC Start B
ON/OFF
Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start B
0F34
641
V Dep OC Start C
ON/OFF
Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Start C
0F34
642
SPower1 Start
ON/OFF
0F34
643
SPower2 Start
ON/OFF
0F34
644
PSlipz Z1 Start
ON/OFF
0F34
645
PSlipz Z2 Start
ON/OFF
0F34
646
PSlipz LensStart
ON/OFF
0F34
647
PSlipz BlindStrt
ON/OFF
0F34
648
PSlipz ReactStrt
ON/OFF
0F34
649
Z<1 Start
ON/OFF
0F34
10
650
Z<1 Start A
ON/OFF
0F34
11
651
Z<1 Start B
ON/OFF
0F34
12
652
Z<1 Start C
ON/OFF
0F34
13
653
Z<2 Start
ON/OFF
0F34
14
654
Z<2 Start A
ON/OFF
0F34
15
655
Z<2 Start B
ON/OFF
0F34
16
656
Z<2 Start C
ON/OFF
0F34
17
657
Control Trip
ON/OFF
Control Trip
0F37
739
Control Close
ON/OFF
Control Close
0F37
740
Close in Prog
ON/OFF
0F37
741
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 132/158
M iC O M P341
Event Text
Additional
Text
Event Description
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
Value
DDB No.
P341 P342 P343
RTD 1 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 1 Alarm
0F37
743
RTD 2 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 2 Alarm
0F37
744
RTD 3 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 3 Alarm
0F37
745
RTD 4 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 4 Alarm
0F37
10
746
RTD 5 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 5 Alarm
0F37
11
747
RTD 6 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 6 Alarm
0F37
12
748
RTD 7 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 7 Alarm
0F37
13
749
RTD 8 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 8 Alarm
0F37
14
750
RTD 9 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 9 Alarm
0F37
15
751
RTD 10 Alarm
ON/OFF
RTD 10 Alarm
0F37
16
752
CB Open 3 ph
ON/OFF
3 ph CB Open
0F37
18
754
CB Closed 3 ph
ON/OFF
3 ph CB Closed
0F37
19
755
General Events
Alarms Cleared
Relay Alarms Cleared
FFFF
Events Cleared
Relay Event Records Cleared
0B01
Faults Cleared
Relay Fault Records Cleared
0B02
Maint Cleared
Relay Maintenance Records Cleared
0B03
PW Unlocked UI
Password Unlocked via User Interface
0002
PW Invalid UI
Invalid Password entered on User Interface
0002
PW1 Modified UI
Password Level 1 Modified on User Interface
0002
PW2 Modified UI
Password Level 2 Modified on User Interface
0002
PW Expired UI
Password unlock expired User Interface
0002
PW Unlocked F
Password Unlocked via Front Port
0002
PW Invalid F
Invalid Password entered on Front Port
0002
10
PW1 Modified F
Password Level 1 Modified on Front Port
0002
11
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 133/158
M iC O M P341
Event Text
Additional
Text
Event Description
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
Value
DDB No.
P341 P342 P343
PW2 Modified F
Password Level 2 Modified on Front Port
0002
12
PW Expired F
Password unlock expired Front Port
0002
13
PW Unlocked R
Password Unlocked via Rear Port
0002
14
PW Invalid R
Invalid Password entered on Rear Port
0002
15
PW1 Modified R
Password Level 1 Modified on Rear Port
0002
16
PW2 Modified R
Password Level 2 Modified on Rear Port
0002
17
PW Expired R
Password unlock expired Rear Port
0002
18
IRIG-B Active
IRIG-B Timesync Active (Valid Signal)
0805
19
IRIG-B Inactive
IRIG-B Timesync Inactive (No Signal)
0805
20
Time Synch
Relay Clock Adjusted
0801
21
C&S Changed
Control and Support Settings Changed
FFFF
22
Dist Changed
Disturbance Recorder Settings Changed
0904
23
Group 1 Changed
Change to Protection Setting Group 1
0904
24
Group 2 Changed
0904
25
Group 3 Changed
0904
26
Group 4 Changed
0904
27
Act Grp Changed
Active Group Selection Changed
0903
28
Indication Reset
Relay Indications Reset
01FF
29
Power On
Relay Powered Up
FFFF
30
Cell Ref
Value
0100
Cell Ref
Value
Text
Fault Recorder
Fault Recorded
Fault Records
Text
Self Monitoring
Maint Recorded
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Record Text
Description
Fast W'Dog Error
Fast Watchdog Error
8
9
FFFF
0
Continuous
Extraction Column
Record No.
B000
16bit UINT
Extraction Column
Record No.
B100
16bit UINT
P341 P342 P343
*
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 134/158
M iC O M P341
Event Text
Additional
Text
Event Description
Modbus
Event Type
G13
Courier
Cell Ref
Value
DDB No.
P341 P342 P343
Battery Failure
Battery Failure
BBRAM Failure
Battery Back RAM Failure
Field Volt Fail
Bus Reset Error
Bus Error
Slow W'Dog Error
Slow Watchdog Error
SRAM Failure Bus
SRAM Bus Failure
SRAM Failure Blk
SRAM Block Failure
FLASH Failure
Flash checksum Error
Code Verify Fail
Software Code Verification Failure
EEPROM Failure
EEPROM Failure
Software Failure
Software Error
Hard Verify Fail
Hardware Verification Error
Non Standard
General Error
Relay Menu Database

MiCOM P341
DNP 3.0
Device Profile Document
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 135/158
Issue: E
Date: 31 May 2001
Vendor Name:
Alstom T&D Protection & Control Ltd.
Device Name:
P340 Generator Protection
Models Covered: P341***A4**04**
P342****4**04*
P343****4**04*
Highest DNP Level Supported:
Device Function:
For Requests:
Level 2
Master
For Responses: Level 2
Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP
Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the DNP V3.0 Implementation table):
For static (non-change-event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00 and 01
(start-stop), 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are supported in
addition to request qualifier code 06 (no range).
Static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded
with qualifiers 00 or 01.
Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with
qualifiers 17 or 28.
For change-event object requests, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
16-bit and 32-bit Analog Change Events with Time may be requested.
The read function code for Object 50 (Time and Date), variation 1, is supported.
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted: 292
Transmitted: 2048
292
249
Received:
Received:
Maximum Data Link Re-tries:
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
None
None
Fixed at 2
Configurable
Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
Never
Always
When reporting Event Data
When sending multi-fragment responses
Sometimes
Configurable
P341/EN GC/D22
Relay Menu Database
Page 136/158
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm:
MiCOM P341
None
Fixed at
100ms
Fixed at
Fixed at 1s
Fixed at
Variable
Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment:

None
Variable
Configurable
Application Confirm:
None
Variable
Configurable
Complete Appl. Response:
None
Variable
Configurable
Others:
Inter-character Delay:
4 character times at selected baud rate.
Select/Operate Arm Timeout: default 10s.
Need Time Interval:
configurable, 0 or 30min.
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs
Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE
Always
Never
Sometimes
Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE
Always
Never
Sometimes
Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK
Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable
Count > 1
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Queue
Clear Queue
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Never
Never
Sometimes
Configurable
Never
Never
Sometimes
Configurable
Reports Binary Input Change Events when Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change
no specific variation requested:
Events when no specific variation requested:
Never
Never
Only time-tagged, var 2
Binary Input Change With Time
Only non-time-tagged
Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable
Configurable
Sends Unsolicited Responses:
Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
Never
Never
Configurable
When Device Restarts
Only certain Objects
When Status Flags Change
Sometimes
No other options are permitted.
ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported
Default Counter Object/Variation:
Counters Roll Over at:
No Counters Reported
No Counters Reported
Configurable
Configurable
Default Object: 20
16 Bits
Default Variation: 5
32 Bits
Point-by-point list attached
Other Value:____
Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
Yes
No
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 137/158
Object
Object Variation
Number Number
Request
Description
Response
Function
Codes (dec)
Qualifier
Codes (hex)
Function
Codes (dec)
Qualifier
Codes (hex)
Binary Input - Any Variation
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
Binary Input
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
129
00,01,17,28
Binary Input with Status
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
129
00,01,17,28
Binary Input Change - Any Variation
06,07,08
129
Binary Input Change without Time
06,07,08
129
17,28
Binary Input Change with Time
06,07,08
129
17,28
10
Binary Output - All Variations
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
10
Binary Output Status
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
129
00,01,17,28
12
Control Relay Output Block
3,4,5,6
00,01,07,08,
17,28
129
echo
20
Binary Counter
1,7,8,9,10
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
20
32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag
1,7,8,9,10
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
129
00,01,17,28
20
16-Bit Bianry Counter with Flag
1,7,8,9,10
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
129
00,01,17,28
20
32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
1,7,8,9,10
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
129
00,01,17,28
20
16-Bit Binary Counter Without Flag
1,7,8,9,10
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
129
00,01,17,28
21
Frozen Counter
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
21
32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
129
00,01,17,28
21
16-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
129
00,01,17,28
21
32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
129
00,01,17,28
21
10
16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
129
00,01,17,28
30
Analog Input - All Variations
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
30
32-Bit Analog Input
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
129
00,01,17,28
30
16-Bit Analog Input
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
129
00,01,17,28
30
32-Bit Analog Input without Flag
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
129
00,01,17,28
30
16-Bit Analog Input without Flag
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
129
00,01,17,28
32
Analog Change Event - All Variations
06,07,08
32
32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time
06,07,08
129
17,28
32
16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time
06,07,08
129
17,28
32
32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
06,07,08
129
17,28
32
16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
06,07,08
129
17,28
50
Time and Date - All Variations
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
50
Time and Date
1,2
00,01,06,07,
08,17,28
52
Time Delay Fine
60
Class 0,1,2,3 Data
06
60
Class 0 Data
06
00,01,17,28
129
00,01,17,28
129
129
00,01
P341/EN GC/D22
Relay Menu Database
Page 138/158
MiCOM P341
Object
Object Variation
Number Number
Request
Description
Response
Function
Codes (dec)
Qualifier
Codes (hex)
Function
Codes (dec)
Qualifier
Codes (hex)
60
Class 1 Data
06,07,08
129
17, 28
60
Class 2 Data
06,07,08
129
17,28
60
Class 3 Data
06,07,08
129
17,28
80
Internal Indications
00 (index = 7)
No Object (function code only)
13
14
23
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 139/158
Binary Input Points

Static (Steady State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
P341 P342 P343
Point Point Point
Index Index Index
Name / Description
DDB
No.
Change Event
Assigned
Class (1, 2, 3)
Initial
Value
Output Relay Status

0
Output Relay 1
False
Output Relay 2
False
Output Relay 3
False
Output Relay 4
False
Output Relay 5
False
Output Relay 6
False
Output Relay 7
False
Output Relay 8
False
Output Relay 9
False
Output Relay 10
False
10
10
10
Output Relay 11
10
False
11
11
11
Output Relay 12
11
False
12
12
12
Output Relay 13
12
False
13
13
13
Output Relay 14
13
False
14
14
14
Output Relay 15
14
False
15
15
15
Output Relay 16
15
False
16
16
16
Output Relay 17
16
False
17
17
17
Output Relay 18
17
False
18
18
18
Output Relay 19
18
False
19
19
19
Output Relay 20
19
False
20
20
20
Output Relay 21
20
False
21
21
21
Output Relay 22
21
False
22
22
22
Output Relay 23
22
False
23
23
23
Output Relay 24
23
False
24
Output Relay 25
24
False
25
Output Relay 26
25
False
26
Output Relay 27
26
False
27
Output Relay 28
27
False
28
Output Relay 29
28
False
29
Output Relay 30
29
False
30
Output Relay 31
30
False
31
Output Relay 32
31
False
Opto Isolator Input Status

24
24
32
Opto Isolator Input 1
32
False
25
25
33
33
False
26
26
34
34
False
27
27
35
35
False
P341/EN GC/D22
Relay Menu Database
Page 140/158
MiCOM P341
P341 P342 P343

Point Point Point
Index Index Index
Name / Description
DDB
No.
Change Event
Assigned
Class (1, 2, 3)
Initial
Value
28
28
36
36
False
29
29
37
37
False
30
30
38
38
False
31
31
39
39
False
32
32
40
40
False
33
33
41
41
False
34
34
42
42
False
35
35
43
43
False
36
36
44
44
False
37
37
45
45
False
38
38
46
46
False
39
39
47
47
False
40
40
48
48
False
41
41
49
49
False
42
42
50
50
False
43
43
51
51
False
44
44
52
52
False
45
45
53
53
False
46
46
54
54
False
47
47
55
55
False
56
56
False
57
57
False
58
58
False
59
59
False
60
60
False
61
61
False
62
62
False
63
63
False
Alarm & Event indications

48
48
64
Setting Group via Opto Invalid
290
False
49
49
65
Test Mode Enabled
291
False
50
50
66
VTS Indication
292
False
51
51
67
CTS Indication
293
False
52
52
68
294
False
53
53
69
295
False
54
54
70
296
False
55
55
71
Number of CB Operations Maintenance Alarm
297
False
56
56
72
Number of CB Operations Maintenance Lockout
298
False
57
57
73
Excessive CB Operation Time Maintenance Alarm
299
False
58
58
74
Excessive CB Operation Time Lockout Alarm
300
False
59
59
75
301
False
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 141/158
P341 P342 P343

Point Point Point
Index Index Index
DDB
No.
Change Event
Assigned
Class (1, 2, 3)
Initial
Value
CB Status Alarm
302
False
61
CB Failed to Trip
303
False
62
CB Failed to Close
304
False
63
Control CB Unhealthy
305
False
64
Frequency Out of Range
306
False
60
60
76
Name / Description
61
77
306
False
62
78
307
False
63
79
Volts Per Hz Alarm
308
False
64
80
Field Failure Alarm
309
False
65
81
RTD Thermal Alarm
310
False
66
82
RTD Open Circuit Failure
311
False
67
83
RTD Short Circuit Failure
312
False
68
84
RTD Data Inconsistency Error
313
False
69
85
RTD Board Failure
314
False
66
71
86
Frequency Protection Alarm
315
False
67
72
87
Voltage Protection Alarm
316
False
68
73
88
User Settable Alarm 1
317
False
69
74
89
318
False
70
70
90
319
False
75
91
RTD 1 Alarm
743
False
76
92
RTD 2 Alarm
744
False
77
93
RTD 3 Alarm
745
False
78
94
RTD 4 Alarm
746
False
79
95
RTD 5 Alarm
747
False
80
96
RTD 6 Alarm
748
False
81
97
RTD 7 Alarm
749
False
82
98
RTD 8 Alarm
750
False
83
99
RTD 9 Alarm
751
False
84
100
RTD 10 Alarm
752
False
71
85
101
Composite Lockout Alarm
753
False
72
86
102
756
False
65
Miscellaneous Indications
73
87
103
Battery Status
N/A
False
74
88
104
IRIG-B Status
N/A
False
Protection Operation Signals

75
89
105
Any Trip
162
False
76
90
106
External Trip 3ph
380
False
107
416
False
108
Dead Machine Protection Trip
417
False
109
Generator Differential Trip 3ph
418
False
110
419
False
P341/EN GC/D22
Relay Menu Database
Page 142/158
MiCOM P341
P341 P342 P343

Point Point Point
Index Index Index
Name / Description
DDB
No.
Change Event
Assigned
Class (1, 2, 3)
Initial
Value
111
420
False
112
421
False
91
113
422
False
92
114
423
False
93
115
424
False
94
116
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip 3ph
425
False
95
117
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip A
426
False
96
118
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip B
427
False
97
119
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip C
428
False
98
120
Volts per Hz Trip
429
False
99
121
RTD 1 Trip
430
False
100
122
RTD 2 Trip
431
False
101
123
RTD 3 Trip
432
False
102
124
RTD 4 Trip
433
False
103
125
RTD 5 Trip
434
False
104
126
RTD 6 Trip
435
False
105
127
RTD 7 Trip
436
False
106
128
RTD 8 Trip
437
False
107
129
RTD 9 Trip
438
False
108
130
RTD 10 Trip
439
False
109
131
Any RTD Trip
440
False
77
Rate Of Change Of Frequency Trip
440
False
78
Voltage Vector Shift Trip
441
False
79
110
132
1st Stage EF Trip
442
False
80
111
133
2nd Stage EF Trip
443
False
81
3rd Stage EF Trip
444
False
82
4th Stage EF Trip
445
False
83
112
134
REF Trip
446
False
84
113
135
1st Stage SEF Trip
447
False
85
2nd Stage SEF Trip
448
False
86
3rd Stage SEF Trip
449
False
87
4th Stage SEF Trip
450
False
88
114
136
451
False
89
115
137
452
False
90
116
138
453
False
91
117
139
454
False
92
118
140
455
False
93
119
141
456
False
94
120
142
457
False
95
121
143
458
False
96
122
144
459
False
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 143/158
P341 P342 P343

Point Point Point
Index Index Index
Name / Description
DDB
No.
Change Event
Assigned
Class (1, 2, 3)
Initial
Value
97
123
145
460
False
98
124
146
461
False
99
125
147
462
False
100
126
148
463
False
101
127
149
464
False
102
128
150
465
False
103
129
151
466
False
104
130
152
467
False
105
131
153
468
False
106
132
154
Under Frequency Stage 1 Trip
469
False
107
133
155
470
False
108
134
156
471
False
109
135
157
472
False
110
136
158
Over Frequency Stage 1 Trip
473
False
111
137
159
Over Frequency Stage 2 Trip
474
False
112
138
160
Power Stage 1 Trip
475
False
113
139
161
Power Stage 2 Trip
476
False
114
140
162
477
False
115
141
163
478
False
116
142
164
479
False
117
143
165
480
False
118
144
166
481
False
119
145
167
482
False
120
146
168
483
False
121
147
169
484
False
122
485
False
123
486
False
124
487
False
125
488
False
126
489
False
127
490
False
128
491
False
129
492
False
130
148
170
tBF1 Trip 3ph
493
False
131
149
171
tBF2 Trip 3ph
494
False
132
150
172
495
False
133
151
173
496
False
174
497
False
175
498
False
152
176
499
False
153
177
Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 1 Trip
500
False
134
P341/EN GC/D22
Relay Menu Database
Page 144/158
MiCOM P341
P341 P342 P343

Point Point Point
Index Index Index
Name / Description
DDB
No.
Change Event
Assigned
Class (1, 2, 3)
Initial
Value
154
178
Underimpedance Phase A Stage 1 Trip
501
False
155
179
Underimpedance Phase B Stage 1 Trip
502
False
156
180
Underimpedance Phase C Stage 1 Trip
503
False
157
181
Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 2 Trip
504
False
158
182
Underimpedance Phase A Stage 2 Trip
505
False
159
183
Underimpedance Phase B Stage 2 Trip
506
False
160
184
Underimpedance Phase C Stage 2 Trip
507
False
135
161
185
Any Start
576
False
136
162
186
577
False
137
163
187
578
False
138
164
188
579
False
139
165
189
580
False
140
166
190
581
False
141
167
191
582
False
142
168
192
583
False
143
169
193
584
False
144
170
194
585
False
145
171
195
586
False
146
172
196
587
False
147
173
197
588
False
148
174
198
589
False
149
175
199
590
False
150
176
200
591
False
151
177
201
592
False
152
178
202
593
False
153
179
203
594
False
154
180
204
Power Stage 1 Start
595
False
155
181
205
Power Stage 2 Start
596
False
156
182
206
597
False
157
183
207
598
False
158
184
208
599
False
159
185
209
600
False
160
186
210
601
False
161
187
211
602
False
162
188
212
603
False
163
189
213
604
False
164
605
False
165
606
False
166
607
False
167
608
False
168
609
False
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 145/158
P341 P342 P343

Point Point Point
Index Index Index
Name / Description
DDB
No.
Change Event
Assigned
Class (1, 2, 3)
Initial
Value
169
610
False
170
611
False
171
612
False
172
190
214
1st Stage EF Start
613
False
173
191
215
2nd Stage EF Start
614
False
174
3rd Stage EF Start
615
False
175
4th Stage EF Start
616
False
1st Stage SEF Start
617
False
177
2nd Stage SEF Start
618
False
178
3rd Stage SEF Start
619
False
179
4th Stage SEF Start
620
False
217
621
False
176
192
216
180
193
218
Under Frequency Stage 1 Start
622
False
181
194
219
623
False
182
195
220
624
False
183
196
221
625
False
184
197
222
Over Frequency Stage 1 Start
626
False
185
198
223
Over Frequency Stage 2 Start
627
False
186
I> Blocked O/C Start
628
False
187
IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start
629
False
188
Rate Of Change Of Frequency Start
630
False
199
224
Volts per Hz Start
636
False
200
225
Field Failure Stage 1 Start
637
False
201
226
Field Failure Stage 2 Start
638
False
202
227
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start 3Ph
639
False
203
228
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start A
640
False
204
229
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start B
641
False
205
230
Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start C
642
False
189
206
231
643
False
190
207
232
644
False
233
645
False
234
646
False
235
647
False
236
648
False
237
649
False
208
238
Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 1 Start
650
False
209
239
Underimpedance Phase A Stage 1 Start
651
False
210
240
Underimpedance Phase B Stage 1 Start
652
False
211
241
Underimpedance Phase C Stage 1 Start
653
False
212
242
Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 2 Start
654
False
213
243
Underimpedance Phase A Stage 2 Start
655
False
P341/EN GC/D22
Relay Menu Database
Page 146/158
MiCOM P341
Name / Description
P341 P342 P343

Point Point Point
Index Index Index
DDB
No.
Change Event
Assigned
Class (1, 2, 3)
Initial
Value
214
244
Underimpedance Phase B Stage 2 Start
656
False
215
245
Underimpedance Phase C Stage 2 Start
657
False
191
216
246
VTS Fast Block
736
False
192
217
247
VTS Slow Block
737
False
193
218
248
CTS Block
738
False
194
Control Trip
739
False
195
Control Close
740
False
196
741
False
197
Reconnection Time Delay Output
742
False
CB Status
198
219
249
3 ph CB Open
754
False
199
220
250
3 ph CB Closed
755
False
200
221
251
IA< Operate
631
False
201
222
252
IB< Operate
632
False
202
223
253
IC< Operate
633
False
203
224
254
ISEF< Operate
634
False
225
255
IN< Operate
635
False
204
226
256
All Poles Dead
757
False
205
227
257
Any Pole Dead
758
False
206
228
258
Phase A Pole Dead
759
False
207
229
259
Phase B Pole Dead
760
False
208
230
260
Phase C Pole Dead
761
False
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 147/158
Binary Output Status Points

Object Number: 10
Request Function Code supported: 1(read)
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
Control Relay Output Blocks
Object Number: 12
Request Function Code supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
P341 P342 P343
Point Point Point
Index Index Index
Name / Description
Supported Control
Relay Output Block
Fields
Pulse
Latch
Activate Settings Group

0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Controls
4
CB Trip
CB Close
Yes
Yes
Reset Indication
Yes
Yes
Reset Demand
Yes
Yes
Reset NPSThermal
Yes
Yes
Reset ThermalO/L
Yes
Yes
Clear Events
Yes
Yes
10
Clear Faults
Yes
Yes
11
10
10
Clear Maint
Yes
Yes
12
11
11
Test LEDs
Yes
Yes
13
12
12
Lockout Reset
Yes
Yes
14
13
13
Reset CB Data
Yes
Yes
14
14
Reset RTD Flags
Yes
Yes
Control Inputs
15
15
15
Control Input 1
No
Yes
16
16
16
Control Input 2
No
Yes
17
17
17
Control Input 3
No
Yes
18
18
18
Control Input 4
No
Yes
19
19
19
Control Input 5
No
Yes
20
20
20
Control Input 6
No
Yes
21
21
21
Control Input 7
No
Yes
22
22
22
Control Input 8
No
Yes
23
23
23
Control Input 9
No
Yes
24
24
24
Control Input 10
No
Yes
25
25
25
Control Input 11
No
Yes
26
26
26
Control Input 12
No
Yes
27
27
27
Control Input 13
No
Yes
28
28
28
Control Input 14
No
Yes
29
29
29
Control Input 15
No
Yes
30
30
30
Control Input 16
No
Yes
31
31
31
Control Input 17
No
Yes
32
32
32
Control Input 18
No
Yes
33
33
33
Control Input 19
No
Yes
34
34
34
Control Input 20
No
Yes
35
35
35
Control Input 21
No
Yes
36
36
36
Control Input 22
No
Yes
37
37
37
Control Input 23
No
Yes
38
38
38
Control Input 24
No
Yes
39
39
39
Control Input 25
No
Yes
40
40
40
Control Input 26
No
Yes
P341/EN GC/D22
Relay Menu Database
Page 148/158
MiCOM P341
P341 P342 P343

Point Point Point
Index Index Index
Name / Description
Supported Control
Relay Output Block
Fields
Pulse
Latch
41
41
41
Control Input 27
No
Yes
42
42
42
Control Input 28
No
Yes
43
43
43
Control Input 29
No
Yes
44
44
44
Control Input 30
No
Yes
45
45
45
Control Input 31
No
Yes
46
46
46
Control Input 32
No
Yes
Notes:
Only the Pulse On operation is supported when Yes appears in the Pulse column.
Both the Latch On and Latch Off operations are supported when Yes appears in the Latch column.
The Queue, Clear, Trip/Close, On and Off Time fields are ignored.
Data points that support both the Latch and Pulse operations implement them identically as a trigger for the specified
action. This implies that such data points are self-reset and will always return a value of zero when read. The Latch Off
operation will complete successfully, but will have no effect.
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 149/158
Binary Counter Points

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20
Request Function Code supported: 1(read), 7(freeze), 8(freeze noack), 9(freeze and clear), 10(freeze and clear, noack)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported
Frozen Counter Points
Request Function Code supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported
P341 P342 P343
Point Point Point
Index Index Index
Name / Description
Data Type
3Ph WHours Fwd
D10
3Ph WHours Rev
D10
3Ph VArHours Fwd
D10
3Ph VArHours Rev
D10
CB Operations
P341/EN GC/D22
Relay Menu Database
Page 150/158
MiCOM P341
Analog Inputs
Change Event Object Number: 32
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Analog Change Event without Time)
P341 P342 P343
Point Point Point
Index Index Index
Name / Description
Data
Type
Valid Range
Default
Deadband
Change Event
Assigned
Class (1, 2, 3)
D9
14
Active Group
0
Active Group
MEASUREMENTS 1
IA Magnitude
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
IA Phase Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
IB Magnitude
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
IB Phase Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
IC Magnitude
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
IC Phase Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
IA-1 Magnitude
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
IA-1 Phase Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
IB-1 Magnitude
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
IB-1 Phase Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
IC-1 Magnitude
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
IC-1 Phase Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
IN Measured Mag
D2
0.00002.0000
0.01
IN Measured Ang
D4
-180.00+180.00
IN Derived Mag
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
IN Derived Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
I Sen Magnitude
D2
0.00002.0000
0.01
10
10
10
I Sen Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
11
11
11
I1 Magnitude
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
12
12
12
I2 Magnitude
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
13
13
13
I0 Magnitude
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
14
14
14
IA RMS
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
15
15
15
IB RMS
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
16
16
16
IC RMS
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
17
17
17
VAB Magnitude
D3
0.00220.00
18
18
18
VAB Phase Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
19
19
19
VBC Magnitude
D3
0.00220.00
20
20
20
VBC Phase Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
21
21
21
VCA Magnitude
D3
0.00220.00
22
22
22
VCA Phase Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
23
23
23
VAN Magnitude
D3
0.00220.00
24
24
24
VAN Phase Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
25
25
25
VBN Magnitude
D3
0.00220.00
26
26
26
VBN Phase Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
27
27
27
VCN Magnitude
D3
0.00220.00
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 151/158
P341 P342 P343

Point Point Point
Index Index Index
Name / Description
Data
Type
Valid Range
Default
Deadband
Change Event
Assigned
Class (1, 2, 3)
28
28
28
VCN Phase Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
29
29
29
VN Measured Mag
D3
0.00220.00
30
30
30
VN Measured Ang
D4
-180.00+180.00
31
31
31
VN Derived Mag
D3
0.00220.00
32
32
32
VN Derived Ang
D4
-180.00+180.00
33
33
33
V1 Magnitude
D3
0.00220.00
34
34
34
V2 Magnitude
D3
0.00220.00
35
35
35
V0 Magnitude
D3
0.00220.00
36
36
36
VAN RMS
D3
0.00220.00
37
37
37
VBN RMS
D3
0.00220.00
38
38
38
VCN RMS
D3
0.00220.00
39
39
39
Frequency
D5
5.0070.00
0.5
MEASUREMENTS 2
40
40
40
A Phase Watts
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
41
41
41
B Phase Watts
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
42
42
42
C Phase Watts
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
43
43
43
A Phase VArs
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
44
44
44
B Phase VArs
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
45
45
45
C Phase VArs
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
46
46
46
A Phase VA
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
47
47
47
B Phase VA
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
48
48
48
C Phase VA
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
49
49
49
3 Phase Watts
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
50
50
50
3 Phase VArs
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
51
51
51
3 Phase VA
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
52
52
52
3Ph Power Factor
D8
0.0001.000
0.1
53
53
53
APh Power Factor
D8
0.0001.000
0.1
54
54
54
BPh Power Factor
D8
0.0001.000
0.1
55
55
55
CPh Power Factor
D8
0.0001.000
0.1
56
56
56
3Ph W Fix Demand
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
57
57
57
3Ph VArs Fix Dem
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
58
58
58
IA Fixed Demand
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
59
59
59
IB Fixed Demand
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
60
60
60
IC Fixed Demand
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
61
61
61
3 Ph W Roll Dem
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
62
62
62
3Ph VArs RollDem
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
63
63
63
IA Roll Demand
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
64
64
64
IB Roll Demand
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
65
65
65
IC Roll Demand
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
66
66
66
3Ph W Peak Dem
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
67
67
67
3Ph VAr Peak Dem
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
68
68
68
IA Peak Demand
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
P341/EN GC/D22
Relay Menu Database
Page 152/158
MiCOM P341
Name / Description
P341 P342 P343

Point Point Point
Index Index Index
Data
Type
Valid Range
Default
Deadband
Change Event
Assigned
Class (1, 2, 3)
69
69
69
IB Peak Demand
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
70
70
70
IC Peak Demand
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
MEASUREMENTS 3
71
IA-2 Magnitude
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
72
IA-2 Phase Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
73
IB-2 Magnitude
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
74
IB-2 Phase Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
75
IC-2 Magnitude
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
76
IC-2 Phase Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
77
IA Differential
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
78
IB Differential
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
79
IC Differential
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
80
IA Bias
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
81
IB Bias
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
82
IC Bias
D1
0.00065.534
0.1
71
83
IREF Diff
D2
0.00002.0000
0.01
72
84
IREF Bias
D2
0.00002.0000
0.01
85
VN 3rd Harmonic
D3
0.00220.00
73
86
NPS Thermal
D7
0.00327.67
10
74
87
RTD 1
D14
-40.0300.0
75
88
RTD 2
D14
-40.0300.0
76
89
RTD 3
D14
-40.0300.0
77
90
RTD 4
D14
-40.0300.0
78
91
RTD 5
D14
-40.0300.0
79
92
RTD 6
D14
-40.0300.0
80
93
RTD 7
D14
-40.0300.0
81
94
RTD 8
D14
-40.0300.0
82
95
RTD 9
D14
-40.0300.0
83
96
RTD 10
D14
-40.0300.0
71
84
97
APh Sen Watts
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
72
85
98
APh Sen Vars
D6
-3150.0+3150.0
73
86
99
APh Power Angle
D4
-180.00+180.00
74
87
100
Thermal Overload
D7
0.00327.67
10
Name / Description
Data
Type
Scaling
Default
Change
Event
Deadband
Change Event
Deadband Min
Change Event
Deadband Max
Change Event
Deadband Step
Standard Numeric
Range
Units
x In / 500
0.1
0.05 In
64 In
0.01 In
0.00065.534
x In / 10000
0.01
0.01 In
2 In
0.001 In
0.00002.0000
x Vn /(110 x 100)
0.1 Vn / 110
220 Vn / 110
0.1 Vn / 110
0.00220.00
D2
Sensitive current
D3
Voltage
D4
Angle
x 0.01
0.1
180
0.1
-180.00+180.00
Degrees
D5
Frequency
x 0.01
0.5
0.1
70
0.1
5.0070.00
Hz
D6
Power
x 0.1 In .Vn / 110
0.1 In .Vn / 110
3200 In .Vn / 110
0.1 In .Vn / 110
-3150.0+3150.0
W/Var/VA
D7
Percentage
x 0.01
10
0.1
320
0.1
0.00327.67
D8
Power Factor
x 0.001
0.1
0.01
0.01
0.0001.000
[None]
D9
Setting Group
x1
14
[None]
D10
Energy
In .Vn / 110
32000 In .Vn / 110
In .Vn / 110
0(2^31)-1
Wh/Varh/Vah
D11
Admittance (Standard current)
x (In / 1000).(110 / Vn)
0.1
(0.01 In).( 110 / Vn)
32 In .( 110 / Vn)
(0.01 In).( 110 / Vn)
-7.040+7.040
D12
Admittance (Sensitive current)
x (In / 10000).(110 / Vn)
0.01
(0.001 In).( 110 / Vn)
2 In .( 110 / Vn)
(0.001 In).( 110 / Vn)
-0.0220+0.0220
D13
Time (minutes)
x 0.01
30
0.5
0.00327.67
min
D14
Temperature
x 0.1
0.1
300
0.1
-40.0300.0
D15
Time (seconds)
x 0.00001
0.001
0.0001
0.03
0.0001
0.000000.32767
x In .Vn / 110
P341/EN GC/D22
Standard Phase, RMS and sequence current
Page 153/158
D1
Relay Menu Database
MiCOM P341
Data Types
Notes:
1. Type D6 can represent Watts, VArs or VA; the exact unit applied depends on the description of the item.
2. The default change event deadband is used unless specified otherwise in the point list.
3. The scaling value represents the multiplier required at the master station.
4. In and Vn represent the rated current and rated voltage respectively.
P341/EN GC/D22
Relay Menu Database
Page 154/158
MiCOM P341
MiCOM P341 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC

Opto Input Mappings
IN>3 Timer Blk

DDB #360
L3 Block IN>3&4
DDB #034
IN>4 Timer Blk
DDB #361
I>3 Timer Block

DDB #356
L4 Block I>3&4
DDB #035
I>4 Timer Block
DDB #357
L5 Reset
DDB #036
Reset Relays/LED
DDB #386
L6 Ext Prot Trip

DDB #037
Ext. Trip 3ph

DDB #380
L7 52a
DDB #038
CB Aux 3ph(52-A)
DDB #381
L8 52b
DDB #039
CB Aux 3ph(52-B)
DDB #382
Fault Record Trigger Mapping
R3 Any Trip
DDB #002
Fault REC TRIG

DDB #288
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 155/158

Output Relay Mappings
df/dt Trip
DDB #440
V Shift Trip
DDB #441
IN>1 Trip
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
IN>3 Trip
DDB #444
IN>4 Trip
DDB #445
IREF> Trip
DDB #446
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
ISEF>2 Trip
DDB #448
ISEF>3 Trip
DDB #449
ISEF>4 Trip
DDB #450
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
V<1 Trip
DDB #453
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
V>1 Trip
DDB #461
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
F<1 Trip
DDB #469
F<2 Trip
DDB #470
F<3 Trip
DDB #471
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
F>1 Trip
DDB #473
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
Power2 Trip
DDB #476
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481
I>3 Trip
DDB #485
I>4 Trip
DDB #489
SPower1 Trip
DDB #495
SPower2 Trip
DDB #496
Thermal O/L Trip
DDB #499
100
Dwell
R3 Any Trip
DDB #002
P341/EN GC/D22
Relay Menu Database
Page 156/158
MiCOM P341

Output Relay Mappings
0
IN/SEF>Blk Start
DDB #629
Straight
I> BlockStart
DDB #628
Straight
R1 IN>1 Start
DDB #000
R2 I>1 Start
DDB #001
SG-opto Invalid
DDB #290
VT Fail Alarm
DDB #292
CT Fail Alarm
DDB #293
CB Fail Alarm
DDB #294
I^ Maint Alarm
DDB #295
I^ Lockout Alarm
DDB #296
CB Ops Maint
DDB #297
CB Ops Lockout
DDB #298
CB Op Time Maint
DDB #299
CB Op Time Lock
DDB #300
Drop-Off
500
R4 General Alarm
DDB #003
Fault Freq Lock

DDB #301
CB Status Alarm
DDB #302
Man CB Trip Fail
DDB #303
Man CB Cls Fail
DDB #304
Man CB Unhealthy
DDB #305
F out of Range
DDB #306
Field volts fail
DDB #756
Thermal Alarm
DDB #307
Bfail1 Trip 3ph

DDB #493
Control Close
DDB #740
100
Dwell
Straight
0
Control Trip
DDB #739
Straight
R5 CB Fail
DDB #004
R6 Control Close
DDB #005
R7 Control Trip
DDB #006
Relay Menu Database
P341/EN GC/D22
MiCOM P341
Page 157/158

LED Mappings
IN>1 Trip
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
IN>3 Trip
DDB #444
IN>4 Trip
DDB #445
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
ISEF>2 Trip
DDB #448
Latching
LED 1
DDB #064
Latching
LED 2
DDB #065
Latching
LED 3
DDB #066
Latching
LED 4
DDB #067
Latching
LED 5
DDB #068
Latching
LED 6
DDB #069
Latching
LED 7
DDB #070
Non Latching
LED 8
DDB #071
ISEF>3 Trip
DDB #449
ISEF>4 Trip
DDB #450
IREF> Trip
DDB #446
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481
I>3 Trip
DDB #485
I>4 Trip
DDB #489
df/dt Trip
DDB #440
V Shift Trip
DDB #441
V<1 Trip
DDB #453
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
V>1 Trip
DDB #461
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
F<1 Trip
DDB #469
F<2 Trip
DDB #470
F<3 Trip
DDB #471
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
F>1 Trip
DDB #473
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
Power2 Trip
DDB #476
SPower1 Trip
DDB #495
SPower2 Trip
DDB #496
Any Start
DDB #576
P341/EN GC/D22
Page 158/158
Relay Menu Database

MiCOM P341
External Connection
Diagrams
MiCOM P341
P341/EN CO/D22
EXTERNAL CONNECTION
DIAGRAMS
P341/EN CO/D22
External Connection
Diagrams
MiCOM P341
P341/EN CO/D22
Page 1/8
(Not Available Yet)
(Not Available Yet)
External Connection
Diagrams
MiCOM P341
P2139ENb
Figure 1:
Comms Options MiCOM Px40 Platform
P341/EN CO/D22
Page 2/8
External Connection
Diagrams
MiCOM P341
P2234ENa
Figure 2:
Interconnection Protection Relay (40TE) for Embedded Generation Using VEE

Connected VT's (8 I/P & 7 O/P)
External Connection
Diagrams
MiCOM P341
P341/EN CO/D22
Page 3/8
P2232ENa
Figure 3:
Interconnection
(8 I/P & 7 O/P)
Protection
Relay
(40TE)
for
Embedded
Generation
P341/EN CO/D22
External Connection
Diagrams
MiCOM P341
Page 4/8
P2233ENa
Figure 4:
Interconnection
(8 I/P & 7 O/P)
Protection
Relay
(40TE)
for
Embedded
Generation
External Connection
Diagrams
MiCOM P341
P341/EN CO/D22
Page 5/8
P2236ENa
Figure 5:
Interconnection Protection
(8 I/P & 15 O/P)
Relay
(40TE)
for
Embedded
Generation
P341/EN CO/D22
External Connection
Diagrams
MiCOM P341
Page 6/8
P2235ENa
Figure 6:
(16 I/P & 7 O/P)
Relay
(40TE)
for
Embedded
Generation
External Connection
Diagrams
MiCOM P341
P341/EN CO/D22
Page 7/8
P2237ENa
Figure 7:
(12 I/P & 11 O/P)
Relay
(40TE)
for
Embedded
Generation
P341/EN CO/D22
Page 8/8
External Connection
Diagrams
MiCOM P341
Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P341
P341/EN VC/C22
HARDWARE / SOFTWARE VERSION

HISTORY AND COMPATIBILITY
(Note: Includes versions released and supplied to customers only)
P341/EN VC/C22
MiCOM P341
Software
Version
01
Date of
Issue
Backward Compatibility
Full Description of Changes
11/10/1999 First release to Production
S1 Compatibility
PSL
Setting Files
Menu Text
Files
V1.10
OK
OK
OK
V2
OK
OK
OK
V1.09
Refer to manual reference TG8617A for software version 01.

02
19/10/2000 Released to production
MiCOM P341
Relay type: P341..
DNP 3.0 included

Courier Bay Module compatibility
modification
Modbus Bay Module compatibility
modification
Modifications to IEC60870-5-103 Test
Mode
Poledead logic DDB signals made
visible in PSL
Foreign language text updated
Refer to manual reference P341/EN T/B11 for software version 02.
03

Includes event filtering

P341/EN VC/C22
Page 1/4
Software
Version
Date of
Issue
04
04/12/01
Released to production
S1 Compatibility
PSL
Setting Files
Menu Text
Files
V2.02a
OK
OK
OK
V2.05
OK
P341/EN VC/C22
Page 2/4
Relay type: P341..
Includes sensitive reverse power

Neutral voltage displacement
threshold, VN>1/2, increased from 50
to 80 V (100/120 V), 200 to 320
(380/480V)
Earth fault polarising voltage
threshold, Vnpol, increased from 22 to
88 V(100/120 V) and 88 to 352 V
(380/480V)
05

Includes thermal overload protection
Includes control inputs
PSL DDB list of signals increased from

512 to 1023 signals
MiCOM P341
Enhancements to IEC60870-5-103
builds to include private codes,
monitor blocking and disturbance
record extraction
Software
Version
Date of
Issue
PSL Data menu included with PSL
Reference information for version
history
Optional additional opto inputs and
output contacts with a larger case size
option available
S1 Compatibility
PSL
Setting Files
Menu Text
Files
MiCOM P341
Relay type: P341..
New Universal wide ranging opto

inputs (Model number suffix B)
New outputput contacts with better
break and continuous carry ratings
(Model number suffix B)
Refer to manual reference P341/EN T/C22 for software version 05.
P341/EN VC/C22
Page 3/4
P341/EN VC/C22
Page 4/4
MiCOM P341
Publication: P341/EN T/D22

TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION
Energy Automation & Information energy.automation-information@areva-td.com

www.areva.com

Micom P341: Interconnection Protection Relay

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Micom P341: Interconnection Protection Relay

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

MiCOM P341

Interconnection Protection Relay

Amendments completed 09.12.2004

Handling of electronic equipment

All references to chapters replaced with new subdocument

Amendments completed 09.12.2004

Rate of change of frequency protection

Voltage vector shift protection

Reverse power protection function

Sensitive earth fault protection element (SEF)

Negative sequence polarisation

General setting guidelines for DEF

Operation of sensitive earth fault element

tem 3 of list : added

Amendments completed 09.12.2004

Calculation of required relay settings

Restricted earth fault protection

High impedance restricted earth fault protection

Setting guidelines for high impedance REF

Residual over voltage/neutral voltage

Under frequency protection

Over frequency protection function

Under voltage protection

Thermal overload protection

Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers

Breaker fail timer settings

Breaker fail undercurrent settings

Voltage transformer supervision (VTS)

Amendments completed 09.12.2004

Loss of all three phase voltages under load

Absence of three phase voltages upon line

The CT supervision feature

Circuit breaker state monitoring features

Circuit breaker control

Pole dead logic

Circuit breaker condition monitoring

Trip circuit supervision (TCS)

Relay alarm conditions

High impedance restricted earth fault protection

Metering class current transformers

Converting IEC185 current transformer standard

Commissioning test menu

Power supply module

Universal opto isolated logic inputs

Power supply board (including EIA(RS)485

Output relay board

Auto reset of trip LED indication

Amendments completed 09.12.2004

Amendments completed 09.12.2004

All references to chapters replaced with new subdocument

Reverse power/low forward power/over power

Thermal overload (49)

DT operation setting amended to 2% or 50ms whichever

Local and remote communications

Relay menu database

External connection diagrams

Hardware/software version history and

INTERCONNECTION PROTECTION RELAY

Relay Menu Database

External Connection Diagrams

Hardware / Software Version History and

HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is